diff options
Diffstat (limited to 'docs/docbook')
69 files changed, 4058 insertions, 4888 deletions
diff --git a/docs/docbook/Makefile.in b/docs/docbook/Makefile.in index 0739f43f84..ae24606caf 100644 --- a/docs/docbook/Makefile.in +++ b/docs/docbook/Makefile.in @@ -21,9 +21,7 @@ MANPAGES_NAMES=findsmb.1 smbclient.1 \ smbpasswd.8 testprns.1 \ smb.conf.5 wbinfo.1 pdbedit.8 \ smbcacls.1 smbsh.1 winbindd.8 \ - smbgroupedit.8 vfstest.1 \ - profiles.1 smbtree.1 ntlm_auth.1 \ - editreg.1 smbcquotas.1 + smbgroupedit.8 vfstest.1 ## This part contains only rules. You shouldn't need to change it ## if you are adding docs @@ -68,42 +66,36 @@ everything: manpages ps pdf html-single html htmlman txt htmlfaq # Global rules -manpages: $(MANDIR) $(MANPAGES) -pdf: $(PDFDIR) $(PDFDIR)/Samba-HOWTO-Collection.pdf ../Samba-Developers-Guide.pdf -ps: $(PSDIR) $(PSDIR)/Samba-HOWTO-Collection.ps ../Samba-Developers-Guide.ps -txt: $(TXTDIR) $(TXTDIR)/Samba-HOWTO-Collection.txt $(TXTDIR)/Samba-Developers-Guide.txt -htmlman: $(HTMLDIR) $(MANPAGES_HTML) -htmlfaq: $(HTMLDIR) +manpages: $(MANPAGES) +pdf: $(PDFDIR)/Samba-HOWTO-Collection.pdf ../Samba-Developers-Guide.pdf +ps: $(PSDIR)/Samba-HOWTO-Collection.ps ../Samba-Developers-Guide.ps +txt: $(TXTDIR)/Samba-HOWTO-Collection.txt $(TXTDIR)/Samba-Developers-Guide.txt +htmlman: $(MANPAGES_HTML) +htmlfaq: $(DOCBOOK2HTML) -d samba.dsl -o $(FAQDIR) $(FAQPROJDOC)/sambafaq.sgml -html-single: $(HTMLDIR) $(HTMLDIR)/Samba-HOWTO-Collection.html $(HTMLDIR)/Samba-Developers-Guide.html -html: $(HTMLDIR) +html-single: $(HTMLDIR)/Samba-HOWTO-Collection.html $(HTMLDIR)/Samba-Developers-Guide.html +html: $(DOCBOOK2HTML) -d samba.dsl -o $(HTMLDIR) $(PROJDOC)/samba-doc.sgml # Text files -$(TXTDIR): - mkdir $(TXTDIR) - $(TXTDIR)/Samba-HOWTO-Collection.txt: $(PROJDOC)/samba-doc.sgml - $(DOCBOOK2TXT) -d samba.dsl -o . $< + $(DOCBOOK2TXT) -o . $< mv ./samba-doc.txt $@ -$(TXTDIR)/Samba-Developers-Guide.txt: $(DEVDOC)/dev-doc.sgml - $(DOCBOOK2TXT) -d samba.dsl -o . $< - mv ./dev-doc.txt $@ +$(TXTDIR)/Samba-Developers-Guide.txt: $(PROJDOC)/samba-doc.sgml + $(DOCBOOK2TXT) -o . $< + mv ./samba-doc.txt $@ # PostScript -$(PSDIR): - mkdir $(PSDIR) - $(PSDIR)/Samba-HOWTO-Collection.ps: $(PROJDOC)/samba-doc.sgml - $(DOCBOOK2PS) -d samba.dsl -o . $< + $(DOCBOOK2PS) -o . $< mv ./samba-doc.ps $@ -$(PSDIR)/Samba-Developers-Guide.ps: $(DEVDOC)/dev-doc.sgml - $(DOCBOOK2PS) -d samba.dsl -o . $< - mv ./dev-doc.ps $@ +$(PSDIR)/Samba-Developers-Guide.ps: $(PROJDOC)/samba-doc.sgml + $(DOCBOOK2PS) -o . $< + mv ./samba-doc.ps $@ # Adobe PDF files @@ -115,28 +107,20 @@ $(PDFDIR)/Samba-Developers-Guide.pdf: $(HTMLDIR)/Samba-Developers-Guide.html # Single large HTML files -$(HTMLDIR): - mkdir $(HTMLDIR) - $(HTMLDIR)/Samba-HOWTO-Collection.html: $(PROJDOC)/samba-doc.sgml - $(DOCBOOK2HTML) -d samba.dsl -u -o . $< + $(DOCBOOK2HTML) -u -o . $< mv ./samba-doc.html $@ $(HTMLDIR)/Samba-Developers-Guide.html: $(DEVDOC)/dev-doc.sgml - $(DOCBOOK2HTML) -d samba.dsl -u -o . $< + $(DOCBOOK2HTML) -u -o . $< mv ./dev-doc.html $@ $(HTMLDIR)/%.html: $(MANPROJDOC)/%.sgml - $(DOCBOOK2HTML) -d samba.dsl -u -o $(HTMLDIR) $< - -# Manpages - -$(MANDIR): - mkdir $(MANDIR) + $(DOCBOOK2HTML) -u -o $(HTMLDIR) $< $(MANDIR)/%: $(MANPROJDOC)/%.sgml - $(DOCBOOK2MAN) -d samba.dsl -o $(MANDIR) $< + $(DOCBOOK2MAN) -o $(MANDIR) $< || rm $@ $(PERL) scripts/strip-links.pl < $@ > $@.temp mv $@.temp $@ diff --git a/docs/docbook/configure b/docs/docbook/configure index 8680e5b5ab..609c17ed87 100755 --- a/docs/docbook/configure +++ b/docs/docbook/configure @@ -557,13 +557,10 @@ else echo "$ac_t""no" 1>&6 fi -if test "x$JW" = x; then - { echo "configure: error: "jw is required"" 1>&2; exit 1; } -fi # Extract the first word of "perl", so it can be a program name with args. set dummy perl; ac_word=$2 echo $ac_n "checking for $ac_word""... $ac_c" 1>&6 -echo "configure:567: checking for $ac_word" >&5 +echo "configure:564: checking for $ac_word" >&5 if eval "test \"`echo '$''{'ac_cv_path_PERL'+set}'`\" = set"; then echo $ac_n "(cached) $ac_c" 1>&6 else @@ -595,13 +592,10 @@ else echo "$ac_t""no" 1>&6 fi -if test "x$PERL" = x; then - { echo "configure: error: "perl is required"" 1>&2; exit 1; } -fi # Extract the first word of "htmldoc", so it can be a program name with args. set dummy htmldoc; ac_word=$2 echo $ac_n "checking for $ac_word""... $ac_c" 1>&6 -echo "configure:605: checking for $ac_word" >&5 +echo "configure:599: checking for $ac_word" >&5 if eval "test \"`echo '$''{'ac_cv_path_HTMLDOC'+set}'`\" = set"; then echo $ac_n "(cached) $ac_c" 1>&6 else @@ -633,9 +627,6 @@ else echo "$ac_t""no" 1>&6 fi -if test "x$HTMLDOC" = x; then - { echo "configure: error: "htmldoc is required"" 1>&2; exit 1; } -fi DOC_BUILD_DATE=`date '+%d-%m-%Y'` diff --git a/docs/docbook/configure.in b/docs/docbook/configure.in index 57482d134e..3a9ed51d16 100644 --- a/docs/docbook/configure.in +++ b/docs/docbook/configure.in @@ -1,18 +1,8 @@ AC_INIT(global.ent) -# Jade wrapper AC_PATH_PROG(JW, jw) -if test "x$JW" = x; then - AC_MSG_ERROR("jw is required") -fi AC_PATH_PROG(PERL, perl) -if test "x$PERL" = x; then - AC_MSG_ERROR("perl is required") -fi AC_PATH_PROG(HTMLDOC, htmldoc) -if test "x$HTMLDOC" = x; then - AC_MSG_ERROR("htmldoc is required") -fi DOC_BUILD_DATE=`date '+%d-%m-%Y'` AC_SUBST(DOC_BUILD_DATE) diff --git a/docs/docbook/devdoc/dev-doc.sgml b/docs/docbook/devdoc/dev-doc.sgml index 5e1af3d3a0..e256dbe3a2 100644 --- a/docs/docbook/devdoc/dev-doc.sgml +++ b/docs/docbook/devdoc/dev-doc.sgml @@ -12,9 +12,6 @@ <!ENTITY wins SYSTEM "wins.sgml"> <!ENTITY sam SYSTEM "sam.sgml"> <!ENTITY encryption SYSTEM "encryption.sgml"> -<!ENTITY rpc-plugin SYSTEM "rpc_plugin.sgml"> -<!ENTITY modules SYSTEM "modules.sgml"> -<!ENTITY packagers SYSTEM "packagers.sgml"> ]> <book id="Samba-Developers-Guide"> @@ -69,8 +66,5 @@ url="http://www.fsf.org/licenses/gpl.txt">http://www.fsf.org/licenses/gpl.txt</u &wins; &sam; &encryption; -&modules; -&rpc-plugin; -&packagers; </book> diff --git a/docs/docbook/devdoc/gencache.sgml b/docs/docbook/devdoc/gencache.sgml deleted file mode 100644 index 1ba2f77c9d..0000000000 --- a/docs/docbook/devdoc/gencache.sgml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,119 +0,0 @@ -<chapter id="gencache"> -<chapterinfo> - <author> - <firstname>Rafal</firstname><surname>Szczesniak</surname> - </author> - <pubdate>April 2003</pubdate> -</chapterinfo> - -<title>General cache mechanism and API</title> - -<sect1> -<title>Abstract</title> -<para> -General cache (gencache) was designed to combine various kinds of caching -mechanisms into one, defined by a simple API. This way, anyone can use it -to create their own caching layer on top of gencache. An example of -such approach is the netbios name cache. -</para> -</sect1> - -<sect1> -<title>The mechanism</title> -<para> -Gencache utilises <emphasise>tdb</emphasise> database, like many other -parts of Samba. As its origins are in Berkeley DB implementation, it -uses key/value pairs stored in binary file. The values gencache -operates on are string-based, however. This makes very easy to use it -in command line environment eg. to quickly take a look at what's in -the cache or set some value. -</para> - -<para> -All the data is stored in <filename>gencache.tdb</filename> -file. Records put there are in key/value format as mentioned below, -but as it's a cache, the timeout plays also important role and has a -special place in the key/value pair, as well as API. -</para> -</sect1> - - -<sect1> -<title>The data structure</title> -<para> -The record stored in <filename>gencache.tdb</filename> file consists -of the key, the value and the expiration timeout. While the first part -is stored completely independent from the others, the last two are -kept together. The form the record has is: -</para> - -<para><programlisting> -key: <string&bt; -value: <12-digit timeout&bt;/<string> -</programlisting></para> - -<para>The timeout part is the ASCII representation of -<emphasis>time_t</emphasis> value of the time when the cache entry -expires. Obviously the API, the programmer is provided with, hides this detail, -so that you don't have to care about checking it. Simply watch -carefully the return status of the function. -</para> -</sect1> - -<sect1> -<title>The API</title> - -<para><programlisting> -BOOL gencache_init() -</programlisting></para> - -<para>This is used to initialise to whole caching mechanism. It means -opening the file or creating it if non-existing. If it's already been -opened earlier, then the routine just does nothing and returns -<constant>true</constant>. If something goes wrong, say the user -doesn't have necessary rights, the function returns -<constant>false</constant>.</para> - -<para><programlisting> -BOOL gencache_shutdown() -</programlisting></para> - -<para>This is the proper way to close the cache file. It simply -returns <constant>true</constant> after successful closing file and -<constant>false</constant> upon a failure.</para> - -<para><programlisting> -BOOL gencache_set(const char* keystr, const char* value, time_t timeout) -</programlisting></para> - -<para>This is one of the most basic functions. What it allows you to -do is to set some particular cache entry. If the entry haven't -existed yet, the function will act just as it was "gencache_add" -function. If it's already been in the cache, the entry will be set to -the new value. In either case, the cache entry will be set with given -key, value and timeout. Thus it is comfortable way to just set the -entry and not care about the details.</para> - -<para><programlisting> -BOOL gencache_set_only(const char* keystr, const char* value, time_t timeout) -</programlisting></para> - -<para><programlisting> -BOOL gencache_del(const char* keystr) -</programlisting></para> - -<para><programlisting> -BOOL gencache_get(const char* keystr, char** valstr, time_t* timeout) -</programlisting></para> - -<para><programlisting> -void gencache_iterate(void (*fn)(const char* key, const char *value, time_t timeout, void* dptr), - void* data, const char* keystr_pattern) - -</programlisting></para> - -<sect1> -<title>Writing your own caching layer</title> -</sect1> - -</chapter> diff --git a/docs/docbook/devdoc/modules.sgml b/docs/docbook/devdoc/modules.sgml deleted file mode 100644 index 0bcdadc66c..0000000000 --- a/docs/docbook/devdoc/modules.sgml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,156 +0,0 @@ -<chapter id="modules"> -<chapterinfo> - <author> - <firstname>Jelmer</firstname><surname>Vernooij</surname> - <affiliation> - <orgname>Samba Team</orgname> - <address><email>jelmer@samba.org</email></address> - </affiliation> - </author> - <pubdate> 19 March 2003 </pubdate> -</chapterinfo> - -<title>Modules</title> - -<sect1> -<title>Advantages</title> - -<para> -The new modules system has the following advantages: -</para> - -<simplelist> -<member>Transparent loading of static and shared modules (no need -for a subsystem to know about modules)</member> -<member>Simple selection between shared and static modules at configure time</member> -<member>"preload modules" option for increasing performance for stable modules</member> -<member>No nasty #define stuff anymore</member> -<member>All backends are available as plugin now (including pdb_ldap and pdb_tdb)</member> -</simplelist> -</sect1> - -<sect1> -<title>Loading modules</title> - -<para> -Some subsystems in samba use different backends. These backends can be -either statically linked in to samba or available as a plugin. A subsystem -should have a function that allows a module to register itself. For example, -the passdb subsystem has: -</para> - -<para><programlisting> -BOOL smb_register_passdb(const char *name, pdb_init_function init, int version); -</programlisting></para> - -<para> -This function will be called by the initialisation function of the module to -register itself. -</para> - -<sect2> -<title>Static modules</title> - -<para> -The modules system compiles a list of initialisation functions for the -static modules of each subsystem. This is a define. For example, -it is here currently (from <filename>include/config.h</filename>): -</para> - -<para><programlisting> -/* Static init functions */ -#define static_init_pdb { pdb_mysql_init(); pdb_ldap_init(); pdb_smbpasswd_init(); pdb_tdbsam_init(); pdb_guest_init();} -</programlisting></para> - -<para> -These functions should be called before the subsystem is used. That -should be done when the subsystem is initialised or first used. -</para> - -</sect2> - -<sect2> -<title>Shared modules</title> - -<para> -If a subsystem needs a certain backend, it should check if it has -already been registered. If the backend hasn't been registered already, -the subsystem should call smb_probe_module(char *subsystem, char *backend). -This function tries to load the correct module from a certain path -($LIBDIR/subsystem/backend.so). If the first character in 'backend' -is a slash, smb_probe_module() tries to load the module from the -absolute path specified in 'backend'. -</para> - -<para>After smb_probe_module() has been executed, the subsystem -should check again if the module has been registered. -</para> - -</sect2> -</sect1> - -<sect1> -<title>Writing modules</title> - -<para> -Each module has an initialisation function. For modules that are -included with samba this name is '<replaceable>subsystem</replaceable>_<replaceable>backend</replaceable>_init'. For external modules (that will never be built-in, but only available as a module) this name is always 'init_module'. (In the case of modules included with samba, the configure system will add a #define subsystem_backend_init() init_module()). -The prototype for these functions is: -</para> - -<para><programlisting> -int init_module(void); -</programlisting></para> - -<para>This function should call one or more -registration functions. The function should return non-zero on success and zero on -failure.</para> - -<para>For example, pdb_ldap_init() contains: </para> - -<para><programlisting> -int pdb_ldap_init(void) -{ - smb_register_passdb("ldapsam", pdb_init_ldapsam, PASSDB_INTERFACE_VERSION); - smb_register_passdb("ldapsam_nua", pdb_init_ldapsam_nua, PASSDB_INTERFACE_VERSION); - return TRUE; -} -</programlisting></para> - -<sect2> -<title>Static/Shared selection in configure.in</title> - -<para> -Some macros in configure.in generate the various defines and substs that -are necessary for the system to work correct. All modules that should -be built by default have to be added to the variable 'default_modules'. -For example, if ldap is found, pdb_ldap is added to this variable. -</para> - -<para> -On the bottom of configure.in, SMB_MODULE() should be called -for each module and SMB_SUBSYSTEM() for each subsystem. -</para> - -<para>Syntax:</para> - -<para><programlisting> -SMB_MODULE(<replaceable>subsystem</replaceable>_<replaceable>backend</replaceable>, <replaceable>object files</replaceable>, <replaceable>plugin name</replaceable>, <replaceable>subsystem name</replaceable>, <replaceable>static_action</replaceable>, <replaceable>shared_action</replaceable>) -SMB_SUBSYSTEM(<replaceable>subsystem</replaceable>) -</programlisting></para> - -<para>Also, make sure to add the correct directives to -<filename>Makefile.in</filename>. <replaceable>@SUBSYSTEM_STATIC@</replaceable> -will be replaced with a list of objects files of the modules that need to -be linked in statically. <replaceable>@SUBSYSTEM_MODULES@</replaceable> will -be replaced with the names of the plugins to build. -</para> - -<para>You must make sure all .c files that contain defines that can -be changed by ./configure are rebuilded in the 'modules_clean' make target. -Practically, this means all c files that contain <command>static_init_subsystem;</command> calls need to be rebuilded. -</para> - -</sect2> -</sect1> -</chapter> diff --git a/docs/docbook/devdoc/packagers.sgml b/docs/docbook/devdoc/packagers.sgml deleted file mode 100644 index fb47c7305c..0000000000 --- a/docs/docbook/devdoc/packagers.sgml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,40 +0,0 @@ -<chapter id="Packaging"> -<chapterinfo> - <author> - <firstname>Jelmer</firstname><surname>Vernooij</surname> - </author> -</chapterinfo> - -<title>Notes to packagers</title> - -<sect1> -<title>Versioning</title> - -<para>Please, please update the version number in -<filename>source/include/version.h</filename> to include the versioning of your package. This makes it easier to distinguish standard samba builds -from custom-build samba builds (distributions often patch packages). For -example, a good version would be: </para> - -<para><programlisting> -Version 2.999+3.0.alpha21-5 for Debian -</programlisting></para> - -</sect1> - -<sect1> -<title>Modules</title> - -<para>Samba now has support for building parts of samba as plugins. This -makes it possible to, for example, put ldap or mysql support in a seperate -package, thus making it possible to have a normal samba package not -depending on ldap or mysql. To build as much parts of samba -as a plugin, run: </para> - -<para><programlisting> -./configure --with-shared-modules=rpc,vfs,auth,pdb,charset -</programlisting></para> - -</sect1> - - -</chapter> diff --git a/docs/docbook/devdoc/rpc_plugin.sgml b/docs/docbook/devdoc/rpc_plugin.sgml deleted file mode 100644 index c83742a247..0000000000 --- a/docs/docbook/devdoc/rpc_plugin.sgml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,83 +0,0 @@ -<chapter id="rpc-plugin"> -<chapterinfo> - <author> - <firstname>Anthony</firstname><surname>Liguori</surname> - <affiliation> - <orgname>IBM</orgname> - <address><email>aliguor@us.ibm.com</email></address> - </affiliation> - </author> - <author> - <firstname>Jelmer</firstname><surname>Vernooij</surname> - <affiliation> - <orgname>Samba Team</orgname> - <address><email>jelmer@samba.org</email></address> - </affiliation> - </author> - <pubdate>January 2003</pubdate> -</chapterinfo> - -<title>RPC Pluggable Modules</title> - -<sect1> -<title>About</title> - -<para> -This document describes how to make use the new RPC Pluggable Modules features -of Samba 3.0. This architecture was added to increase the maintainability of -Samba allowing RPC Pipes to be worked on separately from the main CVS branch. -The RPM architecture will also allow third-party vendors to add functionality -to Samba through plug-ins. -</para> - -</sect1> - -<sect1> -<title>General Overview</title> - -<para> -When an RPC call is sent to smbd, smbd tries to load a shared library by the -name <filename>librpc_<pipename>.so</filename> to handle the call if -it doesn't know how to handle the call internally. For instance, LSA calls -are handled by <filename>librpc_lsass.so</filename>.. -These shared libraries should be located in the <filename><sambaroot>/lib/rpc</filename>. smbd then attempts to call the init_module function within -the shared library. Check the chapter on modules for more information. -</para> - -<para> -In the init_module function, the library should call -rpc_pipe_register_commands(). This function takes the following arguments: -</para> - -<para><programlisting> -int rpc_pipe_register_commands(const char *clnt, const char *srv, - const struct api_struct *cmds, int size); -</programlisting></para> - -<variablelist> - -<varlistentry><term>clnt</term> -<listitem><para>the Client name of the named pipe</para></listitem> -</varlistentry> - -<varlistentry><term>srv</term> -<listitem><para>the Server name of the named pipe</para></listitem> -</varlistentry> - -<varlistentry><term>cmds</term> -<listitem><para>a list of api_structs that map RPC ordinal numbers to function calls</para></listitem> -</varlistentry> - -<varlistentry><term>size</term> -<listitem><para>the number of api_structs contained in cmds</para></listitem> -</varlistentry> - -</variablelist> - -<para> -See rpc_server/srv_reg.c and rpc_server/srv_reg_nt.c for a small example of -how to use this library. -</para> - -</sect1> -</chapter> diff --git a/docs/docbook/faq/clientapp.sgml b/docs/docbook/faq/clientapp.sgml index 3d44dd44c0..6d687bf772 100644 --- a/docs/docbook/faq/clientapp.sgml +++ b/docs/docbook/faq/clientapp.sgml @@ -1,8 +1,8 @@ -<chapter id="FAQ-ClientApp"> +<chapter id="ClientApp"> <title>Specific client application problems</title> <sect1> -<title>MS Office Setup reports "Cannot change properties of '\\MSOFFICE\\SETUP.INI'"</title> +<title>MS Office Setup reports "Cannot change properties of '\MSOFFICE\SETUP.INI'"</title> <para> When installing MS Office on a Samba drive for which you have admin user permissions, ie. admin users = username, you will find the @@ -60,16 +60,16 @@ set the following parameters on the share containing it: </para> <para><programlisting> -[MSOP95] - path = /where_you_put_it - comment = Your comment - volume = "The_CD_ROM_Label" - read only = yes - available = yes - share modes = no - locking = no - browseable = yes - public = yes + [MSOP95] + path = /where_you_put_it + comment = Your comment + volume = "The_CD_ROM_Label" + read only = yes + available = yes + share modes = no + locking = no + browseable = yes + public = yes </programlisting></para> </listitem> diff --git a/docs/docbook/faq/config.sgml b/docs/docbook/faq/config.sgml index 2c17c86c4e..78f73252a2 100644 --- a/docs/docbook/faq/config.sgml +++ b/docs/docbook/faq/config.sgml @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -<chapter id="FAQ-Config"> +<chapter id="Config"> <title>Configuration problems</title> <sect1> @@ -8,30 +8,4 @@ When you have a user in 'admin users', samba will always do file operations for this user as 'root', even if 'force user' has been set. </para> </sect1> - -<sect1> -<title>I have just installed samba and I'm trying to log in from Windows, but samba refuses all logins!</title> - -<para> -Newer windows clients(NT4, 2000, XP) send encrypted passwords. Samba can't compare these -passwords to the unix password database, so it needs it's own user database. You can -add users to this database using "smbpasswd -a user-name". -</para> - -<para> -See also the "User database" chapter of the samba HOWTO Collection. -</para> -</sect1> - -<sect1> -<title>How can I make samba use netbios scope ID's</title> - -<para>By default Samba uses a blank scope ID. This means -all your windows boxes must also have a blank scope ID. -If you really want to use a non-blank scope ID then you will -need to use the 'netbios scope' smb.conf option. -All your PCs will need to have the same setting for -this to work. Scope ID's are not recommended.</para> -</sect1> - </chapter> diff --git a/docs/docbook/faq/errors.sgml b/docs/docbook/faq/errors.sgml index 97619ce704..6476ec064e 100644 --- a/docs/docbook/faq/errors.sgml +++ b/docs/docbook/faq/errors.sgml @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -<chapter id="FAQ-errors"> +<chapter id="errors"> <title>Common errors</title> @@ -50,6 +50,7 @@ Windows NT in the chapter "Portability" of the samba HOWTO collection </member> </simplelist> </para> + </sect1> <sect1> @@ -63,6 +64,7 @@ It also ignores the "-N" argument when querying some (but not all) of our NT servers. </quote> </para> + <para> No, it does not ignore -N, it is just that your server rejected the null password in the connection, so smbclient prompts for a password diff --git a/docs/docbook/faq/features.sgml b/docs/docbook/faq/features.sgml index 66b05379cc..bc1081e5c0 100644 --- a/docs/docbook/faq/features.sgml +++ b/docs/docbook/faq/features.sgml @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -<chapter id="FAQ-features"> +<chapter id="features"> <title>Features</title> @@ -83,7 +83,9 @@ manual carefully.</para> <title>Tools for printing faxes</title> <para>Your incomed faxes are in: -<filename>/var/spool/fax/incoming</filename>. Print it with:</para> +<filename>/var/spool/fax/incoming</filename></para> + +<para>print it with:</para> <para><programlisting> for i in * diff --git a/docs/docbook/faq/general.sgml b/docs/docbook/faq/general.sgml index 54c620b382..38bcdf49e3 100644 --- a/docs/docbook/faq/general.sgml +++ b/docs/docbook/faq/general.sgml @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -<chapter id="FAQ-general"> +<chapter id="general"> <title>General Information</title> <sect1> @@ -35,7 +35,7 @@ unstable, and a series of alpha releases are distributed, for example doing. The "alpha" in the filename will hopefully scare off those who are just looking for the latest version to install.</member> -<member>When the release manager, currently Jerry, thinks that the alphas have stabilised to the point +<member>When Andrew thinks that the alphas have stabilised to the point where he would recommend new users install it, he renames it to the same version number without the alpha, for example 1.9.16.</member> @@ -128,4 +128,43 @@ Look at <ulink url="http://samba.org/samba/archives.html">the samba mailing list </para> </sect1> +<sect1> +<title>Pizza supply details</title> +<para> +Those who have registered in the Samba survey as "Pizza Factory" will +already know this, but the rest may need some help. Andrew doesn't ask +for payment, but he does appreciate it when people give him +pizza. This calls for a little organisation when the pizza donor is +twenty thousand kilometres away, but it has been done. +</para> + +<para> +Method 1: Ring up your local branch of an international pizza chain +and see if they honour their vouchers internationally. Pizza Hut do, +which is how the entire Canberra Linux Users Group got to eat pizza +one night, courtesy of someone in the US. +</para> + +<para> +Method 2: Ring up a local pizza shop in Canberra and quote a credit +card number for a certain amount, and tell them that Andrew will be +collecting it (don't forget to tell him.) One kind soul from Germany +did this. +</para> + +<para> +Method 3: Purchase a pizza voucher from your local pizza shop that has +no international affiliations and send it to Andrew. It is completely +useless but he can hang it on the wall next to the one he already has +from Germany :-) +</para> + +<para> +Method 4: Air freight him a pizza with your favourite regional +flavours. It will probably get stuck in customs or torn apart by +hungry sniffer dogs but it will have been a noble gesture. +</para> + +</sect1> + </chapter> diff --git a/docs/docbook/faq/install.sgml b/docs/docbook/faq/install.sgml index f8341dc65a..88520fc71d 100644 --- a/docs/docbook/faq/install.sgml +++ b/docs/docbook/faq/install.sgml @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -<chapter id="FAQ-Install"> +<chapter id="Install"> <title>Compiling and installing Samba on a Unix host</title> <sect1> @@ -22,7 +22,7 @@ client to client - check your client's documentation. </sect1> <sect1> -<title>Some files that I KNOW are on the server don't show up when I view the files from my client!</title> +<title>Some files that I KNOW are on the server doesn't show up when I view the files from my client!</title> <para>See the next question.</para> </sect1> diff --git a/docs/docbook/faq/printing.sgml b/docs/docbook/faq/printing.sgml deleted file mode 100644 index be2acbd905..0000000000 --- a/docs/docbook/faq/printing.sgml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,38 +0,0 @@ -<chapter id="FAQ-Printing"> -<!-- Kurt Pfeifle's HOWTO chapter on printing should make this obsolete --> -<chapterinfo> -<author> - <firstname>Ronan</firstname><surname>Waide</surname> -</author> -</chapterinfo> - -<title>Printing problems</title> - -<sect1> -<title>setdriver or cupsaddsmb failes</title> -<para> -setdriver expects the following setup: - -<simplelist> -<member>you are a printer admin, or root. this is the smb.conf printer admin group, not the Printer Operators group in NT. I've not tried the latter, but I don't believe it will work based on the current code.</member> -<member>printer admins has to be defined in [global]</member> -<member>upload the driver files to \\server\print$\w32x86 and win40 as appropriate. DON'T put them in the 0 or 2 subdirectories.</member> -<member>Make sure that the user you're connecting as is able to write to the print$ directories</member> -<member>Use adddriver (with appropriate parameters) to create the driver. note, this will not just update samba's notion of drivers, it will also move the files from the w32x86 and win40 directories to an appropriate subdirectory (based on driver version, I think, but not important enough for me to find out)</member> -<member>Use setdriver to associate the driver with a printer</member> -</simplelist> -</para> - -<para> -The setdriver call will fail if the printer doesn't already exist in -samba's view of the world. Either create the printer in cups and -restart samba, or create an add printer command (see smb.conf doco) -and use RPC calls to create a printer. NB the add printer command MUST -return a single line of text indicating which port the printer was -added on. If it doesn't, Samba won't reload the printer -definitions. Although samba doesn't really support the notion of -ports, suitable add printer command and enumport command settings can -allow you pretty good remote control of the samba printer setup. -</para> -</sect1> -</chapter> diff --git a/docs/docbook/faq/sambafaq.sgml b/docs/docbook/faq/sambafaq.sgml index 2cc7d466fd..e9e5ed7a3c 100644 --- a/docs/docbook/faq/sambafaq.sgml +++ b/docs/docbook/faq/sambafaq.sgml @@ -5,7 +5,6 @@ <!ENTITY clientapp SYSTEM "clientapp.sgml"> <!ENTITY features SYSTEM "features.sgml"> <!ENTITY config SYSTEM "config.sgml"> -<!ENTITY printing SYSTEM "printing.sgml"> ]> <book id="Samba-FAQ"> @@ -35,5 +34,4 @@ and the old samba text documents which were mostly written by John Terpstra. &clientapp; &errors; &features; -&printing; </book> diff --git a/docs/docbook/global.ent b/docs/docbook/global.ent index dcef1084d6..c69b72d8a6 100644 --- a/docs/docbook/global.ent +++ b/docs/docbook/global.ent @@ -407,7 +407,8 @@ an Active Directory environment. <!ENTITY ID-BUGS SYSTEM "bugreport"> <!ENTITY ID-SECURITY-LEVEL SYSTEM "securitylevels"> <!ENTITY ID-SPEED SYSTEM "speed"> -<!ENTITY ID-NetworkBrowsing SYSTEM "network-browsing"> +<!ENTITY ID-BROWSING SYSTEM "improved-browsing"> +<!ENTITY ID-BROWSING-Quick SYSTEM "Browsing-Quick"> <!ENTITY ID-GROUP-MAPPING-HOWTO SYSTEM "groupmapping"> <!ENTITY ID-Portability SYSTEM "Portability"> <!ENTITY ID-Other-Clients SYSTEM "Other-Clients"> @@ -450,7 +451,8 @@ an Active Directory environment. <!ENTITY ADS-HOWTO SYSTEM "projdoc/ADS-HOWTO.sgml"> <!ENTITY AdvancedNetworkAdmin SYSTEM "projdoc/AdvancedNetworkAdmin.sgml"> -<!ENTITY NetworkBrowsing SYSTEM "projdoc/NetworkBrowsing.sgml"> +<!ENTITY BROWSING SYSTEM "projdoc/Browsing.sgml"> +<!ENTITY BROWSING-Quick SYSTEM "projdoc/Browsing-Quickguide.sgml"> <!ENTITY BUGS SYSTEM "projdoc/Bugs.sgml"> <!ENTITY CUPS SYSTEM "projdoc/CUPS-printing.sgml"> <!ENTITY CVS-Access SYSTEM "projdoc/CVS-Access.sgml"> @@ -461,7 +463,6 @@ an Active Directory environment. <!ENTITY GROUP-MAPPING-HOWTO SYSTEM "projdoc/GROUP-MAPPING-HOWTO.sgml"> <!ENTITY IntegratingWithWindows SYSTEM "projdoc/Integrating-with-Windows.sgml"> <!ENTITY IntroSMB SYSTEM "projdoc/IntroSMB.sgml"> -<!ENTITY locking SYSTEM "projdoc/locking.sgml"> <!ENTITY MS-Dfs-Setup SYSTEM "projdoc/msdfs_setup.sgml"> <!ENTITY NT-Security SYSTEM "projdoc/NT_Security.sgml"> <!ENTITY NT4Migration SYSTEM "projdoc/NT4Migration.sgml"> diff --git a/docs/docbook/manpages/editreg.1.sgml b/docs/docbook/manpages/editreg.1.sgml deleted file mode 100644 index 22c3c3e759..0000000000 --- a/docs/docbook/manpages/editreg.1.sgml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,85 +0,0 @@ -<!DOCTYPE refentry PUBLIC "-//OASIS//DTD DocBook V4.1//EN" [ -<!ENTITY % globalentities SYSTEM '../global.ent'> %globalentities; -]> -<refentry id="editreg.1"> - -<refmeta> - <refentrytitle>editreg</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>1</manvolnum> -</refmeta> - - -<refnamediv> - <refname>editreg</refname> - <refpurpose>A utility to report and change SIDs in registry files - </refpurpose> -</refnamediv> - -<refsynopsisdiv> - <cmdsynopsis> - <command>editreg</command> - <arg choice="opt">-v</arg> - <arg choice="opt">-c file</arg> - <arg choice="req">file</arg> - </cmdsynopsis> -</refsynopsisdiv> - -<refsect1> - <title>DESCRIPTION</title> - - <para>This tool is part of the <citerefentry><refentrytitle>Samba</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>7</manvolnum></citerefentry> suite.</para> - - <para><command>editreg</command> is a utility that - can visualize windows registry files (currently only NT4) and apply - so-called commandfiles to them. - </para> -</refsect1> - - -<refsect1> - <title>OPTIONS</title> - - <variablelist> - <varlistentry> - <term>registry_file</term> - <listitem><para>Registry file to view or edit. </para></listitem> - </varlistentry> - - - <varlistentry> - <term>-v,--verbose</term> - <listitem><para>Increases verbosity of messages. - </para></listitem> - </varlistentry> - - <varlistentry> - <term>-c commandfile</term> - <listitem><para>Read commands to execute on <filename>registry_file</filename> from <filename>commandfile</filename>. Currently not yet supported! - </para></listitem> - </varlistentry> - - &stdarg.help; - - </variablelist> -</refsect1> - -<refsect1> - <title>VERSION</title> - - <para>This man page is correct for version 3.0 of the Samba - suite.</para> -</refsect1> - -<refsect1> - <title>AUTHOR</title> - - <para>The original Samba software and related utilities - were created by Andrew Tridgell. Samba is now developed - by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar - to the way the Linux kernel is developed.</para> - - <para>The editreg man page was written by Jelmer Vernooij. </para> -</refsect1> - -</refentry> diff --git a/docs/docbook/manpages/findsmb.1.sgml b/docs/docbook/manpages/findsmb.1.sgml index 090b1c8388..0b3bbca017 100644 --- a/docs/docbook/manpages/findsmb.1.sgml +++ b/docs/docbook/manpages/findsmb.1.sgml @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ <!DOCTYPE refentry PUBLIC "-//OASIS//DTD DocBook V4.1//EN"> -<refentry id="findsmb.1"> +<refentry id="findsmb"> <refmeta> <refentrytitle>findsmb</refentrytitle> @@ -23,16 +23,15 @@ <refsect1> <title>DESCRIPTION</title> - <para>This perl script is part of the <citerefentry> - <refentrytitle>Samba</refentrytitle><manvolnum>7</manvolnum></citerefentry> - suite.</para> + <para>This perl script is part of the <ulink url="samba.7.html"> + Samba</ulink> suite.</para> <para><command>findsmb</command> is a perl script that prints out several pieces of information about machines on a subnet that respond to SMB name query requests. - It uses <citerefentry><refentrytitle>nmblookup</refentrytitle><manvolnum>1</manvolnum></citerefentry> - and <citerefentry><refentrytitle>smbclient</refentrytitle><manvolnum>1</manvolnum></citerefentry> - to obtain this information. + It uses <ulink url="nmblookup.1.html"><command> + nmblookup(1)</command></ulink> and <ulink url="smbclient.1.html"> + <command>smbclient(1)</command></ulink> to obtain this information. </para> </refsect1> @@ -46,17 +45,16 @@ bugs in Windows95 into account when trying to find a Netbios name registered of the remote machine. This option is disabled by default because it is specific to Windows 95 and Windows 95 machines only. - If set, <citerefentry><refentrytitle>nmblookup</refentrytitle><manvolnum>1</manvolnum></citerefentry> + If set, <ulink url="nmblookup.1.html"><command>nmblookup</command></ulink> will be called with <constant>-B</constant> option.</para></listitem> </varlistentry> <varlistentry> <term>subnet broadcast address</term> <listitem><para>Without this option, <command>findsmb </command> will probe the subnet of the machine where - <citerefentry><refentrytitle>findsmb</refentrytitle><manvolnum>1</manvolnum></citerefentry> - is run. This value is passed to - <citerefentry><refentrytitle>nmblookup</refentrytitle><manvolnum>1</manvolnum></citerefentry> - as part of the <constant>-B</constant> option.</para></listitem> + <command>findsmb</command> is run. This value is passed + to <command>nmblookup</command> as part of the + <constant>-B</constant> option.</para></listitem> </varlistentry> </variablelist> </refsect1> @@ -78,21 +76,19 @@ version.</para> <para>The command with <constant>-r</constant> option - must be run on a system without <citerefentry> - <refentrytitle>nmbd</refentrytitle><manvolnum>8</manvolnum> - </citerefentry> running. - + must be run on a system without <ulink + url="nmbd.8.html"><command>nmbd</command></ulink> running. If <command>nmbd</command> is running on the system, you will only get the IP address and the DNS name of the machine. To get proper responses from Windows 95 and Windows 98 machines, the command must be run as root and with <constant>-r</constant> option on a machine without <command>nmbd</command> running.</para> - <para>For example, running <command>findsmb</command> - without <constant>-r</constant> option set would yield output similar + <para>For example, running <command>findsmb</command> without + <constant>-r</constant> option set would yield output similar to the following</para> -<screen> + <screen><computeroutput> IP ADDR NETBIOS NAME WORKGROUP/OS/VERSION --------------------------------------------------------------------- 192.168.35.10 MINESET-TEST1 [DMVENGR] @@ -105,7 +101,7 @@ IP ADDR NETBIOS NAME WORKGROUP/OS/VERSION 192.168.35.88 SCNT2 +[MVENGR] [Windows NT 4.0] [NT LAN Manager 4.0] 192.168.35.93 FROGSTAR-PC [MVENGR] [Windows 5.0] [Windows 2000 LAN Manager] 192.168.35.97 HERBNT1 *[HERB-NT] [Windows NT 4.0] [NT LAN Manager 4.0] -</screen> + </computeroutput></screen> </refsect1> @@ -119,12 +115,10 @@ IP ADDR NETBIOS NAME WORKGROUP/OS/VERSION <refsect1> <title>SEE ALSO</title> - <para><citerefentry> - <refentrytitle>nmbd</refentrytitle><manvolnum>8</manvolnum> - </citerefentry>, - <citerefentry><refentrytitle>smbclient</refentrytitle><manvolnum>1</manvolnum> - </citerefentry>, and <citerefentry><refentrytitle>nmblookup</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>1</manvolnum></citerefentry> + <para><ulink url="nmbd.8.html"><command>nmbd(8)</command></ulink>, + <ulink url="smbclient.1.html"><command>smbclient(1) + </command></ulink>, and <ulink url="nmblookup.1.html"> + <command>nmblookup(1)</command></ulink> </para> </refsect1> @@ -138,11 +132,11 @@ IP ADDR NETBIOS NAME WORKGROUP/OS/VERSION <para>The original Samba man pages were written by Karl Auer. The man page sources were converted to YODL format (another - excellent piece of Open Source software, available at <ulink - url="ftp://ftp.icce.rug.nl/pub/unix/">ftp://ftp.icce.rug.nl/pub/unix/</ulink>) - and updated for the Samba 2.0 release by Jeremy Allison. The conversion to DocBook for - Samba 2.2 was done by Gerald Carter. The conversion to DocBook - XML 4.2 for Samba 3.0 was done by Alexander Bokovoy.</para> + excellent piece of Open Source software, available at + <ulink url="ftp://ftp.icce.rug.nl/pub/unix/"> + ftp://ftp.icce.rug.nl/pub/unix/</ulink>) and updated for the Samba 2.0 + release by Jeremy Allison. The conversion to DocBook for + Samba 2.2 was done by Gerald Carter</para> </refsect1> </refentry> diff --git a/docs/docbook/manpages/lmhosts.5.sgml b/docs/docbook/manpages/lmhosts.5.sgml index a8a5f2c072..7934c18e8e 100644 --- a/docs/docbook/manpages/lmhosts.5.sgml +++ b/docs/docbook/manpages/lmhosts.5.sgml @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ <!DOCTYPE refentry PUBLIC "-//OASIS//DTD DocBook V4.1//EN"> -<refentry id="lmhosts.5"> +<refentry id="lmhosts"> <refmeta> <refentrytitle>lmhosts</refentrytitle> @@ -13,15 +13,15 @@ </refnamediv> <refsynopsisdiv> - <para><filename>lmhosts</filename> is the <citerefentry><refentrytitle>Samba</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>7</manvolnum></citerefentry> NetBIOS name to IP address mapping file.</para> + <para><filename>lmhosts</filename> is the <ulink url="samba.7.html"> + Samba</ulink> NetBIOS name to IP address mapping file.</para> </refsynopsisdiv> <refsect1> <title>DESCRIPTION</title> - <para>This file is part of the <citerefentry><refentrytitle>Samba</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>7</manvolnum></citerefentry> suite.</para> + <para>This file is part of the <ulink url="samba.7.html"> + Samba</ulink> suite.</para> <para><filename>lmhosts</filename> is the <emphasis>Samba </emphasis> NetBIOS name to IP address mapping file. It @@ -35,7 +35,7 @@ <para>It is an ASCII file containing one line for NetBIOS name. The two fields on each line are separated from each other by white space. Any entry beginning with '#' is ignored. Each line - in the lmhosts file contains the following information:</para> + in the lmhosts file contains the following information :</para> <itemizedlist> <listitem><para>IP Address - in dotted decimal format.</para> @@ -52,16 +52,16 @@ </listitem> </itemizedlist> - <para>An example follows:</para> + <para>An example follows :</para> - <programlisting> + <para><programlisting> # # Sample Samba lmhosts file. # 192.9.200.1 TESTPC 192.9.200.20 NTSERVER#20 192.9.200.21 SAMBASERVER - </programlisting> + </programlisting></para> <para>Contains three IP to NetBIOS name mappings. The first and third will be returned for any queries for the names "TESTPC" @@ -73,24 +73,24 @@ be resolved.</para> <para>The default location of the <filename>lmhosts</filename> file - is in the same directory as the <citerefentry><refentrytitle>smb.conf</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>5</manvolnum></citerefentry> file.</para> + is in the same directory as the <ulink url="smb.conf.5.html"> + smb.conf(5)></ulink> file.</para> </refsect1> <refsect1> <title>VERSION</title> - <para>This man page is correct for version 3.0 of the Samba suite.</para> + <para>This man page is correct for version 2.2 of + the Samba suite.</para> </refsect1> <refsect1> <title>SEE ALSO</title> - <para><citerefentry> - <refentrytitle>smbclient</refentrytitle><manvolnum>1</manvolnum> - </citerefentry>, <citerefentry><refentrytitle>smb.conf</refentrytitle><manvolnum>5</manvolnum> - </citerefentry>, and <citerefentry><refentrytitle>smbpasswd</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>8</manvolnum></citerefentry> + <para><ulink url="smbclient.1.html"><command>smbclient(1) + </command></ulink>, <ulink url="smb.conf.5.html#NAMERESOLVEORDER"> + smb.conf(5)</ulink>, and <ulink url="smbpasswd.8.html"><command> + smbpasswd(8)</command></ulink> </para> </refsect1> @@ -108,8 +108,7 @@ <ulink url="ftp://ftp.icce.rug.nl/pub/unix/"> ftp://ftp.icce.rug.nl/pub/unix/</ulink>) and updated for the Samba 2.0 release by Jeremy Allison. The conversion to DocBook for - Samba 2.2 was done by Gerald Carter. The conversion to DocBook - XML 4.2 was done by Alexander Bokovoy.</para> + Samba 2.2 was done by Gerald Carter</para> </refsect1> </refentry> diff --git a/docs/docbook/manpages/net.8.sgml b/docs/docbook/manpages/net.8.sgml index 8ee965e3ed..aab9032f14 100644 --- a/docs/docbook/manpages/net.8.sgml +++ b/docs/docbook/manpages/net.8.sgml @@ -1,41 +1,5 @@ -<!DOCTYPE refentry PUBLIC "-//OASIS//DTD DocBook V4.1//EN" [ -<!ENTITY % globalentities SYSTEM '../global.ent'> %globalentities; - -<!-- This one is only used for adding users using RAP --> -<!ENTITY net.arg.flags ' -<varlistentry> -<term>-F flags</term> -<listitem><para> -FIXME. Defaults to 0x21 -</para></listitem> -</varlistentry>'> - -<!-- This one is only used by shutdown (RPC) --> -<!ENTITY net.arg.shutdown ' -<varlistentry> -<term>-r</term> -<listitem><para> -Reboot after shutdown. -</para></listitem> -</varlistentry> - -<varlistentry> -<term>-f</term> -<listitem><para> -Force shutting down all applications. -</para></listitem> -</varlistentry> - -<varlistentry> -<term>-t timeout</term> -<listitem><para> -Timeout before system will be shut down. An interactive -user of the system can use this time to cancel the shutdown. -</para></listitem> -</varlistentry>'> -]> - -<refentry id="net.8"> +<!DOCTYPE refentry PUBLIC "-//OASIS//DTD DocBook V4.1//EN"> +<refentry id="net"> <refmeta> <refentrytitle>net</refentrytitle> @@ -46,8 +10,7 @@ user of the system can use this time to cancel the shutdown. <refnamediv> <refname>net</refname> <refpurpose>Tool for administration of Samba and remote - CIFS servers. - </refpurpose> + CIFS servers.</refpurpose> </refnamediv> <refsynopsisdiv> @@ -63,7 +26,14 @@ user of the system can use this time to cancel the shutdown. <arg choice="opt">-n myname</arg> <arg choice="opt">-s conffile</arg> <arg choice="opt">-S server</arg> + <arg choice="opt">-C comment</arg> + <arg choice="opt">-M maxusers</arg> + <arg choice="opt">-F flags</arg> + <arg choice="opt">-j jobid</arg> <arg choice="opt">-l</arg> + <arg choice="opt">-r</arg> + <arg choice="opt">-f</arg> + <arg choice="opt">-t timeout</arg> <arg choice="opt">-P</arg> <arg choice="opt">-D debuglevel</arg> </cmdsynopsis> @@ -72,17 +42,11 @@ user of the system can use this time to cancel the shutdown. <refsect1> <title>DESCRIPTION</title> - <para>This tool is part of the <citerefentry><refentrytitle>Samba</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>7</manvolnum></citerefentry> suite.</para> + <para>This tool is part of the <ulink url="samba.7.html"> + Samba</ulink> suite.</para> <para>The samba net utility is meant to work just like the net utility - available for windows and DOS. The first argument should be used - to specify the protocol to use when executing a certain command. - ADS is used for ActiveDirectory, RAP is using for old (Win9x/NT3) - clients and RPC can be used for NT4 and Windows 2000. If this - argument is omitted, net will try to determine it automatically. - Not all commands are available on all protocols. - </para> + available for windows and DOS.</para> </refsect1> @@ -90,13 +54,18 @@ user of the system can use this time to cancel the shutdown. <title>OPTIONS</title> <variablelist> - &stdarg.help; + <varlistentry> + <term>-h</term> + <listitem><para> + Display summary of all available options. + + </para></listitem> + </varlistentry> <varlistentry> <term>-w target-workgroup</term> <listitem><para> - Sets target workgroup or domain. You have to specify - either this option or the IP address or the name of a server. + Sets target workgroup or domain. You have to specify either this option or the IP address or the name of a server. </para></listitem> </varlistentry> @@ -117,35 +86,91 @@ user of the system can use this time to cancel the shutdown. <varlistentry> <term>-I ip-address</term> <listitem><para> - IP address of target server to use. You have to - specify either this option or a target workgroup or - a target server. + IP address of target server to use. You have to specify either this option or a target workgroup or a target server. </para></listitem> </varlistentry> <varlistentry> <term>-p port</term> <listitem><para> - Port on the target server to connect to (usually 139 or 445). - Defaults to trying 445 first, then 139. + Port on the target server to connect to. </para></listitem> </varlistentry> - &stdarg.netbios.name; - &stdarg.configfile; + <varlistentry> + <term>-n myname</term> + <listitem><para> + Sets name of the client. + </para></listitem> + </varlistentry> + + <varlistentry> + <term>-s conffile</term> + <listitem><para> + Specify alternative configuration file that should be loaded. + </para></listitem> + </varlistentry> <varlistentry> <term>-S server</term> <listitem><para> - Name of target server. You should specify either - this option or a target workgroup or a target IP address. + Name of target server. You should specify either this option or a target workgroup or a target IP address. + </para></listitem> + </varlistentry> + + <varlistentry> + <term>-C comment</term> + <listitem><para> + FIXME + </para></listitem> + </varlistentry> + + <varlistentry> + <term>-M maxusers</term> + <listitem><para> + FIXME + </para></listitem> + </varlistentry> + + <varlistentry> + <term>-F flags</term> + <listitem><para> + FIXME + </para></listitem> + </varlistentry> + + <varlistentry> + <term>-j jobid</term> + <listitem><para> + FIXME </para></listitem> </varlistentry> <varlistentry> <term>-l</term> <listitem><para> - When listing data, give more information on each item. + FIXME + </para></listitem> + </varlistentry> + + <varlistentry> + <term>-r</term> + <listitem><para> + FIXME + </para></listitem> + </varlistentry> + + <varlistentry> + <term>-f</term> + <listitem><para> + FIXME + </para></listitem> + </varlistentry> + + <varlistentry> + <term>-t timeout</term> + <listitem><para> + FIXME </para></listitem> </varlistentry> @@ -156,673 +181,147 @@ user of the system can use this time to cancel the shutdown. </para></listitem> </varlistentry> - &stdarg.debug; + <varlistentry> + <term>-D debuglevel</term> + <listitem><para>set the debuglevel. Debug level 0 is the lowest + and 100 being the highest. This should be set to 100 if you are + planning on submitting a bug report to the Samba team (see + <filename>BUGS.txt</filename>). + </para></listitem> + </varlistentry> </variablelist> </refsect1> -<refsect1> -<title>COMMANDS</title> -<refsect2> +<refsect1> <title>TIME</title> <para>The <command>NET TIME</command> command allows you to view the time on a remote server or synchronise the time on the local server with the time on the remote server.</para> -<refsect3> -<title>TIME</title> - -<para>Without any options, the <command>NET TIME</command> command -displays the time on the remote server. -</para> - -</refsect3> - -<refsect3> -<title>TIME SYSTEM</title> - -<para> Displays the time on the remote server in a format ready for <command>/bin/date</command></para> - -</refsect3> - -<refsect3> -<title>TIME SET</title> -<para>Tries to set the date and time of the local server to that on -the remote server using <command>/bin/date</command>. </para> - -</refsect3> - -<refsect3> -<title>TIME ZONE</title> - -<para>Displays the timezone in hours from GMT on the remote computer.</para> - -</refsect3> -</refsect2> - -<refsect2> -<title>[RPC|ADS] JOIN [TYPE] [-U username[%password]] [options]</title> - -<para> -Join a domain. If the account already exists on the server, and -[TYPE] is MEMBER, the machine will attempt to join automatically. -(Assuming that the machine has been created in server manager) -Otherwise, a password will be prompted for, and a new account may -be created.</para> - -<para> -[TYPE] may be PDC, BDC or MEMBER to specify the type of server -joining the domain. -</para> -</refsect2> - -<refsect2> -<title>[RPC] OLDJOIN [options]</title> - -<para>Join a domain. Use the OLDJOIN option to join the domain -using the old style of domain joining - you need to create a trust -account in server manager first.</para> -</refsect2> - -<refsect2> -<title>[RPC|ADS] USER</title> - -<refsect3> -<title>[RPC|ADS] USER DELETE <replaceable>target</replaceable></title> - -<para>Delete specified user</para> - -</refsect3> - -<refsect3> -<title>[RPC|ADS] USER LIST</title> - -<para>List all users</para> - -</refsect3> - -<refsect3> -<title>[RPC|ADS] USER INFO <replaceable>target</replaceable></title> - -<para>List the domain groups of a the specified user.</para> - -</refsect3> - -<refsect3> -<title>[RPC|ADS] USER ADD <replaceable>name</replaceable> [password] [-F user flags] [-C comment]</title> - -<para>Add specified user.</para> -</refsect3> -</refsect2> - -<refsect2> -<title>[RPC|ADS] GROUP</title> - -<refsect3> -<title>[RPC|ADS] GROUP [misc options] [targets]</title> -<para>List user groups.</para> -</refsect3> - -<refsect3> -<title>[RPC|ADS] GROUP DELETE <replaceable>name</replaceable> [misc. options]</title> - -<para>Delete specified group.</para> - -</refsect3> - -<refsect3> -<title>[RPC|ADS] GROUP ADD <replaceable>name</replaceable> [-C comment]</title> - -<para>Create specified group.</para> - -</refsect3> -</refsect2> - -<refsect2> -<title>[RAP|RPC] SHARE</title> - -<refsect3> -<title>[RAP|RPC] SHARE [misc. options] [targets]</title> - -<para>Enumerates all exported resources (network shares) on target server.</para> - -</refsect3> - -<refsect3> -<title>[RAP|RPC] SHARE ADD <replaceable>name=serverpath</replaceable> [-C comment] [-M maxusers] [targets]</title> - -<para>Adds a share from a server (makes the export active). Maxusers -specifies the number of users that can be connected to the -share simultaneously.</para> - -</refsect3> - -<refsect3> -<title>SHARE DELETE <replaceable>sharenam</replaceable></title> - -<para>Delete specified share.</para> -</refsect3> -</refsect2> - -<refsect2> -<title>[RPC|RAP] FILE</title> - -<refsect3> -<title>[RPC|RAP] FILE</title> - -<para>List all open files on remote server.</para> - -</refsect3> - -<refsect3> -<title>[RPC|RAP] FILE CLOSE <replaceable>fileid</replaceable></title> - -<para>Close file with specified <replaceable>fileid</replaceable> on -remote server.</para> - -</refsect3> - -<refsect3> -<title>[RPC|RAP] FILE INFO <replaceable>fileid</replaceable></title> - -<para> -Print information on specified <replaceable>fileid</replaceable>. -Currently listed are: file-id, username, locks, path, permissions. -</para> - -</refsect3> - -<refsect3> -<title>[RAP|RPC] FILE USER</title> - -¬.implemented; - -</refsect3> - -</refsect2> - -<refsect2> -<title>SESSION</title> - -<refsect3> -<title>RAP SESSION</title> - -<para>Without any other options, SESSION enumerates all active SMB/CIFS -sessions on the target server.</para> - -</refsect3> - -<refsect3> -<title>RAP SESSION DELETE|CLOSE <replaceable>CLIENT_NAME</replaceable></title> - -<para>Close the specified sessions.</para> - -</refsect3> - -<refsect3> -<title>RAP SESSION INFO <replaceable>CLIENT_NAME</replaceable></title> - -<para>Give a list with all the open files in specified session.</para> - -</refsect3> - -</refsect2> - -<refsect2> -<title>RAP SERVER <replaceable>DOMAIN</replaceable></title> - -<para>List all servers in specified domain or workgroup. Defaults -to local domain.</para> - -</refsect2> - -<refsect2> -<title>RAP DOMAIN</title> - -<para>Lists all domains and workgroups visible on the -current network.</para> - -</refsect2> - -<refsect2> -<title>RAP PRINTQ</title> - -<refsect3> -<title>RAP PRINTQ LIST <replaceable>QUEUE_NAME</replaceable></title> - -<para>Lists the specified print queue and print jobs on the server. -If the <replaceable>QUEUE_NAME</replaceable> is omitted, all -queues are listed.</para> - -</refsect3> - -<refsect3> -<title>RAP PRINTQ DELETE <replaceable>JOBID</replaceable></title> - -<para>Delete job with specified id.</para> - -</refsect3> - -</refsect2> - -<refsect2> -<title>RAP VALIDATE <replaceable>user</replaceable> [<replaceable>password</replaceable>]</title> - -<para> -Validate whether the specified user can log in to the -remote server. If the password is not specified on the commandline, it -will be prompted. -</para> - -¬.implemented; - -</refsect2> - -<refsect2> -<title>RAP GROUPMEMBER</title> - -<refsect3> -<title>RAP GROUPMEMBER LIST <replaceable>GROUP</replaceable></title> - -<para>List all members of the specified group.</para> - -</refsect3> - -<refsect3> -<title>RAP GROUPMEMBER DELETE <replaceable>GROUP</replaceable> <replaceable>USER</replaceable></title> - -<para>Delete member from group.</para> - -</refsect3> - -<refsect3> -<title>RAP GROUPMEMBER ADD <replaceable>GROUP</replaceable> <replaceable>USER</replaceable></title> - -<para>Add member to group.</para> - -</refsect3> - -</refsect2> - -<refsect2> -<title>RAP ADMIN <replaceable>command</replaceable></title> - -<para>Execute the specified <replaceable>command</replaceable> on -the remote server. Only works with OS/2 servers. -</para> - -¬.implemented; - -</refsect2> - -<refsect2> -<title>RAP SERVICE</title> - -<refsect3> -<title>RAP SERVICE START <replaceable>NAME</replaceable> [arguments...]</title> - -<para>Start the specified service on the remote server. Not implemented yet.</para> - -¬.implemented; - -</refsect3> - -<refsect3> -<title>RAP SERVICE STOP</title> - -<para>Stop the specified service on the remote server.</para> - -¬.implemented; - -</refsect3> - -</refsect2> - -<refsect2> -<title>RAP PASSWORD <replaceable>USER</replaceable> <replaceable>OLDPASS</replaceable> <replaceable>NEWPASS</replaceable></title> - -<para> -Change password of <replaceable>USER</replaceable> from <replaceable>OLDPASS</replaceable> to <replaceable>NEWPASS</replaceable>. -</para> - -</refsect2> - -<refsect2> -<title>LOOKUP</title> - -<refsect3> -<title>LOOKUP HOST <replaceable>HOSTNAME</replaceable> [<replaceable>TYPE</replaceable>]</title> - -<para> -Lookup the IP address of the given host with the specified type (netbios suffix). -The type defaults to 0x20 (workstation). -</para> - -</refsect3> - -<refsect3> -<title>LOOKUP LDAP [<replaceable>DOMAIN</replaceable></title> - -<para>Give IP address of LDAP server of specified <replaceable>DOMAIN</replaceable>. Defaults to local domain.</para> - -</refsect3> - -<refsect3> -<title>LOOKUP KDC [<replaceable>REALM</replaceable>]</title> - -<para>Give IP address of KDC for the specified <replaceable>REALM</replaceable>. -Defaults to local realm.</para> - -</refsect3> - -<refsect3> -<title>LOOKUP DC [<replaceable>DOMAIN</replaceable>]</title> - -<para>Give IP's of Domain Controllers for specified <replaceable> -DOMAIN</replaceable>. Defaults to local domain.</para> - -</refsect3> - -<refsect3> -<title>LOOKUP MASTER <replaceable>DOMAIN</replaceable></title> - -<para>Give IP of master browser for specified <replaceable>DOMAIN</replaceable> -or workgroup. Defaults to local domain.</para> - -</refsect3> - -</refsect2> - -<refsect2> -<title>CACHE</title> - -<para>Samba uses a general caching interface called 'gencache'. It -can be controlled using 'NET CACHE'.</para> - -<para>All the timeout parameters support the suffixes: - -<simplelist> -<member>s - Seconds</member> -<member>m - Minutes</member> -<member>h - Hours</member> -<member>d - Days</member> -<member>w - Weeks</member> -</simplelist> - -</para> - -<refsect3> -<title>CACHE ADD <replaceable>key</replaceable> <replaceable>data</replaceable> <replaceable>time-out</replaceable></title> - -<para>Add specified key+data to the cache with the given timeout.</para> - -</refsect3> - -<refsect3> -<title>CACHE DEL <replaceable>key</replaceable></title> - -<para>Delete key from the cache.</para> - -</refsect3> - -<refsect3> -<title>CACHE SET <replaceable>key</replaceable> <replaceable>data</replaceable> <replaceable>time-out</replaceable></title> - -<para>Update data of existing cache entry.</para> - -</refsect3> - -<refsect3> -<title>CACHE SEARCH <replaceable>PATTERN</replaceable></title> - -<para>Search for the specified pattern in the cache data.</para> - -</refsect3> - -<refsect3> -<title>CACHE LIST</title> - -<para> -List all current items in the cache. -</para> - -</refsect3> - -<refsect3> -<title>CACHE FLUSH</title> - -<para>Remove all the current items from the cache.</para> - -</refsect3> - -</refsect2> - -<refsect2> -<title>GETLOCALSID [DOMAIN]</title> - -<para>Print the SID of the specified domain, or if the parameter is -omitted, the SID of the domain the local server is in.</para> - -</refsect2> - -<refsect2> -<title>SETLOCALSID S-1-5-21-x-y-z</title> - -<para>Sets domain sid for the local server to the specified SID.</para> - -</refsect2> - -<refsect2> -<title>MAXRID</title> - -<para>Prints out the highest RID currently in use on the local -server (by the active 'passdb backend'). -</para> - -</refsect2> - -<refsect2> -<title>RPC INFO</title> - -<para>Print information about the domain of the remote server, -such as domain name, domain sid and number of users and groups. -</para> - -</refsect2> - -<refsect2> -<title>[RPC|ADS] TESTJOIN</title> - -<para>Check whether participation in a domain is still valid.</para> - -</refsect2> - -<refsect2> -<title>[RPC|ADS] CHANGETRUSTPW</title> - -<para>Force change of domain trust password.</para> - -</refsect2> - -<refsect2> -<title>RPC TRUSTDOM</title> - -<refsect3> -<title>RPC TRUSTDOM ADD <replaceable>DOMAIN</replaceable></title> - -<para>Add a interdomain trust account for -<replaceable>DOMAIN</replaceable> to the remote server. -</para> - -</refsect3> - -<refsect3> -<title>RPC TRUSTDOM DEL <replaceable>DOMAIM</replaceable></title> - -<para>Remove interdomain trust account for -<replaceable>DOMAIN</replaceable> from the remote server. -</para> - -¬.implemented; - -</refsect3> - -<refsect3> -<title>RPC TRUSTDOM ESTABLISH <replaceable>DOMAIN</replaceable></title> - -<para> -Establish a trust relationship to a trusting domain. -Interdomain account must already be created on the remote PDC. -</para> - -</refsect3> - -<refsect3> -<title>RPC TRUSTDOM REVOKE <replaceable>DOMAIN</replaceable></title> -<para>Abandon relationship to trusted domain</para> - -</refsect3> - -<refsect3> -<title>RPC TRUSTDOM LIST</title> - -<para>List all current interdomain trust relationships.</para> - -</refsect3> - -</refsect2> - -<refsect2> -<title>RPC ABORTSHUTDOWN</title> - -<para>Abort the shutdown of a remote server.</para> - -</refsect2> - -<refsect2> -<title>SHUTDOWN [-t timeout] [-r] [-f] [-C message]</title> - -<para>Shut down the remote server.</para> - -<variablelist> -&net.arg.shutdown; -<varlistentry> -<term>-C message</term> -<listitem><para>Display the specified message on the screen to -announce the shutdown.</para></listitem> -</varlistentry> -</variablelist> - -</refsect2> - -<refsect2> -<title>SAMDUMP</title> - -<para>Print out sam database of remote server. You need -to run this on either a BDC. <!-- -Is that correct? - Jelmer --></para> -</refsect2> - -<refsect2> -<title>VAMPIRE</title> - -<para>Export users, aliases and groups from remote server to -local server. Can only be run an a BDC. -</para> - -</refsect2> - -<refsect2> -<title>GETSID</title> - -<para>Fetch domain SID and store it in the local <filename>secrets.tdb</filename>. </para> - -</refsect2> - -<refsect2> -<title>ADS LEAVE</title> - -<para>Make the remote host leave the domain it is part of. </para> - -</refsect2> - -<refsect2> -<title>ADS STATUS</title> - -<para>Print out status of machine account of the local machine in ADS. -Prints out quite some debug info. Aimed at developers, regular -users should use <command>NET ADS TESTJOIN</command>.</para> - -</refsect2> - -<refsect2> -<title>ADS PRINTER</title> - -<refsect3> -<title>ADS PRINTER INFO [<replaceable>PRINTER</replaceable>] [<replaceable>SERVER</replaceable>]</title> - -<para> -Lookup info for <replaceable>PRINTER</replaceable> on <replaceable>SERVER</replaceable>. The printer name defaults to "*", the -server name defaults to the local host.</para> - -</refsect3> - -<refsect3> -<title>ADS PRINTER PUBLISH <replaceable>PRINTER</replaceable></title> - -<para>Publish specified printer using ADS.</para> - -</refsect3> - -<refsect3> -<title>ADS PRINTER REMOVE <replaceable>PRINTER</replaceable></title> - -<para>Remove specified printer from ADS directory.</para> - -</refsect3> + <variablelist> + <varlistentry> + <term></term> + <listitem><para> + Without any options, the <command>NET TIME</command> command + displays the time on the remote server. + </para></listitem> + </varlistentry> -</refsect2> + <varlistentry> + <term>SYSTEM</term> + <listitem><para> + Displays the time on the remote server in a format ready for /bin/date + </para></listitem> + </varlistentry> -<refsect2> -<title>ADS SEARCH <replaceable>EXPRESSION</replaceable> <replaceable>ATTRIBUTES...</replaceable></title> + <varlistentry> + <term>SET</term> + <listitem><para> + Tries to set the date and time of the local server to that on + the remote server using /bin/date. + </para></listitem> + </varlistentry> -<para>Perform a raw LDAP search on a ADS server and dump the results. The -expression is a standard LDAP search expression, and the -attributes are a list of LDAP fields to show in the results.</para> + <varlistentry> + <term>ZONE</term> + <listitem><para> + Displays the timezone in hours from GMT on the remote computer. + </para></listitem> + </varlistentry> + </variablelist> +</refsect1> -<para>Example: <userinput>net ads search '(objectCategory=group)' sAMAccountName</userinput> -</para> +<refsect1> + <title>RPC</title> -</refsect2> + <para>The <command>NET RPC</command> command allows you to do various + NT4 operations.</para> -<refsect2> -<title>ADS DN <replaceable>DN</replaceable> <replaceable>(attributes)</replaceable></title> + <variablelist> + <varlistentry> + <term>JOIN -U username[%password] [options]</term> + <listitem><para> + Join a domain with specified username and password. Password + will be prompted if none is specified.</para> + </listitem> + </varlistentry> -<para> -Perform a raw LDAP search on a ADS server and dump the results. The -DN standard LDAP DN, and the attributes are a list of LDAP fields -to show in the result. -</para> + <varlistentry> + <term>JOIN [options except -U]</term> + <listitem><para> + to join a domain created in server manager + </para></listitem> + </varlistentry> -<para>Example: <userinput>net ads dn 'CN=administrator,CN=Users,DC=my,DC=domain' SAMAccountName</userinput></para> + <varlistentry> + <term>USER [misc. options] [targets]</term> + <listitem><para> + List users + </para></listitem> + </varlistentry> -</refsect2> + <varlistentry> + <term>USER DELETE <name> [misc options]</term> + <listitem><para> + delete specified user + </para></listitem> + </varlistentry> -<refsect2> -<title>WORKGROUP</title> + <varlistentry> + <term>USER INFO <name> [misc options]</term> + <listitem><para> + list the domain groups of the specified user + </para></listitem> + </varlistentry> -<para>Print out workgroup name for specified kerberos realm.</para> + <varlistentry> + <term>USER ADD <name> [password] [-F user flags] [misc. options</term> + <listitem><para> + Add specified user + </para></listitem> + </varlistentry> -</refsect2> + <varlistentry> + <term>GROUP [misc options] [targets]</term> + <listitem><para> + List user groups + </para></listitem> + </varlistentry> + <varlistentry> + <term>GROUP DELETE <name> [misc. options] [targets]</term> + <listitem><para> + Delete specified group + </para></listitem> + </varlistentry> -<refsect2> -<title>HELP [COMMAND]</title> + <varlistentry> + <term>GROUP ADD <name> [-C comment]</term> + <listitem><para> + Create specified group + </para></listitem> + </varlistentry> -<para>Gives usage information for the specified command.</para> + <varlistentry> + <term>SHARE [misc. options] [targets]</term> + <listitem><para> + enumerates all exported resources (network shares) on target server + </para></listitem> + </varlistentry> -</refsect2> + <varlistentry> + <term>SHARE ADD <name=serverpath> [misc. options] [targets]</term> + <listitem><para> + Adds a share from a server (makes the export active) + </para></listitem> + </varlistentry> + <varlistentry> + <term>SHARE DELETE <sharenam</term> + <listitem><para></para></listitem> + </varlistentry> + </variablelist> </refsect1> <refsect1> @@ -840,7 +339,9 @@ to show in the result. by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed.</para> - <para>The net manpage was written by Jelmer Vernooij.</para> + <para>The original Samba man pages were written by Karl Auer. + The current set of manpages and documentation is maintained + by the Samba Team in the same fashion as the Samba source code.</para> </refsect1> diff --git a/docs/docbook/manpages/nmbd.8.sgml b/docs/docbook/manpages/nmbd.8.sgml index f2b4ac5a05..db920c79a1 100644 --- a/docs/docbook/manpages/nmbd.8.sgml +++ b/docs/docbook/manpages/nmbd.8.sgml @@ -1,7 +1,5 @@ -<!DOCTYPE refentry PUBLIC "-//OASIS//DTD DocBook V4.1//EN" [ -<!ENTITY % globalentities SYSTEM '../global.ent'> %globalentities; -]> -<refentry id="nmbd.8"> +<!DOCTYPE refentry PUBLIC "-//OASIS//DTD DocBook V4.1//EN"> +<refentry id="nmbd"> <refmeta> <refentrytitle>nmbd</refentrytitle> @@ -37,8 +35,7 @@ <refsect1> <title>DESCRIPTION</title> - <para>This program is part of the <citerefentry><refentrytitle>Samba</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>7</manvolnum></citerefentry> suite.</para> + <para>This program is part of the Samba suite.</para> <para><command>nmbd</command> is a server that understands and can reply to NetBIOS over IP name service requests, like @@ -60,8 +57,8 @@ option (see OPTIONS below). Thus <command>nmbd</command> will reply to broadcast queries for its own name(s). Additional names for <command>nmbd</command> to respond on can be set - via parameters in the <citerefentry><refentrytitle>smb.conf</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>5</manvolnum></citerefentry> configuration file.</para> + via parameters in the <ulink url="smb.conf.5.html"><filename> + smb.conf(5)</filename></ulink> configuration file.</para> <para><command>nmbd</command> can also be used as a WINS (Windows Internet Name Server) server. What this basically means @@ -114,27 +111,46 @@ </varlistentry> <varlistentry> + <term>-a</term> + <listitem><para>If this parameter is specified, each new + connection will append log messages to the log file. + This is the default.</para></listitem> + </varlistentry> + + <varlistentry> <term>-i</term> <listitem><para>If this parameter is specified it causes the server to run "interactively", not as a daemon, even if the server is executed on the command line of a shell. Setting this parameter negates the implicit daemon mode when run from the command line. <command>nmbd</command> also logs to standard - output, as if the <constant>-S</constant> parameter had been + output, as if the <command>-S</command> parameter had been given. </para></listitem> </varlistentry> - &stdarg.help; + <varlistentry> + <term>-o</term> + <listitem><para>If this parameter is specified, the + log files will be overwritten when opened. By default, + <command>smbd</command> will append entries to the log + files.</para></listitem> + </varlistentry> + + <varlistentry> + <term>-h</term> + <listitem><para>Prints the help information (usage) + for <command>nmbd</command>.</para></listitem> + </varlistentry> <varlistentry> <term>-H <filename></term> <listitem><para>NetBIOS lmhosts file. The lmhosts file is a list of NetBIOS names to IP addresses that is loaded by the nmbd server and used via the name - resolution mechanism <ulink url="smb.conf.5.html#nameresolveorder"><parameter>name resolve - order</parameter></ulink> described in <citerefentry><refentrytitle>smb.conf</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>5</manvolnum></citerefentry> to resolve any - NetBIOS name queries needed by the server. Note + resolution mechanism <ulink url="smb.conf.5.html#nameresolveorder"> + name resolve order</ulink> described in <ulink + url="smb.conf.5.html"> <filename>smb.conf(5)</filename></ulink> + to resolve any NetBIOS name queries needed by the server. Note that the contents of this file are <emphasis>NOT</emphasis> used by <command>nmbd</command> to answer any name queries. Adding a line to this file affects name NetBIOS resolution @@ -144,13 +160,71 @@ Samba as part of the build process. Common defaults are <filename>/usr/local/samba/lib/lmhosts</filename>, <filename>/usr/samba/lib/lmhosts</filename> or - <filename>/etc/samba/lmhosts</filename>. See the <citerefentry><refentrytitle>lmhosts</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>5</manvolnum></citerefentry> man page for details on the contents of this file.</para></listitem> + <filename>/etc/lmhosts</filename>. See the + <ulink url="lmhosts.5.html"><filename>lmhosts(5)</filename></ulink> + man page for details on the contents of this file.</para></listitem> </varlistentry> - &popt.common.samba; + <varlistentry> + <term>-V</term> + <listitem><para>Prints the version number for + <command>nmbd</command>.</para></listitem> + </varlistentry> + + <varlistentry> + <term>-d <debug level></term> + <listitem><para>debuglevel is an integer + from 0 to 10. The default value if this parameter is + not specified is zero.</para> + + <para>The higher this value, the more detail will + be logged to the log files about the activities of the + server. At level 0, only critical errors and serious + warnings will be logged. Level 1 is a reasonable level for + day to day running - it generates a small amount of + information about operations carried out.</para> + + <para>Levels above 1 will generate considerable amounts + of log data, and should only be used when investigating + a problem. Levels above 3 are designed for use only by developers + and generate HUGE amounts of log data, most of which is extremely + cryptic.</para> + + <para>Note that specifying this parameter here will override + the <ulink url="smb.conf.5.html#loglevel">log level</ulink> + parameter in the <ulink url="smb.conf.5.html"><filename> + smb.conf(5)</filename></ulink> file.</para></listitem> + </varlistentry> <varlistentry> + <term>-l <log directory></term> + <listitem><para>The -l parameter specifies a directory + into which the "log.nmbd" log file will be created + for operational data from the running <command>nmbd</command> + server. The default log directory is compiled into Samba + as part of the build process. Common defaults are <filename> + /usr/local/samba/var/log.nmb</filename>, <filename> + /usr/samba/var/log.nmb</filename> or + <filename>/var/log/log.nmb</filename>. <emphasis>Beware:</emphasis> + If the directory specified does not exist, <command>nmbd</command> + will log to the default debug log location defined at compile time. + </para></listitem> + </varlistentry> + + + <varlistentry> + <term>-n <primary NetBIOS name></term> + <listitem><para>This option allows you to override + the NetBIOS name that Samba uses for itself. This is identical + to setting the <ulink url="smb.conf.5.html#netbiosname"> + NetBIOS name</ulink> parameter in the <ulink url="smb.conf.5.html"> + <filename>smb.conf</filename></ulink> file. However, a command + line setting will take precedence over settings in + <filename>smb.conf</filename>.</para></listitem> + </varlistentry> + + + <varlistentry> <term>-p <UDP port number></term> <listitem><para>UDP port number is a positive integer value. This option changes the default UDP port number (normally 137) @@ -159,6 +233,18 @@ won't need help!</para></listitem> </varlistentry> + <varlistentry> + <term>-s <configuration file></term> + <listitem><para>The default configuration file name + is set at build time, typically as <filename> + /usr/local/samba/lib/smb.conf</filename>, but + this may be changed when Samba is autoconfigured.</para> + + <para>The file specified contains the configuration details + required by the server. See <ulink url="smb.conf.5.html"> + <filename>smb.conf(5)</filename></ulink> for more information. + </para></listitem> + </varlistentry> </variablelist> </refsect1> @@ -172,7 +258,7 @@ <command>inetd</command> meta-daemon, this file must contain suitable startup information for the meta-daemon. See the <ulink - url="install.html">install</ulink> document + url="UNIX_INSTALL.html">UNIX_INSTALL.html</ulink> document for details. </para></listitem> </varlistentry> @@ -185,7 +271,7 @@ <para>If running the server as a daemon at startup, this file will need to contain an appropriate startup sequence for the server. See the <ulink - url="install.html">"How to Install and Test SAMBA"</ulink> document + url="UNIX_INSTALL.html">UNIX_INSTALL.html</ulink> document for details.</para></listitem> </varlistentry> @@ -195,23 +281,21 @@ meta-daemon <command>inetd</command>, this file must contain a mapping of service name (e.g., netbios-ssn) to service port (e.g., 139) and protocol type (e.g., tcp). - See the <ulink url="install.html">"How to Install and Test SAMBA"</ulink> + See the <ulink url="UNIX_INSTALL.html">UNIX_INSTALL.html</ulink> document for details.</para></listitem> </varlistentry> <varlistentry> <term><filename>/usr/local/samba/lib/smb.conf</filename></term> - <listitem><para>This is the default location of - the <citerefentry><refentrytitle>smb.conf</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>5</manvolnum></citerefentry> server - configuration file. Other common places that systems + <listitem><para>This is the default location of the + <ulink url="smb.conf.5.html"><filename>smb.conf</filename></ulink> + server configuration file. Other common places that systems install this file are <filename>/usr/samba/lib/smb.conf</filename> - and <filename>/etc/samba/smb.conf</filename>.</para> + and <filename>/etc/smb.conf</filename>.</para> <para>When run as a WINS server (see the - <ulink url="smb.conf.5.html#WINSSUPPORT"><constant>wins support</constant></ulink> - parameter in the <citerefentry><refentrytitle>smb.conf</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>5</manvolnum></citerefentry> man page), + <ulink url="smb.conf.5.html#WINSSUPPORT">wins support</ulink> + parameter in the <filename>smb.conf(5)</filename> man page), <command>nmbd</command> will store the WINS database in the file <filename>wins.dat</filename> in the <filename>var/locks</filename> directory configured under @@ -219,9 +303,9 @@ <para>If <command>nmbd</command> is acting as a <emphasis> browse master</emphasis> (see the <ulink - url="smb.conf.5.html#LOCALMASTER"><constant>local master</constant></ulink> - parameter in the <citerefentry><refentrytitle>smb.conf</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>5</manvolnum></citerefentry> man page, <command>nmbd</command> + url="smb.conf.5.html#LOCALMASTER">local master</ulink> + parameter in the <filename>smb.conf(5)</filename> man page, + <command>nmbd</command> will store the browsing database in the file <filename>browse.dat </filename> in the <filename>var/locks</filename> directory configured under wherever Samba was configured to install itself. @@ -247,11 +331,10 @@ cause <command>nmbd</command> to dump out its server database in the <filename>log.nmb</filename> file.</para> - <para>The debug log level of nmbd may be raised or lowered - using <citerefentry><refentrytitle>smbcontrol</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>1</manvolnum></citerefentry> (SIGUSR[1|2] signals - are no longer used since Samba 2.2). This is to allow - transient problems to be diagnosed, whilst still running + <para>The debug log level of nmbd may be raised or lowered using + <ulink url="smbcontrol.1.html"><command>smbcontrol(1)</command> + </ulink> (SIGUSR[1|2] signals are no longer used in Samba 2.2). This is + to allow transient problems to be diagnosed, whilst still running at a normally low log level.</para> </refsect1> @@ -265,15 +348,14 @@ <refsect1> <title>SEE ALSO</title> - <para> - <citerefentry><refentrytitle>inetd</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>8</manvolnum></citerefentry>, <citerefentry><refentrytitle>smbd</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>8</manvolnum></citerefentry>, <citerefentry><refentrytitle>smb.conf</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>5</manvolnum></citerefentry>, <citerefentry><refentrytitle>smbclient</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>1</manvolnum></citerefentry>, <citerefentry><refentrytitle>testparm</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>1</manvolnum></citerefentry>, <citerefentry><refentrytitle>testprns</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>1</manvolnum></citerefentry>, and the Internet - RFC's <filename>rfc1001.txt</filename>, <filename>rfc1002.txt</filename>. + <para><command>inetd(8)</command>, <ulink + url="smbd.8.html"><command>smbd(8)</command></ulink>, + <ulink url="smb.conf.5.html"><filename>smb.conf(5)</filename> + </ulink>, <ulink url="smbclient.1.html"><command>smbclient(1) + </command></ulink>, <ulink url="testparm.1.html"><command> + testparm(1)</command></ulink>, <ulink url="testprns.1.html"> + <command>testprns(1)</command></ulink>, and the Internet RFC's + <filename>rfc1001.txt</filename>, <filename>rfc1002.txt</filename>. In addition the CIFS (formerly SMB) specification is available as a link from the Web page <ulink url="http://samba.org/cifs/"> http://samba.org/cifs/</ulink>.</para> @@ -289,11 +371,11 @@ <para>The original Samba man pages were written by Karl Auer. The man page sources were converted to YODL format (another - excellent piece of Open Source software, available at <ulink url="ftp://ftp.icce.rug.nl/pub/unix/"> + excellent piece of Open Source software, available at + <ulink url="ftp://ftp.icce.rug.nl/pub/unix/"> ftp://ftp.icce.rug.nl/pub/unix/</ulink>) and updated for the Samba 2.0 release by Jeremy Allison. The conversion to DocBook for - Samba 2.2 was done by Gerald Carter. The conversion to DocBook - XML 4.2 for Samba 3.0 was done by Alexander Bokovoy.</para> + Samba 2.2 was done by Gerald Carter</para> </refsect1> </refentry> diff --git a/docs/docbook/manpages/nmblookup.1.sgml b/docs/docbook/manpages/nmblookup.1.sgml index 176050b9c8..33ae631ed9 100644 --- a/docs/docbook/manpages/nmblookup.1.sgml +++ b/docs/docbook/manpages/nmblookup.1.sgml @@ -1,6 +1,4 @@ -<!DOCTYPE refentry PUBLIC "-//OASIS//DTD DocBook V4.1//EN" [ -<!ENTITY % globalentities SYSTEM '../global.ent'> %globalentities; -]> +<!DOCTYPE refentry PUBLIC "-//OASIS//DTD DocBook V4.1//EN"> <refentry id="nmblookup"> <refmeta> @@ -38,8 +36,8 @@ <refsect1> <title>DESCRIPTION</title> - <para>This tool is part of the <citerefentry><refentrytitle>Samba</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>7</manvolnum></citerefentry> suite.</para> + <para>This tool is part of the <ulink url="samba.7.html"> + Samba</ulink> suite.</para> <para><command>nmblookup</command> is used to query NetBIOS names and map them to IP addresses in a network using NetBIOS over TCP/IP @@ -68,7 +66,7 @@ query to a machine running a WINS server and the user wishes to query the names in the WINS server. If this bit is unset the normal (broadcast responding) NetBIOS processing code - on a machine is used instead. See RFC1001, RFC1002 for details. + on a machine is used instead. See rfc1001, rfc1002 for details. </para></listitem> </varlistentry> @@ -88,8 +86,8 @@ where it ignores the source port of the requesting packet and only replies to UDP port 137. Unfortunately, on most UNIX systems root privilege is needed to bind to this port, and - in addition, if the <citerefentry><refentrytitle>nmbd</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>8</manvolnum></citerefentry> daemon is running on this machine it also binds to this port. + in addition, if the <ulink url="nmbd.8.html">nmbd(8)</ulink> + daemon is running on this machine it also binds to this port. </para></listitem> </varlistentry> @@ -103,8 +101,12 @@ - &popt.common.connection; - &stdarg.help; + <varlistentry> + <term>-h</term> + <listitem><para>Print a help (usage) message.</para></listitem> + </varlistentry> + + <varlistentry> <term>-B <broadcast address></term> @@ -113,8 +115,7 @@ query to the broadcast address of the network interfaces as either auto-detected or defined in the <ulink url="smb.conf.5.html#INTERFACES"><parameter>interfaces</parameter> - </ulink> parameter of the <citerefentry><refentrytitle>smb.conf</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>5</manvolnum></citerefentry> file. + </ulink> parameter of the <filename>smb.conf (5)</filename> file. </para></listitem> </varlistentry> @@ -129,8 +130,48 @@ </varlistentry> - &popt.common.samba; + <varlistentry> + <term>-d <debuglevel></term> + <listitem><para>debuglevel is an integer from 0 to 10.</para> + <para>The default value if this parameter is not specified + is zero.</para> + + <para>The higher this value, the more detail will be logged + about the activities of <command>nmblookup</command>. At level + 0, only critical errors and serious warnings will be logged.</para> + + <para>Levels above 1 will generate considerable amounts of + log data, and should only be used when investigating a problem. + Levels above 3 are designed for use only by developers and + generate HUGE amounts of data, most of which is extremely cryptic.</para> + + <para>Note that specifying this parameter here will override + the <ulink url="smb.conf.5.html#LOGLEVEL"><parameter> + log level</parameter></ulink> parameter in the <filename> + smb.conf(5)</filename> file.</para></listitem> + </varlistentry> + + <varlistentry> + <term>-s <smb.conf></term> + <listitem><para>This parameter specifies the pathname to + the Samba configuration file, <ulink url="smb.conf.5.html"> + smb.conf(5)</ulink>. This file controls all aspects of + the Samba setup on the machine.</para></listitem> + </varlistentry> + + <varlistentry> + <term>-i <scope></term> + <listitem><para>This specifies a NetBIOS scope that + <command>nmblookup</command> will use to communicate with when + generating NetBIOS names. For details on the use of NetBIOS + scopes, see rfc1001.txt and rfc1002.txt. NetBIOS scopes are + <emphasis>very</emphasis> rarely used, only set this parameter + if you are the system administrator in charge of all the + NetBIOS systems you communicate with.</para></listitem> + </varlistentry> + + <varlistentry> <term>-T</term> <listitem><para>This causes any IP addresses found in the @@ -157,7 +198,7 @@ <listitem><para>This is the NetBIOS name being queried. Depending upon the previous options this may be a NetBIOS name or IP address. If a NetBIOS name then the different name types may be specified - by appending '#<type>' to the name. This name may also be + by appending '#<type>' to the name. This name may also be '*', which will return all registered names within a broadcast area.</para></listitem> </varlistentry> @@ -170,8 +211,8 @@ <para><command>nmblookup</command> can be used to query a WINS server (in the same way <command>nslookup</command> is - used to query DNS servers). To query a WINS server, <command>nmblookup</command> - must be called like this:</para> + used to query DNS servers). To query a WINS server, + <command>nmblookup</command> must be called like this:</para> <para><command>nmblookup -U server -R 'name'</command></para> @@ -192,10 +233,10 @@ <refsect1> <title>SEE ALSO</title> - <para><citerefentry><refentrytitle>nmbd</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>8</manvolnum></citerefentry>, <citerefentry><refentrytitle>samba</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>7</manvolnum></citerefentry>, and <citerefentry><refentrytitle>smb.conf</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>5</manvolnum></citerefentry>.</para> + <para><ulink url="nmbd.8.html"><command>nmbd(8)</command></ulink>, + <ulink url="samba.7.html">samba(7)</ulink>, and <ulink + url="smb.conf.5.html">smb.conf(5)</ulink> + </para> </refsect1> <refsect1> @@ -208,11 +249,11 @@ <para>The original Samba man pages were written by Karl Auer. The man page sources were converted to YODL format (another - excellent piece of Open Source software, available at <ulink url="ftp://ftp.icce.rug.nl/pub/unix/"> + excellent piece of Open Source software, available at + <ulink url="ftp://ftp.icce.rug.nl/pub/unix/"> ftp://ftp.icce.rug.nl/pub/unix/</ulink>) and updated for the Samba 2.0 release by Jeremy Allison. The conversion to DocBook for - Samba 2.2 was done by Gerald Carter. The conversion to DocBook - XML 4.2 for Samba 3.0 was done by Alexander Bokovoy.</para> + Samba 2.2 was done by Gerald Carter</para> </refsect1> </refentry> diff --git a/docs/docbook/manpages/ntlm_auth.1.sgml b/docs/docbook/manpages/ntlm_auth.1.sgml deleted file mode 100644 index 42a362cd41..0000000000 --- a/docs/docbook/manpages/ntlm_auth.1.sgml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,127 +0,0 @@ -<!DOCTYPE refentry PUBLIC "-//OASIS//DTD DocBook V4.1//EN" [ -<!ENTITY % globalentities SYSTEM '../global.ent'> %globalentities; -]> -<refentry id="ntlm-auth.1"> - -<refmeta> - <refentrytitle>ntlm_auth</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>1</manvolnum> -</refmeta> - - -<refnamediv> - <refname>ntlm_auth</refname> - <refpurpose>tool to allow external access to Winbind's NTLM authentication function</refpurpose> -</refnamediv> - -<refsynopsisdiv> - <cmdsynopsis> - <command>ntlm_auth</command> - <arg choice="opt">-d debuglevel</arg> - <arg choice="opt">-l logfile</arg> - <arg choice="opt">-s <smb config file></arg> - </cmdsynopsis> -</refsynopsisdiv> - -<refsect1> - <title>DESCRIPTION</title> - - <para>This tool is part of the <citerefentry><refentrytitle>Samba</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>7</manvolnum></citerefentry> suite.</para> - - <para><command>ntlm_auth</command> is a helper utility that authenticates - users using NT/LM authentication. It returns 0 if the users is authenticated - successfully and 1 if access was denied. ntlm_auth uses winbind to access - the user and authentication data for a domain. This utility - is only to be used by other programs (currently squid). - </para> -</refsect1> - - -<refsect1> - <title>OPTIONS</title> - - <variablelist> - <varlistentry> - <term>--helper-protocol=PROTO</term> - <listitem><para> - Operate as a stdio-based helper - </para></listitem> - </varlistentry> - - <varlistentry> - <term>--username=USERNAME</term> - <listitem><para> - Specify username of user to authenticate - </para></listitem> - </varlistentry> - - <varlistentry> - <term>--domain=DOMAIN</term> - <listitem><para> - Specify domain of user to authenticate - </para></listitem> - </varlistentry> - - <varlistentry> - <term>--workstation=WORKSTATION</term> - <listitem><para> - Specify the workstation the user authenticated from - </para></listitem> - </varlistentry> - - <varlistentry> - <term>--challenge=STRING</term> - <listitem><para>challenge (HEX encoded)</para></listitem> - </varlistentry> - - <varlistentry> - <term>--lm-response=RESPONSE</term> - <listitem><para>LM Response to the challenge (HEX encoded)</para></listitem> - </varlistentry> - - <varlistentry> - <term>--nt-response=RESPONSE</term> - <listitem><para>NT or NTLMv2 Response to the challenge (HEX encoded)</para></listitem> - </varlistentry> - - <varlistentry> - <term>--password=PASSWORD</term> - <listitem><para>User's plaintext password</para></listitem> - </varlistentry> - - <varlistentry> - <term>--request-lm-key</term> - <listitem><para>Retreive LM session key</para></listitem> - </varlistentry> - - <varlistentry> - <term>--request-nt-key</term> - <listitem><para>Request NT key</para></listitem> - </varlistentry> - - &popt.common.samba; - &stdarg.help; - - </variablelist> -</refsect1> - -<refsect1> - <title>VERSION</title> - - <para>This man page is correct for version 3.0 of the Samba - suite.</para> -</refsect1> - -<refsect1> - <title>AUTHOR</title> - - <para>The original Samba software and related utilities - were created by Andrew Tridgell. Samba is now developed - by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar - to the way the Linux kernel is developed.</para> - - <para>The ntlm_auth manpage was written by Jelmer Vernooij.</para> -</refsect1> - -</refentry> diff --git a/docs/docbook/manpages/pdbedit.8.sgml b/docs/docbook/manpages/pdbedit.8.sgml index fc9a212c19..3454b7d7fa 100644 --- a/docs/docbook/manpages/pdbedit.8.sgml +++ b/docs/docbook/manpages/pdbedit.8.sgml @@ -1,7 +1,7 @@ <!DOCTYPE refentry PUBLIC "-//OASIS//DTD DocBook V4.1//EN" [ <!ENTITY % globalentities SYSTEM '../global.ent'> %globalentities; ]> -<refentry id="pdbedit.8"> +<refentry id="pdbedit"> <refmeta> <refentrytitle>pdbedit</refentrytitle> @@ -33,19 +33,18 @@ <arg choice="opt">-e passdb-backend</arg> <arg choice="opt">-g</arg> <arg choice="opt">-b passdb-backend</arg> - <arg choice="opt">-g</arg> <arg choice="opt">-d debuglevel</arg> <arg choice="opt">-s configfile</arg> <arg choice="opt">-P account-policy</arg> - <arg choice="opt">-C value</arg> + <arg choice="opt">-V value</arg> </cmdsynopsis> </refsynopsisdiv> <refsect1> <title>DESCRIPTION</title> - <para>This tool is part of the <citerefentry><refentrytitle>Samba</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>7</manvolnum></citerefentry> suite.</para> + <para>This tool is part of the <ulink url="samba.7.html"> + Samba</ulink> suite.</para> <para>The pdbedit program is used to manage the users accounts stored in the sam database and can only be run by root.</para> @@ -69,11 +68,12 @@ present in the users database. This option prints a list of user/uid pairs separated by the ':' character.</para> + <para>Example: <command>pdbedit -l</command></para> - <para><screen> -sorce:500:Simo Sorce -samba:45:Test User -</screen></para> + <para><programlisting> + sorce:500:Simo Sorce + samba:45:Test User + </programlisting></para> </listitem> </varlistentry> @@ -86,26 +86,26 @@ samba:45:Test User out the account fields in a descriptive format.</para> <para>Example: <command>pdbedit -l -v</command></para> - <para><screen> ---------------- -username: sorce -user ID/Group: 500/500 -user RID/GRID: 2000/2001 -Full Name: Simo Sorce -Home Directory: \\BERSERKER\sorce -HomeDir Drive: H: -Logon Script: \\BERSERKER\netlogon\sorce.bat -Profile Path: \\BERSERKER\profile ---------------- -username: samba -user ID/Group: 45/45 -user RID/GRID: 1090/1091 -Full Name: Test User -Home Directory: \\BERSERKER\samba -HomeDir Drive: -Logon Script: -Profile Path: \\BERSERKER\profile -</screen></para> + <para><programlisting> + --------------- + username: sorce + user ID/Group: 500/500 + user RID/GRID: 2000/2001 + Full Name: Simo Sorce + Home Directory: \\BERSERKER\sorce + HomeDir Drive: H: + Logon Script: \\BERSERKER\netlogon\sorce.bat + Profile Path: \\BERSERKER\profile + --------------- + username: samba + user ID/Group: 45/45 + user RID/GRID: 1090/1091 + Full Name: Test User + Home Directory: \\BERSERKER\samba + HomeDir Drive: + Logon Script: + Profile Path: \\BERSERKER\profile + </programlisting></para> </listitem> </varlistentry> @@ -116,15 +116,14 @@ Profile Path: \\BERSERKER\profile <listitem><para>This option sets the "smbpasswd" listing format. It will make pdbedit list the users in the database, printing out the account fields in a format compatible with the - <filename>smbpasswd</filename> file format. (see the - <citerefentry><refentrytitle>smbpasswd</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>5</manvolnum></citerefentry> for details)</para> + <filename>smbpasswd</filename> file format. (see the <ulink + url="smbpasswd.5.html"><filename>smbpasswd(5)</filename></ulink> for details)</para> <para>Example: <command>pdbedit -l -w</command></para> - <screen> -sorce:500:508818B733CE64BEAAD3B435B51404EE:D2A2418EFC466A8A0F6B1DBB5C3DB80C:[UX ]:LCT-00000000: -samba:45:0F2B255F7B67A7A9AAD3B435B51404EE:BC281CE3F53B6A5146629CD4751D3490:[UX ]:LCT-3BFA1E8D: -</screen> + <para><programlisting> + sorce:500:508818B733CE64BEAAD3B435B51404EE:D2A2418EFC466A8A0F6B1DBB5C3DB80C:[UX ]:LCT-00000000: + samba:45:0F2B255F7B67A7A9AAD3B435B51404EE:BC281CE3F53B6A5146629CD4751D3490:[UX ]:LCT-3BFA1E8D: + </programlisting></para> </listitem> </varlistentry> @@ -138,6 +137,8 @@ samba:45:0F2B255F7B67A7A9AAD3B435B51404EE:BC281CE3F53B6A5146629CD4751D3490:[UX operations.</para> </listitem> </varlistentry> + + <varlistentry> <term>-f fullname</term> @@ -162,6 +163,7 @@ samba:45:0F2B255F7B67A7A9AAD3B435B51404EE:BC281CE3F53B6A5146629CD4751D3490:[UX </listitem> </varlistentry> + <varlistentry> <term>-D drive</term> <listitem><para>This option can be used while adding or @@ -206,10 +208,9 @@ samba:45:0F2B255F7B67A7A9AAD3B435B51404EE:BC281CE3F53B6A5146629CD4751D3490:[UX ask for the password to be used.</para> <para>Example: <command>pdbedit -a -u sorce</command> -<programlisting>new password: -retype new password -</programlisting> -</para> + <programlisting>new password: + retype new password</programlisting> + </para> </listitem> </varlistentry> @@ -270,18 +271,7 @@ retype new password <listitem><para>If you specify <parameter>-g</parameter>, then <parameter>-i in-backend -e out-backend</parameter> applies to the group mapping instead of the user database. - - <para>This option will ease migration from one passdb backend to - another and will ease backing up.</para> - - </listitem> - </varlistentry> - - <varlistentry> - <term>-g</term> - <listitem><para>If you specify <parameter>-g</parameter>, - then <parameter>-i in-backend -e out-backend</parameter> - applies to the group mapping instead of the user database. + </para> <para>This option will ease migration from one passdb backend to another and will ease backing up.</para> @@ -305,30 +295,31 @@ retype new password maximum password age and bad lockout attempt.</para> <para>Example: <command>pdbedit -P "bad lockout attempt"</command></para> -<para><programlisting> -account policy value for bad lockout attempt is 0 -</programlisting></para> + <para><programlisting> + account policy value for bad lockout attempt is 0 + </programlisting></para> </listitem> </varlistentry> <varlistentry> - <term>-C account-policy-value</term> + <term>-V account-policy-value</term> <listitem><para>Sets an account policy to a specified value. This option may only be used in conjunction with the <parameter>-P</parameter> option. </para> - <para>Example: <command>pdbedit -P "bad lockout attempt" -C 3</command></para> -<para><programlisting> -account policy value for bad lockout attempt was 0 -account policy value for bad lockout attempt is now 3 -</programlisting></para> + <para>Example: <command>pdbedit -P "bad lockout attempt" -V 3</command></para> + <para><programlisting> + account policy value for bad lockout attempt was 0 + account policy value for bad lockout attempt is now 3 + </programlisting></para> </listitem> </varlistentry> + &stdarg.debuglevel; &stdarg.help; - &popt.common.samba; + &stdarg.configfile; </variablelist> </refsect1> @@ -350,9 +341,9 @@ account policy value for bad lockout attempt is now 3 <refsect1> <title>SEE ALSO</title> - <para><citerefentry><refentrytitle>smbpasswd</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>5</manvolnum></citerefentry>, <citerefentry><refentrytitle>samba</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>7</manvolnum></citerefentry></para> + <para><ulink url="smbpasswd.8.html">smbpasswd(8)</ulink>, + <ulink url="samba.7.html">samba(7)</ulink> + </para> </refsect1> <refsect1> @@ -365,11 +356,11 @@ account policy value for bad lockout attempt is now 3 <para>The original Samba man pages were written by Karl Auer. The man page sources were converted to YODL format (another - excellent piece of Open Source software, available at <ulink url="ftp://ftp.icce.rug.nl/pub/unix/"> + excellent piece of Open Source software, available at + <ulink url="ftp://ftp.icce.rug.nl/pub/unix/"> ftp://ftp.icce.rug.nl/pub/unix/</ulink>) and updated for the Samba 2.0 release by Jeremy Allison. The conversion to DocBook for - Samba 2.2 was done by Gerald Carter. The conversion to DocBook - XML 4.2 for Samba 3.0 was done by Alexander Bokovoy.</para> + Samba 2.2 was done by Gerald Carter</para> </refsect1> </refentry> diff --git a/docs/docbook/manpages/rpcclient.1.sgml b/docs/docbook/manpages/rpcclient.1.sgml index 789ed6b5cf..10e0ff438d 100644 --- a/docs/docbook/manpages/rpcclient.1.sgml +++ b/docs/docbook/manpages/rpcclient.1.sgml @@ -1,7 +1,7 @@ <!DOCTYPE refentry PUBLIC "-//OASIS//DTD DocBook V4.1//EN" [ <!ENTITY % globalentities SYSTEM '../global.ent'> %globalentities; ]> -<refentry id="rpcclient.1"> +<refentry id="rpcclient"> <refmeta> <refentrytitle>rpcclient</refentrytitle> @@ -36,8 +36,8 @@ <refsect1> <title>DESCRIPTION</title> - <para>This tool is part of the <citerefentry><refentrytitle>Samba</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>7</manvolnum></citerefentry> suite.</para> + <para>This tool is part of the <ulink url="samba.7.html"> + Samba</ulink> suite.</para> <para><command>rpcclient</command> is a utility initially developed to test MS-RPC functionality in Samba itself. It has undergone @@ -56,9 +56,28 @@ <listitem><para>NetBIOS name of Server to which to connect. The server can be any SMB/CIFS server. The name is resolved using the <ulink url="smb.conf.5.html#NAMERESOLVEORDER"> - <parameter>name resolve order</parameter></ulink> line from <citerefentry><refentrytitle>smb.conf</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>5</manvolnum></citerefentry>.</para></listitem> - </varlistentry> + <parameter>name resolve order</parameter></ulink> line from + <filename>smb.conf(5)</filename>.</para></listitem> + </varlistentry> + + + <varlistentry> + <term>-A|--authfile=filename</term> + <listitem><para>This option allows + you to specify a file from which to read the username and + password used in the connection. The format of the file is + </para> + + <para><programlisting> + username = <value> + password = <value> + domain = <value> + </programlisting></para> + + <para>Make certain that the permissions on the file restrict + access from unwanted users. </para></listitem> + </varlistentry> + <varlistentry> @@ -66,8 +85,13 @@ <listitem><para>execute semicolon separated commands (listed below)) </para></listitem> </varlistentry> - + + + + &stdarg.debuglevel; + &stdarg.help; + <varlistentry> <term>-I IP-address</term> <listitem><para><replaceable>IP address</replaceable> is the address of the server to connect to. @@ -86,133 +110,117 @@ above. </para></listitem> </varlistentry> - &popt.common.samba; - &popt.common.credentials; - &popt.common.connection; - &stdarg.help; - </variablelist> -</refsect1> + + <varlistentry> + <term>-l|--logfile=logbasename</term> + <listitem><para>File name for log/debug files. The extension + <constant>'.client'</constant> will be appended. The log file is + never removed by the client. + </para></listitem> + </varlistentry> -<refsect1> - <title>COMMANDS</title> + + <varlistentry> + <term>-N|--nopass</term> + <listitem><para>instruct <command>rpcclient</command> not to ask + for a password. By default, <command>rpcclient</command> will + prompt for a password. See also the <parameter>-U</parameter> + option.</para></listitem> + </varlistentry> - <refsect2> - <title>LSARPC</title> + + <varlistentry> + <term>-s|--conf=smb.conf</term> + <listitem><para>Specifies the location of the all-important + <filename>smb.conf</filename> file. </para></listitem> + </varlistentry> - <variablelist> - <varlistentry><term>lsaquery</term><listitem><para>Query info policy</para></listitem></varlistentry> + + + <varlistentry> + <term>-U|--user=username[%password]</term> + <listitem><para>Sets the SMB username or username and password. </para> - <varlistentry><term>lookupsids</term><listitem><para>Resolve a list - of SIDs to usernames. - </para></listitem></varlistentry> + <para>If %password is not specified, the user will be prompted. The + client will first check the <envar>USER</envar> environment variable, then the + <envar>LOGNAME</envar> variable and if either exists, the + string is uppercased. If these environmental variables are not + found, the username <constant>GUEST</constant> is used. </para> + + <para>A third option is to use a credentials file which + contains the plaintext of the username and password. This + option is mainly provided for scripts where the admin does not + wish to pass the credentials on the command line or via environment + variables. If this method is used, make certain that the permissions + on the file restrict access from unwanted users. See the + <parameter>-A</parameter> for more details. </para> - <varlistentry><term>lookupnames</term><listitem><para>Resolve a list - of usernames to SIDs. - </para></listitem></varlistentry> + <para>Be cautious about including passwords in scripts. Also, on + many systems the command line of a running process may be seen + via the <command>ps</command> command. To be safe always allow + <command>rpcclient</command> to prompt for a password and type + it in directly. </para></listitem> + </varlistentry> - <varlistentry><term>enumtrusts</term><listitem><para>Enumerate trusted domains</para></listitem></varlistentry> - - <varlistentry><term>enumprivs</term><listitem><para>Enumerate privileges</para></listitem></varlistentry> - - <varlistentry><term>getdispname</term><listitem><para>Get the privilege name</para></listitem></varlistentry> - - <varlistentry><term>lsaenumsid</term><listitem><para>Enumerate the LSA SIDS</para></listitem></varlistentry> - - <varlistentry><term>lsaenumprivsaccount</term><listitem><para>Enumerate the privileges of an SID</para></listitem></varlistentry> - - <varlistentry><term>lsaenumacctrights</term><listitem><para>Enumerate the rights of an SID</para></listitem></varlistentry> - - <varlistentry><term>lsaenumacctwithright</term><listitem><para>Enumerate accounts with a right</para></listitem></varlistentry> - - <varlistentry><term>lsaaddacctrights</term><listitem><para>Add rights to an account</para></listitem></varlistentry> - - <varlistentry><term>lsaremoveacctrights</term><listitem><para>Remove rights from an account</para></listitem></varlistentry> - - <varlistentry><term>lsalookupprivvalue</term><listitem><para>Get a privilege value given its name</para></listitem></varlistentry> - - <varlistentry><term>lsaquerysecobj</term><listitem><para>Query LSA security object</para></listitem></varlistentry> - - </variablelist> - </refsect2> - - <refsect2> - <title>LSARPC-DS</title> - - <variablelist> - <varlistentry><term>dsroledominfo</term><listitem><para>Get Primary Domain Information</para></listitem></varlistentry> - </variablelist> - - <para> </para> - - <para><emphasis>DFS</emphasis></para> - <variablelist> - <varlistentry><term>dfsexist</term><listitem><para>Query DFS support</para></listitem></varlistentry> - <varlistentry><term>dfsadd</term><listitem><para>Add a DFS share</para></listitem></varlistentry> - <varlistentry><term>dfsremove</term><listitem><para>Remove a DFS share</para></listitem></varlistentry> - <varlistentry><term>dfsgetinfo</term><listitem><para>Query DFS share info</para></listitem></varlistentry> - <varlistentry><term>dfsenum</term><listitem><para>Enumerate dfs shares</para></listitem></varlistentry> - </variablelist> - - </refsect2> - - <refsect2> - <title>REG</title> - <variablelist> - <varlistentry><term>shutdown</term><listitem><para>Remote Shutdown</para></listitem></varlistentry> - <varlistentry><term>abortshutdown</term><listitem><para>Abort Shutdown</para></listitem></varlistentry> + + + + <varlistentry> + <term>-W|--workgroup=domain</term> + <listitem><para>Set the SMB domain of the username. This + overrides the default domain which is the domain defined in + smb.conf. If the domain specified is the same as the server's NetBIOS name, + it causes the client to log on using the server's local SAM (as + opposed to the Domain SAM). </para></listitem> + </varlistentry> + + </variablelist> +</refsect1> - </refsect2> - <refsect2> - <title>SRVSVC</title> +<refsect1> + <title>COMMANDS</title> - <variablelist> - <varlistentry><term>srvinfo</term><listitem><para>Server query info</para></listitem></varlistentry> + <para><emphasis>LSARPC</emphasis></para> + <itemizedlist> + <listitem><para><command>lsaquery</command></para></listitem> - <varlistentry><term>netshareenum</term><listitem><para>Enumerate shares</para></listitem></varlistentry> - - <varlistentry><term>netfileenum</term><listitem><para>Enumerate open files</para></listitem></varlistentry> + <listitem><para><command>lookupsids</command> - Resolve a list + of SIDs to usernames. + </para></listitem> - <varlistentry><term>netremotetod</term><listitem><para>Fetch remote time of day</para></listitem></varlistentry> + <listitem><para><command>lookupnames</command> - Resolve a list + of usernames to SIDs. + </para></listitem> - </variablelist> + <listitem><para><command>enumtrusts</command></para></listitem> + </itemizedlist> + <para> </para> + - </refsect2> - <refsect2> - <title>SAMR</title> + <para><emphasis>SAMR</emphasis></para> + <itemizedlist> + <listitem><para><command>queryuser</command></para></listitem> + <listitem><para><command>querygroup</command></para></listitem> + <listitem><para><command>queryusergroups</command></para></listitem> + <listitem><para><command>querygroupmem</command></para></listitem> + <listitem><para><command>queryaliasmem</command></para></listitem> + <listitem><para><command>querydispinfo</command></para></listitem> + <listitem><para><command>querydominfo</command></para></listitem> + <listitem><para><command>enumdomgroups</command></para></listitem> + </itemizedlist> + <para> </para> - <variablelist> - <varlistentry><term>queryuser</term><listitem><para>Query user info</para></listitem></varlistentry> - <varlistentry><term>querygroup</term><listitem><para>Query group info</para></listitem></varlistentry> - <varlistentry><term>queryusergroups</term><listitem><para>Query user groups</para></listitem></varlistentry> - <varlistentry><term>querygroupmem</term><listitem><para>Query group membership</para></listitem></varlistentry> - <varlistentry><term>queryaliasmem</term><listitem><para>Query alias membership</para></listitem></varlistentry> - <varlistentry><term>querydispinfo</term><listitem><para>Query display info</para></listitem></varlistentry> - <varlistentry><term>querydominfo</term><listitem><para>Query domain info</para></listitem></varlistentry> - <varlistentry><term>enumdomusers</term><listitem><para>Enumerate domain users</para></listitem></varlistentry> - <varlistentry><term>enumdomgroups</term><listitem><para>Enumerate domain groups</para></listitem></varlistentry> - <varlistentry><term>enumalsgroups</term><listitem><para>Enumerate alias groups</para></listitem></varlistentry> - <varlistentry><term>createdomuser</term><listitem><para>Create domain user</para></listitem></varlistentry> - <varlistentry><term>samlookupnames</term><listitem><para>Look up names</para></listitem></varlistentry> - <varlistentry><term>samlookuprids</term><listitem><para>Look up names</para></listitem></varlistentry> - <varlistentry><term>deletedomuser</term><listitem><para>Delete domain user</para></listitem></varlistentry> - <varlistentry><term>samquerysecobj</term><listitem><para>Query SAMR security object</para></listitem></varlistentry> - <varlistentry><term>getdompwinfo</term><listitem><para>Retrieve domain password info</para></listitem></varlistentry> - <varlistentry><term>lookupdomain</term><listitem><para>Look up domain</para></listitem></varlistentry> - </variablelist> - </refsect2> - <refsect2> - <title>SPOOLSS</title> + <para><emphasis>SPOOLSS</emphasis></para> - <variablelist> - <varlistentry><term>adddriver <arch> <config></term> - <listitem><para> - Execute an AddPrinterDriver() RPC to install the printer driver + <itemizedlist> + <listitem><para><command>adddriver <arch> <config></command> + - Execute an AddPrinterDriver() RPC to install the printer driver information on the server. Note that the driver files should already exist in the directory returned by <command>getdriverdir</command>. Possible values for @@ -221,16 +229,16 @@ The <parameter>config</parameter> parameter is defined as follows: </para> -<para><programlisting> -Long Printer Name:\ -Driver File Name:\ -Data File Name:\ -Config File Name:\ -Help File Name:\ -Language Monitor Name:\ -Default Data Type:\ -Comma Separated list of Files -</programlisting></para> + <para><programlisting> + Long Printer Name:\ + Driver File Name:\ + Data File Name:\ + Config File Name:\ + Help File Name:\ + Language Monitor Name:\ + Default Data Type:\ + Comma Separated list of Files + </programlisting></para> <para>Any empty fields should be enter as the string "NULL". </para> @@ -239,174 +247,133 @@ Comma Separated list of Files use of a bi-directional link for communication. This field should be "NULL". On a remote NT print server, the Print Monitor for a driver must already be installed prior to adding the driver or - else the RPC will fail. </para></listitem></varlistentry> - - <varlistentry><term>addprinter <printername> - <sharename> <drivername> <port></term> - <listitem><para> - Add a printer on the remote server. This printer + else the RPC will fail. </para></listitem> + + + + + <listitem><para><command>addprinter <printername> + <sharename> <drivername> <port></command> + - Add a printer on the remote server. This printer will be automatically shared. Be aware that the printer driver must already be installed on the server (see <command>adddriver</command>) and the <parameter>port</parameter>must be a valid port name (see <command>enumports</command>.</para> - </listitem></varlistentry> + </listitem> - <varlistentry><term>deldriver</term><listitem><para>Delete the + <listitem><para><command>deldriver</command> - Delete the specified printer driver for all architectures. This does not delete the actual driver files from the server, only the entry from the server's list of drivers. - </para></listitem></varlistentry> + </para></listitem> - <varlistentry><term>enumdata</term><listitem><para>Enumerate all + <listitem><para><command>enumdata</command> - Enumerate all printer setting data stored on the server. On Windows NT clients, these values are stored in the registry, while Samba servers store them in the printers TDB. This command corresponds to the MS Platform SDK GetPrinterData() function (* This - command is currently unimplemented).</para></listitem></varlistentry> + command is currently unimplemented).</para></listitem> + - <varlistentry><term>enumdataex</term><listitem><para>Enumerate printer data for a key</para></listitem></varlistentry> - <varlistentry><term>enumjobs <printer></term> - <listitem><para>List the jobs and status of a given printer. + <listitem><para><command>enumjobs <printer></command> + - List the jobs and status of a given printer. This command corresponds to the MS Platform SDK EnumJobs() - function </listitem></varlistentry> + function (* This command is currently unimplemented).</para></listitem> + + - <varlistentry><term>enumkey</term><listitem><para>Enumerate printer keys</para></listitem></varlistentry> - <varlistentry><term>enumports [level]</term> - <listitem><para> - Executes an EnumPorts() call using the specified + <listitem><para><command>enumports [level]</command> + - Executes an EnumPorts() call using the specified info level. Currently only info levels 1 and 2 are supported. - </para></listitem></varlistentry> + </para></listitem> - <varlistentry><term>enumdrivers [level]</term> - <listitem><para> - Execute an EnumPrinterDrivers() call. This lists the various installed + <listitem><para><command>enumdrivers [level]</command> + - Execute an EnumPrinterDrivers() call. This lists the various installed printer drivers for all architectures. Refer to the MS Platform SDK documentation for more details of the various flags and calling - options. Currently supported info levels are 1, 2, and 3.</para></listitem></varlistentry> + options. Currently supported info levels are 1, 2, and 3.</para></listitem> - <varlistentry><term>enumprinters [level]</term> - <listitem><para>Execute an EnumPrinters() call. This lists the various installed + <listitem><para><command>enumprinters [level]</command> + - Execute an EnumPrinters() call. This lists the various installed and share printers. Refer to the MS Platform SDK documentation for more details of the various flags and calling options. Currently - supported info levels are 0, 1, and 2.</para></listitem></varlistentry> + supported info levels are 0, 1, and 2.</para></listitem> - <varlistentry><term>getdata <printername> <valuename;></term> - <listitem><para>Retrieve the data for a given printer setting. See + <listitem><para><command>getdata <printername></command> + - Retrieve the data for a given printer setting. See the <command>enumdata</command> command for more information. This command corresponds to the GetPrinterData() MS Platform - SDK function. </para></listitem></varlistentry> + SDK function (* This command is currently unimplemented). </para></listitem> - <varlistentry><term>getdataex</term><listitem><para>Get printer driver data with keyname</para></listitem></varlistentry> - <varlistentry><term>getdriver <printername></term> - <listitem><para> - Retrieve the printer driver information (such as driver file, + <listitem><para><command>getdriver <printername></command> + - Retrieve the printer driver information (such as driver file, config file, dependent files, etc...) for the given printer. This command corresponds to the GetPrinterDriver() MS Platform SDK function. Currently info level 1, 2, and 3 are supported. - </para></listitem></varlistentry> + </para></listitem> - <varlistentry><term>getdriverdir <arch></term> - <listitem><para> - Execute a GetPrinterDriverDirectory() + <listitem><para><command>getdriverdir <arch></command> + - Execute a GetPrinterDriverDirectory() RPC to retrieve the SMB share name and subdirectory for storing printer driver files for a given architecture. Possible values for <parameter>arch</parameter> are "Windows 4.0" (for Windows 95/98), "Windows NT x86", "Windows NT PowerPC", "Windows - Alpha_AXP", and "Windows NT R4000". </para></listitem></varlistentry> + Alpha_AXP", and "Windows NT R4000". </para></listitem> - <varlistentry><term>getprinter <printername></term> - <listitem><para>Retrieve the current printer information. This command + <listitem><para><command>getprinter <printername></command> + - Retrieve the current printer information. This command corresponds to the GetPrinter() MS Platform SDK function. - </para></listitem></varlistentry> + </para></listitem> + - <varlistentry><term>getprintprocdir</term><listitem><para>Get print processor directory</para></listitem></varlistentry> - <varlistentry><term>openprinter <printername></term> - <listitem><para>Execute an OpenPrinterEx() and ClosePrinter() RPC + <listitem><para><command>openprinter <printername></command> + - Execute an OpenPrinterEx() and ClosePrinter() RPC against a given printer. </para></listitem> - <varlistentry><term>setdriver <printername> - <drivername></term> - <listitem><para>Execute a SetPrinter() command to update the printer driver + + <listitem><para><command>setdriver <printername> + <drivername></command> + - Execute a SetPrinter() command to update the printer driver associated with an installed printer. The printer driver must already be correctly installed on the print server. </para> <para>See also the <command>enumprinters</command> and <command>enumdrivers</command> commands for obtaining a list of - of installed printers and drivers.</para></listitem></varlistentry> - - <varlistentry><term>addform</term><listitem><para>Add form</para></listitem></varlistentry> - <varlistentry><term>setform</term><listitem><para>Set form</para></listitem></varlistentry> - <varlistentry><term>getform</term><listitem><para>Get form</para></listitem></varlistentry> - <varlistentry><term>deleteform</term><listitem><para>Delete form</para></listitem></varlistentry> - <varlistentry><term>enumforms</term><listitem><para>Enumerate form</para></listitem></varlistentry> - <varlistentry><term>setprinter</term><listitem><para>Set printer comment</para></listitem></varlistentry> - <varlistentry><term>setprinterdata</term><listitem><para>Set REG_SZ printer data</para></listitem></varlistentry> - <varlistentry><term>rffpcnex</term><listitem><para>Rffpcnex test</para></listitem></varlistentry> - + of installed printers and drivers.</para></listitem> - </variablelist> + </itemizedlist> - </refsect2> - <refsect2> - <title>NETLOGON</title> + <para><emphasis>GENERAL OPTIONS</emphasis></para> - <variablelist> + <itemizedlist> + <listitem><para><command>debuglevel</command> - Set the current + debug level used to log information.</para></listitem> - <varlistentry><term>logonctrl2</term> - <listitem><para>Logon Control 2</para></listitem> - </varlistentry> - - <varlistentry><term>logonctrl</term> - <listitem><para>Logon Control</para></listitem> - </varlistentry> - - <varlistentry><term>samsync</term> - <listitem><para>Sam Synchronisation</para></listitem> - </varlistentry> - - <varlistentry><term>samdeltas</term> - <listitem><para>Query Sam Deltas</para></listitem> - </varlistentry> - - <varlistentry><term>samlogon</term> - <listitem><para>Sam Logon</para></listitem> - </varlistentry> - - </variablelist> - </refsect2> - - <refsect2> - <title>GENERAL COMMANDS</title> - - <variablelist> - <varlistentry><term>debuglevel</term><listitem><para>Set the current - debug level used to log information.</para></listitem></varlistentry> - - <varlistentry><term>help (?)</term><listitem><para>Print a listing of all + <listitem><para><command>help (?)</command> - Print a listing of all known commands or extended help on a particular command. - </para></listitem></varlistentry> + </para></listitem> - <varlistentry><term>quit (exit)</term><listitem><para>Exit <command>rpcclient - </command>.</para></listitem></varlistentry> - </variablelist> - </refsect2> + <listitem><para><command>quit (exit)</command> - Exit <command>rpcclient + </command>.</para></listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </refsect1> @@ -420,7 +387,7 @@ Comma Separated list of Files <para>From Luke Leighton's original rpcclient man page:</para> - <para><emphasis>WARNING!</emphasis> The MSRPC over SMB code has + <para><emphasis>"WARNING!</emphasis> The MSRPC over SMB code has been developed from examining Network traces. No documentation is available from the original creators (Microsoft) on how MSRPC over SMB works, or how the individual MSRPC services work. Microsoft's @@ -428,13 +395,12 @@ Comma Separated list of Files to be... a bit flaky in places. </para> <para>The development of Samba's implementation is also a bit rough, - and as more of the services are understood, it can even result in - versions of <citerefentry><refentrytitle>smbd</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>8</manvolnum></citerefentry> and <citerefentry><refentrytitle>rpcclient</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>1</manvolnum></citerefentry> that are incompatible for some commands or services. Additionally, + and as more of the services are understood, it can even result in + versions of <command>smbd(8)</command> and <command>rpcclient(1)</command> + that are incompatible for some commands or services. Additionally, the developers are sending reports to Microsoft, and problems found or reported to Microsoft are fixed in Service Packs, which may - result in incompatibilities.</para> + result in incompatibilities." </para> </refsect1> @@ -456,8 +422,7 @@ Comma Separated list of Files <para>The original rpcclient man page was written by Matthew Geddes, Luke Kenneth Casson Leighton, and rewritten by Gerald Carter. The conversion to DocBook for Samba 2.2 was done by Gerald - Carter. The conversion to DocBook XML 4.2 for Samba 3.0 was - done by Alexander Bokovoy.</para> + Carter.</para> </refsect1> </refentry> diff --git a/docs/docbook/manpages/samba.7.sgml b/docs/docbook/manpages/samba.7.sgml index a5d486259f..17865edd81 100644 --- a/docs/docbook/manpages/samba.7.sgml +++ b/docs/docbook/manpages/samba.7.sgml @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ <!DOCTYPE refentry PUBLIC "-//OASIS//DTD DocBook V4.1//EN"> -<refentry id="samba.7"> +<refentry id="samba"> <refmeta> <refentrytitle>samba</refentrytitle> @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ <refnamediv> - <refname>Samba</refname> + <refname>SAMBA</refname> <refpurpose>A Windows SMB/CIFS fileserver for UNIX</refpurpose> </refnamediv> @@ -29,30 +29,26 @@ <variablelist> <varlistentry> - <term><citerefentry><refentrytitle>smbd</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>8</manvolnum></citerefentry></term> - <listitem><para>The <command>smbd</command> daemon provides the file and print services to + <term><command>smbd</command></term> + <listitem><para>The <command>smbd </command> + daemon provides the file and print services to SMB clients, such as Windows 95/98, Windows NT, Windows for Workgroups or LanManager. The configuration file - for this daemon is described in <citerefentry><refentrytitle>smb.conf</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>5</manvolnum></citerefentry> + for this daemon is described in <filename>smb.conf</filename> </para></listitem> </varlistentry> <varlistentry> - <term><citerefentry><refentrytitle>nmbd</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>8</manvolnum></citerefentry></term> + <term><command>nmbd</command></term> <listitem><para>The <command>nmbd</command> daemon provides NetBIOS nameservice and browsing support. The configuration file for this daemon - is described in <citerefentry><refentrytitle>smb.conf</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>5</manvolnum></citerefentry></para> + is described in <filename>smb.conf</filename></para> </listitem> </varlistentry> <varlistentry> - <term><citerefentry><refentrytitle>smbclient</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>1</manvolnum></citerefentry></term> + <term><command>smbclient</command></term> <listitem><para>The <command>smbclient</command> program implements a simple ftp-like client. This is useful for accessing SMB shares on other compatible @@ -63,17 +59,15 @@ </varlistentry> <varlistentry> - <term><citerefentry><refentrytitle>testparm</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>1</manvolnum></citerefentry></term> + <term><command>testparm</command></term> <listitem><para>The <command>testparm</command> - utility is a simple syntax checker for Samba's <citerefentry><refentrytitle>smb.conf</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>5</manvolnum></citerefentry> configuration file.</para> + utility is a simple syntax checker for Samba's + <filename>smb.conf</filename>configuration file.</para> </listitem> </varlistentry> <varlistentry> - <term><citerefentry><refentrytitle>testprns</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>1</manvolnum></citerefentry></term> + <term><command>testprns</command></term> <listitem><para>The <command>testprns</command> utility supports testing printer names defined in your <filename>printcap</filename> file used @@ -82,8 +76,7 @@ </varlistentry> <varlistentry> - <term><citerefentry><refentrytitle>smbstatus</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>1</manvolnum></citerefentry></term> + <term><command>smbstatus</command></term> <listitem><para>The <command>smbstatus</command> tool provides access to information about the current connections to <command>smbd</command>.</para> @@ -91,8 +84,7 @@ </varlistentry> <varlistentry> - <term><citerefentry><refentrytitle>nmblookup</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>1</manvolnum></citerefentry></term> + <term><command>nmblookup</command></term> <listitem><para>The <command>nmblookup</command> tools allows NetBIOS name queries to be made from a UNIX host.</para> @@ -100,170 +92,21 @@ </varlistentry> <varlistentry> - <term><citerefentry><refentrytitle>smbgroupedit</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>8</manvolnum></citerefentry></term> - <listitem><para>The <command>smbgroupedit</command> - tool allows for mapping unix groups to NT Builtin, - Domain, or Local groups. Also it allows setting - priviledges for that group, such as saAddUser, etc.</para> + <term><command>make_smbcodepage</command></term> + <listitem><para>The <command>make_smbcodepage</command> + utility provides a means of creating SMB code page + definition files for your <command>smbd</command> server.</para> </listitem> </varlistentry> <varlistentry> - <term><citerefentry><refentrytitle>smbpasswd</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>8</manvolnum></citerefentry></term> + <term><command>smbpasswd</command></term> <listitem><para>The <command>smbpasswd</command> command is a tool for changing LanMan and Windows NT password hashes on Samba and Windows NT servers.</para> </listitem> </varlistentry> - <varlistentry> - <term><citerefentry><refentrytitle>smbcacls</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>1</manvolnum></citerefentry></term> - <listitem><para>The <command>smbcacls</command> command is - a tool to set ACL's on remote CIFS servers. </para> - </listitem> - </varlistentry> - - <varlistentry> - <term><citerefentry><refentrytitle>smbsh</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>1</manvolnum></citerefentry></term> - <listitem><para>The <command>smbsh</command> command is - a program that allows you to run a unix shell with - with an overloaded VFS.</para></listitem> - </varlistentry> - - <varlistentry> - <term><citerefentry><refentrytitle>smbtree</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>1</manvolnum></citerefentry></term> - <listitem><para>The <command>smbtree</command> command - is a text-based network neighborhood tool.</para></listitem> - </varlistentry> - - <varlistentry> - <term><citerefentry><refentrytitle>smbtar</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>1</manvolnum></citerefentry></term> - <listitem><para>The <command>smbtar</command> can make - backups of data on CIFS/SMB servers.</para></listitem> - </varlistentry> - - <varlistentry> - <term><citerefentry><refentrytitle>smbspool</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>8</manvolnum></citerefentry></term> - <listitem><para><command>smbspool</command> is a - helper utility for printing on printers connected - to CIFS servers. </para></listitem> - </varlistentry> - - <varlistentry> - <term><citerefentry><refentrytitle>smbcontrol</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>1</manvolnum></citerefentry></term> - <listitem><para><command>smbcontrol</command> is a utility - that can change the behaviour of running samba daemons. - </para></listitem> - </varlistentry> - - <varlistentry> - <term><citerefentry><refentrytitle>rpcclient</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>1</manvolnum></citerefentry></term> - <listitem><para><command>rpcclient</command> is a utility - that can be used to execute RPC commands on remote - CIFS servers.</para></listitem> - </varlistentry> - - <varlistentry> - <term><citerefentry><refentrytitle>pdbedit</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>8</manvolnum></citerefentry></term> - <listitem><para>The <command>pdbedit</command> command - can be used to maintain the local user database on - a samba server.</para></listitem></varlistentry> - - <varlistentry> - <term><citerefentry><refentrytitle>findsmb</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>1</manvolnum></citerefentry></term> - <listitem><para>The <command>findsmb</command> command - can be used to find SMB servers on the local network. - </para></listitem></varlistentry> - - <varlistentry> - <term><citerefentry><refentrytitle>net</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>8</manvolnum></citerefentry></term> - <listitem><para>The <command>net</command> command - is supposed to work similar to the DOS/Windows - NET.EXE command.</para></listitem> - </varlistentry> - - <varlistentry> - <term><citerefentry><refentrytitle>swat</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>8</manvolnum></citerefentry></term> - <listitem><para><command>swat</command> is a web-based - interface to configuring <filename>smb.conf</filename>. - </para></listitem> - </varlistentry> - - <varlistentry> - <term><citerefentry><refentrytitle>winbindd</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>8</manvolnum></citerefentry></term> - <listitem><para><command>winbindd</command> is a daemon - that is used for integrating authentication and - the user database into unix.</para></listitem> - </varlistentry> - - <varlistentry> - <term><citerefentry><refentrytitle>wbinfo</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>1</manvolnum></citerefentry></term> - <listitem><para><command>wbinfo</command> is a utility - that retrieves and stores information related to winbind. - </para></listitem> - </varlistentry> - - <varlistentry> - <term><citerefentry><refentrytitle>editreg</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>1</manvolnum></citerefentry></term> - <listitem><para><command>editreg</command> is a command-line - utility that can edit windows registry files. - </para></listitem> - </varlistentry> - - <varlistentry> - <term><citerefentry><refentrytitle>profiles</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>1</manvolnum></citerefentry></term> - <listitem><para><command>profiles</command> is a command-line - utility that can be used to replace all occurences of - a certain SID with another SID. - </para></listitem> - </varlistentry> - - <varlistentry> - <term><citerefentry><refentrytitle>vfstest</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>1</manvolnum></citerefentry></term> - <listitem><para><command>vfstest</command> is a utility - that can be used to test vfs modules.</para></listitem> - </varlistentry> - - <varlistentry> - <term><citerefentry><refentrytitle>ntlm_auth</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>1</manvolnum></citerefentry></term> - <listitem><para><command>ntlm_auth</command> is a helper-utility - for external programs wanting to do NTLM-authentication. - </para></listitem></varlistentry> - - <varlistentry> - <term><citerefentry><refentrytitle>smbmount</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>8</manvolnum></citerefentry>, <citerefentry><refentrytitle>smbumount</refentrytitle><manvolnum>8</manvolnum></citerefentry>, <citerefentry><refentrytitle>smbmount</refentrytitle><manvolnum>8</manvolnum></citerefentry></term> - <listitem><para><command>smbmount</command>,<command>smbmnt</command> and <command>smbmnt</command> are commands that can be used to - mount CIFS/SMB shares on Linux. - </para></listitem> - </varlistentry> - - <varlistentry> - <term><citerefentry><refentrytitle>smbcquotas</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>1</manvolnum></citerefentry></term> - <listitem><para><command>smbcquotas</command> is a tool that - can set remote QUOTA's on server with NTFS 5. </para> - </listitem> - </varlistentry> </variablelist> </refsect1> @@ -304,8 +147,8 @@ list. Details on how to join the mailing list are given in the README file that comes with Samba.</para> - <para>If you have access to a WWW viewer (such as Mozilla - or Konqueror) then you will also find lots of useful information, + <para>If you have access to a WWW viewer (such as Netscape + or Mosaic) then you will also find lots of useful information, including back issues of the Samba mailing list, at <ulink url="http://lists.samba.org/">http://lists.samba.org</ulink>.</para> </refsect1> @@ -313,7 +156,7 @@ <refsect1> <title>VERSION</title> - <para>This man page is correct for version 3.0 of the + <para>This man page is correct for version 2.2 of the Samba suite. </para> </refsect1> @@ -327,8 +170,8 @@ <para>If you have patches to submit, visit <ulink url="http://devel.samba.org/">http://devel.samba.org/</ulink> - for information on how to do it properly. We prefer patches - in <command>diff -u</command> format.</para> + for information on how to do it properly. We prefer patches in + <command>diff -u</command> format.</para> </refsect1> <refsect1> @@ -363,11 +206,11 @@ <para>The original Samba man pages were written by Karl Auer. The man page sources were converted to YODL format (another - excellent piece of Open Source software, available at <ulink url="ftp://ftp.icce.rug.nl/pub/unix/"> + excellent piece of Open Source software, available at + <ulink url="ftp://ftp.icce.rug.nl/pub/unix/"> ftp://ftp.icce.rug.nl/pub/unix/</ulink>) and updated for the Samba 2.0 release by Jeremy Allison. The conversion to DocBook for - Samba 2.2 was done by Gerald Carter. The conversion to DocBook XML - 4.2 for Samba 3.0 was done by Alexander Bokovoy.</para> + Samba 2.2 was done by Gerald Carter</para> </refsect1> </refentry> diff --git a/docs/docbook/manpages/smb.conf.5.sgml b/docs/docbook/manpages/smb.conf.5.sgml index 9486eb87ea..4842354012 100644 --- a/docs/docbook/manpages/smb.conf.5.sgml +++ b/docs/docbook/manpages/smb.conf.5.sgml @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ <!DOCTYPE refentry PUBLIC "-//OASIS//DTD DocBook V4.1//EN"> -<refentry id="smb.conf.5"> +<refentry id="smb.conf"> <refmeta> <refentrytitle>smb.conf</refentrytitle> @@ -15,13 +15,14 @@ <refsect1> <title>SYNOPSIS</title> - <para>The <filename>smb.conf</filename> file is a configuration - file for the Samba suite. <filename>smb.conf</filename> contains - runtime configuration information for the Samba programs. The <filename>smb.conf</filename> file - is designed to be configured and administered by the <citerefentry><refentrytitle>swat</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>8</manvolnum></citerefentry> program. The complete - description of the file format and possible parameters held within - are here for reference purposes.</para> </refsect1> + <para>The <filename>smb.conf</filename> file is a configuration + file for the Samba suite. <filename>smb.conf</filename> contains + runtime configuration information for the Samba programs. The + <filename>smb.conf</filename> file is designed to be configured and + administered by the <ulink url="swat.8.html"><command>swat(8)</command> + </ulink> program. The complete description of the file format and + possible parameters held within are here for reference purposes.</para> +</refsect1> <refsect1> <title id="FILEFORMATSECT">FILE FORMAT</title> @@ -104,13 +105,13 @@ The user has write access to the path <filename>/home/bar</filename>. The share is accessed via the share name "foo":</para> -<screen> -<computeroutput> -[foo] - path = /home/bar - read only = no -</computeroutput> -</screen> + <screen> + <computeroutput> + [foo] + path = /home/bar + read only = no + </computeroutput> + </screen> <para>The following sample section defines a printable share. The share is readonly, but printable. That is, the only write @@ -119,15 +120,15 @@ access will be permitted as the default guest user (specified elsewhere):</para> -<screen> -<computeroutput> -[aprinter] - path = /usr/spool/public - read only = yes - printable = yes - guest ok = yes -</computeroutput> -</screen> + <screen> + <computeroutput> + [aprinter] + path = /usr/spool/public + read only = yes + printable = yes + guest ok = yes + </computeroutput> + </screen> </refsect1> <refsect1> @@ -191,12 +192,12 @@ than others. The following is a typical and suitable [homes] section:</para> -<screen> -<computeroutput> -[homes] - read only = no -</computeroutput> -</screen> + <screen> + <computeroutput> + [homes] + read only = no + </computeroutput> + </screen> <para>An important point is that if guest access is specified in the [homes] section, all home directories will be @@ -256,12 +257,12 @@ it. A typical [printers] entry would look like this:</para> -<screen><computeroutput> -[printers] - path = /usr/spool/public - guest ok = yes - printable = yes -</computeroutput></screen> + <screen><computeroutput> + [printers] + path = /usr/spool/public + guest ok = yes + printable = yes + </computeroutput></screen> <para>All aliases given for a printer in the printcap file are legitimate printer names as far as the server is concerned. @@ -269,11 +270,11 @@ to set up a pseudo-printcap. This is a file consisting of one or more lines like this:</para> -<screen> -<computeroutput> -alias|alias|alias|alias... -</computeroutput> -</screen> + <screen> + <computeroutput> + alias|alias|alias|alias... + </computeroutput> + </screen> <para>Each alias should be an acceptable printer name for your printing subsystem. In the [global] section, specify @@ -287,11 +288,11 @@ alias|alias|alias|alias... components (if there are more than one) are separated by vertical bar symbols ('|').</para> - <note><para>On SYSV systems which use lpstat to determine what + <para>NOTE: On SYSV systems which use lpstat to determine what printers are defined on the system you may be able to use "printcap name = lpstat" to automatically obtain a list of printers. See the "printcap name" option - for more details.</para></note> + for more details.</para> </refsect2> </refsect1> @@ -471,7 +472,7 @@ alias|alias|alias|alias... </variablelist> <para>There are some quite creative things that can be done - with these substitutions and other smb.conf options.</para> + with these substitutions and other smb.conf options.</para </refsect1> <refsect1> @@ -551,7 +552,7 @@ alias|alias|alias|alias... then steps 1 to 5 are skipped.</para> - <orderedlist numeration="arabic"> + <orderedlist numeration="Arabic"> <listitem><para>If the client has passed a username/password pair and that username/password pair is validated by the UNIX system's password programs then the connection is made as that @@ -684,7 +685,6 @@ alias|alias|alias|alias... <listitem><para><link linkend="LOGONSCRIPT"><parameter>logon script</parameter></link></para></listitem> <listitem><para><link linkend="LPQCACHETIME"><parameter>lpq cache time</parameter></link></para></listitem> <listitem><para><link linkend="MACHINEPASSWORDTIMEOUT"><parameter>machine password timeout</parameter></link></para></listitem> - <listitem><para><link linkend="MANGLEPREFIX"><parameter>mangle prefix</parameter></link></para></listitem> <listitem><para><link linkend="MANGLEDSTACK"><parameter>mangled stack</parameter></link></para></listitem> <listitem><para><link linkend="MAPTOGUEST"><parameter>map to guest</parameter></link></para></listitem> <listitem><para><link linkend="MAXDISKSIZE"><parameter>max disk size</parameter></link></para></listitem> @@ -728,9 +728,9 @@ alias|alias|alias|alias... <listitem><para><link linkend="PREFEREDMASTER"><parameter>prefered master</parameter></link></para></listitem> <listitem><para><link linkend="PREFERREDMASTER"><parameter>preferred master</parameter></link></para></listitem> <listitem><para><link linkend="PRELOAD"><parameter>preload</parameter></link></para></listitem> - <listitem><para><link linkend="PRELOADMODULES"><parameter>preload modules</parameter></link></para></listitem> <listitem><para><link linkend="PRINTCAP"><parameter>printcap</parameter></link></para></listitem> <listitem><para><link linkend="PRINTCAPNAME"><parameter>printcap name</parameter></link></para></listitem> + <listitem><para><link linkend="PRINTERDRIVERFILE"><parameter>printer driver file</parameter></link></para></listitem> <listitem><para><link linkend="PRIVATEDIR"><parameter>private dir</parameter></link></para></listitem> <listitem><para><link linkend="PROTOCOL"><parameter>protocol</parameter></link></para></listitem> <listitem><para><link linkend="READBMPX"><parameter>read bmpx</parameter></link></para></listitem> @@ -772,6 +772,7 @@ alias|alias|alias|alias... <listitem><para><link linkend="UNIXPASSWORDSYNC"><parameter>unix password sync</parameter></link></para></listitem> <listitem><para><link linkend="UPDATEENCRYPTED"><parameter>update encrypted</parameter></link></para></listitem> <listitem><para><link linkend="USEMMAP"><parameter>use mmap</parameter></link></para></listitem> + <listitem><para><link linkend="USERHOSTS"><parameter>use rhosts</parameter></link></para></listitem> <listitem><para><link linkend="USESENDFILE"><parameter>use sendfile</parameter></link></para></listitem> <listitem><para><link linkend="USERNAMELEVEL"><parameter>username level</parameter></link></para></listitem> <listitem><para><link linkend="USERNAMEMAP"><parameter>username map</parameter></link></para></listitem> @@ -807,7 +808,7 @@ alias|alias|alias|alias... <listitem><para><link linkend="ALLOWHOSTS"><parameter>allow hosts</parameter></link></para></listitem> <listitem><para><link linkend="AVAILABLE"><parameter>available</parameter></link></para></listitem> <listitem><para><link linkend="BLOCKINGLOCKS"><parameter>blocking locks</parameter></link></para></listitem> - <listitem><para><link linkend="BLOCKSIZE"><parameter>block size</parameter></link></para></listitem> +<listitem><para><link linkend="BLOCKSIZE"><parameter>block size</parameter></link></para></listitem> <listitem><para><link linkend="BROWSABLE"><parameter>browsable</parameter></link></para></listitem> <listitem><para><link linkend="BROWSEABLE"><parameter>browseable</parameter></link></para></listitem> <listitem><para><link linkend="CASESENSITIVE"><parameter>case sensitive</parameter></link></para></listitem> @@ -883,6 +884,7 @@ alias|alias|alias|alias... <listitem><para><link linkend="PATH"><parameter>path</parameter></link></para></listitem> <listitem><para><link linkend="POSIXLOCKING"><parameter>posix locking</parameter></link></para></listitem> <listitem><para><link linkend="POSTEXEC"><parameter>postexec</parameter></link></para></listitem> + <listitem><para><link linkend="POSTSCRIPT"><parameter>postscript</parameter></link></para></listitem> <listitem><para><link linkend="PREEXEC"><parameter>preexec</parameter></link></para></listitem> <listitem><para><link linkend="PREEXECCLOSE"><parameter>preexec close</parameter></link></para></listitem> <listitem><para><link linkend="PRESERVECASE"><parameter>preserve case</parameter></link></para></listitem> @@ -891,6 +893,8 @@ alias|alias|alias|alias... <listitem><para><link linkend="PRINTABLE"><parameter>printable</parameter></link></para></listitem> <listitem><para><link linkend="PRINTER"><parameter>printer</parameter></link></para></listitem> <listitem><para><link linkend="PRINTERADMIN"><parameter>printer admin</parameter></link></para></listitem> + <listitem><para><link linkend="PRINTERDRIVER"><parameter>printer driver</parameter></link></para></listitem> + <listitem><para><link linkend="PRINTERDRIVERLOCATION"><parameter>printer driver location</parameter></link></para></listitem> <listitem><para><link linkend="PRINTERNAME"><parameter>printer name</parameter></link></para></listitem> <listitem><para><link linkend="PRINTING"><parameter>printing</parameter></link></para></listitem> <listitem><para><link linkend="PUBLIC"><parameter>public</parameter></link></para></listitem> @@ -936,10 +940,10 @@ alias|alias|alias|alias... <variablelist> <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="ABORTSHUTDOWNSCRIPT"/>abort shutdown script (G)</term> + <term><anchor id="ABORTSHUTDOWNSCRIPT">abort shutdown script (G)</term> <listitem><para><emphasis>This parameter only exists in the HEAD cvs branch</emphasis> - This a full path name to a script called by <citerefentry><refentrytitle>smbd</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>8</manvolnum></citerefentry> that + This a full path name to a script called by + <ulink url="smbd.8.html"><command>smbd(8)</command></ulink> that should stop a shutdown procedure issued by the <link linkend="SHUTDOWNSCRIPT"><parameter>shutdown script</parameter></link>.</para> @@ -951,7 +955,7 @@ alias|alias|alias|alias... </varlistentry> <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="ADDPRINTERCOMMAND"/>addprinter command (G)</term> + <term><anchor id="ADDPRINTERCOMMAND">addprinter command (G)</term> <listitem><para>With the introduction of MS-RPC based printing support for Windows NT/2000 clients in Samba 2.2, The MS Add Printer Wizard (APW) icon is now also available in the @@ -965,12 +969,12 @@ alias|alias|alias|alias... will perform the necessary operations for adding the printer to the print system and to add the appropriate service definition to the <filename>smb.conf</filename> file in order that it can be - shared by <citerefentry><refentrytitle>smbd</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>8</manvolnum></citerefentry>.</para> + shared by <ulink url="smbd.8.html"><command>smbd(8)</command> + </ulink>.</para> <para>The <parameter>addprinter command</parameter> is automatically invoked with the following parameter (in - order):</para> + order:</para> <itemizedlist> <listitem><para><parameter>printer name</parameter></para></listitem> @@ -987,22 +991,16 @@ alias|alias|alias|alias... driver location" parameter is included for backwards compatibility only. The remaining fields in the structure are generated from answers to the APW questions.</para> - + <para>Once the <parameter>addprinter command</parameter> has been executed, <command>smbd</command> will reparse the <filename> smb.conf</filename> to determine if the share defined by the APW exists. If the sharename is still invalid, then <command>smbd </command> will return an ACCESS_DENIED error to the client.</para> - - <para> - The "add printer command" program can output a single line of text, - which Samba will set as the port the new printer is connected to. - If this line isn't output, Samba won't reload its printer shares. - </para> <para>See also <link linkend="DELETEPRINTERCOMMAND"><parameter> deleteprinter command</parameter></link>, <link - linkend="PRINTING"><parameter>printing</parameter></link>, + linkend="printing"><parameter>printing</parameter></link>, <link linkend="SHOWADDPRINTERWIZARD"><parameter>show add printer wizard</parameter></link></para> @@ -1015,7 +1013,7 @@ alias|alias|alias|alias... <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="ADDSHARECOMMAND"/>add share command (G)</term> + <term><anchor id="ADDSHARECOMMAND">add share command (G)</term> <listitem><para>Samba 2.2.0 introduced the ability to dynamically add and delete shares via the Windows NT 4.0 Server Manager. The <parameter>add share command</parameter> is used to define an @@ -1069,10 +1067,9 @@ alias|alias|alias|alias... <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="ADDMACHINESCRIPT"/>add machine script (G)</term> + <term><anchor id="ADDMACHINESCRIPT">add machine script (G)</term> <listitem><para>This is the full pathname to a script that will - be run by <citerefentry><refentrytitle>smbd</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>8</manvolnum></citerefentry> when a machine is added + be run by <ulink url="smbd.8.html">smbd(8)</ulink> when a machine is added to it's domain using the administrator username and password method. </para> <para>This option is only required when using sam back-ends tied to the @@ -1088,7 +1085,7 @@ alias|alias|alias|alias... </varlistentry> <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="ADSSERVER"/>ads server (G)</term> + <term><anchor id="ADSSERVER">ads server (G)</term> <listitem><para>If this option is specified, samba does not try to figure out what ads server to use itself, but uses the specified ads server. Either one DNS name or IP @@ -1101,10 +1098,10 @@ alias|alias|alias|alias... </varlistentry> <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="ADDUSERSCRIPT"/>add user script (G)</term> + <term><anchor id="ADDUSERSCRIPT">add user script (G)</term> <listitem><para>This is the full pathname to a script that will - be run <emphasis>AS ROOT</emphasis> by <citerefentry><refentrytitle>smbd</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>8</manvolnum></citerefentry> under special circumstances described below.</para> + be run <emphasis>AS ROOT</emphasis> by <ulink url="smbd.8.html">smbd(8) + </ulink> under special circumstances described below.</para> <para>Normally, a Samba server requires that UNIX users are created for all users accessing files on this server. For sites @@ -1114,16 +1111,16 @@ alias|alias|alias|alias... url="smbd.8.html">smbd</ulink> to create the required UNIX users <emphasis>ON DEMAND</emphasis> when a user accesses the Samba server.</para> - <para>In order to use this option, <citerefentry><refentrytitle>smbd</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>8</manvolnum></citerefentry> must <emphasis>NOT</emphasis> be set to <parameter>security = share</parameter> + <para>In order to use this option, <ulink url="smbd.8.html">smbd</ulink> + must <emphasis>NOT</emphasis> be set to <parameter>security = share</parameter> and <parameter>add user script</parameter> must be set to a full pathname for a script that will create a UNIX user given one argument of <parameter>%u</parameter>, which expands into the UNIX user name to create.</para> <para>When the Windows user attempts to access the Samba server, - at login (session setup in the SMB protocol) time, <citerefentry><refentrytitle>smbd</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>8</manvolnum></citerefentry> contacts the <parameter>password server</parameter> and + at login (session setup in the SMB protocol) time, <ulink url="smbd.8.html"> + smbd</ulink> contacts the <parameter>password server</parameter> and attempts to authenticate the given user with the given password. If the authentication succeeds then <command>smbd</command> attempts to find a UNIX user in the UNIX password database to map the @@ -1151,10 +1148,10 @@ alias|alias|alias|alias... </listitem> </varlistentry> - <varlistentry><term><anchor id="ADDGROUPSCRIPT"/>add group script (G)</term> + <varlistentry><term><anchor id="ADDGROUPSCRIPT">add group script (G)</term> <listitem><para>This is the full pathname to a script that will - be run <emphasis>AS ROOT</emphasis> by <citerefentry><refentrytitle>smbd</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>8</manvolnum></citerefentry> when a new group is + be run <emphasis>AS ROOT</emphasis> by <ulink + url="smbd.8.html">smbd(8)</ulink> when a new group is requested. It will expand any <parameter>%g</parameter> to the group name passed. This script is only useful for installations using the @@ -1167,7 +1164,7 @@ alias|alias|alias|alias... </varlistentry> <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="ADMINUSERS"/>admin users (S)</term> + <term><anchor id="ADMINUSERS">admin users (S)</term> <listitem><para>This is a list of users who will be granted administrative privileges on the share. This means that they will do all file operations as the super-user (root).</para> @@ -1183,13 +1180,13 @@ alias|alias|alias|alias... </varlistentry> <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="ADDUSERTOGROUPSCRIPT"/>add user to group script (G)</term> + <term><anchor id="ADDUSERTOGROUPSCRIPT">add user to group script (G)</term> <listitem><para>Full path to the script that will be called when a user is added to a group using the Windows NT domain administration - tools. It will be run by <citerefentry><refentrytitle>smbd</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>8</manvolnum></citerefentry> <emphasis>AS ROOT</emphasis>. - Any <parameter>%g</parameter> will be replaced with the group name and - any <parameter>%u</parameter> will be replaced with the user name. + tools. It will be run by <ulink url="smbd.8.html">smbd(8)</ulink> + <emphasis>AS ROOT</emphasis>. Any <parameter>%g</parameter> will be + replaced with the group name and any <parameter>%u</parameter> will + be replaced with the user name. </para> <para>Default: <command>add user to group script = </command></para> @@ -1200,13 +1197,13 @@ alias|alias|alias|alias... </varlistentry> <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="ALLOWHOSTS"/>allow hosts (S)</term> + <term><anchor id="ALLOWHOSTS">allow hosts (S)</term> <listitem><para>Synonym for <link linkend="HOSTSALLOW"> <parameter>hosts allow</parameter></link>.</para></listitem> </varlistentry> <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="ALGORITHMICRIDBASE"/>algorithmic rid base (G)</term> + <term><anchor id="ALGORITHMICRIDBASE">algorithmic rid base (G)</term> <listitem><para>This determines how Samba will use its algorithmic mapping from uids/gid to the RIDs needed to construct NT Security Identifiers.</para> @@ -1229,7 +1226,7 @@ alias|alias|alias|alias... </varlistentry> <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="ALLOWTRUSTEDDOMAINS"/>allow trusted domains (G)</term> + <term><anchor id="ALLOWTRUSTEDDOMAINS">allow trusted domains (G)</term> <listitem><para>This option only takes effect when the <link linkend="SECURITY"><parameter>security</parameter></link> option is set to <constant>server</constant> or <constant>domain</constant>. @@ -1253,9 +1250,10 @@ alias|alias|alias|alias... </varlistentry> <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="ANNOUNCEAS"/>announce as (G)</term> - <listitem><para>This specifies what type of server <citerefentry><refentrytitle>nmbd</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>8</manvolnum></citerefentry> will announce itself as, to a network neighborhood browse + <term><anchor id="ANNOUNCEAS">announce as (G)</term> + <listitem><para>This specifies what type of server + <ulink url="nmbd.8.html"><command>nmbd</command></ulink> + will announce itself as, to a network neighborhood browse list. By default this is set to Windows NT. The valid options are : "NT Server" (which can also be written as "NT"), "NT Workstation", "Win95" or "WfW" meaning Windows NT Server, @@ -1274,7 +1272,7 @@ alias|alias|alias|alias... <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="ANNOUNCEVERSION"/>announce version (G)</term> + <term><anchor id="ANNOUNCEVERSION">announce version (G)</term> <listitem><para>This specifies the major and minor version numbers that nmbd will use when announcing itself as a server. The default is 4.9. Do not change this parameter unless you have a specific @@ -1289,7 +1287,7 @@ alias|alias|alias|alias... <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="AUTOSERVICES"/>auto services (G)</term> + <term><anchor id="AUTOSERVICES">auto services (G)</term> <listitem><para>This is a synonym for the <link linkend="PRELOAD"> <parameter>preload</parameter></link>.</para> </listitem> @@ -1298,7 +1296,7 @@ alias|alias|alias|alias... <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="AUTHMETHODS"/>auth methods (G)</term> + <term><anchor id="AUTHMETHODS">auth methods (G)</term> <listitem><para>This option allows the administrator to chose what authentication methods <command>smbd</command> will use when authenticating a user. This option defaults to sensible values based on <link linkend="SECURITY"><parameter> @@ -1316,7 +1314,7 @@ alias|alias|alias|alias... <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="AVAILABLE"/>available (S)</term> + <term><anchor id="AVAILABLE">available (S)</term> <listitem><para>This parameter lets you "turn off" a service. If <parameter>available = no</parameter>, then <emphasis>ALL</emphasis> attempts to connect to the service will fail. Such failures are @@ -1330,12 +1328,12 @@ alias|alias|alias|alias... <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="BINDINTERFACESONLY"/>bind interfaces only (G)</term> + <term><anchor id="BINDINTERFACESONLY">bind interfaces only (G)</term> <listitem><para>This global parameter allows the Samba admin to limit what interfaces on a machine will serve SMB requests. It - affects file service <citerefentry><refentrytitle>smbd</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>8</manvolnum></citerefentry> and name service <citerefentry><refentrytitle>nmbd</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>8</manvolnum></citerefentry> in a slightly different ways.</para> + affects file service <ulink url="smbd.8.html">smbd(8)</ulink> and + name service <ulink url="nmbd.8.html">nmbd(8)</ulink> in slightly + different ways.</para> <para>For name service it causes <command>nmbd</command> to bind to ports 137 and 138 on the interfaces listed in the <link @@ -1355,9 +1353,8 @@ alias|alias|alias|alias... does defeat this simple check, however, so it must not be used seriously as a security feature for <command>nmbd</command>.</para> - <para>For file service it causes <citerefentry><refentrytitle>smbd</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>8</manvolnum></citerefentry> to bind only to the interface list - given in the <link linkend="INTERFACES"> + <para>For file service it causes <ulink url="smbd.8.html">smbd(8)</ulink> + to bind only to the interface list given in the <link linkend="INTERFACES"> interfaces</link> parameter. This restricts the networks that <command>smbd</command> will serve to packets coming in those interfaces. Note that you should not use this parameter for machines @@ -1366,9 +1363,10 @@ alias|alias|alias|alias... <para>If <parameter>bind interfaces only</parameter> is set then unless the network address <emphasis>127.0.0.1</emphasis> is added - to the <parameter>interfaces</parameter> parameter list <citerefentry><refentrytitle>smbpasswd</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>8</manvolnum></citerefentry> and <citerefentry><refentrytitle>swat</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>8</manvolnum></citerefentry> may not work as expected due to the reasons covered below.</para> + to the <parameter>interfaces</parameter> parameter list <ulink + url="smbpasswd.8.html"><command>smbpasswd(8)</command></ulink> + and <ulink url="swat.8.html"><command>swat(8)</command></ulink> may + not work as expected due to the reasons covered below.</para> <para>To change a users SMB password, the <command>smbpasswd</command> by default connects to the <emphasis>localhost - 127.0.0.1</emphasis> @@ -1378,9 +1376,9 @@ alias|alias|alias|alias... <parameter>interfaces</parameter> parameter list then <command> smbpasswd</command> will fail to connect in it's default mode. <command>smbpasswd</command> can be forced to use the primary IP interface - of the local host by using its <citerefentry><refentrytitle>smbpasswd</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>8</manvolnum></citerefentry> <parameter>-r <replaceable>remote machine</replaceable></parameter> - parameter, with <replaceable>remote machine</replaceable> set + of the local host by using its <ulink url="smbpasswd.8.html#minusr"> + <parameter>-r <replaceable>remote machine</replaceable></parameter> + </ulink> parameter, with <replaceable>remote machine</replaceable> set to the IP name of the primary interface of the local host.</para> <para>The <command>swat</command> status page tries to connect with @@ -1400,10 +1398,9 @@ alias|alias|alias|alias... <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="BLOCKINGLOCKS"/>blocking locks (S)</term> - <listitem><para>This parameter controls the behavior - of <citerefentry><refentrytitle>smbd</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>8</manvolnum></citerefentry> when given a request by a client + <term><anchor id="BLOCKINGLOCKS">blocking locks (S)</term> + <listitem><para>This parameter controls the behavior of <ulink + url="smbd.8.html">smbd(8)</ulink> when given a request by a client to obtain a byte range lock on a region of an open file, and the request has a time limit associated with it.</para> @@ -1423,9 +1420,9 @@ alias|alias|alias|alias... </varlistentry> <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="BLOCKSIZE"/>block size (S)</term> - <listitem><para>This parameter controls the behavior of <citerefentry><refentrytitle>smbd</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>8</manvolnum></citerefentry> when reporting disk free + <term><anchor id="BLOCKSIZE">block size (S)</term> + <listitem><para>This parameter controls the behavior of + <ulink url="smbd.8.html">smbd(8)</ulink> when reporting disk free sizes. By default, this reports a disk block size of 1024 bytes. </para> @@ -1439,19 +1436,27 @@ alias|alias|alias|alias... <para>Changing this option does not change the disk free reporting size, just the block size unit reported to the client.</para> - </listitem> - </varlistentry> + + <para>Default: <command>block size = 1024</command></para> + <para>Example: <command>block size = 65536</command></para> + + </listitem> + </varlistentry> + + <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="BROWSABLE"/>browsable (S)</term> + <term><anchor id="BROWSABLE">browsable (S)</term> <listitem><para>See the <link linkend="BROWSEABLE"><parameter> browseable</parameter></link>.</para></listitem> </varlistentry> + + <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="BROWSELIST"/>browse list (G)</term> - <listitem><para>This controls whether <citerefentry><refentrytitle>smbd</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>8</manvolnum></citerefentry> will serve a browse list to + <term><anchor id="BROWSELIST">browse list (G)</term> + <listitem><para>This controls whether <ulink url="smbd.8.html"> + <command>smbd(8)</command></ulink> will serve a browse list to a client doing a <command>NetServerEnum</command> call. Normally set to <constant>yes</constant>. You should never need to change this.</para> @@ -1462,7 +1467,7 @@ alias|alias|alias|alias... <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="BROWSEABLE"/>browseable (S)</term> + <term><anchor id="BROWSEABLE">browseable (S)</term> <listitem><para>This controls whether this share is seen in the list of available shares in a net view and in the browse list.</para> @@ -1473,7 +1478,7 @@ alias|alias|alias|alias... <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="CASESENSITIVE"/>case sensitive (S)</term> + <term><anchor id="CASESENSITIVE">case sensitive (S)</term> <listitem><para>See the discussion in the section <link linkend="NAMEMANGLINGSECT">NAME MANGLING</link>.</para> @@ -1484,7 +1489,7 @@ alias|alias|alias|alias... <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="CASESIGNAMES"/>casesignames (S)</term> + <term><anchor id="CASESIGNAMES">casesignames (S)</term> <listitem><para>Synonym for <link linkend="CASESENSITIVE">case sensitive</link>.</para></listitem> </varlistentry> @@ -1492,12 +1497,12 @@ alias|alias|alias|alias... <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="CHANGENOTIFYTIMEOUT"/>change notify timeout (G)</term> + <term><anchor id="CHANGENOTIFYTIMEOUT">change notify timeout (G)</term> <listitem><para>This SMB allows a client to tell a server to "watch" a particular directory for any changes and only reply to the SMB request when a change has occurred. Such constant scanning of - a directory is expensive under UNIX, hence an <citerefentry><refentrytitle>smbd</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>8</manvolnum></citerefentry> daemon only performs such a scan + a directory is expensive under UNIX, hence an <ulink url="smbd.8.html"> + <command>smbd(8)</command></ulink> daemon only performs such a scan on each requested directory once every <parameter>change notify timeout</parameter> seconds.</para> @@ -1510,7 +1515,7 @@ alias|alias|alias|alias... <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="CHANGESHARECOMMAND"/>change share command (G)</term> + <term><anchor id="CHANGESHARECOMMAND">change share command (G)</term> <listitem><para>Samba 2.2.0 introduced the ability to dynamically add and delete shares via the Windows NT 4.0 Server Manager. The <parameter>change share command</parameter> is used to define an @@ -1560,8 +1565,12 @@ alias|alias|alias|alias... </listitem> </varlistentry> + + + + <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="COMMENT"/>comment (S)</term> + <term><anchor id="COMMENT">comment (S)</term> <listitem><para>This is a text field that is seen next to a share when a client does a queries the server, either via the network neighborhood or via <command>net view</command> to list what shares @@ -1578,7 +1587,7 @@ alias|alias|alias|alias... <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="CONFIGFILE"/>config file (G)</term> + <term><anchor id="CONFIGFILE">config file (G)</term> <listitem><para>This allows you to override the config file to use, instead of the default (usually <filename>smb.conf</filename>). There is a chicken and egg problem here as this option is set @@ -1602,7 +1611,7 @@ alias|alias|alias|alias... <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="COPY"/>copy (S)</term> + <term><anchor id="COPY">copy (S)</term> <listitem><para>This parameter allows you to "clone" service entries. The specified service is simply duplicated under the current service's name. Any parameters specified in the current @@ -1620,7 +1629,7 @@ alias|alias|alias|alias... <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="CREATEMASK"/>create mask (S)</term> + <term><anchor id="CREATEMASK">create mask (S)</term> <listitem><para>A synonym for this parameter is <link linkend="CREATEMODE"><parameter>create mode</parameter> </link>.</para> @@ -1664,14 +1673,14 @@ alias|alias|alias|alias... <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="CREATEMODE"/>create mode (S)</term> + <term><anchor id="CREATEMODE">create mode (S)</term> <listitem><para>This is a synonym for <link linkend="CREATEMASK"><parameter> create mask</parameter></link>.</para></listitem> </varlistentry> <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="CSCPOLICY"/>csc policy (S)</term> + <term><anchor id="CSCPOLICY">csc policy (S)</term> <listitem><para>This stands for <emphasis>client-side caching policy</emphasis>, and specifies how clients capable of offline caching will cache the files in the share. The valid values @@ -1690,7 +1699,7 @@ alias|alias|alias|alias... </varlistentry> <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="DEADTIME"/>deadtime (G)</term> + <term><anchor id="DEADTIME">deadtime (G)</term> <listitem><para>The value of the parameter (a decimal integer) represents the number of minutes of inactivity before a connection is considered dead, and it is disconnected. The deadtime only takes @@ -1716,7 +1725,7 @@ alias|alias|alias|alias... <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="DEBUGHIRESTIMESTAMP"/>debug hires timestamp (G)</term> + <term><anchor id="DEBUGHIRESTIMESTAMP">debug hires timestamp (G)</term> <listitem><para>Sometimes the timestamps in the log messages are needed with a resolution of higher that seconds, this boolean parameter adds microsecond resolution to the timestamp @@ -1733,7 +1742,7 @@ alias|alias|alias|alias... <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="DEBUGPID"/>debug pid (G)</term> + <term><anchor id="DEBUGPID">debug pid (G)</term> <listitem><para>When using only one log file for more then one forked <ulink url="smbd.8.html">smbd</ulink>-process there may be hard to follow which process outputs which message. This boolean parameter is adds the process-id @@ -1748,7 +1757,7 @@ alias|alias|alias|alias... <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="DEBUGTIMESTAMP"/>debug timestamp (G)</term> + <term><anchor id="DEBUGTIMESTAMP">debug timestamp (G)</term> <listitem><para>Samba debug log messages are timestamped by default. If you are running at a high <link linkend="DEBUGLEVEL"> <parameter>debug level</parameter></link> these timestamps @@ -1761,7 +1770,7 @@ alias|alias|alias|alias... <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="DEBUGUID"/>debug uid (G)</term> + <term><anchor id="DEBUGUID">debug uid (G)</term> <listitem><para>Samba is sometimes run as root and sometime run as the connected user, this boolean parameter inserts the current euid, egid, uid and gid to the timestamp message headers @@ -1777,7 +1786,7 @@ alias|alias|alias|alias... <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="DEBUGLEVEL"/>debuglevel (G)</term> + <term><anchor id="DEBUGLEVEL">debuglevel (G)</term> <listitem><para>Synonym for <link linkend="LOGLEVEL"><parameter> log level</parameter></link>.</para> </listitem> @@ -1786,7 +1795,7 @@ alias|alias|alias|alias... <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="DEFAULT"/>default (G)</term> + <term><anchor id="DEFAULT">default (G)</term> <listitem><para>A synonym for <link linkend="DEFAULTSERVICE"><parameter> default service</parameter></link>.</para></listitem> </varlistentry> @@ -1794,7 +1803,7 @@ alias|alias|alias|alias... <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="DEFAULTCASE"/>default case (S)</term> + <term><anchor id="DEFAULTCASE">default case (S)</term> <listitem><para>See the section on <link linkend="NAMEMANGLINGSECT"> NAME MANGLING</link>. Also note the <link linkend="SHORTPRESERVECASE"> <parameter>short preserve case</parameter></link> parameter.</para> @@ -1806,7 +1815,7 @@ alias|alias|alias|alias... <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="DEFAULTDEVMODE"/>default devmode (S)</term> + <term><anchor id="DEFAULTDEVMODE">default devmode (S)</term> <listitem><para>This parameter is only applicable to <link linkend="PRINTOK">printable</link> services. When smbd is serving Printer Drivers to Windows NT/2k/XP clients, each printer on the Samba @@ -1844,7 +1853,7 @@ alias|alias|alias|alias... <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="DEFAULTSERVICE"/>default service (G)</term> + <term><anchor id="DEFAULTSERVICE">default service (G)</term> <listitem><para>This parameter specifies the name of a service which will be connected to if the service actually requested cannot be found. Note that the square brackets are <emphasis>NOT</emphasis> @@ -1870,27 +1879,24 @@ alias|alias|alias|alias... <para>Example:</para> -<para><programlisting> + <para><programlisting> [global] default service = pub [pub] path = /%S -</programlisting></para> + </programlisting></para> </listitem> </varlistentry> - <varlistentry><term><anchor id="DELETEGROUPSCRIPT"/>delete group script (G)</term> + <varlistentry><term><anchor id="DELETEGROUPSCRIPT">delete group script (G)</term> <listitem><para>This is the full pathname to a script that will - be run <emphasis>AS ROOT</emphasis> <citerefentry><refentrytitle>smbd</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>8</manvolnum></citerefentry> when a group is requested to be deleted. - It will expand any <parameter>%g</parameter> to the group name passed. - This script is only useful for installations using the Windows NT domain administration tools. + be run <emphasis>AS ROOT</emphasis> by <ulink url="smbd.8.html">smbd(8)</ulink> when a group is requested to be deleted. It will expand any <parameter>%g</parameter> to the group name passed. This script is only useful for installations using the Windows NT domain administration tools. </para></listitem> </varlistentry> <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="DELETEPRINTERCOMMAND"/>deleteprinter command (G)</term> + <term><anchor id="DELETEPRINTERCOMMAND">deleteprinter command (G)</term> <listitem><para>With the introduction of MS-RPC based printer support for Windows NT/2000 clients in Samba 2.2, it is now possible to delete printer at run time by issuing the @@ -1916,7 +1922,7 @@ alias|alias|alias|alias... <para>See also <link linkend="ADDPRINTERCOMMAND"><parameter> addprinter command</parameter></link>, <link - linkend="PRINTING"><parameter>printing</parameter></link>, + linkend="printing"><parameter>printing</parameter></link>, <link linkend="SHOWADDPRINTERWIZARD"><parameter>show add printer wizard</parameter></link></para> @@ -1932,7 +1938,7 @@ alias|alias|alias|alias... <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="DELETEREADONLY"/>delete readonly (S)</term> + <term><anchor id="DELETEREADONLY">delete readonly (S)</term> <listitem><para>This parameter allows readonly files to be deleted. This is not normal DOS semantics, but is allowed by UNIX.</para> @@ -1946,7 +1952,7 @@ alias|alias|alias|alias... <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="DELETESHARECOMMAND"/>delete share command (G)</term> + <term><anchor id="DELETESHARECOMMAND">delete share command (G)</term> <listitem><para>Samba 2.2.0 introduced the ability to dynamically add and delete shares via the Windows NT 4.0 Server Manager. The <parameter>delete share command</parameter> is used to define an @@ -1994,11 +2000,10 @@ alias|alias|alias|alias... <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="DELETEUSERSCRIPT"/>delete user script (G)</term> + <term><anchor id="DELETEUSERSCRIPT">delete user script (G)</term> <listitem><para>This is the full pathname to a script that will - be run by <citerefentry><refentrytitle>smbd</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>8</manvolnum></citerefentry> when managing users - with remote RPC (NT) tools. + be run by <ulink url="smbd.8.html"><command>smbd(8)</command></ulink> + when managing user's with remote RPC (NT) tools. </para> <para>This script is called when a remote client removes a user @@ -2016,13 +2021,13 @@ alias|alias|alias|alias... </varlistentry> <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="DELETEUSERFROMGROUPSCRIPT"/>delete user from group script (G)</term> + <term><anchor id="DELETEUSERFROMGROUPSCRIPT">delete user from group script (G)</term> <listitem><para>Full path to the script that will be called when a user is removed from a group using the Windows NT domain administration - tools. It will be run by <citerefentry><refentrytitle>smbd</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>8</manvolnum></citerefentry> <emphasis>AS ROOT</emphasis>. - Any <parameter>%g</parameter> will be replaced with the group name and - any <parameter>%u</parameter> will be replaced with the user name. + tools. It will be run by <ulink url="smbd.8.html">smbd(8)</ulink> + <emphasis>AS ROOT</emphasis>. Any <parameter>%g</parameter> will be + replaced with the group name and any <parameter>%u</parameter> will + be replaced with the user name. </para> <para>Default: <command>delete user from group script = </command></para> @@ -2033,7 +2038,7 @@ alias|alias|alias|alias... </varlistentry> <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="DELETEVETOFILES"/>delete veto files (S)</term> + <term><anchor id="DELETEVETOFILES">delete veto files (S)</term> <listitem><para>This option is used when Samba is attempting to delete a directory that contains one or more vetoed directories (see the <link linkend="VETOFILES"><parameter>veto files</parameter></link> @@ -2062,7 +2067,7 @@ alias|alias|alias|alias... <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="DENYHOSTS"/>deny hosts (S)</term> + <term><anchor id="DENYHOSTS">deny hosts (S)</term> <listitem><para>Synonym for <link linkend="HOSTSDENY"><parameter>hosts deny</parameter></link>.</para></listitem> </varlistentry> @@ -2071,7 +2076,7 @@ alias|alias|alias|alias... <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="DFREECOMMAND"/>dfree command (G)</term> + <term><anchor id="DFREECOMMAND">dfree command (G)</term> <listitem><para>The <parameter>dfree command</parameter> setting should only be used on systems where a problem occurs with the internal disk space calculations. This has been known to happen with Ultrix, @@ -2104,17 +2109,17 @@ alias|alias|alias|alias... <para>Where the script dfree (which must be made executable) could be:</para> -<para><programlisting> -#!/bin/sh -df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' -</programlisting></para> + <para><programlisting> + #!/bin/sh + df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' + </programlisting></para> <para>or perhaps (on Sys V based systems):</para> -<para><programlisting> -#!/bin/sh -/usr/bin/df -k $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $3" "$5}' -</programlisting></para> + <para><programlisting> + #!/bin/sh + /usr/bin/df -k $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $3" "$5}' + </programlisting></para> <para>Note that you may have to replace the command names with full path names on some systems.</para> @@ -2125,7 +2130,7 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="DIRECTORY"/>directory (S)</term> + <term><anchor id="DIRECTORY">directory (S)</term> <listitem><para>Synonym for <link linkend="PATH"><parameter>path </parameter></link>.</para></listitem> </varlistentry> @@ -2133,7 +2138,7 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="DIRECTORYMASK"/>directory mask (S)</term> + <term><anchor id="DIRECTORYMASK">directory mask (S)</term> <listitem><para>This parameter is the octal modes which are used when converting DOS modes to UNIX modes when creating UNIX directories.</para> @@ -2181,7 +2186,7 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="DIRECTORYMODE"/>directory mode (S)</term> + <term><anchor id="DIRECTORYMODE">directory mode (S)</term> <listitem><para>Synonym for <link linkend="DIRECTORYMASK"><parameter> directory mask</parameter></link></para></listitem> </varlistentry> @@ -2189,7 +2194,7 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="DIRECTORYSECURITYMASK"/>directory security mask (S)</term> + <term><anchor id="DIRECTORYSECURITYMASK">directory security mask (S)</term> <listitem><para>This parameter controls what UNIX permission bits can be modified when a Windows NT client is manipulating the UNIX permission on a directory using the native NT security dialog @@ -2224,7 +2229,7 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="DISABLENETBIOS"/>disable netbios (G)</term> + <term><anchor id="DISABLENETBIOS">disable netbios (G)</term> <listitem><para>Enabling this parameter will disable netbios support in Samba. Netbios is the only available form of browsing in all windows versions except for 2000 and XP. </para> @@ -2239,7 +2244,7 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' </varlistentry> <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="DISABLESPOOLSS"/>disable spoolss (G)</term> + <term><anchor id="DISABLESPOOLSS">disable spoolss (G)</term> <listitem><para>Enabling this parameter will disable Samba's support for the SPOOLSS set of MS-RPC's and will yield identical behavior as Samba 2.0.x. Windows NT/2000 clients will downgrade to using @@ -2260,7 +2265,7 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' </varlistentry> <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="DISPLAYCHARSET"/>display charset (G)</term> + <term><anchor id="DISPLAYCHARSET">display charset (G)</term> <listitem><para>Specifies the charset that samba will use to print messages to stdout and stderr and SWAT will use. Should generally be the same as the <command>unix charset</command>. @@ -2275,12 +2280,12 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="DNSPROXY"/>dns proxy (G)</term> - <listitem><para>Specifies that <citerefentry><refentrytitle>nmbd</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>8</manvolnum></citerefentry> when acting as a WINS server and - finding that a NetBIOS name has not been registered, should treat the - NetBIOS name word-for-word as a DNS name and do a lookup with the DNS server - for that name on behalf of the name-querying client.</para> + <term><anchor id="DNSPROXY">dns proxy (G)</term> + <listitem><para>Specifies that <ulink url="nmbd.8.html">nmbd(8)</ulink> + when acting as a WINS server and finding that a NetBIOS name has not + been registered, should treat the NetBIOS name word-for-word as a DNS + name and do a lookup with the DNS server for that name on behalf of + the name-querying client.</para> <para>Note that the maximum length for a NetBIOS name is 15 characters, so the DNS name (or DNS alias) can likewise only be @@ -2298,7 +2303,7 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="DOMAINLOGONS"/>domain logons (G)</term> + <term><anchor id="DOMAINLOGONS">domain logons (G)</term> <listitem><para>If set to <constant>yes</constant>, the Samba server will serve Windows 95/98 Domain logons for the <link linkend="WORKGROUP"> <parameter>workgroup</parameter></link> it is in. Samba 2.2 @@ -2313,20 +2318,20 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="DOMAINMASTER"/>domain master (G)</term> - <listitem><para>Tell <citerefentry><refentrytitle>smbd</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>8</manvolnum></citerefentry> to enable WAN-wide browse list + <term><anchor id="DOMAINMASTER">domain master (G)</term> + <listitem><para>Tell <ulink url="nmbd.8.html"><command> + nmbd(8)</command></ulink> to enable WAN-wide browse list collation. Setting this option causes <command>nmbd</command> to claim a special domain specific NetBIOS name that identifies it as a domain master browser for its given <link linkend="WORKGROUP"> <parameter>workgroup</parameter></link>. Local master browsers in the same <parameter>workgroup</parameter> on broadcast-isolated subnets will give this <command>nmbd</command> their local browse lists, - and then ask <citerefentry><refentrytitle>smbd</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>8</manvolnum></citerefentry> for a complete copy of the browse - list for the whole wide area network. Browser clients will then contact - their local master browser, and will receive the domain-wide browse list, - instead of just the list for their broadcast-isolated subnet.</para> + and then ask <ulink url="smbd.8.html"><command>smbd(8)</command></ulink> + for a complete copy of the browse list for the whole wide area + network. Browser clients will then contact their local master browser, + and will receive the domain-wide browse list, instead of just the list + for their broadcast-isolated subnet.</para> <para>Note that Windows NT Primary Domain Controllers expect to be able to claim this <parameter>workgroup</parameter> specific special @@ -2351,7 +2356,7 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="DONTDESCEND"/>dont descend (S)</term> + <term><anchor id="DONTDESCEND">dont descend (S)</term> <listitem><para>There are certain directories on some systems (e.g., the <filename>/proc</filename> tree under Linux) that are either not of interest to clients or are infinitely deep (recursive). This @@ -2370,22 +2375,22 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' </varlistentry> <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="DOSCHARSET"/>dos charset (G)</term> + <term><anchor id="DOSCHARSET">dos charset (G)</term> <listitem><para>DOS SMB clients assume the server has the same charset as they do. This option specifies which charset Samba should talk to DOS clients. </para> - <para>The default depends on which charsets you have installed. + <para>The default depends on which charsets you have instaled. Samba tries to use charset 850 but falls back to ASCII in - case it is not available. Run <citerefentry><refentrytitle>testparm</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>1</manvolnum></citerefentry> to check the default on your system. + case it is not available. Run <ulink url="testparm.1.html">testparm(1) + </ulink> to check the default on your system. </para> </listitem> </varlistentry> <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="DOSFILEMODE"/>dos filemode (S)</term> + <term><anchor id="DOSFILEMODE">dos filemode (S)</term> <listitem><para> The default behavior in Samba is to provide UNIX-like behavior where only the owner of a file/directory is able to change the permissions on it. However, this behavior @@ -2404,13 +2409,13 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="DOSFILETIMERESOLUTION"/>dos filetime resolution (S)</term> + <term><anchor id="DOSFILETIMERESOLUTION">dos filetime resolution (S)</term> <listitem><para>Under the DOS and Windows FAT filesystem, the finest granularity on time resolution is two seconds. Setting this parameter for a share causes Samba to round the reported time down to the nearest two second boundary when a query call that requires one second - resolution is made to <citerefentry><refentrytitle>smbd</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>8</manvolnum></citerefentry>.</para> + resolution is made to <ulink url="smbd.8.html"><command>smbd(8)</command> + </ulink>.</para> <para>This option is mainly used as a compatibility option for Visual C++ when used against Samba shares. If oplocks are enabled on a @@ -2430,15 +2435,14 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="DOSFILETIMES"/>dos filetimes (S)</term> + <term><anchor id="DOSFILETIMES">dos filetimes (S)</term> <listitem><para>Under DOS and Windows, if a user can write to a file they can change the timestamp on it. Under POSIX semantics, only the owner of the file or root may change the timestamp. By default, Samba runs with POSIX semantics and refuses to change the timestamp on a file if the user <command>smbd</command> is acting on behalf of is not the file owner. Setting this option to <constant> - yes</constant> allows DOS semantics and <citerefentry><refentrytitle>smbd</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>8</manvolnum></citerefentry> will change the file + yes</constant> allows DOS semantics and <ulink url="smbd.8.html">smbd</ulink> will change the file timestamp as DOS requires.</para> <para>Default: <command>dos filetimes = no</command></para></listitem> @@ -2447,19 +2451,19 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="ENCRYPTPASSWORDS"/>encrypt passwords (G)</term> + <term><anchor id="ENCRYPTPASSWORDS">encrypt passwords (G)</term> <listitem><para>This boolean controls whether encrypted passwords will be negotiated with the client. Note that Windows NT 4.0 SP3 and above and also Windows 98 will by default expect encrypted passwords unless a registry entry is changed. To use encrypted passwords in - Samba see the chapter User Database in the Samba HOWTO Collection.</para> + Samba see the file ENCRYPTION.txt in the Samba documentation + directory <filename>docs/</filename> shipped with the source code.</para> <para>In order for encrypted passwords to work correctly - <citerefentry><refentrytitle>smbd</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>8</manvolnum></citerefentry> must either - have access to a local <citerefentry><refentrytitle>smbpasswd</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>5</manvolnum></citerefentry> file (see the <citerefentry><refentrytitle>smbpasswd</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>8</manvolnum></citerefentry> program for information on how to set up + <ulink url="smbd.8.html"><command>smbd(8)</command></ulink> must either + have access to a local <ulink url="smbpasswd.5.html"><filename>smbpasswd(5) + </filename></ulink> file (see the <ulink url="smbpasswd.8.html"><command> + smbpasswd(8)</command></ulink> program for information on how to set up and maintain this file), or set the <link linkend="SECURITY">security = [server|domain|ads]</link> parameter which causes <command>smbd</command> to authenticate against another @@ -2470,7 +2474,7 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="ENHANCEDBROWSING"/>enhanced browsing (G)</term> + <term><anchor id="ENHANCEDBROWSING">enhanced browsing (G)</term> <listitem><para>This option enables a couple of enhancements to cross-subnet browse propagation that have been added in Samba but which are not standard in Microsoft implementations. @@ -2496,7 +2500,7 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="ENUMPORTSCOMMAND"/>enumports command (G)</term> + <term><anchor id="ENUMPORTSCOMMAND">enumports command (G)</term> <listitem><para>The concept of a "port" is fairly foreign to UNIX hosts. Under Windows NT/2000 print servers, a port is associated with a port monitor and generally takes the form of @@ -2519,7 +2523,7 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' </varlistentry> <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="EXEC"/>exec (S)</term> + <term><anchor id="EXEC">exec (S)</term> <listitem><para>This is a synonym for <link linkend="PREEXEC"> <parameter>preexec</parameter></link>.</para></listitem> </varlistentry> @@ -2527,7 +2531,7 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="FAKEDIRECTORYCREATETIMES"/>fake directory create times (S)</term> + <term><anchor id="FAKEDIRECTORYCREATETIMES">fake directory create times (S)</term> <listitem><para>NTFS and Windows VFAT file systems keep a create time for all files and directories. This is not the same as the ctime - status change time - that Unix keeps, so Samba by default @@ -2561,7 +2565,7 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="FAKEOPLOCKS"/>fake oplocks (S)</term> + <term><anchor id="FAKEOPLOCKS">fake oplocks (S)</term> <listitem><para>Oplocks are the way that SMB clients get permission from a server to locally cache file operations. If a server grants an oplock (opportunistic lock) then the client is free to assume @@ -2593,11 +2597,10 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="FOLLOWSYMLINKS"/>follow symlinks (S)</term> + <term><anchor id="FOLLOWSYMLINKS">follow symlinks (S)</term> <listitem><para>This parameter allows the Samba administrator - to stop <citerefentry><refentrytitle>smbd</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>8</manvolnum></citerefentry> from following symbolic - links in a particular share. Setting this + to stop <ulink url="smbd.8.html"><command>smbd(8)</command></ulink> + from following symbolic links in a particular share. Setting this parameter to <constant>no</constant> prevents any file or directory that is a symbolic link from being followed (the user will get an error). This option is very useful to stop users from adding a @@ -2614,7 +2617,7 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="FORCECREATEMODE"/>force create mode (S)</term> + <term><anchor id="FORCECREATEMODE">force create mode (S)</term> <listitem><para>This parameter specifies a set of UNIX mode bit permissions that will <emphasis>always</emphasis> be set on a file created by Samba. This is done by bitwise 'OR'ing these bits onto @@ -2642,7 +2645,7 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="FORCEDIRECTORYMODE"/>force directory mode (S)</term> + <term><anchor id="FORCEDIRECTORYMODE">force directory mode (S)</term> <listitem><para>This parameter specifies a set of UNIX mode bit permissions that will <emphasis>always</emphasis> be set on a directory created by Samba. This is done by bitwise 'OR'ing these bits onto the @@ -2671,7 +2674,7 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="FORCEDIRECTORYSECURITYMODE"/>force directory security mode (S)</term> + <term><anchor id="FORCEDIRECTORYSECURITYMODE">force directory security mode (S)</term> <listitem><para>This parameter controls what UNIX permission bits can be modified when a Windows NT client is manipulating the UNIX permission on a directory using the native NT security dialog box.</para> @@ -2707,7 +2710,7 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="FORCEGROUP"/>force group (S)</term> + <term><anchor id="FORCEGROUP">force group (S)</term> <listitem><para>This specifies a UNIX group name that will be assigned as the default primary group for all users connecting to this service. This is useful for sharing files by ensuring @@ -2743,7 +2746,7 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' </varlistentry> <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="FORCESECURITYMODE"/>force security mode (S)</term> + <term><anchor id="FORCESECURITYMODE">force security mode (S)</term> <listitem><para>This parameter controls what UNIX permission bits can be modified when a Windows NT client is manipulating the UNIX permission on a file using the native NT security dialog @@ -2781,7 +2784,7 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="FORCEUSER"/>force user (S)</term> + <term><anchor id="FORCEUSER">force user (S)</term> <listitem><para>This specifies a UNIX user name that will be assigned as the default user for all users connecting to this service. This is useful for sharing files. You should also use it carefully @@ -2809,11 +2812,11 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="FSTYPE"/>fstype (S)</term> + <term><anchor id="FSTYPE">fstype (S)</term> <listitem><para>This parameter allows the administrator to configure the string that specifies the type of filesystem a share - is using that is reported by <citerefentry><refentrytitle>smbd</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>8</manvolnum></citerefentry> when a client queries the filesystem type + is using that is reported by <ulink url="smbd.8.html"><command>smbd(8) + </command></ulink> when a client queries the filesystem type for a share. The default type is <constant>NTFS</constant> for compatibility with Windows NT but this can be changed to other strings such as <constant>Samba</constant> or <constant>FAT @@ -2826,7 +2829,7 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="GETWDCACHE"/>getwd cache (G)</term> + <term><anchor id="GETWDCACHE">getwd cache (G)</term> <listitem><para>This is a tuning option. When this is enabled a caching algorithm will be used to reduce the time taken for getwd() calls. This can have a significant impact on performance, especially @@ -2840,7 +2843,7 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="GROUP"/>group (S)</term> + <term><anchor id="GROUP">group (S)</term> <listitem><para>Synonym for <link linkend="FORCEGROUP"><parameter>force group</parameter></link>.</para></listitem> </varlistentry> @@ -2848,7 +2851,7 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="GUESTACCOUNT"/>guest account (S)</term> + <term><anchor id="GUESTACCOUNT">guest account (S)</term> <listitem><para>This is a username which will be used for access to services which are specified as <link linkend="GUESTOK"><parameter> guest ok</parameter></link> (see below). Whatever privileges this @@ -2878,16 +2881,12 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="GUESTOK"/>guest ok (S)</term> + <term><anchor id="GUESTOK">guest ok (S)</term> <listitem><para>If this parameter is <constant>yes</constant> for a service, then no password is required to connect to the service. Privileges will be those of the <link linkend="GUESTACCOUNT"><parameter> guest account</parameter></link>.</para> - <para>This paramater nullifies the benifits of setting - <link linkend="RESTRICTANONYMOUS"><parameter>restrict - anonymous</parameter></link> = 2</para> - <para>See the section below on <link linkend="SECURITY"><parameter> security</parameter></link> for more information about this option. </para> @@ -2898,7 +2897,7 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="GUESTONLY"/>guest only (S)</term> + <term><anchor id="GUESTONLY">guest only (S)</term> <listitem><para>If this parameter is <constant>yes</constant> for a service, then only guest connections to the service are permitted. This parameter will have no effect if <link linkend="GUESTOK"> @@ -2914,7 +2913,7 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="HIDEDOTFILES"/>hide dot files (S)</term> + <term><anchor id="HIDEDOTFILES">hide dot files (S)</term> <listitem><para>This is a boolean parameter that controls whether files starting with a dot appear as hidden files.</para> @@ -2924,7 +2923,7 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="HIDEFILES"/>hide files(S)</term> + <term><anchor id="HIDEFILES">hide files(S)</term> <listitem><para>This is a list of files or directories that are not visible but are accessible. The DOS 'hidden' attribute is applied to any files or directories that match.</para> @@ -2962,7 +2961,7 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="HIDELOCALUSERS"/>hide local users(G)</term> + <term><anchor id="HIDELOCALUSERS">hide local users(G)</term> <listitem><para>This parameter toggles the hiding of local UNIX users (root, wheel, floppy, etc) from remote clients.</para> @@ -2972,7 +2971,7 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="HIDEUNREADABLE"/>hide unreadable (G)</term> + <term><anchor id="HIDEUNREADABLE">hide unreadable (G)</term> <listitem><para>This parameter prevents clients from seeing the existance of files that cannot be read. Defaults to off.</para> @@ -2981,7 +2980,7 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' </varlistentry> <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="HIDEUNWRITEABLEFILES"/>hide unwriteable files (G)</term> + <term><anchor id="HIDEUNWRITEABLEFILES">hide unwriteable files (G)</term> <listitem><para>This parameter prevents clients from seeing the existance of files that cannot be written to. Defaults to off. Note that unwriteable directories are shown as usual. @@ -2992,7 +2991,7 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' </varlistentry> <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="HIDESPECIALFILES"/>hide special files (G)</term> + <term><anchor id="HIDESPECIALFILES">hide special files (G)</term> <listitem><para>This parameter prevents clients from seeing special files such as sockets, devices and fifo's in directory listings. @@ -3003,10 +3002,10 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' </varlistentry> <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="HOMEDIRMAP"/>homedir map (G)</term> + <term><anchor id="HOMEDIRMAP">homedir map (G)</term> <listitem><para>If<link linkend="NISHOMEDIR"><parameter>nis homedir - </parameter></link> is <constant>yes</constant>, and <citerefentry><refentrytitle>smbd</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>8</manvolnum></citerefentry> is also acting + </parameter></link> is <constant>yes</constant>, and <ulink + url="smbd.8.html"><command>smbd(8)</command></ulink> is also acting as a Win95/98 <parameter>logon server</parameter> then this parameter specifies the NIS (or YP) map from which the server for the user's home directory should be extracted. At present, only the Sun @@ -3019,8 +3018,8 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' that copes with different map formats and also Amd (another automounter) maps.</para> - <note><para>A working NIS client is required on - the system for this option to work.</para></note> + <para><emphasis>NOTE :</emphasis>A working NIS client is required on + the system for this option to work.</para> <para>See also <link linkend="NISHOMEDIR"><parameter>nis homedir</parameter> </link>, <link linkend="DOMAINLOGONS"><parameter>domain logons</parameter> @@ -3036,7 +3035,7 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="HOSTMSDFS"/>host msdfs (G)</term> + <term><anchor id="HOSTMSDFS">host msdfs (G)</term> <listitem><para>This boolean parameter is only available if Samba has been configured and compiled with the <command> --with-msdfs</command> option. If set to <constant>yes</constant>, @@ -3054,7 +3053,7 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' </varlistentry> <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="HOSTNAMELOOKUPS"/>hostname lookups (G)</term> + <term><anchor id="HOSTNAMELOOKUPS">hostname lookups (G)</term> <listitem><para>Specifies whether samba should use (expensive) hostname lookups or use the ip addresses instead. An example place where hostname lookups are currently used is when checking @@ -3070,7 +3069,7 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="HOSTSALLOW"/>hosts allow (S)</term> + <term><anchor id="HOSTSALLOW">hosts allow (S)</term> <listitem><para>A synonym for this parameter is <parameter>allow hosts</parameter>.</para> @@ -3119,9 +3118,9 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' <para>Note that access still requires suitable user-level passwords.</para> - <para>See <citerefentry><refentrytitle>testparm</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>1</manvolnum></citerefentry> for a way of testing your host access - to see if it does what you expect.</para> + <para>See <ulink url="testparm.1.html"><command>testparm(1)</command> + </ulink> for a way of testing your host access to see if it does + what you expect.</para> <para>Default: <emphasis>none (i.e., all hosts permitted access) </emphasis></para> @@ -3134,7 +3133,7 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="HOSTSDENY"/>hosts deny (S)</term> + <term><anchor id="HOSTSDENY">hosts deny (S)</term> <listitem><para>The opposite of <parameter>hosts allow</parameter> - hosts listed here are <emphasis>NOT</emphasis> permitted access to services unless the specific services have their own lists to override @@ -3151,7 +3150,7 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="HOSTSEQUIV"/>hosts equiv (G)</term> + <term><anchor id="HOSTSEQUIV">hosts equiv (G)</term> <listitem><para>If this global parameter is a non-null string, it specifies the name of a file to read for the names of hosts and users who will be allowed access without specifying a password. @@ -3163,14 +3162,14 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' hosts equiv</parameter> may be useful for NT clients which will not supply passwords to Samba.</para> - <note><para>The use of <parameter>hosts equiv + <para><emphasis>NOTE :</emphasis> The use of <parameter>hosts equiv </parameter> can be a major security hole. This is because you are trusting the PC to supply the correct username. It is very easy to get a PC to supply a false username. I recommend that the <parameter>hosts equiv</parameter> option be only used if you really know what you are doing, or perhaps on a home network where you trust your spouse and kids. And only if you <emphasis>really</emphasis> trust - them :-).</para></note> + them :-).</para> <para>Default: <emphasis>no host equivalences</emphasis></para> <para>Example: <command>hosts equiv = /etc/hosts.equiv</command></para> @@ -3180,7 +3179,7 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="INCLUDE"/>include (G)</term> + <term><anchor id="INCLUDE">include (G)</term> <listitem><para>This allows you to include one config file inside another. The file is included literally, as though typed in place.</para> @@ -3197,7 +3196,7 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="INHERITACLS"/>inherit acls (S)</term> + <term><anchor id="INHERITACLS">inherit acls (S)</term> <listitem><para>This parameter can be used to ensure that if default acls exist on parent directories, they are always honored when creating a subdirectory. @@ -3215,7 +3214,7 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="INHERITPERMISSIONS"/>inherit permissions (S)</term> + <term><anchor id="INHERITPERMISSIONS">inherit permissions (S)</term> <listitem><para>The permissions on new files and directories are normally governed by <link linkend="CREATEMASK"><parameter> create mask</parameter></link>, <link linkend="DIRECTORYMASK"> @@ -3256,7 +3255,7 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="INTERFACES"/>interfaces (G)</term> + <term><anchor id="INTERFACES">interfaces (G)</term> <listitem><para>This option allows you to override the default network interfaces list that Samba will use for browsing, name registration and other NBT traffic. By default Samba will query @@ -3308,7 +3307,7 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="INVALIDUSERS"/>invalid users (S)</term> + <term><anchor id="INVALIDUSERS">invalid users (S)</term> <listitem><para>This is a list of users that should not be allowed to login to this service. This is really a <emphasis>paranoid</emphasis> check to absolutely ensure an improper setting does not breach @@ -3320,12 +3319,12 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' <para>A name starting with '+' is interpreted only by looking in the UNIX group database. A name starting with - '&' is interpreted only by looking in the NIS netgroup database + '&' is interpreted only by looking in the NIS netgroup database (this requires NIS to be working on your system). The characters - '+' and '&' may be used at the start of the name in either order + '+' and '&' may be used at the start of the name in either order so the value <parameter>+&group</parameter> means check the UNIX group database, followed by the NIS netgroup database, and - the value <parameter>&+group</parameter> means check the NIS + the value <parameter>&+group</parameter> means check the NIS netgroup database, followed by the UNIX group database (the same as the '@' prefix).</para> @@ -3344,7 +3343,7 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="KEEPALIVE"/>keepalive (G)</term> + <term><anchor id="KEEPALIVE">keepalive (G)</term> <listitem><para>The value of the parameter (an integer) represents the number of seconds between <parameter>keepalive</parameter> packets. If this parameter is zero, no keepalive packets will be @@ -3364,7 +3363,7 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="KERNELOPLOCKS"/>kernel oplocks (G)</term> + <term><anchor id="KERNELOPLOCKS">kernel oplocks (G)</term> <listitem><para>For UNIXes that support kernel based <link linkend="OPLOCKS"><parameter>oplocks</parameter></link> (currently only IRIX and the Linux 2.4 kernel), this parameter @@ -3372,10 +3371,10 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' <para>Kernel oplocks support allows Samba <parameter>oplocks </parameter> to be broken whenever a local UNIX process or NFS operation - accesses a file that <citerefentry><refentrytitle>smbd</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>8</manvolnum></citerefentry> has oplocked. This allows complete - data consistency between SMB/CIFS, NFS and local file access (and is - a <emphasis>very</emphasis> cool feature :-).</para> + accesses a file that <ulink url="smbd.8.html"><command>smbd(8)</command> + </ulink> has oplocked. This allows complete data consistency between + SMB/CIFS, NFS and local file access (and is a <emphasis>very</emphasis> + cool feature :-).</para> <para>This parameter defaults to <constant>on</constant>, but is translated to a no-op on systems that no not have the necessary kernel support. @@ -3393,12 +3392,12 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="LANMANAUTH"/>lanman auth (G)</term> - <listitem><para>This parameter determines whether or not <citerefentry><refentrytitle>smbd</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>8</manvolnum></citerefentry> will attempt to authenticate users - using the LANMAN password hash. If disabled, only clients which support NT - password hashes (e.g. Windows NT/2000 clients, smbclient, etc... but not - Windows 95/98 or the MS DOS network client) will be able to connect to the Samba host.</para> + <term><anchor id="LANMANAUTH">lanman auth (G)</term> + <listitem><para>This parameter determines whether or not <ulink url="smbd.8.html">smbd</ulink> will + attempt to authenticate users using the LANMAN password hash. + If disabled, only clients which support NT password hashes (e.g. Windows + NT/2000 clients, smbclient, etc... but not Windows 95/98 or the MS DOS + network client) will be able to connect to the Samba host.</para> <para>Default : <command>lanman auth = yes</command></para> </listitem> @@ -3409,10 +3408,9 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="LARGEREADWRITE"/>large readwrite (G)</term> - <listitem><para>This parameter determines whether or not <citerefentry><refentrytitle>smbd</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>8</manvolnum></citerefentry> supports the new 64k streaming - read and write varient SMB requests introduced + <term><anchor id="LARGEREADWRITE">large readwrite (G)</term> + <listitem><para>This parameter determines whether or not <ulink url="smbd.8.html">smbd</ulink> + supports the new 64k streaming read and write varient SMB requests introduced with Windows 2000. Note that due to Windows 2000 client redirector bugs this requires Samba to be running on a 64-bit capable operating system such as IRIX, Solaris or a Linux 2.4 kernel. Can improve performance by 10% with @@ -3427,15 +3425,15 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="LDAPADMINDN"/>ldap admin dn (G)</term> - <listitem><para> The <parameter>ldap admin dn</parameter> defines the Distinguished + <term><anchor id="LDAPADMINDN">ldap admin dn (G)</term> + <listitem><para>The <parameter>ldap admin dn</parameter> defines the Distinguished Name (DN) name used by Samba to contact the ldap server when retreiving user account information. The <parameter>ldap admin dn</parameter> is used in conjunction with the admin dn password stored in the <filename>private/secrets.tdb</filename> file. See the - <citerefentry><refentrytitle>smbpasswd</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>8</manvolnum></citerefentry> man page for more information on how - to accmplish this.</para> + <ulink url="smbpasswd.8.html"><command>smbpasswd(8)</command></ulink> man + page for more information on how to accomplish this. + </para> </listitem> </varlistentry> @@ -3452,7 +3450,17 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="LDAPFILTER"/>ldap filter (G)</term> + <term><anchor id="LDAPDELONLYSAMATTR"/>ldap del only sam attr (G)</term> + <listitem><para> Inverted synonym for <link linkend="LDAPDELETEDN"><parameter> + ldap delete dn</parameter></link>. + </para> + </listitem> + </varlistentry> + + + + <varlistentry> + <term><anchor id="LDAPFILTER">ldap filter (G)</term> <listitem><para>This parameter specifies the RFC 2254 compliant LDAP search filter. The default is to match the login name with the <constant>uid</constant> attribute for all entries matching the <constant>sambaAccount</constant> @@ -3466,7 +3474,7 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="LDAPPORT"/>ldap port (G)</term> + <term><anchor id="LDAPPORT">ldap port (G)</term> <listitem><para>This parameter is only available if Samba has been configure to include the <command>--with-ldapsam</command> option at compile time. @@ -3488,7 +3496,7 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="LDAPSERVER"/>ldap server (G)</term> + <term><anchor id="LDAPSERVER">ldap server (G)</term> <listitem><para>This parameter is only available if Samba has been configure to include the <command>--with-ldapsam</command> option at compile time. @@ -3505,7 +3513,7 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="LDAPSSL"/>ldap ssl (G)</term> + <term><anchor id="LDAPSSL">ldap ssl (G)</term> <listitem><para>This option is used to define whether or not Samba should use SSL when connecting to the ldap server This is <emphasis>NOT</emphasis> related to @@ -3539,7 +3547,7 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="LDAPSUFFIX"/>ldap suffix (G)</term> + <term><anchor id="LDAPSUFFIX">ldap suffix (G)</term> <listitem> <para>Specifies where user and machine accounts are added to the tree. Can be overriden by <command>ldap user suffix</command> and <command>ldap machine suffix</command>. It also used as the base dn for all ldap searches. </para> @@ -3550,7 +3558,7 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="LDAPUSERSUFFIX"/>ldap user suffix (G)</term> + <term><anchor id="LDAPUSERSUFFIX">ldap user suffix (G)</term> <listitem><para>It specifies where users are added to the tree. </para> @@ -3563,7 +3571,7 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="LDAPMACHINESUFFIX"/>ldap machine suffix (G)</term> + <term><anchor id="LDAPMACHINESUFFIX">ldap machine suffix (G)</term> <listitem><para>It specifies where machines should be added to the ldap tree. </para> @@ -3575,7 +3583,7 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' </varlistentry> <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="LDAPPASSWDSYNC"/>ldap passwd sync (G)</term> + <term><anchor id="LDAPPASSWDSYNC">ldap passwd sync (G)</term> <listitem><para>This option is used to define whether or not Samba should sync the LDAP password with the NT and LM hashes for normal accounts (NOT for @@ -3599,7 +3607,7 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' </varlistentry> <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="LDAPTRUSTIDS"/>ldap trust ids (G)</term> + <term><anchor id="LDAPTRUSTIDS">ldap trust ids (G)</term> <listitem><para>Normally, Samba validates each entry in the LDAP server against getpwnam(). This allows LDAP to be used for Samba with the unix system using @@ -3618,7 +3626,7 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' </varlistentry> <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="LEVEL2OPLOCKS"/>level2 oplocks (S)</term> + <term><anchor id="LEVEL2OPLOCKS">level2 oplocks (S)</term> <listitem><para>This parameter controls whether Samba supports level2 (read-only) oplocks on a share.</para> @@ -3662,9 +3670,9 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="LMANNOUNCE"/>lm announce (G)</term> - <listitem><para>This parameter determines if <citerefentry><refentrytitle>nmbd</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>8</manvolnum></citerefentry> will produce Lanman announce + <term><anchor id="LMANNOUNCE">lm announce (G)</term> + <listitem><para>This parameter determines if <ulink url="nmbd.8.html"> + <command>nmbd(8)</command></ulink> will produce Lanman announce broadcasts that are needed by OS/2 clients in order for them to see the Samba server in their browse list. This parameter can have three values, <constant>yes</constant>, <constant>no</constant>, or @@ -3689,7 +3697,7 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="LMINTERVAL"/>lm interval (G)</term> + <term><anchor id="LMINTERVAL">lm interval (G)</term> <listitem><para>If Samba is set to produce Lanman announce broadcasts needed by OS/2 clients (see the <link linkend="LMANNOUNCE"> <parameter>lm announce</parameter></link> parameter) then this @@ -3709,7 +3717,7 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="LOADPRINTERS"/>load printers (G)</term> + <term><anchor id="LOADPRINTERS">load printers (G)</term> <listitem><para>A boolean variable that controls whether all printers in the printcap will be loaded for browsing by default. See the <link linkend="PRINTERSSECT">printers</link> section for @@ -3722,9 +3730,9 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="LOCALMASTER"/>local master (G)</term> - <listitem><para>This option allows <citerefentry><refentrytitle>nmbd</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>8</manvolnum></citerefentry> to try and become a local master browser + <term><anchor id="LOCALMASTER">local master (G)</term> + <listitem><para>This option allows <ulink url="nmbd.8.html"><command> + nmbd(8)</command></ulink> to try and become a local master browser on a subnet. If set to <constant>no</constant> then <command> nmbd</command> will not attempt to become a local master browser on a subnet and will also lose in all browsing elections. By @@ -3743,7 +3751,7 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="LOCKDIR"/>lock dir (G)</term> + <term><anchor id="LOCKDIR">lock dir (G)</term> <listitem><para>Synonym for <link linkend="LOCKDIRECTORY"><parameter> lock directory</parameter></link>.</para></listitem> </varlistentry> @@ -3751,7 +3759,7 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="LOCKDIRECTORY"/>lock directory (G)</term> + <term><anchor id="LOCKDIRECTORY">lock directory (G)</term> <listitem><para>This option specifies the directory where lock files will be placed. The lock files are used to implement the <link linkend="MAXCONNECTIONS"><parameter>max connections</parameter> @@ -3765,7 +3773,7 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="LOCKSPINCOUNT"/>lock spin count (G)</term> + <term><anchor id="LOCKSPINCOUNT">lock spin count (G)</term> <listitem><para>This parameter controls the number of times that smbd should attempt to gain a byte range lock on the behalf of a client request. Experiments have shown that @@ -3784,7 +3792,7 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="LOCKSPINTIME"/>lock spin time (G)</term> + <term><anchor id="LOCKSPINTIME">lock spin time (G)</term> <listitem><para>The time in microseconds that smbd should pause before attempting to gain a failed lock. See <link linkend="LOCKSPINCOUNT"><parameter>lock spin @@ -3798,7 +3806,7 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="LOCKING"/>locking (S)</term> + <term><anchor id="LOCKING">locking (S)</term> <listitem><para>This controls whether or not locking will be performed by the server in response to lock requests from the client.</para> @@ -3826,7 +3834,7 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="LOGFILE"/>log file (G)</term> + <term><anchor id="LOGFILE">log file (G)</term> <listitem><para>This option allows you to override the name of the Samba log file (also known as the debug file).</para> @@ -3840,7 +3848,7 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="LOGLEVEL"/>log level (G)</term> + <term><anchor id="LOGLEVEL">log level (G)</term> <listitem><para>The value of the parameter (a astring) allows the debug level (logging level) to be specified in the <filename>smb.conf</filename> file. This parameter has been @@ -3858,7 +3866,7 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="LOGONDRIVE"/>logon drive (G)</term> + <term><anchor id="LOGONDRIVE">logon drive (G)</term> <listitem><para>This parameter specifies the local path to which the home directory will be connected (see <link linkend="LOGONHOME"><parameter>logon home</parameter></link>) @@ -3875,7 +3883,7 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="LOGONHOME"/>logon home (G)</term> + <term><anchor id="LOGONHOME">logon home (G)</term> <listitem><para>This parameter specifies the home directory location when a Win95/98 or NT Workstation logs into a Samba PDC. It allows you to do </para> @@ -3917,7 +3925,7 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="LOGONPATH"/>logon path (G)</term> + <term><anchor id="LOGONPATH">logon path (G)</term> <listitem><para>This parameter specifies the home directory where roaming profiles (NTuser.dat etc files for Windows NT) are stored. Contrary to previous versions of these manual pages, it has @@ -3965,7 +3973,7 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="LOGONSCRIPT"/>logon script (G)</term> + <term><anchor id="LOGONSCRIPT">logon script (G)</term> <listitem><para>This parameter specifies the batch file (.bat) or NT command file (.cmd) to be downloaded and run on a machine when a user successfully logs in. The file must contain the DOS @@ -4007,7 +4015,7 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="LPPAUSECOMMAND"/>lppause command (S)</term> + <term><anchor id="LPPAUSECOMMAND">lppause command (S)</term> <listitem><para>This parameter specifies the command to be executed on the server host in order to stop printing or spooling a specific print job.</para> @@ -4051,7 +4059,7 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="LPQCACHETIME"/>lpq cache time (G)</term> + <term><anchor id="LPQCACHETIME">lpq cache time (G)</term> <listitem><para>This controls how long lpq info will be cached for to prevent the <command>lpq</command> command being called too often. A separate cache is kept for each variation of the <command> @@ -4080,7 +4088,7 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="LPQCOMMAND"/>lpq command (S)</term> + <term><anchor id="LPQCOMMAND">lpq command (S)</term> <listitem><para>This parameter specifies the command to be executed on the server host in order to obtain <command>lpq </command>-style printer status information.</para> @@ -4124,7 +4132,7 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="LPRESUMECOMMAND"/>lpresume command (S)</term> + <term><anchor id="LPRESUMECOMMAND">lpresume command (S)</term> <listitem><para>This parameter specifies the command to be executed on the server host in order to restart or continue printing or spooling a specific print job.</para> @@ -4164,7 +4172,7 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="LPRMCOMMAND"/>lprm command (S)</term> + <term><anchor id="LPRMCOMMAND">lprm command (S)</term> <listitem><para>This parameter specifies the command to be executed on the server host in order to delete a print job.</para> @@ -4194,7 +4202,7 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="MACHINEPASSWORDTIMEOUT"/>machine password timeout (G)</term> + <term><anchor id="MACHINEPASSWORDTIMEOUT">machine password timeout (G)</term> <listitem><para>If a Samba server is a member of a Windows NT Domain (see the <link linkend="SECURITYEQUALSDOMAIN">security = domain</link>) parameter) then periodically a running <ulink url="smbd.8.html"> @@ -4204,8 +4212,8 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' will be changed, in seconds. The default is one week (expressed in seconds), the same as a Windows NT Domain member server.</para> - <para>See also <citerefentry><refentrytitle>smbpasswd</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>8</manvolnum></citerefentry>, and the <link linkend="SECURITYEQUALSDOMAIN"> + <para>See also <ulink url="smbpasswd.8.html"><command>smbpasswd(8) + </command></ulink>, and the <link linkend="SECURITYEQUALSDOMAIN"> security = domain</link>) parameter.</para> <para>Default: <command>machine password timeout = 604800</command></para> @@ -4214,7 +4222,7 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="MAGICOUTPUT"/>magic output (S)</term> + <term><anchor id="MAGICOUTPUT">magic output (S)</term> <listitem><para>This parameter specifies the name of a file which will contain output created by a magic script (see the <link linkend="MAGICSCRIPT"><parameter>magic script</parameter></link> @@ -4234,7 +4242,7 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="MAGICSCRIPT"/>magic script (S)</term> + <term><anchor id="MAGICSCRIPT">magic script (S)</term> <listitem><para>This parameter specifies the name of a file which, if opened, will be executed by the server when the file is closed. This allows a UNIX script to be sent to the Samba host and @@ -4265,7 +4273,7 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="MANGLECASE"/>mangle case (S)</term> + <term><anchor id="MANGLECASE">mangle case (S)</term> <listitem><para>See the section on <link linkend="NAMEMANGLINGSECT"> NAME MANGLING</link></para> @@ -4275,7 +4283,7 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="MANGLEDMAP"/>mangled map (S)</term> + <term><anchor id="MANGLEDMAP">mangled map (S)</term> <listitem><para>This is for those who want to directly map UNIX file names which cannot be represented on Windows/DOS. The mangling of names is not always what is needed. In particular you may have @@ -4300,7 +4308,7 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="MANGLEDNAMES"/>mangled names (S)</term> + <term><anchor id="MANGLEDNAMES">mangled names (S)</term> <listitem><para>This controls whether non-DOS names under UNIX should be mapped to DOS-compatible names ("mangled") and made visible, or whether non-DOS names should simply be ignored.</para> @@ -4359,7 +4367,7 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' </varlistentry> <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="MANGLINGMETHOD"/>mangling method (G)</term> + <term><anchor id="MANGLINGMETHOD">mangling method (G)</term> <listitem><para> controls the algorithm used for the generating the mangled names. Can take two different values, "hash" and "hash2". "hash" is the default and is the algorithm that has been @@ -4374,7 +4382,7 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' </varlistentry> <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="MANGLEPREFIX"/>mangle prefix (G)</term> + <term><anchor id="MANGLEPREFIX">mangle prefix (G)</term> <listitem><para> controls the number of prefix characters from the original name used when generating the mangled names. A larger value will give a weaker @@ -4386,10 +4394,10 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' </varlistentry> <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="MANGLEDSTACK"/>mangled stack (G)</term> + <term><anchor id="MANGLEDSTACK">mangled stack (G)</term> <listitem><para>This parameter controls the number of mangled names - that should be cached in the Samba server <citerefentry><refentrytitle>smbd</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>8</manvolnum></citerefentry>.</para> + that should be cached in the Samba server <ulink url="smbd.8.html"> + smbd(8)</ulink>.</para> <para>This stack is a list of recently mangled base names (extensions are only maintained if they are longer than 3 characters @@ -4413,7 +4421,7 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="MANGLINGCHAR"/>mangling char (S)</term> + <term><anchor id="MANGLINGCHAR">mangling char (S)</term> <listitem><para>This controls what character is used as the <emphasis>magic</emphasis> character in <link linkend="NAMEMANGLINGSECT">name mangling</link>. The default is a '~' @@ -4430,7 +4438,7 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="MAPARCHIVE"/>map archive (S)</term> + <term><anchor id="MAPARCHIVE">map archive (S)</term> <listitem><para>This controls whether the DOS archive attribute should be mapped to the UNIX owner execute bit. The DOS archive bit is set when a file has been modified since its last backup. One @@ -4450,7 +4458,7 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="MAPHIDDEN"/>map hidden (S)</term> + <term><anchor id="MAPHIDDEN">map hidden (S)</term> <listitem><para>This controls whether DOS style hidden files should be mapped to the UNIX world execute bit.</para> @@ -4465,7 +4473,7 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="MAPSYSTEM"/>map system (S)</term> + <term><anchor id="MAPSYSTEM">map system (S)</term> <listitem><para>This controls whether DOS style system files should be mapped to the UNIX group execute bit.</para> @@ -4480,15 +4488,14 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="MAPTOGUEST"/>map to guest (G)</term> + <term><anchor id="MAPTOGUEST">map to guest (G)</term> <listitem><para>This parameter is only useful in <link linkend="SECURITY"> security</link> modes other than <parameter>security = share</parameter> - i.e. <constant>user</constant>, <constant>server</constant>, and <constant>domain</constant>.</para> <para>This parameter can take three different values, which tell - <citerefentry><refentrytitle>smbd</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>8</manvolnum></citerefentry> what to do with user + <ulink url="smbd.8.html">smbd(8)</ulink> what to do with user login requests that don't match a valid UNIX user in some way.</para> <para>The three settings are :</para> @@ -4536,7 +4543,7 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="MAXCONNECTIONS"/>max connections (S)</term> + <term><anchor id="MAXCONNECTIONS">max connections (S)</term> <listitem><para>This option allows the number of simultaneous connections to a service to be limited. If <parameter>max connections </parameter> is greater than 0 then connections will be refused if @@ -4556,7 +4563,7 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="MAXDISKSIZE"/>max disk size (G)</term> + <term><anchor id="MAXDISKSIZE">max disk size (G)</term> <listitem><para>This option allows you to put an upper limit on the apparent size of disks. If you set this option to 100 then all shares will appear to be not larger than 100 MB in @@ -4583,7 +4590,7 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="MAXLOGSIZE"/>max log size (G)</term> + <term><anchor id="MAXLOGSIZE">max log size (G)</term> <listitem><para>This option (an integer in kilobytes) specifies the max size the log file should grow to. Samba periodically checks the size and if it is exceeded it will rename the file, adding @@ -4599,7 +4606,7 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="MAXMUX"/>max mux (G)</term> + <term><anchor id="MAXMUX">max mux (G)</term> <listitem><para>This option controls the maximum number of outstanding simultaneous SMB operations that Samba tells the client it will allow. You should never need to set this parameter.</para> @@ -4611,10 +4618,9 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="MAXOPENFILES"/>max open files (G)</term> + <term><anchor id="MAXOPENFILES">max open files (G)</term> <listitem><para>This parameter limits the maximum number of - open files that one <citerefentry><refentrytitle>smbd</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>8</manvolnum></citerefentry> file + open files that one <ulink url="smbd.8.html">smbd(8)</ulink> file serving process may have open for a client at any one time. The default for this parameter is set very high (10,000) as Samba uses only one bit per unopened file.</para> @@ -4630,11 +4636,11 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="MAXPRINTJOBS"/>max print jobs (S)</term> + <term><anchor id="MAXPRINTJOBS">max print jobs (S)</term> <listitem><para>This parameter limits the maximum number of jobs allowable in a Samba printer queue at any given moment. - If this number is exceeded, <citerefentry><refentrytitle>smbd</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>8</manvolnum></citerefentry> will remote "Out of Space" to the client. + If this number is exceeded, <ulink url="smbd.8.html"><command> + smbd(8)</command></ulink> will remote "Out of Space" to the client. See all <link linkend="TOTALPRINTJOBS"><parameter>total print jobs</parameter></link>. </para> @@ -4646,7 +4652,7 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="MAXPROTOCOL"/>max protocol (G)</term> + <term><anchor id="MAXPROTOCOL">max protocol (G)</term> <listitem><para>The value of the parameter (a string) is the highest protocol level that will be supported by the server.</para> @@ -4684,15 +4690,14 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="MAXSMBDPROCESSES"/>max smbd processes (G)</term> + <term><anchor id="MAXSMBDPROCESSES">max smbd processes (G)</term> <listitem><para>This parameter limits the maximum number of <ulink url="smbd.8.html"><command>smbd(8)</command></ulink> processes concurrently running on a system and is intended as a stopgap to prevent degrading service to clients in the event that the server has insufficient resources to handle more than this number of connections. Remember that under normal operating - conditions, each user will have an <citerefentry><refentrytitle>smbd</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>8</manvolnum></citerefentry> associated with him or her + conditions, each user will have an <ulink url="smbd.8.html">smbd</ulink> associated with him or her to handle connections to all shares from a given host. </para> @@ -4705,9 +4710,8 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="MAXTTL"/>max ttl (G)</term> - <listitem><para>This option tells <citerefentry><refentrytitle>nmbd</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>8</manvolnum></citerefentry> + <term><anchor id="MAXTTL">max ttl (G)</term> + <listitem><para>This option tells <ulink url="nmbd.8.html">nmbd(8)</ulink> what the default 'time to live' of NetBIOS names should be (in seconds) when <command>nmbd</command> is requesting a name using either a broadcast packet or from a WINS server. You should never need to @@ -4720,9 +4724,9 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="MAXWINSTTL"/>max wins ttl (G)</term> - <listitem><para>This option tells <citerefentry><refentrytitle>smbd</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>8</manvolnum></citerefentry> when acting as a WINS server (<link linkend="WINSSUPPORT"> + <term><anchor id="MAXWINSTTL">max wins ttl (G)</term> + <listitem><para>This option tells <ulink url="nmbd.8.html">nmbd(8) + </ulink> when acting as a WINS server (<link linkend="WINSSUPPORT"> <parameter>wins support = yes</parameter></link>) what the maximum 'time to live' of NetBIOS names that <command>nmbd</command> will grant will be (in seconds). You should never need to change this @@ -4738,7 +4742,7 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="MAXXMIT"/>max xmit (G)</term> + <term><anchor id="MAXXMIT">max xmit (G)</term> <listitem><para>This option controls the maximum packet size that will be negotiated by Samba. The default is 65535, which is the maximum. In some cases you may find you get better performance @@ -4753,7 +4757,7 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="MESSAGECOMMAND"/>message command (G)</term> + <term><anchor id="MESSAGECOMMAND">message command (G)</term> <listitem><para>This specifies what command to run when the server receives a WinPopup style message.</para> @@ -4763,13 +4767,13 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' <para>An example is:</para> - <para><command>message command = csh -c 'xedit %s;rm %s' &</command> + <para><command>message command = csh -c 'xedit %s;rm %s' &</command> </para> <para>This delivers the message using <command>xedit</command>, then removes it afterwards. <emphasis>NOTE THAT IT IS VERY IMPORTANT THAT THIS COMMAND RETURN IMMEDIATELY</emphasis>. That's why I - have the '&' on the end. If it doesn't return immediately then + have the '&' on the end. If it doesn't return immediately then your PCs may freeze when sending messages (they should recover after 30 seconds, hopefully).</para> @@ -4814,7 +4818,7 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' <para>Default: <emphasis>no message command</emphasis></para> <para>Example: <command>message command = csh -c 'xedit %s; - rm %s' &</command></para> + rm %s' &</command></para> </listitem> </varlistentry> @@ -4822,7 +4826,7 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="MINPASSWDLENGTH"/>min passwd length (G)</term> + <term><anchor id="MINPASSWDLENGTH">min passwd length (G)</term> <listitem><para>Synonym for <link linkend="MINPASSWORDLENGTH"> <parameter>min password length</parameter></link>.</para> </listitem> @@ -4831,7 +4835,7 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="MINPASSWORDLENGTH"/>min password length (G)</term> + <term><anchor id="MINPASSWORDLENGTH">min password length (G)</term> <listitem><para>This option sets the minimum length in characters of a plaintext password that <command>smbd</command> will accept when performing UNIX password changing.</para> @@ -4849,7 +4853,7 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="MINPRINTSPACE"/>min print space (S)</term> + <term><anchor id="MINPRINTSPACE">min print space (S)</term> <listitem><para>This sets the minimum amount of free disk space that must be available before a user will be able to spool a print job. It is specified in kilobytes. The default is 0, which @@ -4867,7 +4871,7 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="MINPROTOCOL"/>min protocol (G)</term> + <term><anchor id="MINPROTOCOL">min protocol (G)</term> <listitem><para>The value of the parameter (a string) is the lowest SMB protocol dialect than Samba will support. Please refer to the <link linkend="MAXPROTOCOL"><parameter>max protocol</parameter></link> @@ -4891,9 +4895,8 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="MINWINSTTL"/>min wins ttl (G)</term> - <listitem><para>This option tells <citerefentry><refentrytitle>nmbd</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>8</manvolnum></citerefentry> + <term><anchor id="MINWINSTTL">min wins ttl (G)</term> + <listitem><para>This option tells <ulink url="nmbd.8.html">nmbd(8)</ulink> when acting as a WINS server (<link linkend="WINSSUPPORT"><parameter> wins support = yes</parameter></link>) what the minimum 'time to live' of NetBIOS names that <command>nmbd</command> will grant will be (in @@ -4906,7 +4909,7 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="MSDFSPROXY"/>msdfs proxy (S)</term> + <term><anchor id="MSDFSPROXY">msdfs proxy (S)</term> <listitem><para>This parameter indicates that the share is a stand-in for another CIFS share whose location is specified by the value of the parameter. When clients attempt to connect to @@ -4917,7 +4920,7 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' and <link linkend="HOSTMSDFS"><parameter>host msdfs</parameter></link> options to find out how to set up a Dfs root share.</para> - <para>Example: <command>msdfs proxy = \\\\otherserver\\someshare</command></para> + <para>Example: <command>msdfs proxy = \otherserver\someshare</command></para> </listitem> </varlistentry> @@ -4925,17 +4928,17 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="MSDFSROOT"/>msdfs root (S)</term> + <term><anchor id="MSDFSROOT">msdfs root (S)</term> <listitem><para>This boolean parameter is only available if Samba is configured and compiled with the <command> --with-msdfs</command> option. If set to <constant>yes</constant>, Samba treats the share as a Dfs root and allows clients to browse the distributed file system tree rooted at the share directory. Dfs links are specified in the share directory by symbolic - links of the form <filename>msdfs:serverA\\shareA,serverB\\shareB</filename> + links of the form <filename>msdfs:serverA\shareA,serverB\shareB</filename> and so on. For more information on setting up a Dfs tree - on Samba, refer to <ulink url="msdfs.html">"Hosting a Microsoft - Distributed File System tree on Samba"</ulink> document.</para> + on Samba, refer to <ulink url="msdfs_setup.html">msdfs_setup.html + </ulink>.</para> <para>See also <link linkend="HOSTMSDFS"><parameter>host msdfs </parameter></link></para> @@ -4945,7 +4948,7 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' </varlistentry> <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="NAMECACHETIMEOUT"/>name cache timeout (G)</term> + <term><anchor id="NAMECACHETIMEOUT">name cache timeout (G)</term> <listitem><para>Specifies the number of seconds it takes before entries in samba's hostname resolve cache time out. If the timeout is set to 0. the caching is disabled. @@ -4958,7 +4961,7 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' </varlistentry> <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="NAMERESOLVEORDER"/>name resolve order (G)</term> + <term><anchor id="NAMERESOLVEORDER">name resolve order (G)</term> <listitem><para>This option is used by the programs in the Samba suite to determine what naming services to use and in what order to resolve host names to IP addresses. The option takes a space @@ -5011,7 +5014,7 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="NETBIOSALIASES"/>netbios aliases (G)</term> + <term><anchor id="NETBIOSALIASES">netbios aliases (G)</term> <listitem><para>This is a list of NetBIOS names that <ulink url="nmbd.8.html">nmbd(8)</ulink> will advertise as additional names by which the Samba server is known. This allows one machine @@ -5032,7 +5035,7 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="NETBIOSNAME"/>netbios name (G)</term> + <term><anchor id="NETBIOSNAME">netbios name (G)</term> <listitem><para>This sets the NetBIOS name by which a Samba server is known. By default it is the same as the first component of the host's DNS name. If a machine is a browse server or @@ -5051,7 +5054,7 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="NETBIOSSCOPE"/>netbios scope (G)</term> + <term><anchor id="NETBIOSSCOPE">netbios scope (G)</term> <listitem><para>This sets the NetBIOS scope that Samba will operate under. This should not be set unless every machine on your LAN also sets this value.</para> @@ -5060,7 +5063,7 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="NISHOMEDIR"/>nis homedir (G)</term> + <term><anchor id="NISHOMEDIR">nis homedir (G)</term> <listitem><para>Get the home share server from a NIS map. For UNIX systems that use an automounter, the user's home directory will often be mounted on a workstation on demand from a remote @@ -5093,7 +5096,7 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="NONUNIXACCOUNTRANGE"/>non unix account range (G)</term> + <term><anchor id="NONUNIXACCOUNTRANGE">non unix account range (G)</term> <listitem><para>The non unix account range parameter specifies the range of 'user ids' that are allocated by the various 'non unix account' passdb backends. These backends allow @@ -5102,10 +5105,10 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' This range of ids should have no existing local or NIS users within it as strange conflicts can occur otherwise.</para> - <note><para>These userids never appear on the system and Samba will never + <para>NOTE: These userids never appear on the system and Samba will never 'become' these users. They are used only to ensure that the algorithmic RID mapping does not conflict with normal users. - </para></note> + </para> <para>Default: <command>non unix account range = <empty string> </command></para> @@ -5117,7 +5120,7 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="NTACLSUPPORT"/>nt acl support (S)</term> + <term><anchor id="NTACLSUPPORT">nt acl support (S)</term> <listitem><para>This boolean parameter controls whether <ulink url="smbd.8.html">smbd(8)</ulink> will attempt to map UNIX permissions into Windows NT access control lists. @@ -5131,10 +5134,9 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="NTPIPESUPPORT"/>nt pipe support (G)</term> + <term><anchor id="NTPIPESUPPORT">nt pipe support (G)</term> <listitem><para>This boolean parameter controls whether - <citerefentry><refentrytitle>smbd</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>8</manvolnum></citerefentry> will allow Windows NT + <ulink url="smbd.8.html">smbd(8)</ulink> will allow Windows NT clients to connect to the NT SMB specific <constant>IPC$</constant> pipes. This is a developer debugging option and can be left alone.</para> @@ -5146,7 +5148,7 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="NTSTATUSSUPPORT"/>nt status support (G)</term> + <term><anchor id="NTSTATUSSUPPORT">nt status support (G)</term> <listitem><para>This boolean parameter controls whether <ulink url="smbd.8.html">smbd(8)</ulink> will negotiate NT specific status support with Windows NT/2k/XP clients. This is a developer @@ -5163,12 +5165,11 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="NULLPASSWORDS"/>null passwords (G)</term> + <term><anchor id="NULLPASSWORDS">null passwords (G)</term> <listitem><para>Allow or disallow client access to accounts that have null passwords. </para> - <para>See also <citerefentry><refentrytitle>smbpasswd</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>5</manvolnum></citerefentry>.</para> + <para>See also <ulink url="smbpasswd.5.html">smbpasswd (5)</ulink>.</para> <para>Default: <command>null passwords = no</command></para> </listitem> @@ -5178,7 +5179,7 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="OBEYPAMRESTRICTIONS"/>obey pam restrictions (G)</term> + <term><anchor id="OBEYPAMRESTRICTIONS">obey pam restrictions (G)</term> <listitem><para>When Samba 2.2 is configured to enable PAM support (i.e. --with-pam), this parameter will control whether or not Samba should obey PAM's account and session management directives. The @@ -5199,7 +5200,7 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="ONLYUSER"/>only user (S)</term> + <term><anchor id="ONLYUSER">only user (S)</term> <listitem><para>This is a boolean option that controls whether connections with usernames not in the <parameter>user</parameter> list will be allowed. By default this option is disabled so that a @@ -5227,7 +5228,7 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="ONLYGUEST"/>only guest (S)</term> + <term><anchor id="ONLYGUEST">only guest (S)</term> <listitem><para>A synonym for <link linkend="GUESTONLY"><parameter> guest only</parameter></link>.</para> </listitem> @@ -5236,7 +5237,7 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="OPLOCKBREAKWAITTIME"/>oplock break wait time (G)</term> + <term><anchor id="OPLOCKBREAKWAITTIME">oplock break wait time (G)</term> <listitem><para>This is a tuning parameter added due to bugs in both Windows 9x and WinNT. If Samba responds to a client too quickly when that client issues an SMB that can cause an oplock @@ -5254,15 +5255,15 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="OPLOCKCONTENTIONLIMIT"/>oplock contention limit (S)</term> + <term><anchor id="OPLOCKCONTENTIONLIMIT">oplock contention limit (S)</term> <listitem><para>This is a <emphasis>very</emphasis> advanced <ulink url="smbd.8.html">smbd(8)</ulink> tuning option to improve the efficiency of the granting of oplocks under multiple client contention for the same file.</para> - <para>In brief it specifies a number, which causes <citerefentry><refentrytitle>smbd</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>8</manvolnum></citerefentry>not to grant an oplock even when requested - if the approximate number of clients contending for an oplock on the same file goes over this + <para>In brief it specifies a number, which causes <ulink url="smbd.8.html">smbd</ulink> not to + grant an oplock even when requested if the approximate number of + clients contending for an oplock on the same file goes over this limit. This causes <command>smbd</command> to behave in a similar way to Windows NT.</para> @@ -5278,7 +5279,7 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="OPLOCKS"/>oplocks (S)</term> + <term><anchor id="OPLOCKS">oplocks (S)</term> <listitem><para>This boolean option tells <command>smbd</command> whether to issue oplocks (opportunistic locks) to file open requests on this share. The oplock code can dramatically (approx. 30% or more) improve @@ -5306,16 +5307,13 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' </varlistentry> <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="NTLMAUTH"/>ntlm auth (G)</term> - <listitem><para>This parameter determines - whether or not <citerefentry><refentrytitle>smbd</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>8</manvolnum></citerefentry> will + <term><anchor id="NTLMAUTH">ntlm auth (G)</term> + <listitem><para>This parameter determines whether or not <ulink url="smbd.8.html">smbd</ulink> will attempt to authenticate users using the NTLM password hash. If disabled, only the lanman password hashes will be used. </para> - <para>Please note that at least this option or <command>lanman auth</command> should - be enabled in order to be able to log in. + <para>Please note that at least this option or <command>lanman auth</command> should be enabled in order to be able to log in. </para> <para>Default : <command>ntlm auth = yes</command></para> @@ -5323,11 +5321,10 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' </varlistentry> <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="OSLEVEL"/>os level (G)</term> + <term><anchor id="OSLEVEL">os level (G)</term> <listitem><para>This integer value controls what level Samba advertises itself as for browse elections. The value of this - parameter determines whether <citerefentry><refentrytitle>nmbd</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>8</manvolnum></citerefentry> + parameter determines whether <ulink url="nmbd.8.html">nmbd(8)</ulink> has a chance of becoming a local master browser for the <parameter> WORKGROUP</parameter> in the local broadcast area.</para> @@ -5347,7 +5344,7 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="OS2DRIVERMAP"/>os2 driver map (G)</term> + <term><anchor id="OS2DRIVERMAP">os2 driver map (G)</term> <listitem><para>The parameter is used to define the absolute path to a file containing a mapping of Windows NT printer driver names to OS/2 printer driver names. The format is:</para> @@ -5360,9 +5357,10 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' LaserJet 5L</command>.</para> <para>The need for the file is due to the printer driver namespace - problem described in the <ulink url="printing.html">Samba + problem described in the <ulink url="printer_driver2.html">Samba Printing HOWTO</ulink>. For more details on OS/2 clients, please - refer to the OS2-Client-HOWTO containing in the Samba documentation.</para> + refer to the <ulink url="OS2-Client-HOWTO.html">OS2-Client-HOWTO + </ulink> containing in the Samba documentation.</para> <para>Default: <command>os2 driver map = <empty string> </command></para> @@ -5371,7 +5369,7 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="PAMPASSWORDCHANGE"/>pam password change (G)</term> + <term><anchor id="PAMPASSWORDCHANGE">pam password change (G)</term> <listitem><para>With the addition of better PAM support in Samba 2.2, this parameter, it is possible to use PAM's password change control flag for Samba. If enabled, then PAM will be used for password @@ -5389,12 +5387,12 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="PANICACTION"/>panic action (G)</term> + <term><anchor id="PANICACTION">panic action (G)</term> <listitem><para>This is a Samba developer option that allows a - system command to be called when either <citerefentry><refentrytitle>smbd</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>8</manvolnum></citerefentry> or <citerefentry><refentrytitle>smbd</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>8</manvolnum></citerefentry> crashes. This is usually used to - draw attention to the fact that a problem occurred.</para> + system command to be called when either <ulink url="smbd.8.html"> + smbd(8)</ulink> or <ulink url="nmbd.8.html">nmbd(8)</ulink> + crashes. This is usually used to draw attention to the fact that + a problem occurred.</para> <para>Default: <command>panic action = <empty string></command></para> <para>Example: <command>panic action = "/bin/sleep 90000"</command></para> @@ -5402,24 +5400,20 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' </varlistentry> <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="PARANOIDSERVERSECURITY"/>paranoid server security (G)</term> + <term><anchor id="PARANOIDSERVERSECURITY">paranoid server security (G)</term> <listitem><para>Some version of NT 4.x allow non-guest users with a bad passowrd. When this option is enabled, samba will not use a broken NT 4.x server as password server, but instead complain - to the logs and exit. + to the logs and exit. </para> - <para>Disabling this option prevents Samba from making - this check, which involves deliberatly attempting a - bad logon to the remote server.</para> - <para>Default: <command>paranoid server security = yes</command></para> </listitem> </varlistentry> <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="PASSDBBACKEND"/>passdb backend (G)</term> + <term><anchor id="PASSDBBACKEND">passdb backend (G)</term> <listitem><para>This option allows the administrator to chose which backends to retrieve and store passwords with. This allows (for example) both smbpasswd and tdbsam to be used without a recompile. Multiple backends can be specified, separated by spaces. The backends will be searched in the order they are specified. New users are always added to the first backend specified. @@ -5487,7 +5481,7 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' for its own processing</para> </listitem> - <listitem><para><command>unixsam</command> - Allows samba to map all (other) available unix users</para> + <listitem><para><command>unixsam</command> - (EXPERIMENTAL) Allows samba to map all (other) available unix users</para> <para>This backend uses the standard unix database for retrieving users. Users included in this pdb are NOT listed in samba user listings and users included in this pdb won't be @@ -5503,22 +5497,22 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' </itemizedlist> </para> - <para>Default: <command>passdb backend = smbpasswd unixsam</command></para> - <para>Example: <command>passdb backend = tdbsam:/etc/samba/private/passdb.tdb smbpasswd:/etc/samba/smbpasswd unixsam</command></para> - <para>Example: <command>passdb backend = ldapsam_nua:ldaps://ldap.example.com unixsam</command></para> + <para>Default: <command>passdb backend = smbpasswd guest</command></para> + <para>Example: <command>passdb backend = tdbsam:/etc/samba/private/passdb.tdb smbpasswd:/etc/samba/smbpasswd </command></para> + <para>Example: <command>passdb backend = ldapsam_nua:ldaps://ldap.example.com </command></para> <para>Example: <command>passdb backend = plugin:/usr/local/samba/lib/my_passdb.so:my_plugin_args tdbsam:/etc/samba/private/passdb.tdb</command></para> </listitem> </varlistentry> <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="PASSWDCHAT"/>passwd chat (G)</term> + <term><anchor id="PASSWDCHAT">passwd chat (G)</term> <listitem><para>This string controls the <emphasis>"chat"</emphasis> - conversation that takes places between <citerefentry><refentrytitle>smbd</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>8</manvolnum></citerefentry> and the local password changing + conversation that takes places between <ulink + url="smbd.8.html">smbd</ulink> and the local password changing program to change the user's password. The string describes a - sequence of response-receive pairs that <citerefentry><refentrytitle>smbd</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>8</manvolnum></citerefentry> uses to determine what to send to the + sequence of response-receive pairs that <ulink url="smbd.8.html"> + smbd(8)</ulink> uses to determine what to send to the <link linkend="PASSWDPROGRAM"><parameter>passwd program</parameter> </link> and what to expect back. If the expected output is not received then the password is not changed.</para> @@ -5540,8 +5534,8 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' <para>The string can contain the macro <parameter>%n</parameter> which is substituted for the new password. The chat sequence can also contain the standard - macros <constant>\\n</constant>, <constant>\\r</constant>, <constant> - \\t</constant> and <constant>\\s</constant> to give line-feed, + macros <constant>\n</constant>, <constant>\r</constant>, <constant> + \t</constant> and <constant>\s</constant> to give line-feed, carriage-return, tab and space. The chat sequence string can also contain a '*' which matches any sequence of characters. Double quotes can be used to collect strings with spaces @@ -5563,10 +5557,10 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' <parameter>passwd chat debug</parameter></link> and <link linkend="PAMPASSWORDCHANGE"> <parameter>pam password change</parameter></link>.</para> - <para>Default: <command>passwd chat = *new*password* %n\\n - *new*password* %n\\n *changed*</command></para> - <para>Example: <command>passwd chat = "*Enter OLD password*" %o\\n - "*Enter NEW password*" %n\\n "*Reenter NEW password*" %n\\n "*Password + <para>Default: <command>passwd chat = *new*password* %n\n + *new*password* %n\n *changed*</command></para> + <para>Example: <command>passwd chat = "*Enter OLD password*" %o\n + "*Enter NEW password*" %n\n "*Reenter NEW password*" %n\n "*Password changed*"</command></para> </listitem> </varlistentry> @@ -5574,12 +5568,11 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="PASSWDCHATDEBUG"/>passwd chat debug (G)</term> + <term><anchor id="PASSWDCHATDEBUG">passwd chat debug (G)</term> <listitem><para>This boolean specifies if the passwd chat script parameter is run in <emphasis>debug</emphasis> mode. In this mode the strings passed to and received from the passwd chat are printed - in the <citerefentry><refentrytitle>smbd</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>8</manvolnum></citerefentry> log with a + in the <ulink url="smbd.8.html">smbd(8)</ulink> log with a <link linkend="DEBUGLEVEL"><parameter>debug level</parameter></link> of 100. This is a dangerous option as it will allow plaintext passwords to be seen in the <command>smbd</command> log. It is available to help @@ -5602,7 +5595,7 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="PASSWDPROGRAM"/>passwd program (G)</term> + <term><anchor id="PASSWDPROGRAM">passwd program (G)</term> <listitem><para>The name of a program that can be used to set UNIX user passwords. Any occurrences of <parameter>%u</parameter> will be replaced with the user name. The user name is checked for @@ -5640,7 +5633,7 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="PASSWORDLEVEL"/>password level (G)</term> + <term><anchor id="PASSWORDLEVEL">password level (G)</term> <listitem><para>Some client/server combinations have difficulty with mixed-case passwords. One offending client is Windows for Workgroups, which for some reason forces passwords to upper @@ -5683,7 +5676,7 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="PASSWORDSERVER"/>password server (G)</term> + <term><anchor id="PASSWORDSERVER">password server (G)</term> <listitem><para>By specifying the name of another SMB server (such as a WinNT box) with this option, and using <command>security = domain </command> or <command>security = server</command> you can get Samba @@ -5704,10 +5697,10 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' the "LM1.2X002" or the "NT LM 0.12" protocol, and it must be in user level security mode.</para> - <note><para>Using a password server + <para><emphasis>NOTE:</emphasis> Using a password server means your UNIX box (running Samba) is only as secure as your password server. <emphasis>DO NOT CHOOSE A PASSWORD SERVER THAT - YOU DON'T COMPLETELY TRUST</emphasis>.</para></note> + YOU DON'T COMPLETELY TRUST</emphasis>.</para> <para>Never point a Samba server at itself for password serving. This will cause a loop and could lock up your Samba @@ -5778,7 +5771,7 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="PATH"/>path (S)</term> + <term><anchor id="PATH">path (S)</term> <listitem><para>This parameter specifies a directory to which the user of the service is to be given access. In the case of printable services, this is where print data will spool prior to @@ -5809,7 +5802,7 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="PIDDIRECTORY"/>pid directory (G)</term> + <term><anchor id="PIDDIRECTORY">pid directory (G)</term> <listitem><para>This option specifies the directory where pid files will be placed. </para> @@ -5821,9 +5814,8 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="POSIXLOCKING"/>posix locking (S)</term> - <listitem><para>The <citerefentry><refentrytitle>smbd</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>8</manvolnum></citerefentry> + <term><anchor id="POSIXLOCKING">posix locking (S)</term> + <listitem><para>The <ulink url="smbd.8.html"><command>smbd(8)</command></ulink> daemon maintains an database of file locks obtained by SMB clients. The default behavior is to map this internal database to POSIX locks. This means that file locks obtained by SMB clients are @@ -5839,7 +5831,7 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="POSTEXEC"/>postexec (S)</term> + <term><anchor id="POSTEXEC">postexec (S)</term> <listitem><para>This option specifies a command to be run whenever the service is disconnected. It takes the usual substitutions. The command may be run as the root on some @@ -5864,7 +5856,23 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="PREEXEC"/>preexec (S)</term> + <term><anchor id="POSTSCRIPT">postscript (S)</term> + <listitem><para>This parameter forces a printer to interpret + the print files as PostScript. This is done by adding a <constant>%! + </constant> to the start of print output.</para> + + <para>This is most useful when you have lots of PCs that persist + in putting a control-D at the start of print jobs, which then + confuses your printer.</para> + + <para>Default: <command>postscript = no</command></para> + </listitem> + </varlistentry> + + + + <varlistentry> + <term><anchor id="PREEXEC">preexec (S)</term> <listitem><para>This option specifies a command to be run whenever the service is connected to. It takes the usual substitutions.</para> @@ -5873,12 +5881,12 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' is an example:</para> <para><command>preexec = csh -c 'echo \"Welcome to %S!\" | - /usr/local/samba/bin/smbclient -M %m -I %I' & </command></para> + /usr/local/samba/bin/smbclient -M %m -I %I' & </command></para> <para>Of course, this could get annoying after a while :-)</para> <para>See also <link linkend="PREEXECCLOSE"><parameter>preexec close - </parameter></link> and <link linkend="POSTEXEC"><parameter>postexec + </parameter</link> and <link linkend="POSTEXEC"><parameter>postexec </parameter></link>.</para> <para>Default: <emphasis>none (no command executed)</emphasis></para> @@ -5890,7 +5898,7 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="PREEXECCLOSE"/>preexec close (S)</term> + <term><anchor id="PREEXECCLOSE">preexec close (S)</term> <listitem><para>This boolean option controls whether a non-zero return code from <link linkend="PREEXEC"><parameter>preexec </parameter></link> should close the service being connected to.</para> @@ -5901,7 +5909,7 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="PREFERREDMASTER"/>preferred master (G)</term> + <term><anchor id="PREFERREDMASTER">preferred master (G)</term> <listitem><para>This boolean parameter controls if <ulink url="nmbd.8.html">nmbd(8)</ulink> is a preferred master browser for its workgroup.</para> @@ -5930,7 +5938,7 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="PREFEREDMASTER"/>prefered master (G)</term> + <term><anchor id="PREFEREDMASTER">prefered master (G)</term> <listitem><para>Synonym for <link linkend="PREFERREDMASTER"><parameter> preferred master</parameter></link> for people who cannot spell :-).</para> </listitem> @@ -5939,7 +5947,7 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="PRELOAD"/>preload (G)</term> + <term><anchor id="PRELOAD">preload (G)</term> <listitem><para>This is a list of services that you want to be automatically added to the browse lists. This is most useful for homes and printers services that would otherwise not be @@ -5955,24 +5963,9 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' </listitem> </varlistentry> - <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="PRELOADMODULES"/>preload modules (G)</term> - <listitem><para>This is a list of paths to modules that should - be loaded into smbd before a client connects. This improves - the speed of smbd when reacting to new connections somewhat. </para> - - <para>It is recommended to only use this option on heavy-performance - servers.</para> - - <para>Default: <command>preload modules = </command></para> - - <para>Example: <command>preload modules = /usr/lib/samba/passdb/mysql.so</command></para> - - </listitem> - </varlistentry> <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="PRESERVECASE"/>preserve case (S)</term> + <term><anchor id="PRESERVECASE">preserve case (S)</term> <listitem><para> This controls if new filenames are created with the case that the client passes, or if they are forced to be the <link linkend="DEFAULTCASE"><parameter>default case @@ -5988,7 +5981,7 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="PRINTCOMMAND"/>print command (S)</term> + <term><anchor id="PRINTCOMMAND">print command (S)</term> <listitem><para>After a print job has finished spooling to a service, this command will be used via a <command>system()</command> call to process the spool file. Typically the command specified will @@ -6078,7 +6071,7 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="PRINTOK"/>print ok (S)</term> + <term><anchor id="PRINTOK">print ok (S)</term> <listitem><para>Synonym for <link linkend="PRINTABLE"> <parameter>printable</parameter></link>.</para> </listitem> @@ -6088,7 +6081,7 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="PRINTABLE"/>printable (S)</term> + <term><anchor id="PRINTABLE">printable (S)</term> <listitem><para>If this parameter is <constant>yes</constant>, then clients may open, write to and submit spool files on the directory specified for the service. </para> @@ -6106,7 +6099,7 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="PRINTCAP"/>printcap (G)</term> + <term><anchor id="PRINTCAP">printcap (G)</term> <listitem><para>Synonym for <link linkend="PRINTCAPNAME"><parameter> printcap name</parameter></link>.</para> </listitem> @@ -6116,7 +6109,7 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="PRINTCAPNAME"/>printcap name (G)</term> + <term><anchor id="PRINTCAPNAME">printcap name (G)</term> <listitem><para>This parameter may be used to override the compiled-in default printcap name used by the server (usually <filename> /etc/printcap</filename>). See the discussion of the <link @@ -6142,22 +6135,22 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' <para>A minimal printcap file would look something like this:</para> -<para><programlisting> -print1|My Printer 1 -print2|My Printer 2 -print3|My Printer 3 -print4|My Printer 4 -print5|My Printer 5 -</programlisting></para> + <para><programlisting> + print1|My Printer 1 + print2|My Printer 2 + print3|My Printer 3 + print4|My Printer 4 + print5|My Printer 5 + </programlisting></para> <para>where the '|' separates aliases of a printer. The fact that the second alias has a space in it gives a hint to Samba that it's a comment.</para> - <note><para>Under AIX the default printcap + <para><emphasis>NOTE</emphasis>: Under AIX the default printcap name is <filename>/etc/qconfig</filename>. Samba will assume the file is in AIX <filename>qconfig</filename> format if the string - <filename>qconfig</filename> appears in the printcap filename.</para></note> + <filename>qconfig</filename> appears in the printcap filename.</para> <para>Default: <command>printcap name = /etc/printcap</command></para> <para>Example: <command>printcap name = /etc/myprintcap</command></para> @@ -6169,7 +6162,7 @@ print5|My Printer 5 <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="PRINTERADMIN"/>printer admin (S)</term> + <term><anchor id="PRINTERADMIN">printer admin (S)</term> <listitem><para>This is a list of users that can do anything to printers via the remote administration interfaces offered by MS-RPC (usually using a NT workstation). Note that the root user always @@ -6183,8 +6176,113 @@ print5|My Printer 5 + + + <varlistentry> + <term><anchor id="PRINTERDRIVER">printer driver (S)</term> + <listitem><para><emphasis>Note :</emphasis>This is a deprecated + parameter and will be removed in the next major release + following version 2.2. Please see the instructions in + the <ulink url="printer_driver2.html">Samba 2.2. Printing + HOWTO</ulink> for more information + on the new method of loading printer drivers onto a Samba server. + </para> + + <para>This option allows you to control the string + that clients receive when they ask the server for the printer driver + associated with a printer. If you are using Windows95 or Windows NT + then you can use this to automate the setup of printers on your + system.</para> + + <para>You need to set this parameter to the exact string (case + sensitive) that describes the appropriate printer driver for your + system. If you don't know the exact string to use then you should + first try with no <link linkend="PRINTERDRIVER"><parameter> + printer driver</parameter></link> option set and the client will + give you a list of printer drivers. The appropriate strings are + shown in a scroll box after you have chosen the printer manufacturer.</para> + + <para>See also <link linkend="PRINTERDRIVERFILE"><parameter>printer + driver file</parameter></link>.</para> + + <para>Example: <command>printer driver = HP LaserJet 4L</command></para> + </listitem> + </varlistentry> + + + <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="PRINTERNAME"/>printer name (S)</term> + <term><anchor id="PRINTERDRIVERFILE">printer driver file (G)</term> + <listitem><para><emphasis>Note :</emphasis>This is a deprecated + parameter and will be removed in the next major release + following version 2.2. Please see the instructions in + the <ulink url="printer_driver2.html">Samba 2.2. Printing + HOWTO</ulink> for more information + on the new method of loading printer drivers onto a Samba server. + </para> + + <para>This parameter tells Samba where the printer driver + definition file, used when serving drivers to Windows 95 clients, is + to be found. If this is not set, the default is :</para> + + <para><filename><replaceable>SAMBA_INSTALL_DIRECTORY</replaceable> + /lib/printers.def</filename></para> + + <para>This file is created from Windows 95 <filename>msprint.inf + </filename> files found on the Windows 95 client system. For more + details on setting up serving of printer drivers to Windows 95 + clients, see the outdated documentation file in the <filename>docs/</filename> + directory, <filename>PRINTER_DRIVER.txt</filename>.</para> + + <para>See also <link linkend="PRINTERDRIVERLOCATION"><parameter> + printer driver location</parameter></link>.</para> + + <para>Default: <emphasis>None (set in compile).</emphasis></para> + + <para>Example: <command>printer driver file = + /usr/local/samba/printers/drivers.def</command></para> + </listitem> + </varlistentry> + + + + + <varlistentry> + <term><anchor id="PRINTERDRIVERLOCATION">printer driver location (S)</term> + <listitem><para><emphasis>Note :</emphasis>This is a deprecated + parameter and will be removed in the next major release + following version 2.2. Please see the instructions in + the <ulink url="printer_driver2.html">Samba 2.2. Printing + HOWTO</ulink> for more information + on the new method of loading printer drivers onto a Samba server. + </para> + + <para>This parameter tells clients of a particular printer + share where to find the printer driver files for the automatic + installation of drivers for Windows 95 machines. If Samba is set up + to serve printer drivers to Windows 95 machines, this should be set to</para> + + <para><command>\\MACHINE\PRINTER$</command></para> + + <para>Where MACHINE is the NetBIOS name of your Samba server, + and PRINTER$ is a share you set up for serving printer driver + files. For more details on setting this up see the outdated documentation + file in the <filename>docs/</filename> directory, <filename> + PRINTER_DRIVER.txt</filename>.</para> + + <para>See also <link linkend="PRINTERDRIVERFILE"><parameter> + printer driver file</parameter></link>.</para> + + <para>Default: <command>none</command></para> + <para>Example: <command>printer driver location = \\MACHINE\PRINTER$ + </command></para> + </listitem> + </varlistentry> + + + + <varlistentry> + <term><anchor id="PRINTERNAME">printer name (S)</term> <listitem><para>This parameter specifies the name of the printer to which print jobs spooled through a printable service will be sent.</para> @@ -6201,7 +6299,7 @@ print5|My Printer 5 <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="PRINTER"/>printer (S)</term> + <term><anchor id="PRINTER">printer (S)</term> <listitem><para>Synonym for <link linkend="PRINTERNAME"><parameter> printer name</parameter></link>.</para> </listitem> @@ -6210,7 +6308,7 @@ print5|My Printer 5 <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="PRINTING"/>printing (S)</term> + <term><anchor id="PRINTING">printing (S)</term> <listitem><para>This parameters controls how printer status information is interpreted on your system. It also affects the default values for the <parameter>print command</parameter>, @@ -6241,7 +6339,7 @@ print5|My Printer 5 <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="PRIVATEDIR"/>private dir (G)</term> + <term><anchor id="PRIVATEDIR">private dir (G)</term> <listitem><para>This parameters defines the directory smbd will use for storing such files as <filename>smbpasswd</filename> and <filename>secrets.tdb</filename>. @@ -6255,7 +6353,7 @@ print5|My Printer 5 <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="PROTOCOL"/>protocol (G)</term> + <term><anchor id="PROTOCOL">protocol (G)</term> <listitem><para>Synonym for <link linkend="MAXPROTOCOL"> <parameter>max protocol</parameter></link>.</para></listitem> </varlistentry> @@ -6264,7 +6362,7 @@ print5|My Printer 5 <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="PUBLIC"/>public (S)</term> + <term><anchor id="PUBLIC">public (S)</term> <listitem><para>Synonym for <link linkend="GUESTOK"><parameter>guest ok</parameter></link>.</para> </listitem> @@ -6273,7 +6371,7 @@ print5|My Printer 5 <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="QUEUEPAUSECOMMAND"/>queuepause command (S)</term> + <term><anchor id="QUEUEPAUSECOMMAND">queuepause command (S)</term> <listitem><para>This parameter specifies the command to be executed on the server host in order to pause the printer queue.</para> @@ -6302,7 +6400,7 @@ print5|My Printer 5 <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="QUEUERESUMECOMMAND"/>queueresume command (S)</term> + <term><anchor id="QUEUERESUMECOMMAND">queueresume command (S)</term> <listitem><para>This parameter specifies the command to be executed on the server host in order to resume the printer queue. It is the command to undo the behavior that is caused by the @@ -6337,7 +6435,7 @@ print5|My Printer 5 <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="READBMPX"/>read bmpx (G)</term> + <term><anchor id="READBMPX">read bmpx (G)</term> <listitem><para>This boolean parameter controls whether <ulink url="smbd.8.html">smbd(8)</ulink> will support the "Read Block Multiplex" SMB. This is now rarely used and defaults to @@ -6352,7 +6450,7 @@ print5|My Printer 5 <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="READLIST"/>read list (S)</term> + <term><anchor id="READLIST">read list (S)</term> <listitem><para>This is a list of users that are given read-only access to a service. If the connecting user is in this list then they will not be given write access, no matter what the <link @@ -6374,7 +6472,7 @@ print5|My Printer 5 <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="READONLY"/>read only (S)</term> + <term><anchor id="READONLY">read only (S)</term> <listitem><para>An inverted synonym is <link linkend="WRITEABLE"> <parameter>writeable</parameter></link>.</para> @@ -6393,7 +6491,7 @@ print5|My Printer 5 <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="READRAW"/>read raw (G)</term> + <term><anchor id="READRAW">read raw (G)</term> <listitem><para>This parameter controls whether or not the server will support the raw read SMB requests when transferring data to clients.</para> @@ -6416,7 +6514,7 @@ print5|My Printer 5 <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="READSIZE"/>read size (G)</term> + <term><anchor id="READSIZE">read size (G)</term> <listitem><para>The option <parameter>read size</parameter> affects the overlap of disk reads/writes with network reads/writes. If the amount of data being transferred in several of the SMB @@ -6443,7 +6541,7 @@ print5|My Printer 5 <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="REALM"/>realm (G)</term> + <term><anchor id="REALM">realm (G)</term> <listitem><para> This option specifies the kerberos realm to use. The realm is used as the ADS equivalent of the NT4<command>domain</command>. It @@ -6456,7 +6554,7 @@ print5|My Printer 5 </varlistentry> <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="REMOTEANNOUNCE"/>remote announce (G)</term> + <term><anchor id="REMOTEANNOUNCE">remote announce (G)</term> <listitem><para>This option allows you to setup <ulink url="nmbd.8.html">nmbd(8)</ulink> to periodically announce itself to arbitrary IP addresses with an arbitrary workgroup name.</para> @@ -6481,7 +6579,7 @@ print5|My Printer 5 addresses of the remote networks, but can also be the IP addresses of known browse masters if your network config is that stable.</para> - <para>See the documentation file <ulink url="improved-browsing.html">BROWSING</ulink> + <para>See the documentation file <filename>BROWSING.txt</filename> in the <filename>docs/</filename> directory.</para> <para>Default: <command>remote announce = <empty string> @@ -6492,7 +6590,7 @@ print5|My Printer 5 <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="REMOTEBROWSESYNC"/>remote browse sync (G)</term> + <term><anchor id="REMOTEBROWSESYNC">remote browse sync (G)</term> <listitem><para>This option allows you to setup <ulink url="nmbd.8.html">nmbd(8)</ulink> to periodically request synchronization of browse lists with the master browser of a Samba @@ -6530,7 +6628,7 @@ print5|My Printer 5 <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="RESTRICTANONYMOUS"/>restrict anonymous (G)</term> + <term><anchor id="RESTRICTANONYMOUS">restrict anonymous (G)</term> <listitem><para>This is a integer parameter, and mirrors as much as possible the functinality the <constant>RestrictAnonymous</constant> @@ -6543,7 +6641,7 @@ print5|My Printer 5 <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="ROOT"/>root (G)</term> + <term><anchor id="ROOT">root (G)</term> <listitem><para>Synonym for <link linkend="ROOTDIRECTORY"> <parameter>root directory"</parameter></link>.</para> </listitem> @@ -6552,7 +6650,7 @@ print5|My Printer 5 <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="ROOTDIR"/>root dir (G)</term> + <term><anchor id="ROOTDIR">root dir (G)</term> <listitem><para>Synonym for <link linkend="ROOTDIRECTORY"> <parameter>root directory"</parameter></link>.</para> </listitem> @@ -6560,7 +6658,7 @@ print5|My Printer 5 <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="ROOTDIRECTORY"/>root directory (G)</term> + <term><anchor id="ROOTDIRECTORY">root directory (G)</term> <listitem><para>The server will <command>chroot()</command> (i.e. Change its root directory) to this directory on startup. This is not strictly necessary for secure operation. Even without it the @@ -6592,7 +6690,7 @@ print5|My Printer 5 <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="ROOTPOSTEXEC"/>root postexec (S)</term> + <term><anchor id="ROOTPOSTEXEC">root postexec (S)</term> <listitem><para>This is the same as the <parameter>postexec</parameter> parameter except that the command is run as root. This is useful for unmounting filesystems @@ -6607,7 +6705,7 @@ print5|My Printer 5 </varlistentry> <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="ROOTPREEXEC"/>root preexec (S)</term> + <term><anchor id="ROOTPREEXEC">root preexec (S)</term> <listitem><para>This is the same as the <parameter>preexec</parameter> parameter except that the command is run as root. This is useful for mounting filesystems (such as CDROMs) when a @@ -6625,7 +6723,7 @@ print5|My Printer 5 <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="ROOTPREEXECCLOSE"/>root preexec close (S)</term> + <term><anchor id="ROOTPREEXECCLOSE">root preexec close (S)</term> <listitem><para>This is the same as the <parameter>preexec close </parameter> parameter except that the command is run as root.</para> @@ -6639,14 +6737,14 @@ print5|My Printer 5 <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="SECURITY"/>security (G)</term> + <term><anchor id="SECURITY">security (G)</term> <listitem><para>This option affects how clients respond to Samba and is one of the most important settings in the <filename> smb.conf</filename> file.</para> <para>The option sets the "security mode bit" in replies to - protocol negotiations with <citerefentry><refentrytitle>smbd</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>8</manvolnum></citerefentry> to turn share level security on or off. Clients decide + protocol negotiations with <ulink url="smbd.8.html">smbd(8) + </ulink> to turn share level security on or off. Clients decide based on this bit whether (and how) to transfer user and password information to the server.</para> @@ -6691,7 +6789,7 @@ print5|My Printer 5 <para>The different settings will now be explained.</para> - <para><anchor id="SECURITYEQUALSSHARE"/><emphasis>SECURITY = SHARE + <para><anchor id="SECURITYEQUALSSHARE"><emphasis>SECURITY = SHARE </emphasis></para> <para>When clients connect to a share level security server they @@ -6760,10 +6858,10 @@ print5|My Printer 5 <para>See also the section <link linkend="VALIDATIONSECT"> NOTE ABOUT USERNAME/PASSWORD VALIDATION</link>.</para> - <para><anchor id="SECURITYEQUALSUSER"/><emphasis>SECURITY = USER + <para><anchor id="SECURITYEQUALSUSER"><emphasis>SECURITY = USER </emphasis></para> - <para>This is the default security setting in Samba 3.0. + <para>This is the default security setting in Samba 2.2. With user-level security a client must first "log-on" with a valid username and password (which can be mapped using the <link linkend="USERNAMEMAP"><parameter>username map</parameter></link> @@ -6787,27 +6885,24 @@ print5|My Printer 5 <para>See also the section <link linkend="VALIDATIONSECT"> NOTE ABOUT USERNAME/PASSWORD VALIDATION</link>.</para> - <para><anchor id="SECURITYEQUALSDOMAIN"/><emphasis>SECURITY = DOMAIN - + <para><anchor id="SECURITYEQUALSSERVER"><emphasis>SECURITY = SERVER </emphasis></para> - <para>This mode will only work correctly if <citerefentry><refentrytitle>net</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>8</manvolnum></citerefentry> has been used to add this - machine into a Windows NT Domain. It expects the <link - linkend="ENCRYPTPASSWORDS"><parameter>encrypted passwords</parameter> - </link> parameter to be set to <constant>yes</constant>. In this - mode Samba will try to validate the username/password by passing - it to a Windows NT Primary or Backup Domain Controller, in exactly - the same way that a Windows NT Server would do.</para> - - <para><emphasis>Note</emphasis> that a valid UNIX user must still - exist as well as the account on the Domain Controller to allow - Samba to have a valid UNIX account to map file access to.</para> + <para>In this mode Samba will try to validate the username/password + by passing it to another SMB server, such as an NT box. If this + fails it will revert to <command>security = user</command>, but note + that if encrypted passwords have been negotiated then Samba cannot + revert back to checking the UNIX password file, it must have a valid + <filename>smbpasswd</filename> file to check users against. See the + documentation file in the <filename>docs/</filename> directory + <filename>ENCRYPTION.txt</filename> for details on how to set this + up.</para> - <para><emphasis>Note</emphasis> that from the client's point - of view <command>security = domain</command> is the same as <command>security = user - </command>. It only affects how the server deals with the authentication, - it does not in any way affect what the client sees.</para> + <para><emphasis>Note</emphasis> that from the client's point of + view <command>security = server</command> is the same as <command> + security = user</command>. It only affects how the server deals + with the authentication, it does not in any way affect what the + client sees.</para> <para><emphasis>Note</emphasis> that the name of the resource being requested is <emphasis>not</emphasis> sent to the server until after @@ -6825,42 +6920,27 @@ print5|My Printer 5 server</parameter></link> parameter and the <link linkend="ENCRYPTPASSWORDS"><parameter>encrypted passwords</parameter> </link> parameter.</para> - - <para><anchor id="SECURITYEQUALSSERVER"/><emphasis>SECURITY = SERVER + + <para><anchor id="SECURITYEQUALSDOMAIN"><emphasis>SECURITY = DOMAIN </emphasis></para> - <para>In this mode Samba will try to validate the username/password - by passing it to another SMB server, such as an NT box. If this - fails it will revert to <command>security = - user</command>. It expects the <link + <para>This mode will only work correctly if <ulink + url="smbpasswd.8.html">smbpasswd(8)</ulink> has been used to add this + machine into a Windows NT Domain. It expects the <link linkend="ENCRYPTPASSWORDS"><parameter>encrypted passwords</parameter> - </link> parameter to be set to - <constant>yes</constant>, unless the remote server - does not support them. However note - that if encrypted passwords have been negotiated then Samba cannot - revert back to checking the UNIX password file, it must have a valid - <filename>smbpasswd</filename> file to check users against. See the - documentation file in the <filename>docs/</filename> directory - <filename>ENCRYPTION.txt</filename> for details on how to set this - up.</para> + </link> parameter to be set to <constant>yes</constant>. In this + mode Samba will try to validate the username/password by passing + it to a Windows NT Primary or Backup Domain Controller, in exactly + the same way that a Windows NT Server would do.</para> - <para><emphasis>Note</emphasis> this mode of operation - has significant pitfalls, due to the fact that is - activly initiates a man-in-the-middle attack on the - remote SMB server. In particular, this mode of - operation can cause significant resource consuption on - the PDC, as it must maintain an active connection for - the duration of the user's session. Furthermore, if - this connection is lost, there is no way to - reestablish it, and futher authenticaions to the Samba - server may fail. (From a single client, till it - disconnects). </para> + <para><emphasis>Note</emphasis> that a valid UNIX user must still + exist as well as the account on the Domain Controller to allow + Samba to have a valid UNIX account to map file access to.</para> - <para><emphasis>Note</emphasis> that from the client's point of - view <command>security = server</command> is the same as <command> - security = user</command>. It only affects how the server deals - with the authentication, it does not in any way affect what the - client sees.</para> + <para><emphasis>Note</emphasis> that from the client's point + of view <command>security = domain</command> is the same as <command>security = user + </command>. It only affects how the server deals with the authentication, + it does not in any way affect what the client sees.</para> <para><emphasis>Note</emphasis> that the name of the resource being requested is <emphasis>not</emphasis> sent to the server until after @@ -6871,6 +6951,14 @@ print5|My Printer 5 See the <link linkend="MAPTOGUEST"><parameter>map to guest</parameter> </link> parameter for details on doing this.</para> + <para><emphasis>BUG:</emphasis> There is currently a bug in the + implementation of <command>security = domain</command> with respect + to multi-byte character set usernames. The communication with a + Domain Controller must be done in UNICODE and Samba currently + does not widen multi-byte user names to UNICODE correctly, thus + a multi-byte username will not be recognized correctly at the + Domain Controller. This issue will be addressed in a future release.</para> + <para>See also the section <link linkend="VALIDATIONSECT"> NOTE ABOUT USERNAME/PASSWORD VALIDATION</link>.</para> @@ -6878,17 +6966,16 @@ print5|My Printer 5 server</parameter></link> parameter and the <link linkend="ENCRYPTPASSWORDS"><parameter>encrypted passwords</parameter> </link> parameter.</para> - + <para>Default: <command>security = USER</command></para> <para>Example: <command>security = DOMAIN</command></para> - </listitem> </varlistentry> <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="SECURITYMASK"/>security mask (S)</term> + <term><anchor id="SECURITYMASK">security mask (S)</term> <listitem><para>This parameter controls what UNIX permission bits can be modified when a Windows NT client is manipulating the UNIX permission on a file using the native NT security @@ -6948,7 +7035,7 @@ print5|My Printer 5 </varlistentry> <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="SERVERSTRING"/>server string (G)</term> + <term><anchor id="SERVERSTRING">server string (G)</term> <listitem><para>This controls what string will show up in the printer comment box in print manager and next to the IPC connection in <command>net view</command>. It can be any string that you wish @@ -6992,7 +7079,7 @@ print5|My Printer 5 <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="SETDIRECTORY"/>set directory (S)</term> + <term><anchor id="SETDIRECTORY">set directory (S)</term> <listitem><para>If <command>set directory = no</command>, then users of the service may not use the setdir command to change directory.</para> @@ -7008,7 +7095,7 @@ print5|My Printer 5 <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="SHAREMODES"/>share modes (S)</term> + <term><anchor id="SHAREMODES">share modes (S)</term> <listitem><para>This enables or disables the honoring of the <parameter>share modes</parameter> during a file open. These modes are used by clients to gain exclusive read or write access @@ -7037,7 +7124,7 @@ print5|My Printer 5 <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="SHORTPRESERVECASE"/>short preserve case (S)</term> + <term><anchor id="SHORTPRESERVECASE">short preserve case (S)</term> <listitem><para>This boolean parameter controls if new files which conform to 8.3 syntax, that is all in upper case and of suitable length, are created upper case, or if they are forced @@ -7057,7 +7144,7 @@ print5|My Printer 5 <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="SHOWADDPRINTERWIZARD"/>show add printer wizard (G)</term> + <term><anchor id="SHOWADDPRINTERWIZARD">show add printer wizard (G)</term> <listitem><para>With the introduction of MS-RPC based printing support for Windows NT/2000 client in Samba 2.2, a "Printers..." folder will appear on Samba hosts in the share listing. Normally this folder will @@ -7092,7 +7179,7 @@ print5|My Printer 5 <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="SHUTDOWNSCRIPT"/>shutdown script (G)</term> + <term><anchor id="SHUTDOWNSCRIPT">shutdown script (G)</term> <listitem><para><emphasis>This parameter only exists in the HEAD cvs branch</emphasis> This a full path name to a script called by <ulink url="smbd.8.html"><command>smbd(8)</command></ulink> that @@ -7118,15 +7205,15 @@ print5|My Printer 5 <para>Default: <emphasis>None</emphasis>.</para> <para>Example: <command>abort shutdown script = /usr/local/samba/sbin/shutdown %m %t %r %f</command></para> <para>Shutdown script example: -<programlisting> -#!/bin/bash + <programlisting> + #!/bin/bash -$time=0 -let "time/60" -let "time++" + $time=0 + let "time/60" + let "time++" -/sbin/shutdown $3 $4 +$time $1 & -</programlisting> + /sbin/shutdown $3 $4 +$time $1 & + </programlisting> Shutdown does not return so we need to launch it in background. </para> @@ -7136,7 +7223,7 @@ let "time++" <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="SMBPASSWDFILE"/>smb passwd file (G)</term> + <term><anchor id="SMBPASSWDFILE">smb passwd file (G)</term> <listitem><para>This option sets the path to the encrypted smbpasswd file. By default the path to the smbpasswd file is compiled into Samba.</para> @@ -7151,7 +7238,7 @@ let "time++" <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="SMBPORTS"/>smb ports (G)</term> + <term><anchor id="SMBPORTS">smb ports (G)</term> <listitem><para>Specifies which ports the server should listen on for SMB traffic. </para> @@ -7162,7 +7249,7 @@ let "time++" </varlistentry> <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="SOCKETADDRESS"/>socket address (G)</term> + <term><anchor id="SOCKETADDRESS">socket address (G)</term> <listitem><para>This option allows you to control what address Samba will listen for connections on. This is used to support multiple virtual interfaces on the one server, each @@ -7179,7 +7266,7 @@ let "time++" <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="SOCKETOPTIONS"/>socket options (G)</term> + <term><anchor id="SOCKETOPTIONS">socket options (G)</term> <listitem><para>This option allows you to set socket options to be used when talking with the client.</para> @@ -7252,7 +7339,7 @@ let "time++" <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="SOURCEENVIRONMENT"/>source environment (G)</term> + <term><anchor id="SOURCEENVIRONMENT">source environment (G)</term> <listitem><para>This parameter causes Samba to set environment variables as per the content of the file named.</para> @@ -7274,23 +7361,17 @@ let "time++" /usr/local/smb_env_vars</command></para> </listitem> </varlistentry> +<varlistentry> +<term><anchor id="SPNEGO">use spnego (G)</term> +<listitem><para> This variable controls controls whether samba will try to use Simple and Protected NEGOciation (as specified by rfc2478) with WindowsXP and Windows2000sp2 clients to agree upon an authentication mechanism. As of samba 3.0alpha it must be set to "no" for these clients to join a samba domain controller. It can be set to "yes" to allow samba to participate in an AD domain controlled by a Windows2000 domain controller.</para> +<para>Default: <emphasis>use spnego = yes</emphasis></para> +</listitem> +</varlistentry> <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="SPNEGO"/>use spnego (G)</term> - <listitem><para> This variable controls controls whether samba will try - to use Simple and Protected NEGOciation (as specified by rfc2478) with - WindowsXP and Windows2000sp2 clients to agree upon an authentication mechanism. - Unless further issues are discovered with our SPNEGO - implementation, there is no reason this should ever be - disabled.</para> - <para>Default: <emphasis>use spnego = yes</emphasis></para> - </listitem> - </varlistentry> - - <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="STATCACHE"/>stat cache (G)</term> - <listitem><para>This parameter determines if <citerefentry><refentrytitle>smbd</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>8</manvolnum></citerefentry> will use a cache in order to + <term><anchor id="STATCACHE">stat cache (G)</term> + <listitem><para>This parameter determines if <ulink + url="smbd.8.html">smbd(8)</ulink> will use a cache in order to speed up case insensitive name mappings. You should never need to change this parameter.</para> @@ -7299,7 +7380,7 @@ let "time++" </varlistentry> <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="STATCACHESIZE"/>stat cache size (G)</term> + <term><anchor id="STATCACHESIZE">stat cache size (G)</term> <listitem><para>This parameter determines the number of entries in the <parameter>stat cache</parameter>. You should never need to change this parameter.</para> @@ -7311,7 +7392,7 @@ let "time++" <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="STRICTALLOCATE"/>strict allocate (S)</term> + <term><anchor id="STRICTALLOCATE">strict allocate (S)</term> <listitem><para>This is a boolean that controls the handling of disk space allocation in the server. When this is set to <constant>yes</constant> the server will change from UNIX behaviour of not committing real @@ -7335,7 +7416,7 @@ let "time++" <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="STRICTLOCKING"/>strict locking (S)</term> + <term><anchor id="STRICTLOCKING">strict locking (S)</term> <listitem><para>This is a boolean that controls the handling of file locking in the server. When this is set to <constant>yes</constant> the server will check every read and write access for file locks, and @@ -7355,7 +7436,7 @@ let "time++" <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="STRICTSYNC"/>strict sync (S)</term> + <term><anchor id="STRICTSYNC">strict sync (S)</term> <listitem><para>Many Windows applications (including the Windows 98 explorer shell) seem to confuse flushing buffer contents to disk with doing a sync to disk. Under UNIX, a sync call forces @@ -7363,8 +7444,7 @@ let "time++" all outstanding data in kernel disk buffers has been safely stored onto stable storage. This is very slow and should only be done rarely. Setting this parameter to <constant>no</constant> (the - default) means that <citerefentry><refentrytitle>smbd</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>8</manvolnum></citerefentry> ignores the Windows applications requests for + default) means that <ulink url="smbd.8.html">smbd</ulink> ignores the Windows applications requests for a sync call. There is only a possibility of losing data if the operating system itself that Samba is running on crashes, so there is little danger in this default setting. In addition, this fixes many @@ -7380,7 +7460,7 @@ let "time++" <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="STRIPDOT"/>strip dot (G)</term> + <term><anchor id="STRIPDOT">strip dot (G)</term> <listitem><para>This is a boolean that controls whether to strip trailing dots off UNIX filenames. This helps with some CDROMs that have filenames ending in a single dot.</para> @@ -7392,7 +7472,7 @@ let "time++" <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="SYNCALWAYS"/>sync always (S)</term> + <term><anchor id="SYNCALWAYS">sync always (S)</term> <listitem><para>This is a boolean parameter that controls whether writes will always be written to stable storage before the write call returns. If this is <constant>no</constant> then the server will be @@ -7414,7 +7494,7 @@ let "time++" <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="SYSLOG"/>syslog (G)</term> + <term><anchor id="SYSLOG">syslog (G)</term> <listitem><para>This parameter maps how Samba debug messages are logged onto the system syslog logging levels. Samba debug level zero maps onto syslog <constant>LOG_ERR</constant>, debug @@ -7434,7 +7514,7 @@ let "time++" <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="SYSLOGONLY"/>syslog only (G)</term> + <term><anchor id="SYSLOGONLY">syslog only (G)</term> <listitem><para>If this parameter is set then Samba debug messages are logged into the system syslog only, and not to the debug log files.</para> @@ -7446,7 +7526,7 @@ let "time++" <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="TEMPLATEHOMEDIR"/>template homedir (G)</term> + <term><anchor id="TEMPLATEHOMEDIR">template homedir (G)</term> <listitem><para>When filling out the user information for a Windows NT user, the <ulink url="winbindd.8.html">winbindd(8)</ulink> daemon uses this parameter to fill in the home directory for that user. @@ -7462,10 +7542,9 @@ let "time++" <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="TEMPLATESHELL"/>template shell (G)</term> + <term><anchor id="TEMPLATESHELL">template shell (G)</term> <listitem><para>When filling out the user information for a Windows NT - user, the <citerefentry><refentrytitle>winbindd</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>8</manvolnum></citerefentry> daemon + user, the <ulink url="winbindd.8.html">winbindd(8)</ulink> daemon uses this parameter to fill in the login shell for that user.</para> <para>Default: <command>template shell = /bin/false</command></para> @@ -7475,7 +7554,7 @@ let "time++" <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="TIMEOFFSET"/>time offset (G)</term> + <term><anchor id="TIMEOFFSET">time offset (G)</term> <listitem><para>This parameter is a setting in minutes to add to the normal GMT to local time conversion. This is useful if you are serving a lot of PCs that have incorrect daylight @@ -7489,9 +7568,9 @@ let "time++" <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="TIMESERVER"/>time server (G)</term> - <listitem><para>This parameter determines if <citerefentry><refentrytitle>nmbd</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>8</manvolnum></citerefentry> advertises itself as a time server to Windows + <term><anchor id="TIMESERVER">time server (G)</term> + <listitem><para>This parameter determines if <ulink url="nmbd.8.html"> + nmbd(8)</ulink> advertises itself as a time server to Windows clients.</para> <para>Default: <command>time server = no</command></para> @@ -7500,7 +7579,7 @@ let "time++" <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="TIMESTAMPLOGS"/>timestamp logs (G)</term> + <term><anchor id="TIMESTAMPLOGS">timestamp logs (G)</term> <listitem><para>Synonym for <link linkend="DEBUGTIMESTAMP"><parameter> debug timestamp</parameter></link>.</para> </listitem> @@ -7511,17 +7590,16 @@ let "time++" <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="TOTALPRINTJOBS"/>total print jobs (G)</term> + <term><anchor id="TOTALPRINTJOBS">total print jobs (G)</term> <listitem><para>This parameter accepts an integer value which defines a limit on the maximum number of print jobs that will be accepted system wide at any given time. If a print job is submitted - by a client which will exceed this number, then <citerefentry><refentrytitle>smbd</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>8</manvolnum></citerefentry> will return an + by a client which will exceed this number, then <ulink url="smbd.8.html">smbd</ulink> will return an error indicating that no space is available on the server. The default value of 0 means that no such limit exists. This parameter can be used to prevent a server from exceeding its capacity and is designed as a printing throttle. See also - <link linkend="MAXPRINTJOBS"><parameter>max print jobs</parameter></link>. + <link linkend="MAXPRINTJOBS"><parameter>max print jobs</parameter</link>. </para> <para>Default: <command>total print jobs = 0</command></para> @@ -7530,7 +7608,7 @@ let "time++" </varlistentry> <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="UNICODE"/>unicode (G)</term> + <term><anchor id="UNICODE">unicode (G)</term> <listitem><para>Specifies whether Samba should try to use unicode on the wire by default. Note: This does NOT mean that samba will assume that the unix machine uses unicode! @@ -7542,19 +7620,19 @@ let "time++" </varlistentry> <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="UNIXCHARSET"/>unix charset (G)</term> + <term><anchor id="UNIXCHARSET">unix charset (G)</term> <listitem><para>Specifies the charset the unix machine Samba runs on uses. Samba needs to know this in order to be able to convert text to the charsets other SMB clients use. </para> - <para>Default: <command>unix charset = UTF8</command></para> - <para>Example: <command>unix charset = ASCII</command></para> + <para>Default: <command>unix charset = ASCII</command></para> + <para>Example: <command>unix charset = UTF8</command></para> </listitem> </varlistentry> <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="UNIXEXTENSIONS"/>unix extensions(G)</term> + <term><anchor id="UNIXEXTENSIONS">unix extensions(G)</term> <listitem><para>This boolean parameter controls whether Samba implments the CIFS UNIX extensions, as defined by HP. These extensions enable Samba to better serve UNIX CIFS clients @@ -7570,7 +7648,7 @@ let "time++" <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="UNIXPASSWORDSYNC"/>unix password sync (G)</term> + <term><anchor id="UNIXPASSWORDSYNC">unix password sync (G)</term> <listitem><para>This boolean parameter controls whether Samba attempts to synchronize the UNIX password with the SMB password when the encrypted SMB password in the smbpasswd file is changed. @@ -7591,7 +7669,7 @@ let "time++" <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="UPDATEENCRYPTED"/>update encrypted (G)</term> + <term><anchor id="UPDATEENCRYPTED">update encrypted (G)</term> <listitem><para>This boolean parameter allows a user logging on with a plaintext password to have their encrypted (hashed) password in the smbpasswd file to be updated automatically as @@ -7622,7 +7700,7 @@ let "time++" <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="USECLIENTDRIVER"/>use client driver (S)</term> + <term><anchor id="USECLIENTDRIVER">use client driver (S)</term> <listitem><para>This parameter applies only to Windows NT/2000 clients. It has no affect on Windows 95/98/ME clients. When serving a printer to Windows NT/2000 clients without first installing @@ -7660,7 +7738,7 @@ let "time++" <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="USEMMAP"/>use mmap (G)</term> + <term><anchor id="USEMMAP">use mmap (G)</term> <listitem><para>This global parameter determines if the tdb internals of Samba can depend on mmap working correctly on the running system. Samba requires a coherent mmap/read-write system memory cache. Currently only HPUX does not have such a @@ -7678,7 +7756,27 @@ let "time++" <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="USER"/>user (S)</term> + <term><anchor id="USERHOSTS">use rhosts (G)</term> + <listitem><para>If this global parameter is <constant>yes</constant>, it specifies + that the UNIX user's <filename>.rhosts</filename> file in their home directory + will be read to find the names of hosts and users who will be allowed + access without specifying a password.</para> + + <para><emphasis>NOTE:</emphasis> The use of <parameter>use rhosts + </parameter> can be a major security hole. This is because you are + trusting the PC to supply the correct username. It is very easy to + get a PC to supply a false username. I recommend that the <parameter> + use rhosts</parameter> option be only used if you really know what + you are doing.</para> + + <para>Default: <command>use rhosts = no</command></para> + </listitem> + </varlistentry> + + + + <varlistentry> + <term><anchor id="USER">user (S)</term> <listitem><para>Synonym for <link linkend="USERNAME"><parameter> username</parameter></link>.</para> </listitem> @@ -7687,7 +7785,7 @@ let "time++" <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="USERS"/>users (S)</term> + <term><anchor id="USERS">users (S)</term> <listitem><para>Synonym for <link linkend="USERNAME"><parameter> username</parameter></link>.</para> </listitem> @@ -7695,7 +7793,7 @@ let "time++" <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="USERNAME"/>username (S)</term> + <term><anchor id="USERNAME">username (S)</term> <listitem><para>Multiple users may be specified in a comma-delimited list, in which case the supplied password will be tested against each username in turn (left to right).</para> @@ -7736,7 +7834,7 @@ let "time++" will be looked up only in the UNIX groups database and will expand to a list of all users in the group of that name.</para> - <para>If any of the usernames begin with a '&' then the name + <para>If any of the usernames begin with a '&'then the name will be looked up only in the NIS netgroups database (if Samba is compiled with netgroup support) and will expand to a list of all users in the netgroup group of that name.</para> @@ -7760,7 +7858,7 @@ let "time++" <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="USERNAMELEVEL"/>username level (G)</term> + <term><anchor id="USERNAMELEVEL">username level (G)</term> <listitem><para>This option helps Samba to try and 'guess' at the real UNIX username, as many DOS clients send an all-uppercase username. By default Samba tries all lowercase, followed by the @@ -7783,7 +7881,7 @@ let "time++" <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="USERNAMEMAP"/>username map (G)</term> + <term><anchor id="USERNAMEMAP">username map (G)</term> <listitem><para>This option allows you to specify a file containing a mapping of usernames from the clients to the server. This can be used for several purposes. The most common is to map usernames @@ -7846,10 +7944,10 @@ let "time++" '!' to tell Samba to stop processing if it gets a match on that line.</para> -<para><programlisting> -!sys = mary fred -guest = * -</programlisting></para> + <para><programlisting> + !sys = mary fred + guest = * + </programlisting></para> <para>Note that the remapping is applied to all occurrences of usernames. Thus if you connect to \\server\fred and <constant> @@ -7875,7 +7973,7 @@ guest = * <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="USESENDFILE"/>use sendfile (S)</term> + <term><anchor id="USESENDFILE">use sendfile (S)</term> <listitem><para>If this parameter is <constant>yes</constant>, and Samba was built with the --with-sendfile-support option, and the underlying operating system supports sendfile system call, then some SMB read calls (mainly ReadAndX @@ -7892,7 +7990,7 @@ guest = * <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="UTMP"/>utmp (G)</term> + <term><anchor id="UTMP">utmp (G)</term> <listitem><para>This boolean parameter is only available if Samba has been configured and compiled with the option <command> --with-utmp</command>. If set to <constant>yes</constant> then Samba will attempt @@ -7914,7 +8012,7 @@ guest = * </varlistentry> <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="UTMPDIRECTORY"/>utmp directory(G)</term> + <term><anchor id="UTMPDIRECTORY">utmp directory(G)</term> <listitem><para>This parameter is only available if Samba has been configured and compiled with the option <command> --with-utmp</command>. It specifies a directory pathname that is @@ -7931,7 +8029,7 @@ guest = * </varlistentry> <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="WTMPDIRECTORY"/>wtmp directory(G)</term> + <term><anchor id="WTMPDIRECTORY">wtmp directory(G)</term> <listitem><para>This parameter is only available if Samba has been configured and compiled with the option <command> --with-utmp</command>. It specifies a directory pathname that is @@ -7953,9 +8051,9 @@ guest = * <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="VALIDUSERS"/>valid users (S)</term> + <term><anchor id="VALIDUSERS">valid users (S)</term> <listitem><para>This is a list of users that should be allowed - to login to this service. Names starting with '@', '+' and '&' + to login to this service. Names starting with '@', '+' and '&' are interpreted using the same rules as described in the <parameter>invalid users</parameter> parameter.</para> @@ -7980,7 +8078,7 @@ guest = * <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="VETOFILES"/>veto files(S)</term> + <term><anchor id="VETOFILES">veto files(S)</term> <listitem><para>This is a list of files and directories that are neither visible nor accessible. Each entry in the list must be separated by a '/', which allows spaces to be included @@ -8028,7 +8126,7 @@ veto files = /.AppleDouble/.bin/.AppleDesktop/Network Trash Folder/ <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="VETOOPLOCKFILES"/>veto oplock files (S)</term> + <term><anchor id="VETOOPLOCKFILES">veto oplock files (S)</term> <listitem><para>This parameter is only valid when the <link linkend="OPLOCKS"><parameter>oplocks</parameter></link> parameter is turned on for a share. It allows the Samba administrator @@ -8054,7 +8152,7 @@ veto files = /.AppleDouble/.bin/.AppleDesktop/Network Trash Folder/ </varlistentry> <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="VFSPATH"/>vfs path (S)</term> + <term><anchor id="VFSPATH">vfs path (S)</term> <listitem><para>This parameter specifies the directory to look in for vfs modules. The name of every <command>vfs object </command> will be prepended by this directory @@ -8067,7 +8165,7 @@ veto files = /.AppleDouble/.bin/.AppleDesktop/Network Trash Folder/ </varlistentry> <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="VFSOBJECT"/>vfs object (S)</term> + <term><anchor id="VFSOBJECT">vfs object (S)</term> <listitem><para>This parameter specifies a shared object files that are used for Samba VFS I/O operations. By default, normal disk I/O operations are used but these can be overloaded @@ -8081,7 +8179,7 @@ veto files = /.AppleDouble/.bin/.AppleDesktop/Network Trash Folder/ <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="VFSOPTIONS"/>vfs options (S)</term> + <term><anchor id="VFSOPTIONS">vfs options (S)</term> <listitem><para>This parameter allows parameters to be passed to the vfs layer at initialization time. See also <link linkend="VFSOBJECT"><parameter> @@ -8094,7 +8192,7 @@ veto files = /.AppleDouble/.bin/.AppleDesktop/Network Trash Folder/ <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="VOLUME"/>volume (S)</term> + <term><anchor id="VOLUME">volume (S)</term> <listitem><para> This allows you to override the volume label returned for a share. Useful for CDROMs with installation programs that insist on a particular volume label.</para> @@ -8106,7 +8204,7 @@ veto files = /.AppleDouble/.bin/.AppleDesktop/Network Trash Folder/ <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="WIDELINKS"/>wide links (S)</term> + <term><anchor id="WIDELINKS">wide links (S)</term> <listitem><para>This parameter controls whether or not links in the UNIX file system may be followed by the server. Links that point to areas within the directory tree exported by the @@ -8125,10 +8223,9 @@ veto files = /.AppleDouble/.bin/.AppleDesktop/Network Trash Folder/ <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="WINBINDCACHETIME"/>winbind cache time (G)</term> - <listitem><para>This parameter specifies the number of - seconds the <citerefentry><refentrytitle>winbindd</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>8</manvolnum></citerefentry> daemon will cache + <term><anchor id="WINBINDCACHETIME">winbind cache time (G)</term> + <listitem><para>This parameter specifies the number of seconds the + <ulink url="winbindd.8.html">winbindd(8)</ulink> daemon will cache user and group information before querying a Windows NT server again.</para> @@ -8138,10 +8235,11 @@ veto files = /.AppleDouble/.bin/.AppleDesktop/Network Trash Folder/ <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="WINBINDENUMUSERS"/>winbind enum users (G)</term> - <listitem><para>On large installations using <citerefentry><refentrytitle>winbindd</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>8</manvolnum></citerefentry> it may be - necessary to suppress the enumeration of users through the <command>setpwent()</command>, + <term><anchor id="WINBINDENUMUSERS">winbind enum users (G)</term> + <listitem><para>On large installations using + <ulink url="winbindd.8.html">winbindd(8)</ulink> it may be + necessary to suppress the enumeration of users through the + <command> setpwent()</command>, <command>getpwent()</command> and <command>endpwent()</command> group of system calls. If the <parameter>winbind enum users</parameter> parameter is @@ -8159,10 +8257,11 @@ veto files = /.AppleDouble/.bin/.AppleDesktop/Network Trash Folder/ </varlistentry> <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="WINBINDENUMGROUPS"/>winbind enum groups (G)</term> - <listitem><para>On large installations using <citerefentry><refentrytitle>winbindd</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>8</manvolnum></citerefentry> it may be necessary to suppress - the enumeration of groups through the <command>setgrent()</command>, + <term><anchor id="WINBINDENUMGROUPS">winbind enum groups (G)</term> + <listitem><para>On large installations using + <ulink url="winbindd.8.html">winbindd(8)</ulink> it may be + necessary to suppress the enumeration of groups through the + <command> setgrent()</command>, <command>getgrent()</command> and <command>endgrent()</command> group of system calls. If the <parameter>winbind enum groups</parameter> parameter is @@ -8179,10 +8278,10 @@ veto files = /.AppleDouble/.bin/.AppleDesktop/Network Trash Folder/ <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="WINBINDGID"/>winbind gid (G)</term> + <term><anchor id="WINBINDGID">winbind gid (G)</term> <listitem><para>The winbind gid parameter specifies the range of group - ids that are allocated by the <citerefentry><refentrytitle>winbindd</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>8</manvolnum></citerefentry> daemon. This range of group ids should have no + ids that are allocated by the <ulink url="winbindd.8.html"> + winbindd(8)</ulink> daemon. This range of group ids should have no existing local or NIS groups within it as strange conflicts can occur otherwise.</para> @@ -8195,7 +8294,7 @@ veto files = /.AppleDouble/.bin/.AppleDesktop/Network Trash Folder/ <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="WINBINDSEPARATOR"/>winbind separator (G)</term> + <term><anchor id="WINBINDSEPARATOR">winbind separator (G)</term> <listitem><para>This parameter allows an admin to define the character used when listing a username of the form of <replaceable>DOMAIN </replaceable>\<replaceable>user</replaceable>. This parameter @@ -8216,10 +8315,10 @@ veto files = /.AppleDouble/.bin/.AppleDesktop/Network Trash Folder/ <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="WINBINDUID"/>winbind uid (G)</term> + <term><anchor id="WINBINDUID">winbind uid (G)</term> <listitem><para>The winbind gid parameter specifies the range of group - ids that are allocated by the <citerefentry><refentrytitle>winbindd</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>8</manvolnum></citerefentry> daemon. This range of ids should have no + ids that are allocated by the <ulink url="winbindd.8.html"> + winbindd(8)</ulink> daemon. This range of ids should have no existing local or NIS users within it as strange conflicts can occur otherwise.</para> @@ -8232,10 +8331,12 @@ veto files = /.AppleDouble/.bin/.AppleDesktop/Network Trash Folder/ <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="WINBINDUSEDEFAULTDOMAIN"/>winbind use default domain (G)</term> - <listitem><para>This parameter specifies whether the <citerefentry><refentrytitle>winbindd</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>8</manvolnum></citerefentry> daemon should operate on users - without domain component in their username. + <term>winbind use default domain</term> + + <term><anchor id="WINBINDUSEDEFAULTDOMAIN">winbind use default domain (G)</term> + <listitem><para>This parameter specifies whether the <ulink url="winbindd.8.html"> + winbindd(8)</ulink> + daemon should operate on users without domain component in their username. Users without a domain component are treated as is part of the winbindd server's own domain. While this does not benifit Windows users, it makes SSH, FTP and e-mail function in a way much closer to the way they would in a native unix system.</para> @@ -8248,7 +8349,7 @@ veto files = /.AppleDouble/.bin/.AppleDesktop/Network Trash Folder/ <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="WINSHOOK"/>wins hook (G)</term> + <term><anchor id="WINSHOOK">wins hook (G)</term> <listitem><para>When Samba is running as a WINS server this allows you to call an external program for all changes to the WINS database. The primary use for this option is to allow the @@ -8296,7 +8397,7 @@ veto files = /.AppleDouble/.bin/.AppleDesktop/Network Trash Folder/ <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="WINSPROXY"/>wins proxy (G)</term> + <term><anchor id="WINSPROXY">wins proxy (G)</term> <listitem><para>This is a boolean that controls if <ulink url="nmbd.8.html">nmbd(8)</ulink> will respond to broadcast name queries on behalf of other hosts. You may need to set this @@ -8310,46 +8411,33 @@ veto files = /.AppleDouble/.bin/.AppleDesktop/Network Trash Folder/ <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="WINSSERVER"/>wins server (G)</term> + <term><anchor id="WINSSERVER">wins server (G)</term> <listitem><para>This specifies the IP address (or DNS name: IP - address for preference) of the WINS server that <citerefentry><refentrytitle>nmbd</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>8</manvolnum></citerefentry> should register with. If you have a WINS server on + address for preference) of the WINS server that <ulink url="nmbd.8.html"> + nmbd(8)</ulink> should register with. If you have a WINS server on your network then you should set this to the WINS server's IP.</para> <para>You should point this at your WINS server if you have a multi-subnetted network.</para> - <para>If you want to work in multiple namespaces, you can - give every wins server a 'tag'. For each tag, only one - (working) server will be queried for a name. The tag should be - seperated from the ip address by a colon. - </para> - - <note><para>You need to set up Samba to point + <para><emphasis>NOTE</emphasis>. You need to set up Samba to point to a WINS server if you have multiple subnets and wish cross-subnet - browsing to work correctly.</para></note> - + browsing to work correctly.</para> - <para>See the documentation file <ulink url="improved-browsing.html">Browsing</ulink> in the samba howto collection.</para> + <para>See the documentation file <filename>BROWSING.txt</filename> + in the docs/ directory of your Samba source distribution.</para> <para>Default: <emphasis>not enabled</emphasis></para> - <para>Example: <command>wins server = mary:192.9.200.1 fred:192.168.3.199 mary:192.168.2.61</command></para> - <para>For this example when querying a certain name, 192.19.200.1 will - be asked first and if that doesn't respond 192.168.2.61. If either - of those doesn't know the name 192.168.3.199 will be queried. - </para> - - <para>Example: <command>wins server = 192.9.200.1 192.168.2.61</command></para> - + <para>Example: <command>wins server = 192.9.200.1</command></para> </listitem> </varlistentry> <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="WINSSUPPORT"/>wins support (G)</term> - <listitem><para>This boolean controls if the <citerefentry><refentrytitle>nmbd</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>8</manvolnum></citerefentry> process in Samba will act as a WINS server. You should + <term><anchor id="WINSSUPPORT">wins support (G)</term> + <listitem><para>This boolean controls if the <ulink url="nmbd.8.html"> + nmbd(8)</ulink> process in Samba will act as a WINS server. You should not set this to <constant>yes</constant> unless you have a multi-subnetted network and you wish a particular <command>nmbd</command> to be your WINS server. Note that you should <emphasis>NEVER</emphasis> set this to <constant>yes</constant> @@ -8362,7 +8450,7 @@ veto files = /.AppleDouble/.bin/.AppleDesktop/Network Trash Folder/ <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="WORKGROUP"/>workgroup (G)</term> + <term><anchor id="WORKGROUP">workgroup (G)</term> <listitem><para>This controls what workgroup your server will appear to be in when queried by clients. Note that this parameter also controls the Domain name used with the <link @@ -8378,7 +8466,7 @@ veto files = /.AppleDouble/.bin/.AppleDesktop/Network Trash Folder/ <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="WRITABLE"/>writable (S)</term> + <term><anchor id="WRITABLE">writable (S)</term> <listitem><para>Synonym for <link linkend="WRITEABLE"><parameter> writeable</parameter></link> for people who can't spell :-).</para> </listitem> @@ -8387,7 +8475,7 @@ veto files = /.AppleDouble/.bin/.AppleDesktop/Network Trash Folder/ <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="WRITECACHESIZE"/>write cache size (S)</term> + <term><anchor id="WRITECACHESIZE">write cache size (S)</term> <listitem><para>If this integer parameter is set to non-zero value, Samba will create an in-memory cache for each oplocked file (it does <emphasis>not</emphasis> do this for @@ -8419,7 +8507,7 @@ veto files = /.AppleDouble/.bin/.AppleDesktop/Network Trash Folder/ <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="WRITELIST"/>write list (S)</term> + <term><anchor id="WRITELIST">write list (S)</term> <listitem><para>This is a list of users that are given read-write access to a service. If the connecting user is in this list then they will be given write access, no matter what the <link @@ -8444,7 +8532,7 @@ veto files = /.AppleDouble/.bin/.AppleDesktop/Network Trash Folder/ <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="WINSPARTNERS"/>wins partners (G)</term> + <term><anchor id="WINSPARTNERS">wins partners (G)</term> <listitem><para>A space separated list of partners' IP addresses for WINS replication. WINS partners are always defined as push/pull partners as defining only one way WINS replication is unreliable. @@ -8460,7 +8548,7 @@ veto files = /.AppleDouble/.bin/.AppleDesktop/Network Trash Folder/ <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="WRITEOK"/>write ok (S)</term> + <term><anchor id="WRITEOK">write ok (S)</term> <listitem><para>Inverted synonym for <link linkend="READONLY"><parameter> read only</parameter></link>.</para> </listitem> @@ -8469,7 +8557,7 @@ veto files = /.AppleDouble/.bin/.AppleDesktop/Network Trash Folder/ <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="WRITERAW"/>write raw (G)</term> + <term><anchor id="WRITERAW">write raw (G)</term> <listitem><para>This parameter controls whether or not the server will support raw write SMB's when transferring data from clients. You should never need to change this parameter.</para> @@ -8481,7 +8569,7 @@ veto files = /.AppleDouble/.bin/.AppleDesktop/Network Trash Folder/ <varlistentry> - <term><anchor id="WRITEABLE"/>writeable (S)</term> + <term><anchor id="WRITEABLE">writeable (S)</term> <listitem><para>Inverted synonym for <link linkend="READONLY"><parameter> read only</parameter></link>.</para> </listitem> @@ -8501,8 +8589,8 @@ veto files = /.AppleDouble/.bin/.AppleDesktop/Network Trash Folder/ problem - but be aware of the possibility.</para> <para>On a similar note, many clients - especially DOS clients - - limit service names to eight characters. <citerefentry><refentrytitle>smbd</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>8</manvolnum></citerefentry> has no such limitation, but attempts to connect from such + limit service names to eight characters. <ulink url="smbd.8.html">smbd(8) + </ulink> has no such limitation, but attempts to connect from such clients will fail if they truncate the service names. For this reason you should probably keep your service names down to eight characters in length.</para> @@ -8517,22 +8605,22 @@ veto files = /.AppleDouble/.bin/.AppleDesktop/Network Trash Folder/ <refsect1> <title>VERSION</title> - <para>This man page is correct for version 3.0 of the Samba suite.</para> + <para>This man page is correct for version 3.0 of + the Samba suite.</para> </refsect1> <refsect1> <title>SEE ALSO</title> - <para> - <citerefentry><refentrytitle>samba</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>7</manvolnum></citerefentry>, <citerefentry><refentrytitle>smbpasswd</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>8</manvolnum></citerefentry>, <citerefentry><refentrytitle>swat</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>8</manvolnum></citerefentry>, <citerefentry><refentrytitle>smbd</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>8</manvolnum></citerefentry>, <citerefentry><refentrytitle>nmbd</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>8</manvolnum></citerefentry>, <citerefentry><refentrytitle>smbclient</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>1</manvolnum></citerefentry>, <citerefentry><refentrytitle>nmblookup</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>1</manvolnum></citerefentry>, <citerefentry><refentrytitle>testparm</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>1</manvolnum></citerefentry>, <citerefentry><refentrytitle>testprns</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>1</manvolnum></citerefentry>.</para> + <para><ulink url="samba.7.html">samba(7)</ulink>, + <ulink url="smbpasswd.8.html"><command>smbpasswd(8)</command></ulink>, + <ulink url="swat.8.html"><command>swat(8)</command></ulink>, + <ulink url="smbd.8.html"><command>smbd(8)</command></ulink>, + <ulink url="nmbd.8.html"><command>nmbd(8)</command></ulink>, + <ulink url="smbclient.1.html"><command>smbclient(1)</command></ulink>, + <ulink url="nmblookup.1.html"><command>nmblookup(1)</command></ulink>, + <ulink url="testparm.1.html"><command>testparm(1)</command></ulink>, + <ulink url="testprns.1.html"><command>testprns(1)</command></ulink> + </para> </refsect1> <refsect1> @@ -8545,11 +8633,11 @@ veto files = /.AppleDouble/.bin/.AppleDesktop/Network Trash Folder/ <para>The original Samba man pages were written by Karl Auer. The man page sources were converted to YODL format (another - excellent piece of Open Source software, available at <ulink url="ftp://ftp.icce.rug.nl/pub/unix/"> + excellent piece of Open Source software, available at + <ulink url="ftp://ftp.icce.rug.nl/pub/unix/"> ftp://ftp.icce.rug.nl/pub/unix/</ulink>) and updated for the Samba 2.0 release by Jeremy Allison. The conversion to DocBook for - Samba 2.2 was done by Gerald Carter. The conversion to DocBook XML 4.2 - for Samba 3.0 was done by Alexander Bokovoy.</para> + Samba 2.2 was done by Gerald Carter</para> </refsect1> </refentry> diff --git a/docs/docbook/manpages/smbcacls.1.sgml b/docs/docbook/manpages/smbcacls.1.sgml index 445566c5bd..766d2a78b1 100644 --- a/docs/docbook/manpages/smbcacls.1.sgml +++ b/docs/docbook/manpages/smbcacls.1.sgml @@ -1,7 +1,5 @@ -<!DOCTYPE refentry PUBLIC "-//OASIS//DTD DocBook V4.1//EN" [ -<!ENTITY % globalentities SYSTEM '../global.ent'> %globalentities; -]> -<refentry id="smbcacls.1"> +<!DOCTYPE refentry PUBLIC "-//OASIS//DTD DocBook V4.1//EN"> +<refentry id="smbcacls"> <refmeta> <refentrytitle>smbcacls</refentrytitle> @@ -19,26 +17,24 @@ <command>smbcacls</command> <arg choice="req">//server/share</arg> <arg choice="req">filename</arg> - <arg choice="opt">-D acls</arg> - <arg choice="opt">-M acls</arg> + <arg choice="opt">-U username</arg> <arg choice="opt">-A acls</arg> + <arg choice="opt">-M acls</arg> + <arg choice="opt">-D acls</arg> <arg choice="opt">-S acls</arg> <arg choice="opt">-C name</arg> <arg choice="opt">-G name</arg> <arg choice="opt">-n</arg> - <arg choice="opt">-t</arg> - <arg choice="opt">-U username</arg> <arg choice="opt">-h</arg> - <arg choice="opt">-d</arg> </cmdsynopsis> </refsynopsisdiv> <refsect1> <title>DESCRIPTION</title> - <para>This tool is part of the <citerefentry><refentrytitle>Samba</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>7</manvolnum></citerefentry> suite.</para> - + <para>This tool is part of the <ulink url="samba.7.html"> + Samba</ulink> suite.</para> + <para>The <command>smbcacls</command> program manipulates NT Access Control Lists (ACLs) on SMB file shares. </para> </refsect1> @@ -94,8 +90,7 @@ <listitem><para>Specifies a username used to connect to the specified service. The username may be of the form "username" in which case the user is prompted to enter in a password and the - workgroup specified in the <citerefentry><refentrytitle>smb.conf</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>5</manvolnum></citerefentry> file is + workgroup specified in the <filename>smb.conf</filename> file is used, or "username%password" or "DOMAIN\username%password" and the password and workgroup names are used as provided. </para></listitem> </varlistentry> @@ -135,16 +130,13 @@ and masks to a readable string format. </para></listitem> </varlistentry> + + <varlistentry> - <term>-t</term> - <listitem><para> - Don't actually do anything, only validate the correctness of - the arguments. - </para></listitem> + <term>-h</term> + <listitem><para>Print usage information on the <command>smbcacls + </command> program.</para></listitem> </varlistentry> - - &stdarg.help; - &popt.common.samba; </variablelist> </refsect1> @@ -155,12 +147,12 @@ <para>The format of an ACL is one or more ACL entries separated by either commas or newlines. An ACL entry is one of the following: </para> -<para><programlisting> + <para><programlisting> REVISION:<revision number> OWNER:<sid or name> GROUP:<sid or name> ACL:<sid or name>:<type>/<flags>/<mask> -</programlisting></para> + </programlisting></para> <para>The revision of the ACL specifies the internal Windows @@ -173,22 +165,24 @@ ACL:<sid or name>:<type>/<flags>/<mask> otherwise the name specified is resolved using the server on which the file or directory resides. </para> - <para>ACLs specify permissions granted to the SID. This SID again - can be specified in CWS-1-x-y-z format or as a name in which case - it is resolved against the server on which the file or directory - resides. The type, flags and mask values determine the type of - access granted to the SID. </para> - - <para>The type can be either 0 or 1 corresponding to ALLOWED or - DENIED access to the SID. The flags values are generally - zero for file ACLs and either 9 or 2 for directory ACLs. Some - common flags are: </para> - - <itemizedlist> - <listitem><para><constant>#define SEC_ACE_FLAG_OBJECT_INHERIT 0x1</constant></para></listitem> - <listitem><para><constant>#define SEC_ACE_FLAG_CONTAINER_INHERIT 0x2</constant></para></listitem> - <listitem><para><constant>#define SEC_ACE_FLAG_NO_PROPAGATE_INHERIT 0x4</constant></para></listitem> - <listitem><para><constant>#define SEC_ACE_FLAG_INHERIT_ONLY 0x8</constant></para></listitem> + <para>ACLs specify permissions granted to the SID. This SID again + can be specified in CWS-1-x-y-z format or as a name in which case + it is resolved against the server on which the file or directory + resides. The type, flags and mask values determine the type of + access granted to the SID. </para> + + <para>The type can be either 0 or 1 corresponding to ALLOWED or + DENIED access to the SID. The flags values are generally + zero for file ACLs and either 9 or 2 for directory ACLs. Some + common flags are: </para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem><para>#define SEC_ACE_FLAG_OBJECT_INHERIT 0x1</para></listitem> + <listitem><para>#define SEC_ACE_FLAG_CONTAINER_INHERIT 0x2</para></listitem> + <listitem><para>#define SEC_ACE_FLAG_NO_PROPAGATE_INHERIT 0x4 + </para></listitem> + <listitem><para>#define SEC_ACE_FLAG_INHERIT_ONLY 0x8</para> + </listitem> </itemizedlist> <para>At present flags can only be specified as decimal or @@ -239,7 +233,8 @@ ACL:<sid or name>:<type>/<flags>/<mask> <refsect1> <title>VERSION</title> - <para>This man page is correct for version 3.0 of the Samba suite.</para> + <para>This man page is correct for version 2.2 of + the Samba suite.</para> </refsect1> <refsect1> @@ -254,8 +249,7 @@ ACL:<sid or name>:<type>/<flags>/<mask> and Tim Potter.</para> <para>The conversion to DocBook for Samba 2.2 was done - by Gerald Carter. The conversion to DocBook XML 4.2 for Samba 3.0 was done - by Alexander Bokovoy.</para> + by Gerald Carter</para> </refsect1> </refentry> diff --git a/docs/docbook/manpages/smbclient.1.sgml b/docs/docbook/manpages/smbclient.1.sgml index cd513398b9..43994a4529 100644 --- a/docs/docbook/manpages/smbclient.1.sgml +++ b/docs/docbook/manpages/smbclient.1.sgml @@ -1,7 +1,5 @@ -<!DOCTYPE refentry PUBLIC "-//OASIS//DTD DocBook V4.1//EN" [ -<!ENTITY % globalentities SYSTEM '../global.ent'> %globalentities; -]> -<refentry id="smbclient.1"> +<!DOCTYPE refentry PUBLIC "-//OASIS//DTD DocBook V4.1//EN"> +<refentry id="smbclient"> <refmeta> <refentrytitle>smbclient</refentrytitle> @@ -40,20 +38,18 @@ <arg choice="opt">-R <name resolve order></arg> <arg choice="opt">-s <smb config file></arg> <arg choice="opt">-T<c|x>IXFqgbNan</arg> - <arg choice="opt">-k</arg> </cmdsynopsis> </refsynopsisdiv> <refsect1> <title>DESCRIPTION</title> - <para>This tool is part of the <citerefentry><refentrytitle>Samba</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>7</manvolnum></citerefentry> suite.</para> + <para>This tool is part of the <ulink url="samba.7.html"> + Samba</ulink> suite.</para> <para><command>smbclient</command> is a client that can 'talk' to an SMB/CIFS server. It offers an interface - similar to that of the ftp program (see <citerefentry><refentrytitle>ftp</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>1</manvolnum></citerefentry>). + similar to that of the ftp program (see <command>ftp(1)</command>). Operations include things like getting files from the server to the local machine, putting files from the local machine to the server, retrieving directory information from the server @@ -85,9 +81,7 @@ <para>The server name is looked up according to either the <parameter>-R</parameter> parameter to <command>smbclient</command> or - using the name resolve order parameter in - the <citerefentry><refentrytitle>smb.conf</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>5</manvolnum></citerefentry> file, + using the name resolve order parameter in the <filename>smb.conf</filename> file, allowing an administrator to change the order and methods by which server names are looked up. </para></listitem> </varlistentry> @@ -118,6 +112,21 @@ </varlistentry> <varlistentry> + <term>-s smb.conf</term> + <listitem><para>Specifies the location of the all important + <filename>smb.conf</filename> file. </para></listitem> + </varlistentry> + + <varlistentry> + <term>-O socket options</term> + <listitem><para>TCP socket options to set on the client + socket. See the socket options parameter in the <filename> + smb.conf (5)</filename> manpage for the list of valid + options. </para></listitem> + </varlistentry> + + + <varlistentry> <term>-R <name resolve order></term> <listitem><para>This option is used by the programs in the Samba suite to determine what naming services and in what order to resolve @@ -125,51 +134,44 @@ string of different name resolution options.</para> <para>The options are :"lmhosts", "host", "wins" and "bcast". They - cause names to be resolved as follows:</para> + cause names to be resolved as follows :</para> <itemizedlist> - <listitem><para><constant>lmhosts</constant>: Lookup an IP + <listitem><para><constant>lmhosts</constant> : Lookup an IP address in the Samba lmhosts file. If the line in lmhosts has - no name type attached to the NetBIOS name (see - the <citerefentry><refentrytitle>lmhosts</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>5</manvolnum></citerefentry> for details) then - any name type matches for lookup.</para> - </listitem> - - <listitem><para><constant>host</constant>: Do a standard host + no name type attached to the NetBIOS name (see the <ulink + url="lmhosts.5.html">lmhosts(5)</ulink> for details) then + any name type matches for lookup.</para></listitem> + + <listitem><para><constant>host</constant> : Do a standard host name to IP address resolution, using the system <filename>/etc/hosts </filename>, NIS, or DNS lookups. This method of name resolution is operating system dependent, for instance on IRIX or Solaris this may be controlled by the <filename>/etc/nsswitch.conf</filename> file). Note that this method is only used if the NetBIOS name type being queried is the 0x20 (server) name type, otherwise - it is ignored.</para> - </listitem> - - <listitem><para><constant>wins</constant>: Query a name with + it is ignored.</para></listitem> + + <listitem><para><constant>wins</constant> : Query a name with the IP address listed in the <parameter>wins server</parameter> parameter. If no WINS server has - been specified this method will be ignored.</para> - </listitem> - - <listitem><para><constant>bcast</constant>: Do a broadcast on + been specified this method will be ignored.</para></listitem> + + <listitem><para><constant>bcast</constant> : Do a broadcast on each of the known local interfaces listed in the <parameter>interfaces</parameter> parameter. This is the least reliable of the name resolution methods as it depends on the target host being on a locally - connected subnet.</para> - </listitem> + connected subnet.</para></listitem> </itemizedlist> <para>If this parameter is not set then the name resolve order - defined in the <citerefentry><refentrytitle>smb.conf</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>5</manvolnum></citerefentry> file parameter + defined in the <filename>smb.conf</filename> file parameter (name resolve order) will be used. </para> <para>The default order is lmhosts, host, wins, bcast and without this parameter or any entry in the <parameter>name resolve order - </parameter> parameter of the <citerefentry><refentrytitle>smb.conf</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>5</manvolnum></citerefentry> file the name resolution + </parameter> parameter of the <filename>smb.conf</filename> file the name resolution methods will be attempted in this order. </para></listitem> </varlistentry> @@ -200,8 +202,8 @@ <parameter>-I</parameter> options useful, as they allow you to control the FROM and TO parts of the message. </para> - <para>See the <parameter>message command</parameter> parameter in the <citerefentry><refentrytitle>smb.conf</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>5</manvolnum></citerefentry> for a description of how to handle incoming + <para>See the message command parameter in the <filename> + smb.conf(5)</filename> for a description of how to handle incoming WinPopup messages in Samba. </para> <para><emphasis>Note</emphasis>: Copy WinPopup into the startup group @@ -210,6 +212,70 @@ </varlistentry> <varlistentry> + <term>-i scope</term> + <listitem><para>This specifies a NetBIOS scope that smbclient will + use to communicate with when generating NetBIOS names. For details + on the use of NetBIOS scopes, see <filename>rfc1001.txt</filename> + and <filename>rfc1002.txt</filename>. + NetBIOS scopes are <emphasis>very</emphasis> rarely used, only set + this parameter if you are the system administrator in charge of all + the NetBIOS systems you communicate with. </para></listitem> + </varlistentry> + + + <varlistentry> + <term>-N</term> + <listitem><para>If specified, this parameter suppresses the normal + password prompt from the client to the user. This is useful when + accessing a service that does not require a password. </para> + + <para>Unless a password is specified on the command line or + this parameter is specified, the client will request a + password.</para></listitem> + </varlistentry> + + + + <varlistentry> + <term>-n NetBIOS name</term> + <listitem><para>By default, the client will use the local + machine's hostname (in uppercase) as its NetBIOS name. This parameter + allows you to override the host name and use whatever NetBIOS + name you wish. </para></listitem> + </varlistentry> + + + <varlistentry> + <term>-d debuglevel</term> + <listitem><para><replaceable>debuglevel</replaceable> is an integer from 0 to 10, or + the letter 'A'. </para> + + <para>The default value if this parameter is not specified + is zero. </para> + + <para>The higher this value, the more detail will be logged to + the log files about the activities of the + client. At level 0, only critical errors and serious warnings will + be logged. Level 1 is a reasonable level for day to day running - + it generates a small amount of information about operations + carried out. </para> + + <para>Levels above 1 will generate considerable amounts of log + data, and should only be used when investigating a problem. + Levels above 3 are designed for use only by developers and + generate HUGE amounts of log data, most of which is extremely + cryptic. If <replaceable>debuglevel</replaceable> is set to the letter 'A', then <emphasis>all + </emphasis> debug messages will be printed. This setting + is for developers only (and people who <emphasis>really</emphasis> want + to know how the code works internally). </para> + + <para>Note that specifying this parameter here will override + the log level parameter in the <filename>smb.conf (5)</filename> + file. </para></listitem> + </varlistentry> + + + <varlistentry> <term>-p port</term> <listitem><para>This number is the TCP port number that will be used when making connections to the server. The standard (well-known) @@ -235,7 +301,13 @@ </varlistentry> - &stdarg.help; + + <varlistentry> + <term>-h</term><listitem> + <para>Print the usage message for the client. </para></listitem> + </varlistentry> + + <varlistentry> <term>-I IP-address</term> @@ -269,6 +341,59 @@ <varlistentry> + <term>-U username[%pass]</term> + <listitem><para>Sets the SMB username or username and password. + If %pass is not specified, The user will be prompted. The client + will first check the <envar>USER</envar> environment variable, then the + <envar>LOGNAME</envar> variable and if either exists, the + string is uppercased. Anything in these variables following a '%' + sign will be treated as the password. If these environment + variables are not found, the username <constant>GUEST</constant> + is used. </para> + + <para>If the password is not included in these environment + variables (using the %pass syntax), <command>smbclient</command> will look for + a <envar>PASSWD</envar> environment variable from which + to read the password. </para> + + <para>A third option is to use a credentials file which + contains the plaintext of the domain name, username and password. This + option is mainly provided for scripts where the admin doesn't + wish to pass the credentials on the command line or via environment + variables. If this method is used, make certain that the permissions + on the file restrict access from unwanted users. See the + <parameter>-A</parameter> for more details. </para> + + <para>Be cautious about including passwords in scripts or in + the <envar>PASSWD</envar> environment variable. Also, on + many systems the command line of a running process may be seen + via the <command>ps</command> command to be safe always allow + <command>smbclient</command> to prompt for a password and type + it in directly. </para></listitem> + </varlistentry> + + + <varlistentry> + <term>-A filename</term><listitem><para>This option allows + you to specify a file from which to read the username, domain name, and + password used in the connection. The format of the file is + </para> + + <para><programlisting> +username = <value> +password = <value> +domain = <value> + </programlisting></para> + + + <para>If the domain parameter is missing the current workgroup name + is used instead. Make certain that the permissions on the file restrict + access from unwanted users. </para></listitem> + </varlistentry> + + + + <varlistentry> <term>-L</term> <listitem><para>This option allows you to look at what services are available on a server. You use it as <command>smbclient -L @@ -305,9 +430,16 @@ </para></listitem> </varlistentry> - &popt.common.samba; - &popt.common.credentials; - &popt.common.connection; + + + <varlistentry> + <term>-W WORKGROUP</term> + <listitem><para>Override the default workgroup (domain) specified + in the workgroup parameter of the <filename>smb.conf</filename> + file for this connection. This may be needed to connect to some + servers. </para></listitem> + </varlistentry> + <varlistentry> <term>-T tar options</term> @@ -387,7 +519,7 @@ <para><emphasis>Tar Filenames</emphasis></para> - <para>All file names can be given as DOS path names (with '\\' + <para>All file names can be given as DOS path names (with '\' as the component separator) or as UNIX path names (with '/' as the component separator). </para> @@ -455,7 +587,7 @@ <para><prompt>smb:\> </prompt></para> - <para>The backslash ("\\") indicates the current working directory + <para>The backslash ("\") indicates the current working directory on the server, and will change if the current working directory is changed. </para> @@ -908,8 +1040,8 @@ and writeable only by the user. </para> <para>To test the client, you will need to know the name of a - running SMB/CIFS server. It is possible to run <citerefentry><refentrytitle>smbd</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>8</manvolnum></citerefentry> as an ordinary user - running that server as a daemon + running SMB/CIFS server. It is possible to run <command>smbd(8) + </command> as an ordinary user - running that server as a daemon on a user-accessible port (typically any port number over 1024) would provide a suitable test server. </para> </refsect1> @@ -931,7 +1063,8 @@ <refsect1> <title>VERSION</title> - <para>This man page is correct for version 2.2 of the Samba suite.</para> + <para>This man page is correct for version 2.2 of + the Samba suite.</para> </refsect1> @@ -945,11 +1078,11 @@ <para>The original Samba man pages were written by Karl Auer. The man page sources were converted to YODL format (another - excellent piece of Open Source software, available at <ulink url="ftp://ftp.icce.rug.nl/pub/unix/"> + excellent piece of Open Source software, available at + <ulink url="ftp://ftp.icce.rug.nl/pub/unix/"> ftp://ftp.icce.rug.nl/pub/unix/</ulink>) and updated for the Samba 2.0 release by Jeremy Allison. The conversion to DocBook for - Samba 2.2 was done by Gerald Carter. The conversion to DocBook XML 4.2 for Samba 3.0 - was done by Alexander Bokovoy.</para> + Samba 2.2 was done by Gerald Carter</para> </refsect1> </refentry> diff --git a/docs/docbook/manpages/smbcontrol.1.sgml b/docs/docbook/manpages/smbcontrol.1.sgml index c118a7b194..166ef63e87 100644 --- a/docs/docbook/manpages/smbcontrol.1.sgml +++ b/docs/docbook/manpages/smbcontrol.1.sgml @@ -1,7 +1,5 @@ -<!DOCTYPE refentry PUBLIC "-//OASIS//DTD DocBook V4.1//EN" [ -<!ENTITY % globalentities SYSTEM '../global.ent'> %globalentities; -]> -<refentry id="smbcontrol.1"> +<!DOCTYPE refentry PUBLIC "-//OASIS//DTD DocBook V4.1//EN"> +<refentry id="smbcontrol"> <refmeta> <refentrytitle>smbcontrol</refentrytitle> @@ -18,7 +16,6 @@ <cmdsynopsis> <command>smbcontrol</command> <arg>-i</arg> - <arg>-s</arg> </cmdsynopsis> <cmdsynopsis> @@ -32,14 +29,14 @@ <refsect1> <title>DESCRIPTION</title> - <para>This tool is part of the <citerefentry><refentrytitle>Samba</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>7</manvolnum></citerefentry> suite.</para> + <para>This tool is part of the <ulink url="samba.7.html"> + Samba</ulink> suite.</para> <para><command>smbcontrol</command> is a very small program, which - sends messages to a <citerefentry><refentrytitle>smbd</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>8</manvolnum></citerefentry>, a <citerefentry><refentrytitle>nmbd</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>8</manvolnum></citerefentry>, or a <citerefentry><refentrytitle>winbindd</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>8</manvolnum></citerefentry> daemon running on the system.</para> + sends messages to an <ulink url="smbd.8.html">smbd(8)</ulink>, + an <ulink url="nmbd.8.html">nmbd(8)</ulink> + or a <ulink url="winbindd.8.html">winbindd(8)</ulink> + daemon running on the system.</para> </refsect1> @@ -47,8 +44,6 @@ <title>OPTIONS</title> <variablelist> - &stdarg.help; - &stdarg.configfile; <varlistentry> <term>-i</term> <listitem><para>Run interactively. Individual commands @@ -59,7 +54,8 @@ <varlistentry> <term>destination</term> - <listitem><para>One of <parameter>nmbd</parameter>, <parameter>smbd</parameter> or a process ID.</para> + <listitem><para>One of <parameter>nmbd</parameter> + <parameter>smbd</parameter> or a process ID.</para> <para>The <parameter>smbd</parameter> destination causes the message to "broadcast" to all smbd daemons.</para> @@ -75,12 +71,107 @@ <varlistentry> <term>message-type</term> - <listitem><para>Type of message to send. See - the section <constant>MESSAGE-TYPES</constant> for details. - </para></listitem></varlistentry> - + <listitem><para>One of: <constant>close-share</constant>, + <constant>debug</constant>, + <constant>force-election</constant>, <constant>ping + </constant>, <constant>profile</constant>, <constant> + debuglevel</constant>, <constant>profilelevel</constant>, + or <constant>printnotify</constant>.</para> + + <para>The <constant>close-share</constant> message-type sends a + message to smbd which will then close the client connections to + the named share. Note that this doesn't affect client connections + to any other shares. This message-type takes an argument of the + share name for which client connections will be closed, or the + "*" character which will close all currently open shares. + This may be useful if you made changes to the access controls on the share. + This message can only be sent to <constant>smbd</constant>.</para> + + <para>The <constant>debug</constant> message-type allows + the debug level to be set to the value specified by the + parameter. This can be sent to any of the destinations.</para> + + <para>The <constant>force-election</constant> message-type can only be + sent to the <constant>nmbd</constant> destination. This message + causes the <command>nmbd</command> daemon to force a new browse + master election.</para> + + <para>The <constant>ping</constant> message-type sends the + number of "ping" messages specified by the parameter and waits + for the same number of reply "pong" messages. This can be sent to + any of the destinations.</para> + + <para>The <constant>profile</constant> message-type sends a + message to an smbd to change the profile settings based on the + parameter. The parameter can be "on" to turn on profile stats + collection, "off" to turn off profile stats collection, "count" + to enable only collection of count stats (time stats are + disabled), and "flush" to zero the current profile stats. This can + be sent to any smbd or nmbd destinations.</para> + + <para>The <constant>debuglevel</constant> message-type sends + a "request debug level" message. The current debug level setting + is returned by a "debuglevel" message. This can be + sent to any of the destinations.</para> + + <para>The <constant>profilelevel</constant> message-type sends + a "request profile level" message. The current profile level + setting is returned by a "profilelevel" message. This can be sent + to any smbd or nmbd destinations.</para> + + <para>The <constant>printnotify</constant> message-type sends a + message to smbd which in turn sends a printer notify message to + any Windows NT clients connected to a printer. This message-type + takes the following arguments: + + <variablelist> + + <varlistentry> + <term>queuepause printername</term> + <listitem><para>Send a queue pause change notify + message to the printer specified.</para></listitem> + </varlistentry> + + <varlistentry> + <term>queueresume printername</term> + <listitem><para>Send a queue resume change notify + message for the printer specified.</para></listitem> + </varlistentry> + + <varlistentry> + <term>jobpause printername unixjobid</term> + <listitem><para>Send a job pause change notify + message for the printer and unix jobid + specified.</para></listitem> + </varlistentry> + + <varlistentry> + <term>jobresume printername unixjobid</term> + <listitem><para>Send a job resume change notify + message for the printer and unix jobid + specified.</para></listitem> + </varlistentry> + + <varlistentry> + <term>jobdelete printername unixjobid</term> + <listitem><para>Send a job delete change notify + message for the printer and unix jobid + specified.</para></listitem> + </varlistentry> + + </variablelist> + + Note that this message only sends notification that an + event has occured. It doesn't actually cause the + event to happen. + + This message can only be sent to <constant>smbd</constant>. + </para> + + </listitem> + </varlistentry> + - <varlistentry> <term>parameters</term> <listitem><para>any parameters required for the message-type</para> @@ -91,181 +182,17 @@ </refsect1> <refsect1> - <title>MESSAGE-TYPES</title> - - <para>Available message types are:</para> - - <variablelist> - <varlistentry><term>close-share</term> - <listitem><para>Order smbd to close the client - connections to the named share. Note that this doesn't affect client - connections to any other shares. This message-type takes an argument of the - share name for which client connections will be closed, or the - "*" character which will close all currently open shares. - This may be useful if you made changes to the access controls on the share. - This message can only be sent to <constant>smbd</constant>.</para> - </listitem> - </varlistentry> - - <varlistentry> - <term>debug</term> - <listitem><para>Set debug level to the value specified by the - parameter. This can be sent to any of the destinations.</para> - </listitem> - </varlistentry> - - <varlistentry> - <term>force-election</term> - <listitem><para>This message causes the <command>nmbd</command> daemon to - force a new browse master election. </para> - </listitem></varlistentry> - - <varlistentry> - <term>ping</term> - <listitem><para> - Send specified number of "ping" messages and - wait for the same number of reply "pong" messages. This can be sent to - any of the destinations.</para> - </listitem> - </varlistentry> - - <varlistentry> - <term>profile</term> - <listitem><para>Change profile settings of a daemon, based on the - parameter. The parameter can be "on" to turn on profile stats - collection, "off" to turn off profile stats collection, "count" - to enable only collection of count stats (time stats are - disabled), and "flush" to zero the current profile stats. This can - be sent to any smbd or nmbd destinations.</para> - </listitem></varlistentry> - - <varlistentry> - <term>debuglevel</term> - <listitem><para> - Request debuglevel of a certain daemon and write it to stdout. This - can be sent to any of the destinations.</para> - </listitem> - </varlistentry> - - <varlistentry> - <term>profilelevel</term> - <listitem><para> - Request profilelevel of a certain daemon and write it to stdout. - This can be sent to any smbd or nmbd destinations.</para> - </listitem> - </varlistentry> - - <varlistentry> - <term>printnotify</term> - <listitem><para> - Order smbd to send a printer notify message to any Windows NT clients - connected to a printer. This message-type takes the following arguments: - </para> - - <variablelist> - - <varlistentry> - <term>queuepause printername</term> - <listitem><para>Send a queue pause change notify - message to the printer specified.</para></listitem> - </varlistentry> - - <varlistentry> - <term>queueresume printername</term> - <listitem><para>Send a queue resume change notify - message for the printer specified.</para></listitem> - </varlistentry> - - <varlistentry> - <term>jobpause printername unixjobid</term> - <listitem><para>Send a job pause change notify - message for the printer and unix jobid - specified.</para></listitem> - </varlistentry> - - <varlistentry> - <term>jobresume printername unixjobid</term> - <listitem><para>Send a job resume change notify - message for the printer and unix jobid - specified.</para></listitem> - </varlistentry> - - <varlistentry> - <term>jobdelete printername unixjobid</term> - <listitem><para>Send a job delete change notify - message for the printer and unix jobid - specified.</para></listitem> - </varlistentry> - </variablelist> - - <para> - Note that this message only sends notification that an - event has occured. It doesn't actually cause the - event to happen. - </para> - - <para>This message can only be sent to <constant>smbd</constant>. </para> - </listitem> - </varlistentry> - - <varlistentry> - <term>samsync</term> - <listitem><para>Order smbd to synchronise sam database from PDC (being BDC). Can only be sent to <constant>smbd</constant>. </para> - <note><para>Not working at the moment</para></note> - </listitem> - </varlistentry> - - <varlistentry> - <term>samrepl</term> - <listitem><para>Send sam replication message, with specified serial. Can only be sent to <constant>smbd</constant>. Should not be used manually.</para></listitem> - </varlistentry> - - <varlistentry> - <term>dmalloc-mark</term> - <listitem><para>Set a mark for dmalloc. Can be sent to both smbd and nmbd. Only available if samba is built with dmalloc support. </para></listitem> - </varlistentry> - - <varlistentry> - <term>dmalloc-log-changed</term> - <listitem><para> - Dump the pointers that have changed since the mark set by dmalloc-mark. - Can be sent to both smbd and nmbd. Only available if samba is built with dmalloc support. </para></listitem> - </varlistentry> - - <varlistentry> - <term>shutdown</term> - <listitem><para>Shut down specified daemon. Can be sent to both smbd and nmbd.</para></listitem> - </varlistentry> - - <varlistentry> - <term>pool-usage</term> - <listitem><para>Print a human-readable description of all - talloc(pool) memory usage by the specified daemon/process. Available - for both smbd and nmbd.</para></listitem> - </varlistentry> - - <varlistentry> - <term>drvupgrade</term> - <listitem><para>Force clients of printers using specified driver - to update their local version of the driver. Can only be - sent to smbd.</para></listitem> - </varlistentry> - -</variablelist> -</refsect1> - -<refsect1> <title>VERSION</title> - <para>This man page is correct for version 3.0 of + <para>This man page is correct for version 2.2 of the Samba suite.</para> </refsect1> <refsect1> <title>SEE ALSO</title> - <para><citerefentry><refentrytitle>nmbd</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>8</manvolnum></citerefentry> and <citerefentry><refentrytitle>smbd</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>8</manvolnum></citerefentry>.</para> + <para><ulink url="nmbd.8.html"><command>nmbd(8)</command></ulink>, + and <ulink url="smbd.8.html"><command>smbd(8)</command></ulink>. + </para> </refsect1> <refsect1> @@ -278,11 +205,11 @@ <para>The original Samba man pages were written by Karl Auer. The man page sources were converted to YODL format (another - excellent piece of Open Source software, available at <ulink url="ftp://ftp.icce.rug.nl/pub/unix/"> + excellent piece of Open Source software, available at + <ulink url="ftp://ftp.icce.rug.nl/pub/unix/"> ftp://ftp.icce.rug.nl/pub/unix/</ulink>) and updated for the Samba 2.0 release by Jeremy Allison. The conversion to DocBook for - Samba 2.2 was done by Gerald Carter. The conversion to DocBook XML 4.2 for - Samba 3.0 was done by Alexander Bokovoy.</para> + Samba 2.2 was done by Gerald Carter</para> </refsect1> </refentry> diff --git a/docs/docbook/manpages/smbcquotas.1.sgml b/docs/docbook/manpages/smbcquotas.1.sgml deleted file mode 100644 index a69312f9d7..0000000000 --- a/docs/docbook/manpages/smbcquotas.1.sgml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,179 +0,0 @@ -<!DOCTYPE refentry PUBLIC "-//OASIS//DTD DocBook V4.1//EN" [ -<!ENTITY % globalentities SYSTEM '../global.ent'> %globalentities; -]> -<refentry id="smbcquotas.1"> - -<refmeta> - <refentrytitle>smbcquotas</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>1</manvolnum> -</refmeta> - - -<refnamediv> - <refname>smbcquotas</refname> - <refpurpose>Set or get QUOTAs of NTFS 5 shares</refpurpose> -</refnamediv> - -<refsynopsisdiv> - <cmdsynopsis> - <command>smbcquotas</command> - <arg choice="req">//server/share</arg> - <arg choice="opt">-u user</arg> - <arg choice="opt">-L</arg> - <arg choice="opt">-F</arg> - <arg choice="opt">-S QUOTA_SET_COMMAND</arg> - <arg choice="opt">-n</arg> - <arg choice="opt">-t</arg> - <arg choice="opt">-v</arg> - - <arg choice="opt">-d debuglevel</arg> - <arg choice="opt">-s configfile</arg> - <arg choice="opt">-l logfilebase</arg> - <arg choice="opt">-V</arg> - - <arg choice="opt">-U username</arg> - <arg choice="opt">-N</arg> - <arg choice="opt">-k</arg> - <arg choice="opt">-A</arg> - - - </cmdsynopsis> -</refsynopsisdiv> - -<refsect1> - <title>DESCRIPTION</title> - - <para>This tool is part of the <citerefentry><refentrytitle>Samba</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>7</manvolnum></citerefentry> suite.</para> - - <para>The <command>smbcquotas</command> program manipulates NT Quotas on SMB file shares. </para> -</refsect1> - - -<refsect1> - <title>OPTIONS</title> - - <para>The following options are available to the <command>smbcquotas</command> program. </para> - - - <variablelist> - <varlistentry> - <term>-u user</term> - <listitem><para> Specifies the user of whom the quotas are get or set. - By default the current user's username will be used.</para></listitem> - </varlistentry> - - - - <varlistentry> - <term>-L</term> - <listitem><para>Lists all quota records of the share.</para></listitem> - </varlistentry> - - - - <varlistentry> - <term>-F</term> - <listitem><para>Show the share quota status and default limits.</para></listitem> - </varlistentry> - - - - <varlistentry> - <term>-S QUOTA_SET_COMMAND</term> - <listitem><para>This command set/modify quotas for a user or on the share, - depending on the QUOTA_SET_COMMAND parameter witch is described later</para></listitem> - </varlistentry> - - - <varlistentry> - <term>-n</term> - <listitem><para>This option displays all QUOTA information in numeric - format. The default is to convert SIDs to names and QUOTA limits - to a readable string format. </para></listitem> - </varlistentry> - - <varlistentry> - <term>-t</term> - <listitem><para> - Don't actually do anything, only validate the correctness of - the arguments. - </para></listitem> - </varlistentry> - - <varlistentry> - <term>-v</term> - <listitem><para> - Be verbose. - </para></listitem> - </varlistentry> - - &stdarg.help; - &popt.common.samba; - &popt.common.credentials; - </variablelist> -</refsect1> - - -<refsect1> - <title>QUOTA_SET_COMAND</title> - - <para>The format of an ACL is one or more ACL entries separated by - either commas or newlines. An ACL entry is one of the following: </para> - - <para> - for user setting quotas for the specified by -u or the current username: - </para> - - <para><userinput> - UQLIM:<username><softlimit><hardlimit> - </userinput></para> - - <para> - for setting the share quota defaults limits: - </para> - - <para><userinput> - FSQLIM:<softlimit><hardlimit> - </userinput></para> - - <para> - for changing the share quota settings: - </para> - - <para><userinput> - FSQFLAGS:QUOTA_ENABLED/DENY_DISK/LOG_SOFTLIMIT/LOG_HARD_LIMIT - </userinput></para> - -<refsect1> - <title>EXIT STATUS</title> - - <para>The <command>smbcquotas</command> program sets the exit status - depending on the success or otherwise of the operations performed. - The exit status may be one of the following values. </para> - - <para>If the operation succeeded, smbcquotas returns an exit - status of 0. If <command>smbcquotas</command> couldn't connect to the specified server, - or when there was an error getting or setting the quota(s), an exit status - of 1 is returned. If there was an error parsing any command line - arguments, an exit status of 2 is returned. </para> -</refsect1> - -<refsect1> - <title>VERSION</title> - - <para>This man page is correct for version 3.0 of the Samba suite.</para> -</refsect1> - -<refsect1> - <title>AUTHOR</title> - - <para>The original Samba software and related utilities - were created by Andrew Tridgell. Samba is now developed - by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar - to the way the Linux kernel is developed.</para> - - <para><command>smbcacls</command> was written by Stefan Metzmacher.</para> -</refsect1> - -</refentry> diff --git a/docs/docbook/manpages/smbd.8.sgml b/docs/docbook/manpages/smbd.8.sgml index b31d919a12..9fb80901be 100644 --- a/docs/docbook/manpages/smbd.8.sgml +++ b/docs/docbook/manpages/smbd.8.sgml @@ -1,7 +1,5 @@ -<!DOCTYPE refentry PUBLIC "-//OASIS//DTD DocBook V4.1//EN" [ -<!ENTITY % globalentities SYSTEM '../global.ent'> %globalentities; -]> -<refentry id="smbd.8"> +<!DOCTYPE refentry PUBLIC "-//OASIS//DTD DocBook V4.1//EN"> +<refentry id="smbd"> <refmeta> <refentrytitle>smbd</refentrytitle> @@ -34,8 +32,7 @@ <refsect1> <title>DESCRIPTION</title> - <para>This program is part of the <citerefentry><refentrytitle>Samba</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>7</manvolnum></citerefentry> suite.</para> + <para>This program is part of the Samba suite.</para> <para><command>smbd</command> is the server daemon that provides filesharing and printing services to Windows clients. @@ -49,14 +46,15 @@ <para>An extensive description of the services that the server can provide is given in the man page for the configuration file controlling the attributes of those - services (see <citerefentry><refentrytitle>smb.conf</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>5</manvolnum></citerefentry>. This man page will not describe the + services (see <ulink url="smb.conf.5.html"><filename>smb.conf(5) + </filename></ulink>. This man page will not describe the services, but will concentrate on the administrative aspects of running the server.</para> <para>Please note that there are significant security - implications to running this server, and the <citerefentry><refentrytitle>smb.conf</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>5</manvolnum></citerefentry> manual page should be regarded as mandatory reading before + implications to running this server, and the <ulink + url="smb.conf.5.html"><filename>smb.conf(5)</filename></ulink> + manpage should be regarded as mandatory reading before proceeding with installation.</para> <para>A session is created whenever a client requests one. @@ -124,8 +122,17 @@ </para></listitem> </varlistentry> - &popt.common.samba; - &stdarg.help; + <varlistentry> + <term>-h</term> + <listitem><para>Prints the help information (usage) + for <command>smbd</command>.</para></listitem> + </varlistentry> + + <varlistentry> + <term>-V</term> + <listitem><para>Prints the version number for + <command>smbd</command>.</para></listitem> + </varlistentry> <varlistentry> <term>-b</term> @@ -134,6 +141,32 @@ </varlistentry> <varlistentry> + <term>-d <debug level></term> + <listitem><para><replaceable>debuglevel</replaceable> is an integer + from 0 to 10. The default value if this parameter is + not specified is zero.</para> + + <para>The higher this value, the more detail will be + logged to the log files about the activities of the + server. At level 0, only critical errors and serious + warnings will be logged. Level 1 is a reasonable level for + day to day running - it generates a small amount of + information about operations carried out.</para> + + <para>Levels above 1 will generate considerable + amounts of log data, and should only be used when + investigating a problem. Levels above 3 are designed for + use only by developers and generate HUGE amounts of log + data, most of which is extremely cryptic.</para> + + <para>Note that specifying this parameter here will + override the <ulink url="smb.conf.5.html#loglevel">log + level</ulink> parameter in the <ulink url="smb.conf.5.html"> + <filename>smb.conf(5)</filename></ulink> file.</para> + </listitem> + </varlistentry> + + <varlistentry> <term>-l <log directory></term> <listitem><para>If specified, <replaceable>log directory</replaceable> @@ -142,9 +175,9 @@ messages from the running server. The log file generated is never removed by the server although its size may be controlled by the <ulink - url="smb.conf.5.html#maxlogsize"><parameter>max log size</parameter></ulink> - option in the <citerefentry><refentrytitle>smb.conf</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>5</manvolnum></citerefentry> file. <emphasis>Beware:</emphasis> + url="smb.conf.5.html#maxlogsize">max log size</ulink> + option in the <ulink url="smb.conf.5.html"><filename> + smb.conf(5)</filename></ulink> file. <emphasis>Beware:</emphasis> If the directory specified does not exist, <command>smbd</command> will log to the default debug log location defined at compile time. </para> @@ -154,6 +187,14 @@ </varlistentry> <varlistentry> + <term>-O <socket options></term> + <listitem><para>See the <ulink + url="smb.conf.5.html#socketoptions">socket options</ulink> + parameter in the <ulink url="smb.conf.5.html"><filename>smb.conf(5) + </filename></ulink> file for details.</para></listitem> + </varlistentry> + + <varlistentry> <term>-p <port number></term> <listitem><para><replaceable>port number</replaceable> is a positive integer value. The default value if this parameter is not @@ -177,6 +218,19 @@ <para>This parameter is not normally specified except in the above situation.</para></listitem> </varlistentry> + + <varlistentry> + <term>-s <configuration file></term> + <listitem><para>The file specified contains the + configuration details required by the server. The + information in this file includes server-specific + information such as what printcap file to use, as well + as descriptions of all the services that the server is + to provide. See <ulink url="smb.conf.5.html"><filename> + smb.conf(5)</filename></ulink> for more information. + The default configuration file name is determined at + compile time.</para></listitem> + </varlistentry> </variablelist> </refsect1> @@ -189,7 +243,7 @@ <listitem><para>If the server is to be run by the <command>inetd</command> meta-daemon, this file must contain suitable startup information for the - meta-daemon. See the <ulink url="install.html">"How to Install and Test SAMBA"</ulink> + meta-daemon. See the <ulink url="UNIX_INSTALL.html">UNIX_INSTALL.html</ulink> document for details. </para></listitem> </varlistentry> @@ -201,7 +255,7 @@ <para>If running the server as a daemon at startup, this file will need to contain an appropriate startup - sequence for the server. See the <ulink url="install.html">"How to Install and Test SAMBA"</ulink> + sequence for the server. See the <ulink url="UNIX_INSTALL.html">UNIX_INSTALL.html</ulink> document for details.</para></listitem> </varlistentry> @@ -211,20 +265,21 @@ meta-daemon <command>inetd</command>, this file must contain a mapping of service name (e.g., netbios-ssn) to service port (e.g., 139) and protocol type (e.g., tcp). - See the <ulink url="install.html">"How to Install and Test SAMBA"</ulink> + See the <ulink url="UNIX_INSTALL.html">UNIX_INSTALL.html</ulink> document for details.</para></listitem> </varlistentry> <varlistentry> <term><filename>/usr/local/samba/lib/smb.conf</filename></term> - <listitem><para>This is the default location of the <citerefentry><refentrytitle>smb.conf</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>5</manvolnum></citerefentry> server configuration file. Other common places that systems + <listitem><para>This is the default location of the + <ulink url="smb.conf.5.html"><filename>smb.conf</filename></ulink> + server configuration file. Other common places that systems install this file are <filename>/usr/samba/lib/smb.conf</filename> - and <filename>/etc/samba/smb.conf</filename>.</para> + and <filename>/etc/smb.conf</filename>.</para> <para>This file describes all the services the server - is to make available to clients. See <citerefentry><refentrytitle>smb.conf</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>5</manvolnum></citerefentry> for more information.</para> + is to make available to clients. See <ulink url="smb.conf.5.html"> + <filename>smb.conf(5)</filename></ulink> for more information.</para> </listitem> </varlistentry> </variablelist> @@ -262,9 +317,9 @@ <para>Samba uses PAM for authentication (when presented with a plaintext password), for account checking (is this account disabled?) and for session management. The degree too which samba supports PAM is restricted - by the limitations of the SMB protocol and the <ulink url="smb.conf.5.html#OBEYPAMRESRICTIONS"><parameter>obey - pam restricions</parameter></ulink> <citerefentry><refentrytitle>smb.conf</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>5</manvolnum></citerefentry> paramater. When this is set, the following restrictions apply: + by the limitations of the SMB protocol and the + <ulink url="smb.conf.5.html#OBEYPAMRESRICTIONS">obey pam restricions</ulink> + smb.conf paramater. When this is set, the following restrictions apply: </para> <itemizedlist> @@ -324,9 +379,9 @@ it to die on its own.</para> <para>The debug log level of <command>smbd</command> may be raised - or lowered using <citerefentry><refentrytitle>smbcontrol</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>1</manvolnum></citerefentry> program (SIGUSR[1|2] signals are no longer - used since Samba 2.2). This is to allow transient problems to be diagnosed, + or lowered using <ulink url="smbcontrol.1.html"><command>smbcontrol(1) + </command></ulink> program (SIGUSR[1|2] signals are no longer used in + Samba 2.2). This is to allow transient problems to be diagnosed, whilst still running at a normally low log level.</para> <para>Note that as the signal handlers send a debug write, @@ -339,15 +394,14 @@ <refsect1> <title>SEE ALSO</title> - <para><citerefentry><refentrytitle>hosts_access</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>5</manvolnum></citerefentry>, <citerefentry><refentrytitle>inetd</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>8</manvolnum></citerefentry>, <citerefentry><refentrytitle>nmbd</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>8</manvolnum></citerefentry>, <citerefentry><refentrytitle>smb.conf</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>5</manvolnum></citerefentry>, <citerefentry><refentrytitle>smbclient</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>1</manvolnum></citerefentry>, <citerefentry><refentrytitle>testparm</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>1</manvolnum></citerefentry>, <citerefentry><refentrytitle>testprns</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>1</manvolnum></citerefentry>, and the - Internet RFC's <filename>rfc1001.txt</filename>, <filename>rfc1002.txt</filename>. + <para>hosts_access(5), <command>inetd(8)</command>, + <ulink url="nmbd.8.html"><command>nmbd(8)</command></ulink>, + <ulink url="smb.conf.5.html"><filename>smb.conf(5)</filename> + </ulink>, <ulink url="smbclient.1.html"><command>smbclient(1) + </command></ulink>, <ulink url="testparm.1.html"><command> + testparm(1)</command></ulink>, <ulink url="testprns.1.html"> + <command>testprns(1)</command></ulink>, and the Internet RFC's + <filename>rfc1001.txt</filename>, <filename>rfc1002.txt</filename>. In addition the CIFS (formerly SMB) specification is available as a link from the Web page <ulink url="http://samba.org/cifs/"> http://samba.org/cifs/</ulink>.</para> @@ -363,11 +417,11 @@ <para>The original Samba man pages were written by Karl Auer. The man page sources were converted to YODL format (another - excellent piece of Open Source software, available at <ulink url="ftp://ftp.icce.rug.nl/pub/unix/"> + excellent piece of Open Source software, available at + <ulink url="ftp://ftp.icce.rug.nl/pub/unix/"> ftp://ftp.icce.rug.nl/pub/unix/</ulink>) and updated for the Samba 2.0 release by Jeremy Allison. The conversion to DocBook for - Samba 2.2 was done by Gerald Carter. The conversion to DocBook XML 4.2 for - Samba 3.0 was done by Alexander Bokovoy.</para> + Samba 2.2 was done by Gerald Carter</para> </refsect1> </refentry> diff --git a/docs/docbook/manpages/smbgroupedit.8.sgml b/docs/docbook/manpages/smbgroupedit.8.sgml index 6c489bb785..188218c249 100644 --- a/docs/docbook/manpages/smbgroupedit.8.sgml +++ b/docs/docbook/manpages/smbgroupedit.8.sgml @@ -1,11 +1,15 @@ <!DOCTYPE refentry PUBLIC "-//OASIS//DTD DocBook V4.1//EN"> -<refentry id="smbgroupedit.8"> +<refentry id="smbgroupedit"> <refmeta> <refentrytitle>smbgroupedit</refentrytitle> <manvolnum>8</manvolnum> </refmeta> + +<!-- **************************************************** +** Name and Options ** +**************************************************** --> <refnamediv> <refname>smbgroupedit</refname> <refpurpose>Query/set/change UNIX - Windows NT group mapping</refpurpose> @@ -21,13 +25,17 @@ +<!-- **************************************************** +** Description ** +**************************************************** --> <refsect1> <title>DESCRIPTION</title> <para> -This program is part of the <citerefentry><refentrytitle>Samba</refentrytitle> -<manvolnum>7</manvolnum></citerefentry> suite.</para> +This program is part of the <ulink url="samba.7.html">Samba</ulink> +suite. +</para> <para> The smbgroupedit command allows for mapping unix groups @@ -62,8 +70,8 @@ etc. Privilege : </programlisting></para> -<para>For example: -<programlisting> +<para>For examples,</para> +<para><programlisting> Users SID : S-1-5-32-545 Unix group: -1 @@ -83,8 +91,9 @@ Users NTGroupName(SID) -> UnixGroupName </programlisting></para> -<para>For example: -<programlisting> +<para>For example,</para> + +<para><programlisting> Users (S-1-5-32-545) -> -1 </programlisting></para> @@ -100,6 +109,8 @@ Users (S-1-5-32-545) -> -1 +<!-- **************************************************** +**************************************************** --> <refsect1> <title>FILES</title> @@ -109,6 +120,8 @@ Users (S-1-5-32-545) -> -1 +<!-- **************************************************** +**************************************************** --> <refsect1> <title>EXIT STATUS</title> @@ -150,45 +163,65 @@ the 'Domain Admins' Global group: <para>domadm:x:502:joe,john,mary</para> </listitem> - <listitem><para>map this domadm group to the 'domain admins' group:</para> + <listitem><para>map this domadm group to the 'domain admins' group: + </para> <orderedlist> - <listitem><para>Get the SID for the Windows NT "Domain Admins" group:</para> + <listitem><para>Get the SID for the Windows NT "Domain Admins" + group:</para> + <para><programlisting> <prompt>root# </prompt><command>smbgroupedit -vs | grep "Domain Admins"</command> Domain Admins (S-1-5-21-1108995562-3116817432-1375597819-512) -> -1 -</programlisting></para></listitem> +</programlisting></para> +</listitem> <listitem><para>map the unix domadm group to the Windows NT "Domain Admins" group, by running the command: -<programlisting> + </para> + +<para><programlisting> <prompt>root# </prompt><command>smbgroupedit \ -c S-1-5-21-1108995562-3116817432-1375597819-512 \ -u domadm -td</command> </programlisting></para> - <para><emphasis>warning:</emphasis> don't copy and paste this sample, the + <para> + <emphasis>warning:</emphasis> don't copy and paste this sample, the Domain Admins SID (the S-1-5-21-...-512) is different for every PDC. - </para> </listitem> + </para> + </listitem> </orderedlist> </listitem> </orderedlist> <para> To verify that your mapping has taken effect: -<programlisting> +</para> + +<para><programlisting> <prompt>root# </prompt><command>smbgroupedit -vs|grep "Domain Admins"</command> Domain Admins (S-1-5-21-1108995562-3116817432-1375597819-512) -> domadm </programlisting></para> -<para>To give access to a certain directory on a domain member machine (an +<para> +To give access to a certain directory on a domain member machine (an NT/W2K or a samba server running winbind) to some users who are member of a group on your samba PDC, flag that group as a domain group: -<programlisting> +</para> + +<para><programlisting> <prompt>root# </prompt><command>smbgroupedit -a unixgroup -td</command> </programlisting></para> + + </refsect1> + + + +<!-- **************************************************** +**************************************************** --> <refsect1> <title>VERSION</title> @@ -199,16 +232,22 @@ the Samba suite. </para> </refsect1> +<!-- **************************************************** +**************************************************** --> + <refsect1> <title>SEE ALSO</title> <para> -<citerefentry><refentrytitle>smb.conf</refentrytitle> -<manvolnum>5</manvolnum></citerefentry></para> +<ulink url="smb.conf.5.html">smb.conf(5)</ulink> +</para> </refsect1> +<!-- **************************************************** +**************************************************** --> + <refsect1> <title>AUTHOR</title> @@ -222,8 +261,7 @@ to the way the Linux kernel is developed. <para> <command>smbgroupedit</command> was written by Jean Francois Micouleau. The current set of manpages and documentation is maintained -by the Samba Team in the same fashion as the Samba source code. The conversion -to DocBook XML 4.2 for Samba 3.0 was done by Alexander Bokovoy.</para> +by the Samba Team in the same fashion as the Samba source code.</para> </refsect1> </refentry> diff --git a/docs/docbook/manpages/smbmnt.8.sgml b/docs/docbook/manpages/smbmnt.8.sgml index 8c07ed2eb4..55b66d5d25 100644 --- a/docs/docbook/manpages/smbmnt.8.sgml +++ b/docs/docbook/manpages/smbmnt.8.sgml @@ -1,7 +1,5 @@ -<!DOCTYPE refentry PUBLIC "-//OASIS//DTD DocBook V4.1//EN" [ -<!ENTITY % globalentities SYSTEM '../global.ent'> %globalentities; -]> -<refentry id="smbmnt.8"> +<!DOCTYPE refentry PUBLIC "-//OASIS//DTD DocBook V4.1//EN"> +<refentry id="smbmnt"> <refmeta> <refentrytitle>smbmnt</refentrytitle> @@ -25,7 +23,6 @@ <arg choice="opt">-f <mask></arg> <arg choice="opt">-d <mask></arg> <arg choice="opt">-o <options></arg> - <arg choice="opt">-h</arg> </cmdsynopsis> </refsynopsisdiv> @@ -41,8 +38,8 @@ by the user, and that the user has write permission on.</para> <para>The <command>smbmnt</command> program is normally invoked - by <citerefentry><refentrytitle>smbmount</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>8</manvolnum></citerefentry>. It should not be invoked directly by users. </para> + by <ulink url="smbmount.8.html"><command>smbmount(8)</command> + </ulink>. It should not be invoked directly by users. </para> <para>smbmount searches the normal PATH for smbmnt. You must ensure that the smbmnt version in your path matches the smbmount used.</para> @@ -91,8 +88,6 @@ </para></listitem> </varlistentry> - &stdarg.help; - </variablelist> </refsect1> @@ -112,8 +107,7 @@ </para> <para>The conversion of this manpage for Samba 2.2 was performed - by Gerald Carter. The conversion to DocBook XML 4.2 for Samba 3.0 - was done by Alexander Bokovoy.</para> + by Gerald Carter</para> </refsect1> </refentry> diff --git a/docs/docbook/manpages/smbmount.8.sgml b/docs/docbook/manpages/smbmount.8.sgml index 12f64c7354..c4b91a5572 100644 --- a/docs/docbook/manpages/smbmount.8.sgml +++ b/docs/docbook/manpages/smbmount.8.sgml @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ <!DOCTYPE refentry PUBLIC "-//OASIS//DTD DocBook V4.1//EN"> -<refentry id="smbmount.8"> +<refentry id="smbmount"> <refmeta> <refentrytitle>smbmount</refentrytitle> @@ -26,8 +26,7 @@ <para><command>smbmount</command> mounts a Linux SMB filesystem. It is usually invoked as <command>mount.smbfs</command> by - the <citerefentry><refentrytitle>mount</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>8</manvolnum></citerefentry> command when using the + the <command>mount(8)</command> command when using the "-t smbfs" option. This command only works in Linux, and the kernel must support the smbfs filesystem. </para> @@ -40,12 +39,11 @@ <para><command>smbmount</command> is a daemon. After mounting it keeps running until the mounted smbfs is umounted. It will log things that happen when in daemon mode using the "machine name" smbmount, so - typically this output will end up in <filename>log.smbmount</filename>. The <command> - smbmount</command> process may also be called mount.smbfs.</para> + typically this output will end up in <filename>log.smbmount</filename>. The + <command>smbmount</command> process may also be called mount.smbfs.</para> <para><emphasis>NOTE:</emphasis> <command>smbmount</command> - calls <citerefentry><refentrytitle>smbmnt</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>8</manvolnum></citerefentry> to do the actual mount. You + calls <command>smbmnt(8)</command> to do the actual mount. You must make sure that <command>smbmnt</command> is in the path so that it can be found. </para> @@ -86,12 +84,15 @@ <varlistentry> <term>credentials=<filename></term> - <listitem><para>specifies a file that contains a username and/or password. -The format of the file is: -<programlisting> -username = <value> -password = <value> -</programlisting></para> + <listitem><para>specifies a file that contains a username + and/or password. The format of the file is:</para> + + <para> + <programlisting> + username = <value> + password = <value> + </programlisting> + </para> <para>This is preferred over having passwords in plaintext in a shared file, such as <filename>/etc/fstab</filename>. Be sure to protect any @@ -100,11 +101,6 @@ password = <value> </varlistentry> <varlistentry> - <term>krb</term> - <listitem><para>Use kerberos (Active Directory). </para></listitem> - </varlistentry> - - <varlistentry> <term>netbiosname=<arg></term> <listitem><para>sets the source NetBIOS name. It defaults to the local hostname. </para></listitem> @@ -145,7 +141,7 @@ password = <value> <varlistentry> <term>dmask=<arg></term> - <listitem><para>Sets the directory mask. This determines the + <listitem><para>sets the directory mask. This determines the permissions that remote directories have in the local filesystem. The default is based on the current umask. </para></listitem> </varlistentry> @@ -153,7 +149,7 @@ password = <value> <varlistentry> <term>debug=<arg></term> - <listitem><para>Sets the debug level. This is useful for + <listitem><para>sets the debug level. This is useful for tracking down SMB connection problems. A suggested value to start with is 4. If set too high there will be a lot of output, possibly hiding the useful output.</para></listitem> @@ -162,7 +158,7 @@ password = <value> <varlistentry> <term>ip=<arg></term> - <listitem><para>Sets the destination host or IP address. + <listitem><para>sets the destination host or IP address. </para></listitem> </varlistentry> @@ -170,30 +166,31 @@ password = <value> <varlistentry> <term>workgroup=<arg></term> - <listitem><para>Sets the workgroup on the destination </para> + <listitem><para>sets the workgroup on the destination </para> </listitem> </varlistentry> <varlistentry> <term>sockopt=<arg></term> - <listitem><para>Sets the TCP socket options. See the <ulink - url="smb.conf.5.html#SOCKETOPTIONS"><citerefentry><refentrytitle>smb.conf</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>5</manvolnum></citerefentry></ulink> <parameter>socket options</parameter> option. + <listitem><para>sets the TCP socket options. See the <ulink + url="smb.conf.5.html#SOCKETOPTIONS"><filename>smb.conf + </filename></ulink> <parameter>socket options</parameter> option. </para></listitem> </varlistentry> <varlistentry> <term>scope=<arg></term> - <listitem><para>Sets the NetBIOS scope </para></listitem> + <listitem><para>sets the NetBIOS scope </para></listitem> </varlistentry> <varlistentry> <term>guest</term> - <listitem><para>Don't prompt for a password </para></listitem> + <listitem><para>don't prompt for a password </para></listitem> </varlistentry> + <varlistentry> <term>ro</term> <listitem><para>mount read-only </para></listitem> @@ -301,9 +298,10 @@ password = <value> <para>FreeBSD also has a smbfs, but it is not related to smbmount</para> - <para>For Solaris, HP-UX and others you may want to look at <citerefentry><refentrytitle>smbsh</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>1</manvolnum></citerefentry> or at other solutions, such as - Sharity or perhaps replacing the SMB server with a NFS server.</para> + <para>For Solaris, HP-UX and others you may want to look at + <ulink url="smbsh.1.html"><command>smbsh(1)</command></ulink> or at other + solutions, such as sharity or perhaps replacing the SMB server with + a NFS server.</para> </refsect1> @@ -323,8 +321,7 @@ password = <value> </para> <para>The conversion of this manpage for Samba 2.2 was performed - by Gerald Carter. The conversion to DocBook XML 4.2 for Samba 3.0 - was done by Alexander Bokovoy.</para> + by Gerald Carter</para> </refsect1> </refentry> diff --git a/docs/docbook/manpages/smbpasswd.5.sgml b/docs/docbook/manpages/smbpasswd.5.sgml index f78e986bef..5c80ac4c06 100644 --- a/docs/docbook/manpages/smbpasswd.5.sgml +++ b/docs/docbook/manpages/smbpasswd.5.sgml @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ <!DOCTYPE refentry PUBLIC "-//OASIS//DTD DocBook V4.1//EN"> -<refentry id="smbpasswd.5"> +<refentry id="smbpasswd"> <refmeta> <refentrytitle>smbpasswd</refentrytitle> @@ -19,8 +19,8 @@ <refsect1> <title>DESCRIPTION</title> - <para>This tool is part of the <citerefentry><refentrytitle>Samba</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>7</manvolnum></citerefentry> suite.</para> + <para>This tool is part of the <ulink url="samba.7.html"> + Samba</ulink> suite.</para> <para>smbpasswd is the Samba encrypted password file. It contains the username, Unix user id and the SMB hashed passwords of the @@ -122,7 +122,7 @@ the attributes of the users account. In the Samba 2.2 release this field is bracketed by '[' and ']' characters and is always 13 characters in length (including the '[' and ']' characters). - The contents of this field may be any of the following characters: + The contents of this field may be any of the characters. </para> <itemizedlist> @@ -136,11 +136,12 @@ Password Hash and NT Password Hash are ignored). Note that this will only allow users to log on with no password if the <parameter> null passwords</parameter> parameter is set in the <ulink - url="smb.conf.5.html#NULLPASSWORDS"><citerefentry><refentrytitle>smb.conf</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>5</manvolnum></citerefentry></ulink> config file. </para></listitem> + url="smb.conf.5.html#NULLPASSWORDS"><filename>smb.conf(5) + </filename></ulink> config file. </para></listitem> <listitem><para><emphasis>D</emphasis> - This means the account - is disabled and no SMB/CIFS logins will be allowed for this user. </para></listitem> + is disabled and no SMB/CIFS logins will be allowed for + this user. </para></listitem> <listitem><para><emphasis>W</emphasis> - This means this account is a "Workstation Trust" account. This kind of account is used @@ -177,9 +178,8 @@ <refsect1> <title>SEE ALSO</title> - <para><citerefentry><refentrytitle>smbpasswd</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>8</manvolnum></citerefentry>, <citerefentry><refentrytitle>Samba</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>7</manvolnum></citerefentry>, and + <para><ulink url="smbpasswd.8.html"><command>smbpasswd(8)</command></ulink>, + <ulink url="samba.7.html">samba(7)</ulink>, and the Internet RFC1321 for details on the MD4 algorithm. </para> </refsect1> @@ -194,11 +194,11 @@ <para>The original Samba man pages were written by Karl Auer. The man page sources were converted to YODL format (another - excellent piece of Open Source software, available at <ulink url="ftp://ftp.icce.rug.nl/pub/unix/"> + excellent piece of Open Source software, available at + <ulink url="ftp://ftp.icce.rug.nl/pub/unix/"> ftp://ftp.icce.rug.nl/pub/unix/</ulink>) and updated for the Samba 2.0 release by Jeremy Allison. The conversion to DocBook for - Samba 2.2 was done by Gerald Carter. The conversion to DocBook XML 4.2 - for Samba 3.0 was done by Alexander Bokovoy.</para> + Samba 2.2 was done by Gerald Carter</para> </refsect1> </refentry> diff --git a/docs/docbook/manpages/smbpasswd.8.sgml b/docs/docbook/manpages/smbpasswd.8.sgml index 5d475cf08c..8e6d925ae0 100644 --- a/docs/docbook/manpages/smbpasswd.8.sgml +++ b/docs/docbook/manpages/smbpasswd.8.sgml @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ <!DOCTYPE refentry PUBLIC "-//OASIS//DTD DocBook V4.1//EN"> -<refentry id="smbpasswd.8"> +<refentry id="smbpasswd"> <refmeta> <refentrytitle>smbpasswd</refentrytitle> @@ -37,27 +37,25 @@ <refsect1> <title>DESCRIPTION</title> - <para>This tool is part of the <citerefentry><refentrytitle>Samba</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>7</manvolnum></citerefentry> suite.</para> + <para>This tool is part of the <ulink url="samba.7.html"> + Samba</ulink> suite.</para> <para>The smbpasswd program has several different - functions, depending on whether it is run by the <emphasis>root</emphasis> user - or not. When run as a normal user it allows the user to change + functions, depending on whether it is run by the <emphasis>root</emphasis> + user or not. When run as a normal user it allows the user to change the password used for their SMB sessions on any machines that store SMB passwords. </para> <para>By default (when run with no arguments) it will attempt to change the current user's SMB password on the local machine. This is - similar to the way the <command>passwd(1)</command> program works. <command> - smbpasswd</command> differs from how the passwd program works + similar to the way the <command>passwd(1)</command> program works. + <command>smbpasswd</command> differs from how the passwd program works however in that it is not <emphasis>setuid root</emphasis> but works in - a client-server mode and communicates with a - locally running <citerefentry><refentrytitle>smbd</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>8</manvolnum></citerefentry>. As a consequence in order for this to + a client-server mode and communicates with a locally running + <command>smbd(8)</command>. As a consequence in order for this to succeed the smbd daemon must be running on the local machine. On a UNIX machine the encrypted SMB passwords are usually stored in - the <citerefentry><refentrytitle>smbpasswd</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>5</manvolnum></citerefentry> file. </para> + the <filename>smbpasswd(5)</filename> file. </para> <para>When run by an ordinary user with no options, smbpasswd will prompt them for their old SMB password and then ask them @@ -69,13 +67,12 @@ <para>smbpasswd can also be used by a normal user to change their SMB password on remote machines, such as Windows NT Primary Domain - Controllers. See the (<parameter>-r</parameter>) and <parameter>-U</parameter> options - below. </para> + Controllers. See the (-r) and -U options below. </para> <para>When run by root, smbpasswd allows new users to be added and deleted in the smbpasswd file, as well as allows changes to - the attributes of the user in this file to be made. When run by root, <command> - smbpasswd</command> accesses the local smbpasswd file + the attributes of the user in this file to be made. When run by root, + <command>smbpasswd</command> accesses the local smbpasswd file directly, thus enabling changes to be made even if smbd is not running. </para> </refsect1> @@ -124,8 +121,8 @@ <para>If the smbpasswd file is in the 'old' format (pre-Samba 2.0 format) there is no space in the user's password entry to write - this information and the command will FAIL. See <citerefentry><refentrytitle>smbpasswd</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>5</manvolnum></citerefentry> for details on the 'old' and new password file formats. + this information and the command will FAIL. See <command>smbpasswd(5) + </command> for details on the 'old' and new password file formats. </para> <para>This option is only available when running smbpasswd as @@ -143,8 +140,7 @@ <para>If the smbpasswd file is in the 'old' format, then <command> smbpasswd</command> will FAIL to enable the account. - See <citerefentry><refentrytitle>smbpasswd</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>5</manvolnum></citerefentry> for + See <command>smbpasswd (5)</command> for details on the 'old' and new password file formats. </para> <para>This option is only available when running smbpasswd as root. @@ -230,15 +226,15 @@ name of the host being connected to. </para> <para>The options are :"lmhosts", "host", "wins" and "bcast". They - cause names to be resolved as follows: </para> + cause names to be resolved as follows : </para> <itemizedlist> - <listitem><para><constant>lmhosts</constant>: Lookup an IP + <listitem><para><constant>lmhosts</constant> : Lookup an IP address in the Samba lmhosts file. If the line in lmhosts has - no name type attached to the NetBIOS name (see the <citerefentry><refentrytitle>lmhosts</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>5</manvolnum></citerefentry> for details) then + no name type attached to the NetBIOS name (see the <ulink + url="lmhosts.5.html">lmhosts(5)</ulink> for details) then any name type matches for lookup.</para></listitem> - <listitem><para><constant>host</constant>: Do a standard host + <listitem><para><constant>host</constant> : Do a standard host name to IP address resolution, using the system <filename>/etc/hosts </filename>, NIS, or DNS lookups. This method of name resolution is operating system depended for instance on IRIX or Solaris this @@ -247,12 +243,12 @@ type being queried is the 0x20 (server) name type, otherwise it is ignored.</para></listitem> - <listitem><para><constant>wins</constant>: Query a name with + <listitem><para><constant>wins</constant> : Query a name with the IP address listed in the <parameter>wins server</parameter> parameter. If no WINS server has been specified this method will be ignored.</para></listitem> - <listitem><para><constant>bcast</constant>: Do a broadcast on + <listitem><para><constant>bcast</constant> : Do a broadcast on each of the known local interfaces listed in the <parameter>interfaces</parameter> parameter. This is the least reliable of the name resolution methods as it depends on the @@ -260,8 +256,8 @@ </itemizedlist> <para>The default order is <command>lmhosts, host, wins, bcast</command> - and without this parameter or any entry in the <citerefentry><refentrytitle>smb.conf</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>5</manvolnum></citerefentry> file the name resolution methods will + and without this parameter or any entry in the + <filename>smb.conf</filename> file the name resolution methods will be attempted in this order. </para></listitem> </varlistentry> @@ -296,6 +292,7 @@ </varlistentry> + <varlistentry> <term>-s</term> <listitem><para>This option causes smbpasswd to be silent (i.e. @@ -315,7 +312,7 @@ switch is used to specify the password to be used with the <ulink url="smb.conf.5.html#LDAPADMINDN"><parameter>ldap admin dn</parameter></ulink>. Note that the password is stored in - the <filename>secrets.tdb</filename> and is keyed off + the <filename>private/secrets.tdb</filename> and is keyed off of the admin's DN. This means that if the value of <parameter>ldap admin dn</parameter> ever changes, the password will need to be manually updated as well. @@ -358,15 +355,14 @@ mode communicating with a local smbd for a non-root user then the smbd daemon must be running for this to work. A common problem is to add a restriction to the hosts that may access the <command> - smbd</command> running on the local machine by specifying either <parameter>allow - hosts</parameter> or <parameter>deny hosts</parameter> entry in - the <citerefentry><refentrytitle>smb.conf</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>5</manvolnum></citerefentry> file and neglecting to + smbd</command> running on the local machine by specifying a + <parameter>allow hosts</parameter> or <parameter>deny hosts</parameter> + entry in the <filename>smb.conf</filename> file and neglecting to allow "localhost" access to the smbd. </para> <para>In addition, the smbpasswd command is only useful if Samba - has been set up to use encrypted passwords. See the document <ulink url="pwencrypt.html"> - "LanMan and NT Password Encryption in Samba"</ulink> in the docs directory for details + has been set up to use encrypted passwords. See the file + <filename>ENCRYPTION.txt</filename> in the docs directory for details on how to do this. </para> </refsect1> @@ -374,14 +370,15 @@ <refsect1> <title>VERSION</title> - <para>This man page is correct for version 3.0 of the Samba suite.</para> + <para>This man page is correct for version 3.0 of + the Samba suite.</para> </refsect1> <refsect1> <title>SEE ALSO</title> - <para><citerefentry><refentrytitle>smbpasswd</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>5</manvolnum></citerefentry>, <citerefentry><refentrytitle>Samba</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>7</manvolnum></citerefentry>.</para> + <para><ulink url="smbpasswd.5.html"><filename>smbpasswd(5)</filename></ulink>, + <ulink url="samba.7.html">samba(7)</ulink> + </para> </refsect1> <refsect1> @@ -394,11 +391,11 @@ <para>The original Samba man pages were written by Karl Auer. The man page sources were converted to YODL format (another - excellent piece of Open Source software, available at <ulink url="ftp://ftp.icce.rug.nl/pub/unix/"> + excellent piece of Open Source software, available at + <ulink url="ftp://ftp.icce.rug.nl/pub/unix/"> ftp://ftp.icce.rug.nl/pub/unix/</ulink>) and updated for the Samba 2.0 release by Jeremy Allison. The conversion to DocBook for - Samba 2.2 was done by Gerald Carter. The conversion to DocBook XML 4.2 - for Samba 3.0 was done by Alexander Bokovoy.</para> + Samba 2.2 was done by Gerald Carter</para> </refsect1> </refentry> diff --git a/docs/docbook/manpages/smbsh.1.sgml b/docs/docbook/manpages/smbsh.1.sgml index f51b5eb34f..c40609be4f 100644 --- a/docs/docbook/manpages/smbsh.1.sgml +++ b/docs/docbook/manpages/smbsh.1.sgml @@ -1,7 +1,5 @@ -<!DOCTYPE refentry PUBLIC "-//OASIS//DTD DocBook V4.1//EN" [ -<!ENTITY % globalentities SYSTEM '../global.ent'> %globalentities; -]> -<refentry id="smbsh.1"> +<!DOCTYPE refentry PUBLIC "-//OASIS//DTD DocBook V4.1//EN"> +<refentry id="smbsh"> <refmeta> <refentrytitle>smbsh</refentrytitle> @@ -31,8 +29,8 @@ <refsect1> <title>DESCRIPTION</title> - <para>This tool is part of the <citerefentry><refentrytitle>Samba</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>7</manvolnum></citerefentry> suite.</para> + <para>This tool is part of the <ulink url="samba.7.html"> + Samba</ulink> suite.</para> <para><command>smbsh</command> allows you to access an NT filesystem using UNIX commands such as <command>ls</command>, <command> @@ -48,8 +46,7 @@ <varlistentry> <term>-W WORKGROUP</term> <listitem><para>Override the default workgroup specified in the - workgroup parameter of the <citerefentry><refentrytitle>smb.conf</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>5</manvolnum></citerefentry> file + workgroup parameter of the <filename>smb.conf</filename> file for this session. This may be needed to connect to some servers. </para></listitem> </varlistentry> @@ -64,17 +61,91 @@ </varlistentry> <varlistentry> - <term>-P prefix</term> - <listitem><para>This option allows + <term>-P prefix</term><listitem><para>This option allows the user to set the directory prefix for SMB access. The default value if this option is not specified is <emphasis>smb</emphasis>. </para></listitem> </varlistentry> - &stdarg.configfile; - &stdarg.debug; - &stdarg.resolve.order; + <varlistentry> + <term>-R <name resolve order></term> + <listitem><para>This option is used to determine what naming + services and in what order to resolve + host names to IP addresses. The option takes a space-separated + string of different name resolution options.</para> + + <para>The options are :"lmhosts", "host", "wins" and "bcast". + They cause names to be resolved as follows :</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem><para><constant>lmhosts</constant> : + Lookup an IP address in the Samba lmhosts file. If the + line in lmhosts has no name type attached to the + NetBIOS name + (see the <ulink url="lmhosts.5.html">lmhosts(5)</ulink> + for details) then any name type matches for lookup. + </para></listitem> + + <listitem><para><constant>host</constant> : + Do a standard host name to IP address resolution, using + the system <filename>/etc/hosts</filename>, NIS, or DNS + lookups. This method of name resolution is operating + system dependent, for instance on IRIX or Solaris this + may be controlled by the <filename>/etc/nsswitch.conf + </filename> file). Note that this method is only used + if the NetBIOS name type being queried is the 0x20 + (server) name type, otherwise it is ignored. + </para></listitem> + + <listitem><para><constant>wins</constant> : + Query a name with the IP address listed in the + <parameter>wins server</parameter> parameter. If no + WINS server has been specified this method will be + ignored. + </para></listitem> + + <listitem><para><constant>bcast</constant> : + Do a broadcast on each of the known local interfaces + listed in the <parameter>interfaces</parameter> + parameter. This is the least reliable of the name + resolution methods as it depends on the target host + being on a locally connected subnet. + </para></listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + <para>If this parameter is not set then the name resolve order + defined in the <filename>smb.conf</filename> file parameter + (name resolve order) will be used. </para> + + <para>The default order is lmhosts, host, wins, bcast. Without + this parameter or any entry in the <parameter>name resolve order + </parameter> parameter of the <filename>smb.conf</filename> + file, the name resolution methods will be attempted in this + order. </para></listitem> + </varlistentry> + + <varlistentry> + <term>-d <debug level></term> + <listitem><para>debug level is an integer from 0 to 10.</para> + + <para>The default value if this parameter is not specified + is zero.</para> + + <para>The higher this value, the more detail will be logged + about the activities of <command>nmblookup</command>. At level + 0, only critical errors and serious warnings will be logged. + </para></listitem> + </varlistentry> + + <varlistentry> + <term>-l logfilename</term> + <listitem><para>If specified causes all debug messages to be + written to the file specified by <replaceable>logfilename + </replaceable>. If not specified then all messages will be + written to<replaceable>stderr</replaceable>. + </para></listitem> + </varlistentry> <varlistentry> <term>-L libdir</term> @@ -93,12 +164,13 @@ <para>To use the <command>smbsh</command> command, execute <command> smbsh</command> from the prompt and enter the username and password that authenticates you to the machine running the Windows NT - operating system. -<programlisting> -<prompt>system% </prompt><userinput>smbsh</userinput> -<prompt>Username: </prompt><userinput>user</userinput> -<prompt>Password: </prompt><userinput>XXXXXXX</userinput> -</programlisting></para> + operating system.</para> + + <para><programlisting> + <prompt>system% </prompt><userinput>smbsh</userinput> + <prompt>Username: </prompt><userinput>user</userinput> + <prompt>Password: </prompt><userinput>XXXXXXX</userinput> + </programlisting></para> <para>Any dynamically linked command you execute from @@ -116,7 +188,8 @@ <refsect1> <title>VERSION</title> - <para>This man page is correct for version 3.0 of the Samba suite.</para> + <para>This man page is correct for version 3.0 of + the Samba suite.</para> </refsect1> <refsect1> @@ -137,9 +210,9 @@ <refsect1> <title>SEE ALSO</title> - <para><citerefentry><refentrytitle>smbd</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>8</manvolnum></citerefentry>, <citerefentry><refentrytitle>smb.conf</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>5</manvolnum></citerefentry></para> + <para><ulink url="smbd.8.html"><command>smbd(8)</command></ulink>, + <ulink url="smb.conf.5.html">smb.conf(5)</ulink> + </para> </refsect1> <refsect1> @@ -152,11 +225,11 @@ <para>The original Samba man pages were written by Karl Auer. The man page sources were converted to YODL format (another - excellent piece of Open Source software, available at <ulink url="ftp://ftp.icce.rug.nl/pub/unix/"> + excellent piece of Open Source software, available at + <ulink url="ftp://ftp.icce.rug.nl/pub/unix/"> ftp://ftp.icce.rug.nl/pub/unix/</ulink>) and updated for the Samba 2.0 release by Jeremy Allison. The conversion to DocBook for - Samba 2.2 was done by Gerald Carter. The conversion to DocBook XML 4.2 - for Samba 3.0 was done by Alexander Bokovoy.</para> + Samba 2.2 was done by Gerald Carter</para> </refsect1> </refentry> diff --git a/docs/docbook/manpages/smbspool.8.sgml b/docs/docbook/manpages/smbspool.8.sgml index dabdcced01..d164cb0864 100644 --- a/docs/docbook/manpages/smbspool.8.sgml +++ b/docs/docbook/manpages/smbspool.8.sgml @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ <!DOCTYPE refentry PUBLIC "-//OASIS//DTD DocBook V4.1//EN"> -<refentry id="smbspool.8"> +<refentry id="smbspool"> <refmeta> <refentrytitle>smbspool</refentrytitle> @@ -15,20 +15,20 @@ <refsynopsisdiv> <cmdsynopsis> <command>smbspool</command> - <arg choice="req">job</arg> - <arg choice="req">user</arg> - <arg choice="req">title</arg> - <arg choice="req">copies</arg> - <arg choice="req">options</arg> - <arg choice="opt">filename</arg> + <arg>job</arg> + <arg>user</arg> + <arg>title</arg> + <arg>copies</arg> + <arg>options</arg> + <arg>filename</arg> </cmdsynopsis> </refsynopsisdiv> <refsect1> <title>DESCRIPTION</title> - <para>This tool is part of the <citerefentry><refentrytitle>Samba</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>7</manvolnum></citerefentry> suite.</para> + <para>This tool is part of the <ulink url="samba.7.html"> + Samba</ulink> suite.</para> <para>smbspool is a very small print spooling program that sends a print file to an SMB printer. The command-line arguments @@ -45,8 +45,10 @@ <itemizedlist> <listitem><para>smb://server/printer</para></listitem> <listitem><para>smb://workgroup/server/printer</para></listitem> - <listitem><para>smb://username:password@server/printer</para></listitem> - <listitem><para>smb://username:password@workgroup/server/printer</para></listitem> + <listitem><para>smb://username:password@server/printer</para> + </listitem> + <listitem><para>smb://username:password@workgroup/server/printer + </para></listitem> </itemizedlist> <para>smbspool tries to get the URI from argv[0]. If argv[0] @@ -95,14 +97,15 @@ <refsect1> <title>VERSION</title> - <para>This man page is correct for version 3.0 of the Samba suite.</para> + <para>This man page is correct for version 2.2 of + the Samba suite.</para> </refsect1> <refsect1> <title>SEE ALSO</title> - <para><citerefentry><refentrytitle>smbd</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>8</manvolnum></citerefentry> and <citerefentry><refentrytitle>Samba</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>7</manvolnum></citerefentry>.</para> + <para><ulink url="smbd.8.html"><command>smbd(8)</command></ulink>, + and <ulink url="samba.7.html">samba(7)</ulink>. + </para> </refsect1> <refsect1> @@ -118,11 +121,11 @@ <para>The original Samba man pages were written by Karl Auer. The man page sources were converted to YODL format (another - excellent piece of Open Source software, available at <ulink url="ftp://ftp.icce.rug.nl/pub/unix/"> + excellent piece of Open Source software, available at + <ulink url="ftp://ftp.icce.rug.nl/pub/unix/"> ftp://ftp.icce.rug.nl/pub/unix/</ulink>) and updated for the Samba 2.0 release by Jeremy Allison. The conversion to DocBook for - Samba 2.2 was done by Gerald Carter. The conversion to DocBook XML 4.2 - for Samba 3.0 was done by Alexander Bokovoy.</para> + Samba 2.2 was done by Gerald Carter</para> </refsect1> </refentry> diff --git a/docs/docbook/manpages/smbstatus.1.sgml b/docs/docbook/manpages/smbstatus.1.sgml index 98f7e864f6..99963a4bec 100644 --- a/docs/docbook/manpages/smbstatus.1.sgml +++ b/docs/docbook/manpages/smbstatus.1.sgml @@ -1,8 +1,5 @@ -<!DOCTYPE refentry PUBLIC "-//OASIS//DTD DocBook V4.1//EN" [ -<!ENTITY % globalentities SYSTEM '../global.ent'> %globalentities; -]> - -<refentry id="smbstatus.1"> +<!DOCTYPE refentry PUBLIC "-//OASIS//DTD DocBook V4.1//EN"> +<refentry id="smbstatus"> <refmeta> <refentrytitle>smbstatus</refentrytitle> @@ -34,8 +31,8 @@ <refsect1> <title>DESCRIPTION</title> - <para>This tool is part of the <citerefentry><refentrytitle>Samba</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>7</manvolnum></citerefentry> suite.</para> + <para>This tool is part of the <ulink url="samba.7.html"> + Samba</ulink> suite.</para> <para><command>smbstatus</command> is a very simple program to list the current Samba connections.</para> @@ -57,7 +54,13 @@ <listitem><para>gives brief output.</para></listitem> </varlistentry> - &popt.common.samba; + + <varlistentry> + <term>-d|--debug=<debuglevel></term> + <listitem><para>sets debugging to specified level</para> + </listitem> + </varlistentry> + <varlistentry> <term>-v|--verbose</term> @@ -81,8 +84,8 @@ <varlistentry> <term>-p|--processes</term> - <listitem><para>print a list of <citerefentry><refentrytitle>smbd</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>8</manvolnum></citerefentry> processes and exit. + <listitem><para>print a list of <ulink url="smbd.8.html"> + <command>smbd(8)</command></ulink> processes and exit. Useful for scripting.</para></listitem> </varlistentry> @@ -93,7 +96,18 @@ </listitem> </varlistentry> - &stdarg.help; + + + <varlistentry> + <term>-s|--conf=<configuration file></term> + <listitem><para>The default configuration file name is + determined at compile time. The file specified contains the + configuration details required by the server. See <ulink + url="smb.conf.5.html"><filename>smb.conf(5)</filename> + </ulink> for more information.</para> + </listitem> + </varlistentry> + <varlistentry> <term>-u|--user=<username></term> @@ -114,9 +128,8 @@ <refsect1> <title>SEE ALSO</title> - <para><citerefentry><refentrytitle>smbd</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>8</manvolnum></citerefentry> and <citerefentry><refentrytitle>smb.conf</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>5</manvolnum></citerefentry>.</para> + <para><ulink url="smbd.8.html"><command>smbd(8)</command></ulink> and + <ulink url="smb.conf.5.html">smb.conf(5)</ulink>.</para> </refsect1> <refsect1> @@ -129,11 +142,11 @@ <para>The original Samba man pages were written by Karl Auer. The man page sources were converted to YODL format (another - excellent piece of Open Source software, available at <ulink url="ftp://ftp.icce.rug.nl/pub/unix/"> + excellent piece of Open Source software, available at + <ulink url="ftp://ftp.icce.rug.nl/pub/unix/"> ftp://ftp.icce.rug.nl/pub/unix/</ulink>) and updated for the Samba 2.0 release by Jeremy Allison. The conversion to DocBook for - Samba 2.2 was done by Gerald Carter. The conversion to DocBook XML 4.2 - for Samba 3.0 was done by Alexander Bokovoy.</para> + Samba 2.2 was done by Gerald Carter</para> </refsect1> </refentry> diff --git a/docs/docbook/manpages/smbtar.1.sgml b/docs/docbook/manpages/smbtar.1.sgml index 0492a3a574..bd70493b6b 100644 --- a/docs/docbook/manpages/smbtar.1.sgml +++ b/docs/docbook/manpages/smbtar.1.sgml @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ <!DOCTYPE refentry PUBLIC "-//OASIS//DTD DocBook V4.1//EN"> -<refentry id="smbtar.1"> +<refentry id="smbtar"> <refmeta> <refentrytitle>smbtar</refentrytitle> @@ -16,20 +16,20 @@ <refsynopsisdiv> <cmdsynopsis> <command>smbtar</command> - <arg choice="opt">-r</arg> - <arg choice="opt">-i</arg> - <arg choice="opt">-a</arg> - <arg choice="opt">-v</arg> <arg choice="req">-s server</arg> <arg choice="opt">-p password</arg> <arg choice="opt">-x services</arg> <arg choice="opt">-X</arg> - <arg choice="opt">-N filename</arg> - <arg choice="opt">-b blocksize</arg> <arg choice="opt">-d directory</arg> - <arg choice="opt">-l loglevel</arg> <arg choice="opt">-u user</arg> <arg choice="opt">-t tape</arg> + <arg choice="opt">-t tape</arg> + <arg choice="opt">-b blocksize</arg> + <arg choice="opt">-N filename</arg> + <arg choice="opt">-i</arg> + <arg choice="opt">-r</arg> + <arg choice="opt">-l loglevel</arg> + <arg choice="opt">-v</arg> <arg choice="req">filenames</arg> </cmdsynopsis> </refsynopsisdiv> @@ -37,12 +37,12 @@ <refsect1> <title>DESCRIPTION</title> - <para>This tool is part of the <citerefentry><refentrytitle>Samba</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>7</manvolnum></citerefentry> suite.</para> + <para>This tool is part of the <ulink url="samba.7.html"> + Samba</ulink> suite.</para> <para><command>smbtar</command> is a very small shell script on top - of <citerefentry><refentrytitle>smbclient</refentrytitle><manvolnum>1</manvolnum> - </citerefentry> which dumps SMB shares directly to tape.</para> + of <ulink url="smbclient.1.html"><command>smbclient(1)</command></ulink> + which dumps SMB shares directly to tape. </para> </refsect1> <refsect1> @@ -100,11 +100,6 @@ </varlistentry> - <varlistentry> - <term>-a</term> - <listitem><para>Reset DOS archive bit mode to - indicate file has been archived. </para></listitem> - </varlistentry> <varlistentry> <term>-t tape</term> @@ -149,9 +144,8 @@ <varlistentry> <term>-l log level</term> <listitem><para>Log (debug) level. Corresponds to the - <parameter>-d</parameter> flag of <citerefentry> - <refentrytitle>smbclient</refentrytitle><manvolnum>1</manvolnum> - </citerefentry>.</para></listitem> + <parameter>-d</parameter> flag of <command>smbclient(1) + </command>. </para></listitem> </varlistentry> </variablelist> </refsect1> @@ -187,9 +181,9 @@ <refsect1> <title>DIAGNOSTICS</title> - <para>See the <emphasis>DIAGNOSTICS</emphasis> section for the <citerefentry> - <refentrytitle>smbclient</refentrytitle><manvolnum>1</manvolnum> - </citerefentry> command.</para> + <para>See the <emphasis>DIAGNOSTICS</emphasis> section for the + <ulink url="smbclient.1.html"><command>smbclient(1)</command> + </ulink> command.</para> </refsect1> @@ -202,11 +196,10 @@ <refsect1> <title>SEE ALSO</title> - <para><citerefentry><refentrytitle>smbd</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>8</manvolnum></citerefentry>, <citerefentry> - <refentrytitle>smbclient</refentrytitle><manvolnum>1</manvolnum> - </citerefentry>, <citerefentry><refentrytitle>smb.conf</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>5</manvolnum></citerefentry>.</para> + <para><ulink url="smbd.8.html"><command>smbd(8)</command></ulink>, + <ulink url="smbclient.1.html"><command>smbclient(1)</command></ulink>, + <ulink url="smb.conf.5.html">smb.conf(5)</ulink>, + </para> </refsect1> <refsect1> @@ -223,11 +216,11 @@ url="mailto:Martin.Kraemer@mch.sni.de">Martin Kraemer</ulink>. Many thanks to everyone who suggested extensions, improvements, bug fixes, etc. The man page sources were converted to YODL format (another - excellent piece of Open Source software, available at <ulink url="ftp://ftp.icce.rug.nl/pub/unix/"> + excellent piece of Open Source software, available at + <ulink url="ftp://ftp.icce.rug.nl/pub/unix/"> ftp://ftp.icce.rug.nl/pub/unix/</ulink>) and updated for the Samba 2.0 release by Jeremy Allison. The conversion to DocBook for - Samba 2.2 was done by Gerald Carter. The conversion to DocBook XML 4.2 for - Samba 3.0 was done by Alexander Bokovoy.</para> + Samba 2.2 was done by Gerald Carter.</para> </refsect1> </refentry> diff --git a/docs/docbook/manpages/smbtree.1.sgml b/docs/docbook/manpages/smbtree.1.sgml deleted file mode 100644 index 3677695d5a..0000000000 --- a/docs/docbook/manpages/smbtree.1.sgml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,93 +0,0 @@ -<!DOCTYPE refentry PUBLIC "-//OASIS//DTD DocBook V4.1//EN" [ -<!ENTITY % globalentities SYSTEM '../global.ent'> %globalentities; -]> -<refentry id="smbtree.1"> - -<refmeta> - <refentrytitle>smbtree</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>1</manvolnum> -</refmeta> - - -<refnamediv> - <refname>smbtree</refname> - <refpurpose>A text based smb network browser - </refpurpose> -</refnamediv> - -<refsynopsisdiv> - <cmdsynopsis> - <command>smbtree</command> - <arg choice="opt">-b</arg> - <arg choice="opt">-D</arg> - <arg choice="opt">-S</arg> - </cmdsynopsis> -</refsynopsisdiv> - -<refsect1> - <title>DESCRIPTION</title> - - <para>This tool is part of the <citerefentry><refentrytitle>Samba</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>7</manvolnum></citerefentry> suite.</para> - - <para><command>smbtree</command> is a smb browser program - in text mode. It is similar to the "Network Neighborhood" found - on Windows computers. It prints a tree with all - the known domains, the servers in those domains and - the shares on the servers. - </para> -</refsect1> - - -<refsect1> - <title>OPTIONS</title> - - <variablelist> - <varlistentry> - <term>-b</term> - <listitem><para>Query network nodes by sending requests - as broadcasts instead of querying the (domain) master browser. - </para></listitem> - </varlistentry> - - <varlistentry> - <term>-D</term> - <listitem><para>Only print a list of all - the domains known on broadcast or by the - master browser</para></listitem> - </varlistentry> - - <varlistentry> - <term>-S</term> - <listitem><para>Only print a list of - all the domains and servers responding on broadcast or - known by the master browser. - </para></listitem> - </varlistentry> - - &popt.common.samba; - &popt.common.credentials; - &stdarg.help; - - </variablelist> -</refsect1> - -<refsect1> - <title>VERSION</title> - - <para>This man page is correct for version 3.0 of the Samba - suite.</para> -</refsect1> - -<refsect1> - <title>AUTHOR</title> - - <para>The original Samba software and related utilities - were created by Andrew Tridgell. Samba is now developed - by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar - to the way the Linux kernel is developed.</para> - - <para>The smbtree man page was written by Jelmer Vernooij. </para> -</refsect1> - -</refentry> diff --git a/docs/docbook/manpages/smbumount.8.sgml b/docs/docbook/manpages/smbumount.8.sgml index 089ede79ea..d6a1b65b57 100644 --- a/docs/docbook/manpages/smbumount.8.sgml +++ b/docs/docbook/manpages/smbumount.8.sgml @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ <!DOCTYPE refentry PUBLIC "-//OASIS//DTD DocBook V4.1//EN"> -<refentry id="smbumount.8"> +<refentry id="smbumount"> <refmeta> <refentrytitle>smbumount</refentrytitle> @@ -47,8 +47,8 @@ <refsect1> <title>SEE ALSO</title> - <para><citerefentry><refentrytitle>smbmount</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>8</manvolnum></citerefentry></para> + <para><ulink url="smbmount.8.html"><command>smbmount(8)</command> + </ulink></para> </refsect1> @@ -67,8 +67,7 @@ </para> <para>The conversion of this manpage for Samba 2.2 was performed - by Gerald Carter. The conversion to DocBook XML 4.2 for Samba 3.0 - was done by Alexander Bokovoy.</para> + by Gerald Carter</para> </refsect1> </refentry> diff --git a/docs/docbook/manpages/swat.8.sgml b/docs/docbook/manpages/swat.8.sgml index 72b3cd65c8..c0052f3d53 100644 --- a/docs/docbook/manpages/swat.8.sgml +++ b/docs/docbook/manpages/swat.8.sgml @@ -1,7 +1,5 @@ -<!DOCTYPE refentry PUBLIC "-//OASIS//DTD DocBook V4.1//EN" [ -<!ENTITY % globalentities SYSTEM '../global.ent'> %globalentities; -]> -<refentry id="swat.8"> +<!DOCTYPE refentry PUBLIC "-//OASIS//DTD DocBook V4.1//EN"> +<refentry id="swat"> <refmeta> <refentrytitle>swat</refentrytitle> @@ -25,13 +23,13 @@ <refsect1> <title>DESCRIPTION</title> - <para>This tool is part of the <citerefentry><refentrytitle>Samba</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>7</manvolnum></citerefentry> suite.</para> + <para>This tool is part of the <ulink url="samba.7.html"> + Samba</ulink> suite.</para> <para><command>swat</command> allows a Samba administrator to - configure the complex <citerefentry><refentrytitle>smb.conf</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>5</manvolnum></citerefentry> file via a Web browser. In addition, + configure the complex <ulink url="smb.conf.5.html"><filename> + smb.conf(5)</filename></ulink> file via a Web browser. In addition, a <command>swat</command> configuration page has help links to all the configurable options in the <filename>smb.conf</filename> file allowing an administrator to easily look up the effects of any change. </para> @@ -48,9 +46,8 @@ <term>-s smb configuration file</term> <listitem><para>The default configuration file path is determined at compile time. The file specified contains - the configuration details required by the <citerefentry><refentrytitle>smbd</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>8</manvolnum></citerefentry> server. This is the file - that <command>swat</command> will modify. + the configuration details required by the <command>smbd + </command> server. This is the file that <command>swat</command> will modify. The information in this file includes server-specific information such as what printcap file to use, as well as descriptions of all the services that the server is to provide. @@ -68,10 +65,6 @@ <para><emphasis>WARNING: Do NOT enable this option on a production server. </emphasis></para></listitem> </varlistentry> - - &popt.common.samba; - &stdarg.help; - </variablelist> </refsect1> @@ -80,12 +73,6 @@ <title>INSTALLATION</title> - <para>Swat is included as binary package with most distributions. The - package manager in this case takes care of the installation and - configuration. This section is only for those who have compiled - swat from scratch. - </para> - <para>After you compile SWAT you need to run <command>make install </command> to install the <command>swat</command> binary and the various help files and images. A default install would put @@ -109,7 +96,7 @@ <para><command>swat 901/tcp</command></para> - <para>Note for NIS/YP and LDAP users - you may need to rebuild the + <para>Note for NIS/YP users - you may need to rebuild the NIS service maps rather than alter your local <filename> /etc/services</filename> file. </para> @@ -133,19 +120,17 @@ </refsect2> + <refsect2> + <title>Launching</title> -</refsect1> - -<refsect1> - <title>LAUNCHING</title> - - <para>To launch SWAT just run your favorite web browser and - point it at "http://localhost:901/".</para> + <para>To launch SWAT just run your favorite web browser and + point it at "http://localhost:901/".</para> - <para>Note that you can attach to SWAT from any IP connected - machine but connecting from a remote machine leaves your - connection open to password sniffing as passwords will be sent - in the clear over the wire. </para> + <para>Note that you can attach to SWAT from any IP connected + machine but connecting from a remote machine leaves your + connection open to password sniffing as passwords will be sent + in the clear over the wire. </para> + </refsect2> </refsect1> <refsect1> @@ -167,9 +152,8 @@ <varlistentry> <term><filename>/usr/local/samba/lib/smb.conf</filename></term> - <listitem><para>This is the default location of the <citerefentry> - <refentrytitle>smb.conf</refentrytitle><manvolnum>5</manvolnum> - </citerefentry> server configuration file that swat edits. Other + <listitem><para>This is the default location of the <filename>smb.conf(5) + </filename> server configuration file that swat edits. Other common places that systems install this file are <filename> /usr/samba/lib/smb.conf</filename> and <filename>/etc/smb.conf </filename>. This file describes all the services the server @@ -182,9 +166,8 @@ <refsect1> <title>WARNINGS</title> - <para><command>swat</command> will rewrite your <citerefentry> - <refentrytitle>smb.conf</refentrytitle><manvolnum>5</manvolnum> - </citerefentry> file. It will rearrange the entries and delete all + <para><command>swat</command> will rewrite your <filename>smb.conf + </filename> file. It will rearrange the entries and delete all comments, <parameter>include=</parameter> and <parameter>copy= </parameter> options. If you have a carefully crafted <filename> smb.conf</filename> then back it up or don't use swat! </para> @@ -194,15 +177,16 @@ <refsect1> <title>VERSION</title> - <para>This man page is correct for version 3.0 of the Samba suite.</para> + <para>This man page is correct for version 2.2 of + the Samba suite.</para> </refsect1> <refsect1> <title>SEE ALSO</title> - <para><command>inetd(5)</command>, <citerefentry> - <refentrytitle>smbd</refentrytitle><manvolnum>8</manvolnum> - </citerefentry>, <citerefentry><refentrytitle>smb.conf</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>5</manvolnum></citerefentry></para> + <para><command>inetd(5)</command>, + <ulink url="smbd.8.html"><command>smbd(8)</command></ulink>, + <ulink url="smb.conf.5.html">smb.conf(5)</ulink> + </para> </refsect1> <refsect1> @@ -215,11 +199,11 @@ <para>The original Samba man pages were written by Karl Auer. The man page sources were converted to YODL format (another - excellent piece of Open Source software, available at <ulink url="ftp://ftp.icce.rug.nl/pub/unix/"> + excellent piece of Open Source software, available at + <ulink url="ftp://ftp.icce.rug.nl/pub/unix/"> ftp://ftp.icce.rug.nl/pub/unix/</ulink>) and updated for the Samba 2.0 release by Jeremy Allison. The conversion to DocBook for - Samba 2.2 was done by Gerald Carter. The conversion to DocBook XML 4.2 for - Samba 3.0 was done by Alexander Bokovoy.</para> + Samba 2.2 was done by Gerald Carter</para> </refsect1> </refentry> diff --git a/docs/docbook/manpages/testparm.1.sgml b/docs/docbook/manpages/testparm.1.sgml index 31a9549416..f34528a43d 100644 --- a/docs/docbook/manpages/testparm.1.sgml +++ b/docs/docbook/manpages/testparm.1.sgml @@ -1,7 +1,5 @@ -<!DOCTYPE refentry PUBLIC "-//OASIS//DTD DocBook V4.1//EN" [ -<!ENTITY % globalentities SYSTEM '../global.ent'> %globalentities; -]> -<refentry id="testparm.1"> +<!DOCTYPE refentry PUBLIC "-//OASIS//DTD DocBook V4.1//EN"> +<refentry id="testparm"> <refmeta> <refentrytitle>testparm</refentrytitle> @@ -31,12 +29,11 @@ <refsect1> <title>DESCRIPTION</title> - <para>This tool is part of the <citerefentry><refentrytitle>Samba</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>7</manvolnum></citerefentry> suite.</para> + <para>This tool is part of the <ulink url="samba.7.html"> + Samba</ulink> suite.</para> <para><command>testparm</command> is a very simple test program - to check an <citerefentry><refentrytitle>smbd</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>8</manvolnum></citerefentry> configuration file for + to check an <command>smbd</command> configuration file for internal correctness. If this program reports no problems, you can use the configuration file with confidence that <command>smbd </command> will successfully load the configuration file.</para> @@ -67,9 +64,13 @@ will prompt for a carriage return after printing the service names and before dumping the service definitions.</para></listitem> </varlistentry> - - &stdarg.help; - &stdarg.version; + + + <varlistentry> + <term>-h</term> + <listitem><para>Print usage message </para></listitem> + </varlistentry> + <varlistentry> <term>-L servername</term> @@ -81,9 +82,9 @@ <varlistentry> <term>-v</term> <listitem><para>If this option is specified, testparm - will also output all options that were not used in <citerefentry> - <refentrytitle>smb.conf</refentrytitle><manvolnum>5</manvolnum> - </citerefentry> and are thus set to their defaults.</para></listitem> + will also output all options that were not used in + <filename>smb.conf</filename> and are thus set to + their defaults.</para></listitem> </varlistentry> <varlistentry> @@ -97,8 +98,7 @@ <term>configfilename</term> <listitem><para>This is the name of the configuration file to check. If this parameter is not present then the - default <citerefentry><refentrytitle>smb.conf</refentrytitle><manvolnum>5</manvolnum> - </citerefentry> file will be checked. + default <filename>smb.conf</filename> file will be checked. </para></listitem> </varlistentry> @@ -108,9 +108,7 @@ <listitem><para>If this parameter and the following are specified, then <command>testparm</command> will examine the <parameter>hosts allow</parameter> and <parameter>hosts deny</parameter> - parameters in the <citerefentry> - <refentrytitle>smb.conf</refentrytitle><manvolnum>5</manvolnum> - </citerefentry> file to + parameters in the <filename>smb.conf</filename> file to determine if the hostname with this IP address would be allowed access to the <command>smbd</command> server. If this parameter is supplied, the hostIP parameter must also @@ -132,11 +130,9 @@ <variablelist> <varlistentry> - <term><citerefentry><refentrytitle>smb.conf</refentrytitle><manvolnum>5</manvolnum> - </citerefentry></term> + <term><filename>smb.conf</filename></term> <listitem><para>This is usually the name of the configuration - file used by <citerefentry><refentrytitle>smbd</refentrytitle><manvolnum>8</manvolnum> - </citerefentry>. + file used by <command>smbd</command>. </para></listitem> </varlistentry> </variablelist> @@ -162,11 +158,9 @@ <refsect1> <title>SEE ALSO</title> - <para><citerefentry> - <refentrytitle>smb.conf</refentrytitle><manvolnum>5</manvolnum> - </citerefentry>, <citerefentry> - <refentrytitle>smbd</refentrytitle><manvolnum>8</manvolnum> - </citerefentry></para> + <para><ulink url="smb.conf.5.html"><filename>smb.conf(5)</filename></ulink>, + <ulink url="smbd.8.html"><command>smbd(8)</command></ulink> + </para> </refsect1> <refsect1> @@ -179,11 +173,11 @@ <para>The original Samba man pages were written by Karl Auer. The man page sources were converted to YODL format (another - excellent piece of Open Source software, available at <ulink url="ftp://ftp.icce.rug.nl/pub/unix/"> + excellent piece of Open Source software, available at + <ulink url="ftp://ftp.icce.rug.nl/pub/unix/"> ftp://ftp.icce.rug.nl/pub/unix/</ulink>) and updated for the Samba 2.0 release by Jeremy Allison. The conversion to DocBook for - Samba 2.2 was done by Gerald Carter. The conversion to DocBook XML 4.2 - for Samba 3.0 was done by Alexander Bokovoy.</para> + Samba 2.2 was done by Gerald Carter</para> </refsect1> </refentry> diff --git a/docs/docbook/manpages/testprns.1.sgml b/docs/docbook/manpages/testprns.1.sgml index 3ff1d85055..cd99494a9a 100644 --- a/docs/docbook/manpages/testprns.1.sgml +++ b/docs/docbook/manpages/testprns.1.sgml @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ <!DOCTYPE refentry PUBLIC "-//OASIS//DTD DocBook V4.1//EN"> -<refentry id="testprns.1"> +<refentry id="testprns"> <refmeta> <refentrytitle>testprns</refentrytitle> @@ -23,13 +23,13 @@ <refsect1> <title>DESCRIPTION</title> - <para>This tool is part of the <citerefentry><refentrytitle>Samba</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>7</manvolnum></citerefentry> suite.</para> + <para>This tool is part of the <ulink url="samba.7.html"> + Samba</ulink> suite.</para> <para><command>testprns</command> is a very simple test program to determine whether a given printer name is valid for use in - a service to be provided by <citerefentry><refentrytitle>smbd</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>8</manvolnum></citerefentry>.</para> + a service to be provided by <ulink url="smbd.8.html"><command> + smbd(8)</command></ulink>. </para> <para>"Valid" in this context means "can be found in the printcap specified". This program is very stupid - so stupid in @@ -54,9 +54,8 @@ done beyond that required to extract the printer name. It may be that the print spooling system is more forgiving or less forgiving than <command>testprns</command>. However, if - <command>testprns</command> finds the printer then <citerefentry> - <refentrytitle>smbd</refentrytitle><manvolnum>8</manvolnum> - </citerefentry> should do so as well. </para></listitem> + <command>testprns</command> finds the printer then + <command>smbd</command> should do so as well. </para></listitem> </varlistentry> <varlistentry> @@ -111,16 +110,16 @@ <refsect1> <title>VERSION</title> - <para>This man page is correct for version 3.0 of + <para>This man page is correct for version 2.2 of the Samba suite.</para> </refsect1> <refsect1> <title>SEE ALSO</title> <para><filename>printcap(5)</filename>, - <citerefentry><refentrytitle>smbd</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>8</manvolnum></citerefentry>, <citerefentry><refentrytitle>smbclient</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>1</manvolnum></citerefentry></para> + <ulink url="smbd.8.html"><command>smbd(8)</command></ulink>, + <ulink url="smbclient.1.html"><command>smbclient(1)</command></ulink> + </para> </refsect1> <refsect1> @@ -133,11 +132,11 @@ <para>The original Samba man pages were written by Karl Auer. The man page sources were converted to YODL format (another - excellent piece of Open Source software, available at <ulink url="ftp://ftp.icce.rug.nl/pub/unix/"> + excellent piece of Open Source software, available at + <ulink url="ftp://ftp.icce.rug.nl/pub/unix/"> ftp://ftp.icce.rug.nl/pub/unix/</ulink>) and updated for the Samba 2.0 release by Jeremy Allison. The conversion to DocBook for - Samba 2.2 was done by Gerald Carter. The conversion to DocBook XML 4.2 - for Samba 3.0 was done by Alexander Bokovoy.</para> + Samba 2.2 was done by Gerald Carter</para> </refsect1> </refentry> diff --git a/docs/docbook/manpages/vfstest.1.sgml b/docs/docbook/manpages/vfstest.1.sgml index 8be9271679..d6c7e5f142 100644 --- a/docs/docbook/manpages/vfstest.1.sgml +++ b/docs/docbook/manpages/vfstest.1.sgml @@ -1,7 +1,8 @@ <!DOCTYPE refentry PUBLIC "-//OASIS//DTD DocBook V4.1//EN" [ <!ENTITY % globalentities SYSTEM '../global.ent'> %globalentities; ]> -<refentry id="vfstest.1"> + +<refentry id="vfstest"> <refmeta> <refentrytitle>vfstest</refentrytitle> @@ -27,8 +28,8 @@ <refsect1> <title>DESCRIPTION</title> - <para>This tool is part of the <citerefentry><refentrytitle>Samba</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>7</manvolnum></citerefentry> suite.</para> + <para>This tool is part of the <ulink url="samba.7.html"> + Samba</ulink> suite.</para> <para><command>vfstest</command> is a small command line utility that has the ability to test dso samba VFS modules. It gives the @@ -50,6 +51,7 @@ </para> </listitem> </varlistentry> + &stdarg.debuglevel; &stdarg.help; <varlistentry> @@ -60,8 +62,6 @@ </para></listitem> </varlistentry> - &popt.common.samba; - </variablelist> </refsect1> diff --git a/docs/docbook/manpages/wbinfo.1.sgml b/docs/docbook/manpages/wbinfo.1.sgml index 2e9a811bcb..a6ca244243 100644 --- a/docs/docbook/manpages/wbinfo.1.sgml +++ b/docs/docbook/manpages/wbinfo.1.sgml @@ -1,7 +1,5 @@ -<!DOCTYPE refentry PUBLIC "-//OASIS//DTD DocBook V4.1//EN" [ -<!ENTITY % globalentities SYSTEM '../global.ent'> %globalentities; -]> -<refentry id="wbinfo.1"> +<!DOCTYPE refentry PUBLIC "-//OASIS//DTD DocBook V4.1//EN"> +<refentry id="wbinfo"> <refmeta> <refentrytitle>wbinfo</refentrytitle> @@ -19,8 +17,8 @@ <command>wbinfo</command> <arg choice="opt">-u</arg> <arg choice="opt">-g</arg> + <arg choice="opt">-i ip</arg> <arg choice="opt">-N netbios-name</arg> - <arg choice="opt">-I ip</arg> <arg choice="opt">-n name</arg> <arg choice="opt">-s sid</arg> <arg choice="opt">-U uid</arg> @@ -29,11 +27,9 @@ <arg choice="opt">-Y sid</arg> <arg choice="opt">-t</arg> <arg choice="opt">-m</arg> - <arg choice="opt">--sequence</arg> <arg choice="opt">-r user</arg> <arg choice="opt">-a user%password</arg> <arg choice="opt">-A user%password</arg> - <arg choice="opt">--get-auth-user</arg> <arg choice="opt">-p</arg> </cmdsynopsis> </refsynopsisdiv> @@ -41,15 +37,14 @@ <refsect1> <title>DESCRIPTION</title> - <para>This tool is part of the <citerefentry><refentrytitle>Samba</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>7</manvolnum></citerefentry> suite.</para> + <para>This tool is part of the <ulink url="samba.7.html"> + Samba</ulink> suite.</para> <para>The <command>wbinfo</command> program queries and returns information - created and used by the <citerefentry><refentrytitle>winbindd</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>8</manvolnum></citerefentry> daemon. </para> + created and used by the <ulink url="winbindd.8.html"><command> + winbindd(8)</command></ulink> daemon. </para> - <para>The <citerefentry><refentrytitle>winbindd</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>8</manvolnum></citerefentry> daemon must be configured + <para>The <command>winbindd(8)</command> daemon must be configured and running for the <command>wbinfo</command> program to be able to return information.</para> </refsect1> @@ -61,30 +56,27 @@ <varlistentry> <term>-u</term> <listitem><para>This option will list all users available - in the Windows NT domain for which the <citerefentry><refentrytitle>winbindd</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>8</manvolnum></citerefentry> daemon is operating in. Users in all trusted domains + in the Windows NT domain for which the <command>winbindd(8) + </command> daemon is operating in. Users in all trusted domains will also be listed. Note that this operation does not assign - user ids to any users that have not already been seen by <citerefentry> - <refentrytitle>winbindd</refentrytitle><manvolnum>8</manvolnum></citerefentry> - .</para></listitem> + user ids to any users that have not already been seen by + <command>winbindd(8)</command>.</para></listitem> </varlistentry> <varlistentry> <term>-g</term> <listitem><para>This option will list all groups available - in the Windows NT domain for which the <citerefentry><refentrytitle>Samba</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>7</manvolnum></citerefentry> daemon is operating in. Groups in all trusted domains + in the Windows NT domain for which the <command>winbindd(8) + </command> daemon is operating in. Groups in all trusted domains will also be listed. Note that this operation does not assign - group ids to any groups that have not already been - seen by <citerefentry><refentrytitle>winbindd</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>8</manvolnum></citerefentry>. </para></listitem> + group ids to any groups that have not already been seen by + <command>winbindd(8)</command>. </para></listitem> </varlistentry> <varlistentry> <term>-N name</term> <listitem><para>The <parameter>-N</parameter> option - queries <citerefentry><refentrytitle>winbindd</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>8</manvolnum></citerefentry> to query the WINS + queries <command>winbindd(8)</command> to query the WINS server for the IP address associated with the NetBIOS name specified by the <parameter>name</parameter> parameter. </para></listitem> @@ -94,8 +86,7 @@ <varlistentry> <term>-I ip</term> <listitem><para>The <parameter>-I</parameter> option - queries <citerefentry><refentrytitle>winbindd</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>8</manvolnum></citerefentry> to send a node status + queries <command>winbindd(8)</command> to send a node status request to get the NetBIOS name associated with the IP address specified by the <parameter>ip</parameter> parameter. </para></listitem> @@ -105,15 +96,13 @@ <varlistentry> <term>-n name</term> <listitem><para>The <parameter>-n</parameter> option - queries <citerefentry><refentrytitle>winbindd</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>8</manvolnum></citerefentry> for the SID + queries <command>winbindd(8)</command> for the SID associated with the name specified. Domain names can be specified before the user name by using the winbind separator character. For example CWDOM1/Administrator refers to the Administrator user in the domain CWDOM1. If no domain is specified then the - domain used is the one specified in the <citerefentry><refentrytitle>smb.conf</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>5</manvolnum></citerefentry> <parameter>workgroup - </parameter> parameter. </para></listitem> + domain used is the one specified in the <filename>smb.conf</filename> + <parameter>workgroup</parameter> parameter. </para></listitem> </varlistentry> @@ -146,18 +135,16 @@ <varlistentry> <term>-S sid</term> <listitem><para>Convert a SID to a UNIX user id. If the SID - does not correspond to a UNIX user mapped by <citerefentry> - <refentrytitle>winbindd</refentrytitle><manvolnum>8</manvolnum> - </citerefentry> then the operation will fail. </para></listitem> + does not correspond to a UNIX user mapped by <command> + winbindd(8)</command> then the operation will fail. </para></listitem> </varlistentry> <varlistentry> <term>-Y sid</term> <listitem><para>Convert a SID to a UNIX group id. If the SID - does not correspond to a UNIX group mapped by <citerefentry> - <refentrytitle>winbindd</refentrytitle><manvolnum>8</manvolnum></citerefentry> then - the operation will fail. </para></listitem> + does not correspond to a UNIX group mapped by <command> + winbindd(8)</command> then the operation will fail. </para></listitem> </varlistentry> @@ -173,18 +160,12 @@ <varlistentry> <term>-m</term> <listitem><para>Produce a list of domains trusted by the - Windows NT server <citerefentry><refentrytitle>winbindd</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>8</manvolnum></citerefentry> contacts + Windows NT server <command>winbindd(8)</command> contacts when resolving names. This list does not include the Windows NT domain the server is a Primary Domain Controller for. </para></listitem> </varlistentry> - <varlistentry> - <term>--sequence</term> - <listitem><para>Show sequence numbers of - all known domains</para></listitem> - </varlistentry> <varlistentry> <term>-r username</term> @@ -212,25 +193,6 @@ Windows 2000 servers only). </para></listitem> </varlistentry> - - <varlistentry> - <term>--get-auth-user</term> - <listitem><para>Print username and password used by winbindd - during session setup to a domain controller. Username - and password can be set using '-A'. Only available for - root.</para></listitem> - </varlistentry> - - <varlistentry> - <term>-p</term> - <listitem><para>Check whether winbindd is still alive. - Prints out either 'succeeded' or 'failed'. - </para></listitem> - </varlistentry> - - &stdarg.version; - &stdarg.help; - </variablelist> </refsect1> @@ -239,9 +201,8 @@ <title>EXIT STATUS</title> <para>The wbinfo program returns 0 if the operation - succeeded, or 1 if the operation failed. If the <citerefentry> - <refentrytitle>winbindd</refentrytitle><manvolnum>8</manvolnum> - </citerefentry> daemon is not working <command>wbinfo</command> will always return + succeeded, or 1 if the operation failed. If the <command>winbindd(8) + </command> daemon is not working <command>wbinfo</command> will always return failure. </para> </refsect1> @@ -255,8 +216,8 @@ <refsect1> <title>SEE ALSO</title> - <para><citerefentry><refentrytitle>winbindd</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>8</manvolnum></citerefentry></para> + <para><ulink url="winbindd.8.html"><command>winbindd(8)</command> + </ulink></para> </refsect1> <refsect1> @@ -271,8 +232,7 @@ were written by Tim Potter.</para> <para>The conversion to DocBook for Samba 2.2 was done - by Gerald Carter. The conversion to DocBook XML 4.2 for Samba - 3.0 was done by Alexander Bokovoy.</para> + by Gerald Carter</para> </refsect1> </refentry> diff --git a/docs/docbook/manpages/winbindd.8.sgml b/docs/docbook/manpages/winbindd.8.sgml index e0489c43c4..ccef2fa623 100644 --- a/docs/docbook/manpages/winbindd.8.sgml +++ b/docs/docbook/manpages/winbindd.8.sgml @@ -1,7 +1,5 @@ -<!DOCTYPE refentry PUBLIC "-//OASIS//DTD DocBook V4.1//EN" [ -<!ENTITY % globalentities SYSTEM '../global.ent'> %globalentities; -]> -<refentry id="winbindd.8"> +<!DOCTYPE refentry PUBLIC "-//OASIS//DTD DocBook V4.1//EN"> +<refentry id="winbindd"> <refmeta> <refentrytitle>winbindd</refentrytitle> @@ -31,8 +29,8 @@ <refsect1> <title>DESCRIPTION</title> - <para>This program is part of the <citerefentry><refentrytitle>Samba</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>7</manvolnum></citerefentry> suite.</para> + <para>This program is part of the <ulink url="samba.7.html"> + Samba</ulink> suite.</para> <para><command>winbindd</command> is a daemon that provides a service for the Name Service Switch capability that is present @@ -90,11 +88,12 @@ <filename>/etc/nsswitch.conf</filename> file can be used to initially resolve user and group information from <filename>/etc/passwd </filename> and <filename>/etc/group</filename> and then from the - Windows NT server. -<programlisting> + Windows NT server. </para> + + <para><programlisting> passwd: files winbind group: files winbind -</programlisting></para> + </programlisting></para> <para>The following simple configuration in the <filename>/etc/nsswitch.conf</filename> file can be used to initially @@ -130,8 +129,13 @@ group: files winbind than a file.</para></listitem> </varlistentry> - &popt.common.samba; - &stdarg.help; + <varlistentry> + <term>-d debuglevel</term> + <listitem><para>Sets the debuglevel to an integer between + 0 and 100. 0 is for no debugging and 100 is for reams and + reams. To submit a bug report to the Samba Team, use debug + level 100 (see BUGS.txt). </para></listitem> + </varlistentry> <varlistentry> <term>-i</term> @@ -161,10 +165,15 @@ group: files winbind as 2 threads. The first will answer all requests from the cache, thus making responses to clients faster. The other will update the cache for the query that the first has just responded. - Advantage of this is that responses stay accurate and are faster. + Advantage of this is that responses are accurate and fast. </para></listitem> </varlistentry> + <varlistentry> + <term>-s|--conf=smb.conf</term> + <listitem><para>Specifies the location of the all-important + <filename>smb.conf</filename> file. </para></listitem> + </varlistentry> </variablelist> </refsect1> @@ -199,9 +208,8 @@ group: files winbind <title>CONFIGURATION</title> <para>Configuration of the <command>winbindd</command> daemon - is done through configuration parameters in the <citerefentry> - <refentrytitle>smb.conf</refentrytitle><manvolnum>5</manvolnum> - </citerefentry> file. All parameters should be specified in the + is done through configuration parameters in the <filename>smb.conf(5) + </filename> file. All parameters should be specified in the [global] section of smb.conf. </para> <itemizedlist> @@ -235,24 +243,27 @@ group: files winbind following setup. This was tested on a RedHat 6.2 Linux box. </para> <para>In <filename>/etc/nsswitch.conf</filename> put the - following: -<programlisting> + following:</para> + + <para><programlisting> passwd: files winbind group: files winbind -</programlisting></para> + </programlisting></para> + + <para>In <filename>/etc/pam.d/*</filename> replace the + <parameter>auth</parameter> lines with something like this: </para> - <para>In <filename>/etc/pam.d/*</filename> replace the <parameter> - auth</parameter> lines with something like this: -<programlisting> + + <para><programlisting> auth required /lib/security/pam_securetty.so auth required /lib/security/pam_nologin.so auth sufficient /lib/security/pam_winbind.so auth required /lib/security/pam_pwdb.so use_first_pass shadow nullok -</programlisting></para> + </programlisting></para> - <para>Note in particular the use of the <parameter>sufficient - </parameter> keyword and the <parameter>use_first_pass</parameter> keyword. </para> + <para>Note in particular the use of the <parameter>sufficient</parameter> + keyword and the <parameter>use_first_pass</parameter> keyword. </para> <para>Now replace the account lines with this: </para> @@ -260,26 +271,28 @@ auth required /lib/security/pam_pwdb.so use_first_pass shadow nullok </command></para> <para>The next step is to join the domain. To do that use the - <command>net</command> program like this: </para> + <command>smbpasswd</command> program like this: </para> - <para><command>net join -S PDC -U Administrator</command></para> + <para><command>smbpasswd -j DOMAIN -r PDC -U + Administrator</command></para> <para>The username after the <parameter>-U</parameter> can be any Domain user that has administrator privileges on the machine. - Substitute the name or IP of your PDC for "PDC".</para> + Substitute your domain name for "DOMAIN" and the name of your PDC + for "PDC".</para> <para>Next copy <filename>libnss_winbind.so</filename> to - <filename>/lib</filename> and <filename>pam_winbind.so - </filename> to <filename>/lib/security</filename>. A symbolic link needs to be + <filename>/lib</filename> and <filename>pam_winbind.so</filename> + to <filename>/lib/security</filename>. A symbolic link needs to be made from <filename>/lib/libnss_winbind.so</filename> to <filename>/lib/libnss_winbind.so.2</filename>. If you are using an older version of glibc then the target of the link should be <filename>/lib/libnss_winbind.so.1</filename>.</para> - <para>Finally, setup a <citerefentry><refentrytitle>smb.conf</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>5</manvolnum></citerefentry> containing directives like the - following: -<programlisting> + <para>Finally, setup a <filename>smb.conf</filename> containing directives like the + following: </para> + + <para><programlisting> [global] winbind separator = + winbind cache time = 10 @@ -290,7 +303,7 @@ auth required /lib/security/pam_pwdb.so use_first_pass shadow nullok workgroup = DOMAIN security = domain password server = * -</programlisting></para> + </programlisting></para> <para>Now start winbindd and you should find that your user and @@ -308,14 +321,19 @@ auth required /lib/security/pam_pwdb.so use_first_pass shadow nullok <para>The following notes are useful when configuring and running <command>winbindd</command>: </para> - <para><citerefentry><refentrytitle>nmbd</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>8</manvolnum></citerefentry> must be running on the local machine - for <command>winbindd</command> to work. <command>winbindd</command> queries - the list of trusted domains for the Windows NT server + <para><command>nmbd</command> must be running on the local machine + for <command>winbindd</command> to work. <command>winbindd</command> + queries the list of trusted domains for the Windows NT server on startup and when a SIGHUP is received. Thus, for a running <command> winbindd</command> to become aware of new trust relationships between servers, it must be sent a SIGHUP signal. </para> + <para>Client processes resolving names through the <command>winbindd</command> + nsswitch module read an environment variable named <envar> + $WINBINDD_DOMAIN</envar>. If this variable contains a comma separated + list of Windows NT domain names, then winbindd will only resolve users + and groups within those Windows NT domains. </para> + <para>PAM is really easy to misconfigure. Make sure you know what you are doing when modifying PAM configuration files. It is possible to set up PAM such that you can no longer log into your system. </para> @@ -339,9 +357,8 @@ auth required /lib/security/pam_pwdb.so use_first_pass shadow nullok <variablelist> <varlistentry> <term>SIGHUP</term> - <listitem><para>Reload the <citerefentry><refentrytitle>smb.conf</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>5</manvolnum></citerefentry> file and - apply any parameter changes to the running + <listitem><para>Reload the <filename>smb.conf(5)</filename> + file and apply any parameter changes to the running version of winbindd. This signal also clears any cached user and group information. The list of other domains trusted by winbindd is also reloaded. </para></listitem> @@ -381,21 +398,6 @@ auth required /lib/security/pam_pwdb.so use_first_pass shadow nullok </varlistentry> <varlistentry> - <term>$LOCKDIR/winbindd_privilaged/pipe</term> - <listitem><para>The UNIX pipe over which 'privilaged' clients - communicate with the <command>winbindd</command> program. For security - reasons, access to some winbindd functions - like those needed by - the <command>ntlm_auth</command> utility - is restricted. By default, - only users in the 'root' group will get this access, however the administrator - may change the group permissions on $LOCKDIR/winbindd_privilaged to allow - programs like 'squid' to use ntlm_auth. - Note that the winbind client will only attempt to connect to the winbindd daemon - if both the <filename>$LOCKDIR/winbindd_privilaged</filename> directory - and <filename>$LOCKDIR/winbindd_privilaged/pipe</filename> file are owned by - root. </para></listitem> - </varlistentry> - - <varlistentry> <term>/lib/libnss_winbind.so.X</term> <listitem><para>Implementation of name service switch library. </para></listitem> @@ -429,13 +431,10 @@ auth required /lib/security/pam_pwdb.so use_first_pass shadow nullok <refsect1> <title>SEE ALSO</title> - <para><filename>nsswitch.conf(5)</filename>, <citerefentry> - <refentrytitle>Samba</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>7</manvolnum></citerefentry>, <citerefentry> - <refentrytitle>wbinfo</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>8</manvolnum></citerefentry>, <citerefentry> - <refentrytitle>smb.conf</refentrytitle> - <manvolnum>5</manvolnum></citerefentry></para> + <para><filename>nsswitch.conf(5)</filename>, + <ulink url="samba.7.html">samba(7)</ulink>, + <ulink url="wbinfo.1.html">wbinfo(1)</ulink>, + <ulink url="smb.conf.5.html">smb.conf(5)</ulink></para> </refsect1> <refsect1> @@ -446,12 +445,11 @@ auth required /lib/security/pam_pwdb.so use_first_pass shadow nullok by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed.</para> - <para><command>wbinfo</command> and <command>winbindd</command> were - written by Tim Potter.</para> + <para><command>wbinfo</command> and <command>winbindd</command> + were written by Tim Potter.</para> <para>The conversion to DocBook for Samba 2.2 was done - by Gerald Carter. The conversion to DocBook XML 4.2 for - Samba 3.0 was done by Alexander Bokovoy.</para> + by Gerald Carter</para> </refsect1> </refentry> diff --git a/docs/docbook/projdoc/AdvancedNetworkAdmin.sgml b/docs/docbook/projdoc/AdvancedNetworkAdmin.sgml index dc2a78f5a6..138095e02c 100644 --- a/docs/docbook/projdoc/AdvancedNetworkAdmin.sgml +++ b/docs/docbook/projdoc/AdvancedNetworkAdmin.sgml @@ -269,23 +269,8 @@ Those wishing to use more elaborate or capable logon processing system should ch <simplelist> <member>http://www.craigelachie.org/rhacer/ntlogon</member> <member>http://www.kixtart.org</member> - <member>http://support.microsoft.com/default.asp?scid=kb;en-us;189105</member> </simplelist> -<sect2> -<title>Adding printers without user intervention</title> - -<para> -Printers may be added automatically during logon script processing through the use of: - -<programlisting> - rundll32 printui.dll,PrintUIEntry /? -</programlisting> - -See the documentation in the Microsoft knowledgebase article no: 189105 referred to above. -</para> -</sect2> - </sect1> </chapter> diff --git a/docs/docbook/projdoc/Browsing-Quickguide.sgml b/docs/docbook/projdoc/Browsing-Quickguide.sgml new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..ed5b9a61af --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docbook/projdoc/Browsing-Quickguide.sgml @@ -0,0 +1,390 @@ +<chapter id="Browsing-Quick"> +<chapterinfo> + &author.jht; + <pubdate>July 5, 1998</pubdate> + <pubdate>Updated: March 15, 2003</pubdate> +</chapterinfo> + +<title>Quick Cross Subnet Browsing / Cross Workgroup Browsing guide</title> + +<para> +This document should be read in conjunction with Browsing and may +be taken as the fast track guide to implementing browsing across subnets +and / or across workgroups (or domains). WINS is the best tool for resolution +of NetBIOS names to IP addesses. WINS is NOT involved in browse list handling +except by way of name to address mapping. +</para> + +<note><para> +MS Windows 2000 and later can be configured to operate with NO NetBIOS +over TCP/IP. Samba-3 and later also supports this mode of operation. +</para></note> + + +<sect1> +<title>Discussion</title> + +<para> +Firstly, all MS Windows networking is based on SMB (Server Message +Block) based messaging. SMB messaging may be implemented using NetBIOS or +without NetBIOS. Samba implements NetBIOS by encapsulating it over TCP/IP. +MS Windows products can do likewise. NetBIOS based networking uses broadcast +messaging to affect browse list management. When running NetBIOS over +TCP/IP this uses UDP based messaging. UDP messages can be broadcast or unicast. +</para> + +<para> +Normally, only unicast UDP messaging can be forwarded by routers. The +<command>remote announce</command> +parameter to smb.conf helps to project browse announcements +to remote network segments via unicast UDP. Similarly, the +<command>remote browse sync</command> parameter of <filename>smb.conf</filename> +implements browse list collation using unicast UDP. +</para> + +<para> +Secondly, in those networks where Samba is the only SMB server technology +wherever possible &nmbd; should be configured on one (1) machine as the WINS +server. This makes it easy to manage the browsing environment. If each network +segment is configured with it's own Samba WINS server, then the only way to +get cross segment browsing to work is by using the +<command>remote announce</command> and the <command>remote browse sync</command> +parameters to your <filename>smb.conf</filename> file. +</para> + +<para> +If only one WINS server is used for an entire multi-segment network then +the use of the <command>remote announce</command> and the +<command>remote browse sync</command> parameters should NOT be necessary. +</para> + +<para> +As of Samba 3 WINS replication is being worked on. The bulk of the code has +been committed, but it still needs maturation. +</para> + +<para> +Right now samba WINS does not support MS-WINS replication. This means that +when setting up Samba as a WINS server there must only be one &nmbd; configured +as a WINS server on the network. Some sites have used multiple Samba WINS +servers for redundancy (one server per subnet) and then used +<command>remote browse sync</command> and <command>remote announce</command> +to affect browse list collation across all +segments. Note that this means clients will only resolve local names, +and must be configured to use DNS to resolve names on other subnets in +order to resolve the IP addresses of the servers they can see on other +subnets. This setup is not recommended, but is mentioned as a practical +consideration (ie: an 'if all else fails' scenario). +</para> + +<para> +Lastly, take note that browse lists are a collection of unreliable broadcast +messages that are repeated at intervals of not more than 15 minutes. This means +that it will take time to establish a browse list and it can take up to 45 +minutes to stabilise, particularly across network segments. +</para> + +</sect1> + +<sect1> +<title>How browsing functions and how to deploy stable and +dependable browsing using Samba</title> + + +<para> +As stated above, MS Windows machines register their NetBIOS names +(i.e.: the machine name for each service type in operation) on start +up. Also, as stated above, the exact method by which this name registration +takes place is determined by whether or not the MS Windows client/server +has been given a WINS server address, whether or not LMHOSTS lookup +is enabled, or if DNS for NetBIOS name resolution is enabled, etc. +</para> + +<para> +In the case where there is no WINS server all name registrations as +well as name lookups are done by UDP broadcast. This isolates name +resolution to the local subnet, unless LMHOSTS is used to list all +names and IP addresses. In such situations Samba provides a means by +which the samba server name may be forcibly injected into the browse +list of a remote MS Windows network (using the +<command>remote announce</command> parameter). +</para> + +<para> +Where a WINS server is used, the MS Windows client will use UDP +unicast to register with the WINS server. Such packets can be routed +and thus WINS allows name resolution to function across routed networks. +</para> + +<para> +During the startup process an election will take place to create a +local master browser if one does not already exist. On each NetBIOS network +one machine will be elected to function as the domain master browser. This +domain browsing has nothing to do with MS security domain control. +Instead, the domain master browser serves the role of contacting each local +master browser (found by asking WINS or from LMHOSTS) and exchanging browse +list contents. This way every master browser will eventually obtain a complete +list of all machines that are on the network. Every 11-15 minutes an election +is held to determine which machine will be the master browser. By the nature of +the election criteria used, the machine with the highest uptime, or the +most senior protocol version, or other criteria, will win the election +as domain master browser. +</para> + +<para> +Clients wishing to browse the network make use of this list, but also depend +on the availability of correct name resolution to the respective IP +address/addresses. +</para> + +<para> +Any configuration that breaks name resolution and/or browsing intrinsics +will annoy users because they will have to put up with protracted +inability to use the network services. +</para> + +<para> +Samba supports a feature that allows forced synchonisation +of browse lists across routed networks using the <command>remote +browse sync</command> parameter in the <filename>smb.conf</filename> file. +This causes Samba to contact the local master browser on a remote network and +to request browse list synchronisation. This effectively bridges +two networks that are separated by routers. The two remote +networks may use either broadcast based name resolution or WINS +based name resolution, but it should be noted that the <command>remote +browse sync</command> parameter provides browse list synchronisation - and +that is distinct from name to address resolution, in other +words, for cross subnet browsing to function correctly it is +essential that a name to address resolution mechanism be provided. +This mechanism could be via DNS, <filename>/etc/hosts</filename>, +and so on. +</para> + +</sect1> + +<sect1> +<title>Use of the <command>Remote Announce</command> parameter</title> +<para> +The <command>remote announce</command> parameter of +<filename>smb.conf</filename> can be used to forcibly ensure +that all the NetBIOS names on a network get announced to a remote network. +The syntax of the <command>remote announce</command> parameter is: +<programlisting> + remote announce = <replaceable>a.b.c.d [e.f.g.h]</replaceable> ... +</programlisting> +_or_ +<programlisting> + remote announce = <replaceable>a.b.c.d/WORKGROUP [e.f.g.h/WORKGROUP]</replaceable> ... +</programlisting> + +where: +<variablelist> +<varlistentry><term><replaceable>a.b.c.d</replaceable> and +<replaceable>e.f.g.h</replaceable></term> +<listitem><para>is either the LMB (Local Master Browser) IP address +or the broadcst address of the remote network. +ie: the LMB is at 192.168.1.10, or the address +could be given as 192.168.1.255 where the netmask +is assumed to be 24 bits (255.255.255.0). +When the remote announcement is made to the broadcast +address of the remote network every host will receive +our announcements. This is noisy and therefore +undesirable but may be necessary if we do NOT know +the IP address of the remote LMB.</para></listitem> +</varlistentry> + +<varlistentry> +<term><replaceable>WORKGROUP</replaceable></term> +<listitem><para>is optional and can be either our own workgroup +or that of the remote network. If you use the +workgroup name of the remote network then our +NetBIOS machine names will end up looking like +they belong to that workgroup, this may cause +name resolution problems and should be avoided. +</para></listitem> +</varlistentry> +</variablelist> +</para> + +</sect1> + +<sect1> +<title>Use of the <command>Remote Browse Sync</command> parameter</title> + +<para> +The <command>remote browse sync</command> parameter of +<filename>smb.conf</filename> is used to announce to +another LMB that it must synchronise it's NetBIOS name list with our +Samba LMB. It works ONLY if the Samba server that has this option is +simultaneously the LMB on it's network segment. +</para> + +<para> +The syntax of the <command>remote browse sync</command> parameter is: + +<programlisting> +remote browse sync = <replaceable>a.b.c.d</replaceable> +</programlisting> + +where <replaceable>a.b.c.d</replaceable> is either the IP address of the remote LMB or else is the network broadcast address of the remote segment. +</para> + +</sect1> + +<sect1> +<title>Use of WINS</title> + +<para> +Use of WINS (either Samba WINS _or_ MS Windows NT Server WINS) is highly +recommended. Every NetBIOS machine registers it's name together with a +name_type value for each of of several types of service it has available. +eg: It registers it's name directly as a unique (the type 0x03) name. +It also registers it's name if it is running the lanmanager compatible +server service (used to make shares and printers available to other users) +by registering the server (the type 0x20) name. +</para> + +<para> +All NetBIOS names are up to 15 characters in length. The name_type variable +is added to the end of the name - thus creating a 16 character name. Any +name that is shorter than 15 characters is padded with spaces to the 15th +character. ie: All NetBIOS names are 16 characters long (including the +name_type information). +</para> + +<para> +WINS can store these 16 character names as they get registered. A client +that wants to log onto the network can ask the WINS server for a list +of all names that have registered the NetLogon service name_type. This saves +broadcast traffic and greatly expedites logon processing. Since broadcast +name resolution can not be used across network segments this type of +information can only be provided via WINS _or_ via statically configured +<filename>lmhosts</filename> files that must reside on all clients in the +absence of WINS. +</para> + +<para> +WINS also serves the purpose of forcing browse list synchronisation by all +LMB's. LMB's must synchronise their browse list with the DMB (domain master +browser) and WINS helps the LMB to identify it's DMB. By definition this +will work only within a single workgroup. Note that the domain master browser +has NOTHING to do with what is referred to as an MS Windows NT Domain. The +later is a reference to a security environment while the DMB refers to the +master controller for browse list information only. +</para> + +<para> +Use of WINS will work correctly only if EVERY client TCP/IP protocol stack +has been configured to use the WINS server/s. Any client that has not been +configured to use the WINS server will continue to use only broadcast based +name registration so that WINS may NEVER get to know about it. In any case, +machines that have not registered with a WINS server will fail name to address +lookup attempts by other clients and will therefore cause workstation access +errors. +</para> + +<para> +To configure Samba as a WINS server just add +<command>wins support = yes</command> to the <filename>smb.conf</filename> +file [globals] section. +</para> + +<para> +To configure Samba to register with a WINS server just add +"wins server = a.b.c.d" to your smb.conf file [globals] section. +</para> + +<important><para> +Never use both <command>wins support = yes</command> together +with <command>wins server = a.b.c.d</command> +particularly not using it's own IP address. +Specifying both will cause &nmbd; to refuse to start! +</para></important> + +</sect1> + +<sect1> +<title>Do NOT use more than one (1) protocol on MS Windows machines</title> + +<para> +A very common cause of browsing problems results from installing more than +one protocol on an MS Windows machine. +</para> + +<para> +Every NetBIOS machine takes part in a process of electing the LMB (and DMB) +every 15 minutes. A set of election criteria is used to determine the order +of precidence for winning this election process. A machine running Samba or +Windows NT will be biased so that the most suitable machine will predictably +win and thus retain it's role. +</para> + +<para> +The election process is "fought out" so to speak over every NetBIOS network +interface. In the case of a Windows 9x machine that has both TCP/IP and IPX +installed and has NetBIOS enabled over both protocols the election will be +decided over both protocols. As often happens, if the Windows 9x machine is +the only one with both protocols then the LMB may be won on the NetBIOS +interface over the IPX protocol. Samba will then lose the LMB role as Windows +9x will insist it knows who the LMB is. Samba will then cease to function +as an LMB and thus browse list operation on all TCP/IP only machines will +fail. +</para> + +<para><emphasis> +Windows 95, 98, 98se, Me are referred to generically as Windows 9x. +The Windows NT4, 2000, XP and 2003 use common protocols. These are roughly +referred to as the WinNT family, but it should be recognised that 2000 and +XP/2003 introduce new protocol extensions that cause them to behave +differently from MS Windows NT4. Generally, where a server does NOT support +the newer or extended protocol, these will fall back to the NT4 protocols. +</emphasis></para> + +<para> +The safest rule of all to follow it this - USE ONLY ONE PROTOCOL! +</para> + +</sect1> + +<sect1> +<title>Name Resolution Order</title> + +<para> +Resolution of NetBIOS names to IP addresses can take place using a number +of methods. The only ones that can provide NetBIOS name_type information +are:</para> + +<simplelist> +<member>WINS: the best tool!</member> +<member>LMHOSTS: is static and hard to maintain.</member> +<member>Broadcast: uses UDP and can not resolve names across remote segments.</member> +</simplelist> + +<para> +Alternative means of name resolution includes:</para> +<simplelist> +<member>/etc/hosts: is static, hard to maintain, and lacks name_type info</member> +<member>DNS: is a good choice but lacks essential name_type info.</member> +</simplelist> + +<para> +Many sites want to restrict DNS lookups and want to avoid broadcast name +resolution traffic. The "name resolve order" parameter is of great help here. +The syntax of the "name resolve order" parameter is: +<programlisting> +name resolve order = wins lmhosts bcast host +</programlisting> +_or_ +<programlisting> +name resolve order = wins lmhosts (eliminates bcast and host) +</programlisting> +The default is: +<programlisting> +name resolve order = host lmhost wins bcast +</programlisting>. +where "host" refers the the native methods used by the Unix system +to implement the gethostbyname() function call. This is normally +controlled by <filename>/etc/host.conf</filename>, <filename>/etc/nsswitch.conf</filename> and <filename>/etc/resolv.conf</filename>. +</para> +</sect1> +</chapter> diff --git a/docs/docbook/projdoc/Browsing.sgml b/docs/docbook/projdoc/Browsing.sgml new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..ca2f6dc57b --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docbook/projdoc/Browsing.sgml @@ -0,0 +1,807 @@ +<chapter id="improved-browsing"> +<chapterinfo> + <author> + <affiliation> + <orgname>Samba Team</orgname> + </affiliation> + </author> + + <pubdate> (5 July 1998) </pubdate> +</chapterinfo> + +<title>Improved browsing in samba</title> + +<sect1> +<title>Overview of browsing</title> + +<para> +SMB networking provides a mechanism by which clients can access a list +of machines in a network, a so-called <command>browse list</command>. This list +contains machines that are ready to offer file and/or print services +to other machines within the network. Thus it does not include +machines which aren't currently able to do server tasks. The browse +list is heavily used by all SMB clients. Configuration of SMB +browsing has been problematic for some Samba users, hence this +document. +</para> + +<para> +MS Windows 2000 and later, as with Samba 3 and later, can be +configured to not use NetBIOS over TCP/IP. When configured this way +it is imperative that name resolution (using DNS/LDAP/ADS) be correctly +configured and operative. Browsing will NOT work if name resolution +from SMB machine names to IP addresses does not function correctly. +</para> + +<para> +Where NetBIOS over TCP/IP is enabled use of a WINS server is highly +recommended to aid the resolution of NetBIOS (SMB) names to IP addresses. +WINS allows remote segment clients to obtain NetBIOS name_type information +that can NOT be provided by any other means of name resolution. +</para> + +</sect1> + +<sect1> +<title>Browsing support in samba</title> + +<para> +Samba facilitates browsing. The browsing is supported by &nmbd; +and is also controlled by options in the &smb.conf; file. +Samba can act as a local browse master for a workgroup and the ability +for samba to support domain logons and scripts is now available. +</para> + +<para> +Samba can also act as a domain master browser for a workgroup. This +means that it will collate lists from local browse masters into a +wide area network server list. In order for browse clients to +resolve the names they may find in this list, it is recommended that +both samba and your clients use a WINS server. +</para> + +<para> +Note that you should NOT set Samba to be the domain master for a +workgroup that has the same name as an NT Domain: on each wide area +network, you must only ever have one domain master browser per workgroup, +regardless of whether it is NT, Samba or any other type of domain master +that is providing this service. +</para> + +<note><para> +Nmbd can be configured as a WINS server, but it is not +necessary to specifically use samba as your WINS server. MS Windows +NT4, Server or Advanced Server 2000 or 2003 can be configured as +your WINS server. In a mixed NT/2000/2003 server and samba environment on +a Wide Area Network, it is recommended that you use the Microsoft +WINS server capabilities. In a samba-only environment, it is +recommended that you use one and only one Samba server as your WINS server. +</para></note> + +<para> +To get browsing to work you need to run nmbd as usual, but will need +to use the <command>workgroup</command> option in &smb.conf; +to control what workgroup Samba becomes a part of. +</para> + +<para> +Samba also has a useful option for a Samba server to offer itself for +browsing on another subnet. It is recommended that this option is only +used for 'unusual' purposes: announcements over the internet, for +example. See <command>remote announce</command> in the +&smb.conf; man page. +</para> +</sect1> + +<sect1> +<title>Problem resolution</title> + +<para> +If something doesn't work then hopefully the log.nmb file will help +you track down the problem. Try a debug level of 2 or 3 for finding +problems. Also note that the current browse list usually gets stored +in text form in a file called <filename>browse.dat</filename>. +</para> + +<para> +Note that if it doesn't work for you, then you should still be able to +type the server name as <filename>\\SERVER</filename> in filemanager then +hit enter and filemanager should display the list of available shares. +</para> + +<para> +Some people find browsing fails because they don't have the global +<command>guest account</command> set to a valid account. Remember that the +IPC$ connection that lists the shares is done as guest, and thus you must +have a valid guest account. +</para> + +<para><emphasis> +MS Windows 2000 and upwards (as with Samba) can be configured to disallow +anonymous (ie: Guest account) access to the IPC$ share. In that case, the +MS Windows 2000/XP/2003 machine acting as an SMB/CIFS client will use the +name of the currently logged in user to query the IPC$ share. MS Windows +9X clients are not able to do this and thus will NOT be able to browse +server resources. +</emphasis></para> + +<para> +The other big problem people have is that their broadcast address, +netmask or IP address is wrong (specified with the "interfaces" option +in &smb.conf;) +</para> +</sect1> + +<sect1> +<title>Browsing across subnets</title> +<para> +Since the release of Samba 1.9.17(alpha1) Samba has been +updated to enable it to support the replication of browse lists +across subnet boundaries. New code and options have been added to +achieve this. This section describes how to set this feature up +in different settings. +</para> + +<para> +To see browse lists that span TCP/IP subnets (ie. networks separated +by routers that don't pass broadcast traffic) you must set up at least +one WINS server. The WINS server acts as a DNS for NetBIOS names, allowing +NetBIOS name to IP address translation to be done by doing a direct +query of the WINS server. This is done via a directed UDP packet on +port 137 to the WINS server machine. The reason for a WINS server is +that by default, all NetBIOS name to IP address translation is done +by broadcasts from the querying machine. This means that machines +on one subnet will not be able to resolve the names of machines on +another subnet without using a WINS server. +</para> + +<para> +Remember, for browsing across subnets to work correctly, all machines, +be they Windows 95, Windows NT, or Samba servers must have the IP address +of a WINS server given to them by a DHCP server, or by manual configuration +(for Win95 and WinNT, this is in the TCP/IP Properties, under Network +settings) for Samba this is in the &smb.conf; file. +</para> + +<sect2> +<title>How does cross subnet browsing work ?</title> + +<para> +Cross subnet browsing is a complicated dance, containing multiple +moving parts. It has taken Microsoft several years to get the code +that achieves this correct, and Samba lags behind in some areas. +Samba is capable of cross subnet browsing when configured correctly. +</para> + +<para> +Consider a network set up as follows : +</para> + +<para> +<programlisting> + (DMB) + N1_A N1_B N1_C N1_D N1_E + | | | | | + ------------------------------------------------------- + | subnet 1 | + +---+ +---+ + |R1 | Router 1 Router 2 |R2 | + +---+ +---+ + | | + | subnet 2 subnet 3 | + -------------------------- ------------------------------------ + | | | | | | | | + N2_A N2_B N2_C N2_D N3_A N3_B N3_C N3_D + (WINS) +</programlisting> +</para> + +<para> +Consisting of 3 subnets (1, 2, 3) connected by two routers +(R1, R2) - these do not pass broadcasts. Subnet 1 has 5 machines +on it, subnet 2 has 4 machines, subnet 3 has 4 machines. Assume +for the moment that all these machines are configured to be in the +same workgroup (for simplicities sake). Machine N1_C on subnet 1 +is configured as Domain Master Browser (ie. it will collate the +browse lists for the workgroup). Machine N2_D is configured as +WINS server and all the other machines are configured to register +their NetBIOS names with it. +</para> + +<para> +As all these machines are booted up, elections for master browsers +will take place on each of the three subnets. Assume that machine +N1_C wins on subnet 1, N2_B wins on subnet 2, and N3_D wins on +subnet 3 - these machines are known as local master browsers for +their particular subnet. N1_C has an advantage in winning as the +local master browser on subnet 1 as it is set up as Domain Master +Browser. +</para> + +<para> +On each of the three networks, machines that are configured to +offer sharing services will broadcast that they are offering +these services. The local master browser on each subnet will +receive these broadcasts and keep a record of the fact that +the machine is offering a service. This list of records is +the basis of the browse list. For this case, assume that +all the machines are configured to offer services so all machines +will be on the browse list. +</para> + +<para> +For each network, the local master browser on that network is +considered 'authoritative' for all the names it receives via +local broadcast. This is because a machine seen by the local +master browser via a local broadcast must be on the same +network as the local master browser and thus is a 'trusted' +and 'verifiable' resource. Machines on other networks that +the local master browsers learn about when collating their +browse lists have not been directly seen - these records are +called 'non-authoritative'. +</para> + +<para> +At this point the browse lists look as follows (these are +the machines you would see in your network neighborhood if +you looked in it on a particular network right now). +</para> + +<para> +<programlisting> +Subnet Browse Master List +------ ------------- ---- +Subnet1 N1_C N1_A, N1_B, N1_C, N1_D, N1_E + +Subnet2 N2_B N2_A, N2_B, N2_C, N2_D + +Subnet3 N3_D N3_A, N3_B, N3_C, N3_D +</programlisting> +</para> + +<para> +Note that at this point all the subnets are separate, no +machine is seen across any of the subnets. +</para> + +<para> +Now examine subnet 2. As soon as N2_B has become the local +master browser it looks for a Domain master browser to synchronize +its browse list with. It does this by querying the WINS server +(N2_D) for the IP address associated with the NetBIOS name +WORKGROUP>1B<. This name was registerd by the Domain master +browser (N1_C) with the WINS server as soon as it was booted. +</para> + +<para> +Once N2_B knows the address of the Domain master browser it +tells it that is the local master browser for subnet 2 by +sending a MasterAnnouncement packet as a UDP port 138 packet. +It then synchronizes with it by doing a NetServerEnum2 call. This +tells the Domain Master Browser to send it all the server +names it knows about. Once the domain master browser receives +the MasterAnnouncement packet it schedules a synchronization +request to the sender of that packet. After both synchronizations +are done the browse lists look like : +</para> + +<para> +<programlisting> +Subnet Browse Master List +------ ------------- ---- +Subnet1 N1_C N1_A, N1_B, N1_C, N1_D, N1_E, + N2_A(*), N2_B(*), N2_C(*), N2_D(*) + +Subnet2 N2_B N2_A, N2_B, N2_C, N2_D + N1_A(*), N1_B(*), N1_C(*), N1_D(*), N1_E(*) + +Subnet3 N3_D N3_A, N3_B, N3_C, N3_D + +Servers with a (*) after them are non-authoritative names. +</programlisting> +</para> + +<para> +At this point users looking in their network neighborhood on +subnets 1 or 2 will see all the servers on both, users on +subnet 3 will still only see the servers on their own subnet. +</para> + +<para> +The same sequence of events that occured for N2_B now occurs +for the local master browser on subnet 3 (N3_D). When it +synchronizes browse lists with the domain master browser (N1_A) +it gets both the server entries on subnet 1, and those on +subnet 2. After N3_D has synchronized with N1_C and vica-versa +the browse lists look like. +</para> + +<para> +<programlisting> +Subnet Browse Master List +------ ------------- ---- +Subnet1 N1_C N1_A, N1_B, N1_C, N1_D, N1_E, + N2_A(*), N2_B(*), N2_C(*), N2_D(*), + N3_A(*), N3_B(*), N3_C(*), N3_D(*) + +Subnet2 N2_B N2_A, N2_B, N2_C, N2_D + N1_A(*), N1_B(*), N1_C(*), N1_D(*), N1_E(*) + +Subnet3 N3_D N3_A, N3_B, N3_C, N3_D + N1_A(*), N1_B(*), N1_C(*), N1_D(*), N1_E(*), + N2_A(*), N2_B(*), N2_C(*), N2_D(*) + +Servers with a (*) after them are non-authoritative names. +</programlisting> +</para> + +<para> +At this point users looking in their network neighborhood on +subnets 1 or 3 will see all the servers on all sunbets, users on +subnet 2 will still only see the servers on subnets 1 and 2, but not 3. +</para> + +<para> +Finally, the local master browser for subnet 2 (N2_B) will sync again +with the domain master browser (N1_C) and will recieve the missing +server entries. Finally - and as a steady state (if no machines +are removed or shut off) the browse lists will look like : +</para> + +<para> +<programlisting> +Subnet Browse Master List +------ ------------- ---- +Subnet1 N1_C N1_A, N1_B, N1_C, N1_D, N1_E, + N2_A(*), N2_B(*), N2_C(*), N2_D(*), + N3_A(*), N3_B(*), N3_C(*), N3_D(*) + +Subnet2 N2_B N2_A, N2_B, N2_C, N2_D + N1_A(*), N1_B(*), N1_C(*), N1_D(*), N1_E(*) + N3_A(*), N3_B(*), N3_C(*), N3_D(*) + +Subnet3 N3_D N3_A, N3_B, N3_C, N3_D + N1_A(*), N1_B(*), N1_C(*), N1_D(*), N1_E(*), + N2_A(*), N2_B(*), N2_C(*), N2_D(*) + +Servers with a (*) after them are non-authoritative names. +</programlisting> +</para> + +<para> +Synchronizations between the domain master browser and local +master browsers will continue to occur, but this should be a +steady state situation. +</para> + +<para> +If either router R1 or R2 fails the following will occur: +</para> + +<orderedlist> +<listitem> + <para> + Names of computers on each side of the inaccessible network fragments + will be maintained for as long as 36 minutes, in the network neighbourhood + lists. + </para> +</listitem> + +<listitem> + <para> + Attempts to connect to these inaccessible computers will fail, but the + names will not be removed from the network neighbourhood lists. + </para> +</listitem> + +<listitem> + <para> + If one of the fragments is cut off from the WINS server, it will only + be able to access servers on its local subnet, by using subnet-isolated + broadcast NetBIOS name resolution. The effects are similar to that of + losing access to a DNS server. + </para> +</listitem> +</orderedlist> +</sect2> +</sect1> + +<sect1> +<title>Setting up a WINS server</title> + +<para> +Either a Samba machine or a Windows NT Server machine may be set up +as a WINS server. To set a Samba machine to be a WINS server you must +add the following option to the &smb.conf; file on the selected machine : +in the [globals] section add the line +</para> + +<para> +<command> wins support = yes</command> +</para> + +<para> +Versions of Samba prior to 1.9.17 had this parameter default to +yes. If you have any older versions of Samba on your network it is +strongly suggested you upgrade to a recent version, or at the very +least set the parameter to 'no' on all these machines. +</para> + +<para> +Machines with <command>wins support = yes</command> will keep a list of +all NetBIOS names registered with them, acting as a DNS for NetBIOS names. +</para> + +<para> +You should set up only ONE wins server. Do NOT set the +<command>wins support = yes</command> option on more than one Samba +server. +</para> + +<para> +To set up a Windows NT Server as a WINS server you need to set up +the WINS service - see your NT documentation for details. Note that +Windows NT WINS Servers can replicate to each other, allowing more +than one to be set up in a complex subnet environment. As Microsoft +refuse to document these replication protocols Samba cannot currently +participate in these replications. It is possible in the future that +a Samba->Samba WINS replication protocol may be defined, in which +case more than one Samba machine could be set up as a WINS server +but currently only one Samba server should have the +<command>wins support = yes</command> parameter set. +</para> + +<para> +After the WINS server has been configured you must ensure that all +machines participating on the network are configured with the address +of this WINS server. If your WINS server is a Samba machine, fill in +the Samba machine IP address in the "Primary WINS Server" field of +the "Control Panel->Network->Protocols->TCP->WINS Server" dialogs +in Windows 95 or Windows NT. To tell a Samba server the IP address +of the WINS server add the following line to the [global] section of +all &smb.conf; files : +</para> + +<para> +<command>wins server = >name or IP address<</command> +</para> + +<para> +where >name or IP address< is either the DNS name of the WINS server +machine or its IP address. +</para> + +<para> +Note that this line MUST NOT BE SET in the &smb.conf; file of the Samba +server acting as the WINS server itself. If you set both the +<command>wins support = yes</command> option and the +<command>wins server = <name></command> option then +nmbd will fail to start. +</para> + +<para> +There are two possible scenarios for setting up cross subnet browsing. +The first details setting up cross subnet browsing on a network containing +Windows 95, Samba and Windows NT machines that are not configured as +part of a Windows NT Domain. The second details setting up cross subnet +browsing on networks that contain NT Domains. +</para> + +</sect1> + +<sect1> +<title>Setting up Browsing in a WORKGROUP</title> + +<para> +To set up cross subnet browsing on a network containing machines +in up to be in a WORKGROUP, not an NT Domain you need to set up one +Samba server to be the Domain Master Browser (note that this is *NOT* +the same as a Primary Domain Controller, although in an NT Domain the +same machine plays both roles). The role of a Domain master browser is +to collate the browse lists from local master browsers on all the +subnets that have a machine participating in the workgroup. Without +one machine configured as a domain master browser each subnet would +be an isolated workgroup, unable to see any machines on any other +subnet. It is the presense of a domain master browser that makes +cross subnet browsing possible for a workgroup. +</para> + +<para> +In an WORKGROUP environment the domain master browser must be a +Samba server, and there must only be one domain master browser per +workgroup name. To set up a Samba server as a domain master browser, +set the following option in the [global] section of the &smb.conf; file : +</para> + +<para> +<command>domain master = yes</command> +</para> + +<para> +The domain master browser should also preferrably be the local master +browser for its own subnet. In order to achieve this set the following +options in the [global] section of the &smb.conf; file : +</para> + +<para> +<programlisting> +domain master = yes +local master = yes +preferred master = yes +os level = 65 +</programlisting> +</para> + +<para> +The domain master browser may be the same machine as the WINS +server, if you require. +</para> + +<para> +Next, you should ensure that each of the subnets contains a +machine that can act as a local master browser for the +workgroup. Any MS Windows NT/2K/XP/2003 machine should be +able to do this, as will Windows 9x machines (although these +tend to get rebooted more often, so it's not such a good idea +to use these). To make a Samba server a local master browser +set the following options in the [global] section of the +&smb.conf; file : +</para> + +<para> +<programlisting> +domain master = no +local master = yes +preferred master = yes +os level = 65 +</programlisting> +</para> + +<para> +Do not do this for more than one Samba server on each subnet, +or they will war with each other over which is to be the local +master browser. +</para> + +<para> +The <command>local master</command> parameter allows Samba to act as a +local master browser. The <command>preferred master</command> causes nmbd +to force a browser election on startup and the <command>os level</command> +parameter sets Samba high enough so that it should win any browser elections. +</para> + +<para> +If you have an NT machine on the subnet that you wish to +be the local master browser then you can disable Samba from +becoming a local master browser by setting the following +options in the <command>[global]</command> section of the +&smb.conf; file : +</para> + +<para> +<programlisting> +domain master = no +local master = no +preferred master = no +os level = 0 +</programlisting> +</para> + +</sect1> + +<sect1> +<title>Setting up Browsing in a DOMAIN</title> + +<para> +If you are adding Samba servers to a Windows NT Domain then +you must not set up a Samba server as a domain master browser. +By default, a Windows NT Primary Domain Controller for a Domain +name is also the Domain master browser for that name, and many +things will break if a Samba server registers the Domain master +browser NetBIOS name (<replaceable>DOMAIN</replaceable><1B>) +with WINS instead of the PDC. +</para> + +<para> +For subnets other than the one containing the Windows NT PDC +you may set up Samba servers as local master browsers as +described. To make a Samba server a local master browser set +the following options in the <command>[global]</command> section +of the &smb.conf; file : +</para> + +<para> +<programlisting> +domain master = no +local master = yes +preferred master = yes +os level = 65 +</programlisting> +</para> + +<para> +If you wish to have a Samba server fight the election with machines +on the same subnet you may set the <command>os level</command> parameter +to lower levels. By doing this you can tune the order of machines that +will become local master browsers if they are running. For +more details on this see the section <link linkend="browse-force-master"> +Forcing samba to be the master browser</link> +below. +</para> + +<para> +If you have Windows NT machines that are members of the domain +on all subnets, and you are sure they will always be running then +you can disable Samba from taking part in browser elections and +ever becoming a local master browser by setting following options +in the <command>[global]</command> section of the &smb.conf; +file : +</para> + +<para> +<command> + domain master = no + local master = no + preferred master = no + os level = 0 +</command> +</para> + +</sect1> + +<sect1 id="browse-force-master"> +<title>Forcing samba to be the master</title> + +<para> +Who becomes the <command>master browser</command> is determined by an election +process using broadcasts. Each election packet contains a number of parameters +which determine what precedence (bias) a host should have in the +election. By default Samba uses a very low precedence and thus loses +elections to just about anyone else. +</para> + +<para> +If you want Samba to win elections then just set the <command>os level</command> global +option in &smb.conf; to a higher number. It defaults to 0. Using 34 +would make it win all elections over every other system (except other +samba systems!) +</para> + +<para> +A <command>os level</command> of 2 would make it beat WfWg and Win95, but not MS Windows +NT/2K Server. A MS Windows NT/2K Server domain controller uses level 32. +</para> + +<para>The maximum os level is 255</para> + +<para> +If you want samba to force an election on startup, then set the +<command>preferred master</command> global option in &smb.conf; to "yes". Samba will +then have a slight advantage over other potential master browsers +that are not preferred master browsers. Use this parameter with +care, as if you have two hosts (whether they are windows 95 or NT or +samba) on the same local subnet both set with <command>preferred master</command> to +"yes", then periodically and continually they will force an election +in order to become the local master browser. +</para> + +<para> +If you want samba to be a <command>domain master browser</command>, then it is +recommended that you also set <command>preferred master</command> to "yes", because +samba will not become a domain master browser for the whole of your +LAN or WAN if it is not also a local master browser on its own +broadcast isolated subnet. +</para> + +<para> +It is possible to configure two samba servers to attempt to become +the domain master browser for a domain. The first server that comes +up will be the domain master browser. All other samba servers will +attempt to become the domain master browser every 5 minutes. They +will find that another samba server is already the domain master +browser and will fail. This provides automatic redundancy, should +the current domain master browser fail. +</para> + +</sect1> + +<sect1> +<title>Making samba the domain master</title> + +<para> +The domain master is responsible for collating the browse lists of +multiple subnets so that browsing can occur between subnets. You can +make samba act as the domain master by setting <command>domain master = yes</command> +in &smb.conf;. By default it will not be a domain master. +</para> + +<para> +Note that you should NOT set Samba to be the domain master for a +workgroup that has the same name as an NT Domain. +</para> + +<para> +When samba is the domain master and the master browser it will listen +for master announcements (made roughly every twelve minutes) from local +master browsers on other subnets and then contact them to synchronise +browse lists. +</para> + +<para> +If you want samba to be the domain master then I suggest you also set +the <command>os level</command> high enough to make sure it wins elections, and set +<command>preferred master</command> to "yes", to get samba to force an election on +startup. +</para> + +<para> +Note that all your servers (including samba) and clients should be +using a WINS server to resolve NetBIOS names. If your clients are only +using broadcasting to resolve NetBIOS names, then two things will occur: +</para> + +<orderedlist> +<listitem> + <para> + your local master browsers will be unable to find a domain master + browser, as it will only be looking on the local subnet. + </para> +</listitem> + +<listitem> + <para> + if a client happens to get hold of a domain-wide browse list, and + a user attempts to access a host in that list, it will be unable to + resolve the NetBIOS name of that host. + </para> +</listitem> +</orderedlist> + +<para> +If, however, both samba and your clients are using a WINS server, then: +</para> + +<orderedlist> +<listitem> + <para> + your local master browsers will contact the WINS server and, as long as + samba has registered that it is a domain master browser with the WINS + server, your local master browser will receive samba's ip address + as its domain master browser. + </para> +</listitem> + +<listitem> + <para> + when a client receives a domain-wide browse list, and a user attempts + to access a host in that list, it will contact the WINS server to + resolve the NetBIOS name of that host. as long as that host has + registered its NetBIOS name with the same WINS server, the user will + be able to see that host. + </para> +</listitem> +</orderedlist> + +</sect1> + +<sect1> +<title>Note about broadcast addresses</title> + +<para> +If your network uses a "0" based broadcast address (for example if it +ends in a 0) then you will strike problems. Windows for Workgroups +does not seem to support a 0's broadcast and you will probably find +that browsing and name lookups won't work. +</para> +</sect1> + +<sect1> +<title>Multiple interfaces</title> + +<para> +Samba now supports machines with multiple network interfaces. If you +have multiple interfaces then you will need to use the <command>interfaces</command> +option in &smb.conf; to configure them. +</para> +</sect1> +</chapter> diff --git a/docs/docbook/projdoc/NT4Migration.sgml b/docs/docbook/projdoc/NT4Migration.sgml index 60d9f121f4..1f7371de36 100644 --- a/docs/docbook/projdoc/NT4Migration.sgml +++ b/docs/docbook/projdoc/NT4Migration.sgml @@ -15,488 +15,80 @@ Samba-3 based domain control. <title>Planning and Getting Started</title> <para> -In the IT world there is often a saying that all problems are encountered because of -poor planning. The corrollary to this saying is that not all problems can be anticpated -and planned for. Then again, good planning will anticpate most show stopper type situations. -</para> - -<para> -Those wishing to migrate from MS Windows NT4 domain control to a Samba-3 domain control -environment would do well to develop a detailed migration plan. So here are a few pointers to -help migration get under way. +You must use at least the following ... </para> <sect2> <title>Objectives</title> <para> -The key objective for most organisations will be to make the migration from MS Windows NT4 -to Samba-3 domain control as painless as possible. One of the challenges you may experience -in your migration process may well be one of convincing management that the new environment -should remain in place. Many who have introduced open source technologies have experienced -pressure to return to a Microsoft based platform solution at the first sign of trouble. -</para> - -<para> -It is strongly advised that before attempting a migration to a Samba-3 controlled network -that every possible effort be made to gain all-round commitment to the change. Firstly, you -should know precisely <emphasis>why</emphasis> the change is important for the organisation. -Possible motivations to make a change include: -</para> - -<itemizedlist> -<listitem> - <para>Improve network manageability</para> -</listitem> -<listitem> - <para>Obtain better user level functionality</para> -</listitem> -<listitem> - <para>Reduce network operating costs</para> -</listitem> -<listitem> - <para>Reduce exposure caused by Microsoft withdrawal of NT4 support</para> -</listitem> -<listitem> - <para>Avoid MS License 6 implications</para> -</listitem> -<listitem> - <para>Reduce organisation's dependency on Microsoft</para> -</listitem> -</itemizedlist> - -<para> -It is vital that it be well recognised that Samba-3 is NOT MS Windows NT4. Samba-3 offers -an alternative solution that is both different from MS Windows NT4 and that offers some -advantages compared with it. It should also be recognised that Samba-3 lacks many of the -features that Microsoft has promoted as core values in migration from MS Windows NT4 to -MS Windows 2000 and beyond (with or without Active Directory services). -</para> - -<para> -What are the features that Samba-3 can NOT provide? -</para> - -<itemizedlist> -<listitem> - <para>Active Directory Server<para> -</listitem> -<listitem> - <para>Group Policy Objects (in Active Direcrtory)<para> -</listitem> -<listitem> - <para>Machine Policy objects<para> -</listitem> -<listitem> - <para>Logon Scripts in Active Directorty<para> -</listitem> -<listitem> - <para>Software Application and Access Controls in Active Directory<para> -</listitem> -</itemizedlist> - -<para> -The features that Samba-3 DOES provide and that may be of compelling interest to your site -includes: -</para> - -<itemizedlist> -<listitem> - <para>Lower Cost of Ownership</para> -</listitem> -<listitem> - <para>Global availability of support with no strings attached</para> -</listitem> -<listitem> - <para>Dynamic SMB Servers (ie:Can run more than one server per Unix/Linux system)</para> -</listitem> -<listitem> - <para>Creation of on-the-fly logon scripts</para> -</listitem> -<listitem> - <para>Creation of on-the-fly Policy Files</para> -</listitem> -<listitem> - <para>Greater Stability, Reliability, Performance and Availability</para> -</listitem> -<listitem> - <para>Manageability via an ssh connection</para> -</listitem> -<listitem> - <para>Flexible choices of back-end authentication technologies (tdbsam, ldapsam, mysqlsam)</para> -</listitem> -<listitem> - <para>Ability to implement a full single-signon architecture</para> -</listitem> -<listitem> - <para>Ability to distribute authentication systems for absolute minimum wide are network bandwidth demand</para> -</listitem> -</itemizedlist> - -<para> -Before migrating a network from MS Windows NT4 to Samba-3 it is vital that all necessary factors are -considered. Users should be educated about changes they may experience so that the change will be a -welcome one and not become an obstacle to the work they need to do. The following are some of the -factors that will go into a successful migration: -</para> - -<sect3> -<title>Domain Layout</title> - -<para> -Samba-3 can be configured as a domain controller, a back-up domain controller (probably best called -a secondary controller), a domain member, or as a stand-alone server. The Windows network security -domain context should be sized and scoped before implementation. Particular attention needs to be -paid to the location of the primary domain controller (PDC) as well as backup controllers (BDCs). -It should be noted that one way in which Samba-3 differs from Microsoft technology is that if one -chooses to use an LDAP authentication backend then the same database can be used by several different -domains. This means that in a complex organisation there can be a single LDAP database, that itself -can be distributed, that can simultaneously serve multiple domains (that can also be widely distributed). -</para> - -<para> -It is recommended that from a design perspective, the number of users per server, as well as the number -of servers, per domain should be scaled according to needs and should also consider server capacity -and network bandwidth. -</para> - -<para> -A physical network segment may house several domains, each of which may span multiple network segments. -Where domains span routed network segments it is most advisable to consider and test the performance -implications of the design and layout of a network. A Centrally located domain controller that is being -designed to serve mulitple routed network segments may result in severe performance problems if the -response time (eg: ping timing) between the remote segment and the PDC is more than 100 ms. In situations -where the delay is too long it is highly recommended to locate a backup controller (BDC) to serve as -the local authentication and access control server. -</para> -</sect3> - -<sect3> -<title>Server Share and Directory Layout</title> - -<para> -There are few cardinal rules to effective network design that can be broken with impunity. -The most important rule of effective network management is that simplicity is king in every -well controlled network. Every part of the infrastructure must be managed, the more complex -it is, the greater will be the demand of keeping systems secure and functional. -</para> - -<para> -The nature of the data that must be stored needs to be born in mind when deciding how many -shares must be created. The physical disk space layout should also be taken into account -when designing where share points will be created. Keep in mind that all data needs to be -backed up, thus the simpler the disk layout the easier it will be to keep track of what must -be backed up to tape or other off-line storage medium. Always plan and implement for minimum -maintenance. Leave nothing to chance in your design, above all, do not leave backups to chance: -Backup and test, validate every backup, create a disaster recovery plan and prove that it works. -</para> - -<para> -Users should be grouped according to data access control needs. File and directory access -is best controlled via group permissions and the use of the "sticky bit" on group controlled -directories may substantially avoid file access complaints from samba share users. -</para> - -<para> -Many network administrators who are new to the game will attempt to use elaborate techniques -to set access controls, on files, directories, shares, as well as in share definitions. -There is the ever present danger that that administrator's successor will not understand the -complex mess that has been inherited. Remember, apparent job security through complex design -and implementation may ultimately cause loss of operations and downtime to users as the new -administrator learns to untangle your web. Keep access controls simple and effective and -make sure that users will never be interrupted by the stupidity of complexity. -</para> -</sect3> - -<sect3> -<title>Logon Scripts</title> - -<para> -Please refer to the section of this document on Advanced Network Adminsitration for information -regarding the network logon script options for Samba-3. Logon scripts can help to ensure that -all users gain share and printer connections they need. +Blah blah objectives here. </para> -<para> -Logon scripts can be created on-the-fly so that all commands executed are specific to the -rights and privilidges granted to the user. The preferred controls should be affected through -group membership so that group information can be used to custom create a logong script using -the <filename>root preexec</filename> parameters to the <filename>NETLOGON</filename> share. -</para> +</sect2> +<sect2> +<title>Steps In Migration Process</title> <para> -Some sites prefer to use a tool such as <filename>kixstart</filename> to establish a controlled -user environment. In any case you may wish to do a google search for logon script process controls. -In particular, you may wish to explore the use of the Microsoft knowledgebase article KB189105 that -deals with how to add printers without user intervention via the logon script process. -</para> -</sect3> +This is not a definitive ste-by-step process yet - just a place holder so the info +is not lost. -<sect3> -<title>Profile Migration/Creation</title> +1. You will have an NT4 PDC that has the users, groups, policies and profiles to be migrated -<para> -User and Group Profiles may be migrated using the tools described in the section titled Desktop Profile -Management. -</para> +2. Samba-3 set up as a DC with netlogon share, profile share, etc. -<para> -Profiles may also be managed using the Samba-3 tool <filename>profiles</filename>. This tool allows -the MS Windows NT style security identifiers (SIDs) that are stored inside the profile NTuser.DAT file -to be changed to the SID of the Samba-3 domain. -</para> -</sect3> +3. Process: + a. Create a BDC account for the samba server using NT Server Manager + - Samba must NOT be running -<sect3> -<title>User and Group Accounts</title> + b. rpcclient NT4PDC -U Administrator%passwd + lsaquery -<para> -It is possible to migrate all account settings from an MS Windows NT4 domain to Samba-3. Before -attempting to migrate user and group accounts it is STRONGLY advised to create in Samba-3 the -groups that are present on the MS Windows NT4 domain <emphasis>AND</emphasis> to connect these to -suitable Unix/Linux groups. Following this simple advice will mean that all user and group attributes -should migrate painlessly. -</para> -</sect3> + Note the SID returned by step b. -</sect2> + c. net getsid -S NT4PDC -w DOMNAME -U Administrator%passwd -<sect2> -<title>Steps In Migration Process</title> + Note the SID in step c. -<para> -The approximate migration process is described below. -</para> + d. net getlocalsid -<itemizedlist> -<listitem><para> -You will have an NT4 PDC that has the users, groups, policies and profiles to be migrated -</para></listitem> + Note the SID, now check that all three SIDS reported are the same! -<listitem><para> -Samba-3 set up as a DC with netlogon share, profile share, etc. -</para></listitem> -</itemizedlist> + e. net rpc join -S NT4PDC -w DOMNAME -U Administrator%passwd -<procedure><title>The Account Migration Process</title> - <step><para>Create a BDC account for the samba server using NT Server Manager</para> - <substeps><step><para>Samba must NOT be running</para></step></substeps></step> + f. net rpc vampire -S NT4PDC -U administrator%passwd - <step> - <para>rpcclient NT4PDC -U Administrator%passwd</para> - <substeps><step><para>lsaquery</para></step> - <step><para>Note the SID returned</para></step> - </substeps> - </step> + g. pdbedit -l - <step><para>net getsid -S NT4PDC -w DOMNAME -U Administrator%passwd</para> - <substeps><step><para>Note the SID</para></step></substeps> - </step> + Note - did the users migrate? - <step><para>net getlocalsid</para> - <substeps> - <step><para>Note the SID, now check that all three SIDS reported are the same!</para></step> - </substeps> - </step> + h. initGrps.sh DOMNAME - <step><para>net rpc join -S NT4PDC -w DOMNAME -U Administrator%passwd</para></step> + i. smbgroupedit -v - <step><para>net rpc vampire -S NT4PDC -U administrator%passwd</para></step> + Now check that all groups are recognised - <step><para>pdbedit -l</para> - <substeps><step><para>Note - did the users migrate?</para></step></substeps> - </step> + j. net rpc campire -S NT4PDC -U administrator%passwd - <step><para>initGrps.sh DOMNAME</para></step> + k. pdbedit -lv - <step><para>smbgroupedit -v</para> - <substeps><step><para>Now check that all groups are recognised</para></step></substeps> - </step> + Note - check that all group membership has been migrated. - <step><para>net rpc campire -S NT4PDC -U administrator%passwd</para></step> - <step><para>pdbedit -lv</para> - <substeps><step> - <para>Note - check that all group membership has been migrated</para> - </step></substeps> - </step> -</procedure> - -<para> Now it is time to migrate all the profiles, then migrate all policy files. -More later. + +Moe later. </para> </sect2> </sect1> <sect1> -<title>Migration Options</title> +<title>Managing Samba-3 Domain Control</title> <para> -Based on feedback from many sites as well as from actual installation and maintenance -experience sites that wish to migrate from MS Windows NT4 Domain Control to a Samba -based solution fit into three basic categories. -</para> - -<table frame="all"><title>The 3 Major Site Types</title> -<tgroup cols="2" align="center"> - <thead> - <row><entry align="center">Number of Users</entry><entry>Description</entry></row> - </thead> - <tbody> - <row><entry align="center">< 50</entry><entry><para>Want simple conversion with NO pain</para></entry></row> - <row><entry align="center">50 - 250</entry><entry><para>Want new features, can manage some in-house complexity</para></entry></row> - <row><entry align="center">> 250</entry><entry><para>Solution/Implementation MUST scale well, complex needs. Cross departmental decision process. Local expertise in most areas</para></entry></row> - </tbody> -</tgroup> -</table> - -<sect2> -<title>Planning for Success</title> - -<para> -There are three basic choices for sites that intend to migrate from MS Windwows NT4 -to Samba-3. -</para> - -<itemizedlist> - <listitem><para> - Simple Conversion (total replacement) - </para></listitem> - - <listitem><para> - Upgraded Conversion (could be one of integration) - </para></listitem> - - <listitem><para> - Complete Redesign (completely new solution) - </para></listitem> -</itemizedlist> - -<para> -No matter what choice you make, the following rules will minimise down-stream problems: -</para> - -<itemizedlist> - <listitem><para> - Take sufficient time - </para></listitem> - - <listitem><para> - Avoid Panic - </para></listitem> - - <listitem><para> - Test ALL assumptions - </para></listitem> - - <listitem><para> - Test full roll-out program, including workstation deployment - </para></listitem> -</itemizedlist> - -<table frame="top"><title>Nature of the Conversion Choices</title> -<tgroup cols="3" align="center"> - <thead> - <row><entry>Simple</entry><entry>Upgraded</entry><entry>Redesign</entry></row> - </thead> - <tbody> - <row> - <entry><para>Make use of minimal OS specific features</para></entry> - <entry><para>Translate NT4 features to new host OS features</para></entry> - <entry><para>Decide:</para></entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry><para>Suck all accounts from NT4 into Samba-3</para></entry> - <entry><para>Copy and improve:</para></entry> - <entry><para>Authentication Regime (database location and access)</para></entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry><para>Make least number of operational changes</para></entry> - <entry><para>Make progressive improvements</para></entry> - <entry><para>Desktop Management Methods</para></entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry><para>Take least amount of time to migrate</para></entry> - <entry><para>Minimise user impact</para></entry> - <entry><para>Better Control of Desktops / Users</para></entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry><para>Live versus Isolated Conversion</para></entry> - <entry><para>Maximise functionality</para></entry> - <entry><para>Identify Needs for: Manageability, Scalability, Security, Availability</para></entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry><para>Integrate Samba-3 then migrate while users are active, then Change of control (ie: swap out)</para></entry> - <entry><para>Take advantage of lower maintenance opportunity</para></entry> - <entry><para></para></entry> - </row> - </tbody> -</tgroup> -</table> -</sect2> - -<sect2> -<title>Samba Implementation Choices</title> - -<para><programlisting> -Authentication database back end - Winbind (external Samba or NT4/200x server) - Can use pam_mkhomedir.so to auto-create home dirs - External server could use Active Directory or NT4 Domain - -Database type - smbpasswd, tdbsam, ldapsam, MySQLsam - -Access Control Points - On the Share itself (Use NT4 Server Manager) - On the file system - Unix permissions on files and directories - Posix ACLs enablement in file system? - Through Samba share parameters - Not recommended - except as only resort - -Policies (migrate or create new ones) - Group Policy Editor (NT4) - Watch out for Tattoo effect - -User and Group Profiles - Platform specific so use platform tool to change from a Local to a Roaming profile - Can use new profiles tool to change SIDs (NTUser.DAT) - -Logon Scripts (Know how they work) - -User and Group mapping to Unix/Linux - username map facility may be needed - Use smbgroupedit to connect NT4 groups to Unix groups - Use pdbedit to set/change user configuration -NOTE: -If migrating to LDAP back end it may be easier to dump initial LDAP database to LDIF, then edit, then reload into LDAP - - OS specific scripts / programs may be needed - Add / delete Users - Note OS limits on size of name (Linux 8 chars) - NT4 up to 254 chars - Add / delete machines - Applied only to domain members (note up to 16 chars) - Add / delete Groups - Note OS limits on size and nature - Linux limit is 16 char, no spaces and no upper case chars (groupadd) - -Migration Tools - Domain Control (NT4 Style) - Profiles, Policies, Access Controls, Security - -Migration Tools - Samba: net, rpcclient, smbpasswd, pdbedit, smbgroupedit, profiles - Windows: NT4 Domain User Manager, Server Manager (NEXUS) - -Authentication - New SAM back end (smbpasswd, tdbsam, ldapsam, mysqlsam) -</programlisting> +Lots of blah blah here. </para> </sect1> - </chapter> diff --git a/docs/docbook/projdoc/Other-Clients.sgml b/docs/docbook/projdoc/Other-Clients.sgml index 73316927e0..6177b4dcb6 100644 --- a/docs/docbook/projdoc/Other-Clients.sgml +++ b/docs/docbook/projdoc/Other-Clients.sgml @@ -168,8 +168,7 @@ packages, Samba, and Linux (and other UNIX-based systems) see <title>Use latest TCP/IP stack from Microsoft</title> <para>Use the latest TCP/IP stack from microsoft if you use Windows -for workgroups. -</para> +for workgroups.</para> <para>The early TCP/IP stacks had lots of bugs.</para> @@ -235,24 +234,6 @@ it may break the print queue reporting on some systems. It is presumably a WfWg bug.</para> </sect2> - -<sect2> -<title>Speed improvement</title> - -<para> -Note that some people have found that setting DefaultRcvWindow in -the [MSTCP] section of the SYSTEM.INI file under WfWg to 3072 gives a -big improvement. I don't know why. -</para> - -<para> -My own experience wth DefaultRcvWindow is that I get much better -performance with a large value (16384 or larger). Other people have -reported that anything over 3072 slows things down enourmously. One -person even reported a speed drop of a factor of 30 when he went from -3072 to 8192. I don't know why. -</para> -</sect2> </sect1> <sect1> @@ -285,17 +266,6 @@ OutLook and you may also notice a significant speedup when accessing network neighborhood services. </para> -<sect2> -<title>Speed improvement</title> - -<para> -Configure the win95 TCPIP registry settings to give better -performance. I use a program called MTUSPEED.exe which I got off the -net. There are various other utilities of this type freely available. -</para> - -</sect2> - </sect1> <sect1> diff --git a/docs/docbook/projdoc/PolicyMgmt.sgml b/docs/docbook/projdoc/PolicyMgmt.sgml index 7557d496a4..a6c5ffa8e4 100644 --- a/docs/docbook/projdoc/PolicyMgmt.sgml +++ b/docs/docbook/projdoc/PolicyMgmt.sgml @@ -195,12 +195,12 @@ exists with NT4 style policy files. <sect3> <title>Administration of Win2K / XP Policies</title> -<procedure> <title>Instructions</title> <para> Instead of using the tool called "The System Policy Editor", commonly called Poledit (from the executable name poledit.exe), GPOs are created and managed using a Microsoft Management Console (MMC) snap-in as follows:</para> +<procedure> <step> <para> diff --git a/docs/docbook/projdoc/SWAT.sgml b/docs/docbook/projdoc/SWAT.sgml index ad43fd7b8a..7326a49874 100644 --- a/docs/docbook/projdoc/SWAT.sgml +++ b/docs/docbook/projdoc/SWAT.sgml @@ -1,49 +1,19 @@ <chapter id="SWAT"> <chapterinfo> &author.jht; - <pubdate>April 21, 2003</pubdate> + <pubdate>April 3, 2003</pubdate> </chapterinfo> <title>SWAT - The Samba Web Admininistration Tool</title> <para> -There are many and varied opinions regarding the usefulness or otherwise of SWAT. -No matter how hard one tries to produce the perfect configuration tool it remains -an object of personal taste. SWAT is a tool that will allow web based configuration -of samba. It has a wizard that may help to get samba configured quickly, it has context -sensitive help on each smb.conf parameter, it provides for monitoring of current state -of connection information, and it allows network wide MS Windows network password -management. +This is a rough guide to SWAT. </para> <sect1> <title>SWAT Features and Benefits</title> -<para> -There are network administrators who believe that it is a good idea to write systems -documentation inside configuration files, for them SWAT will aways be a nasty tool. SWAT -does not store the configuration file in any intermediate form, rather, it stores only the -parameter settings, so when SWAT writes the smb.conf file to disk it will write only -those parameters that are at other than the default settings. The result is that all comments -will be lost from the smb.conf file. Additionally, the parameters will be written back in -internal ordering. -</para> - -<para><note> -So before using SWAT please be warned - SWAT will completely replace your smb.conf with -a fully optimised file that has been stripped of all comments you might have placed there -and only non-default settings will be written to the file. -</note></para> - -<para> -SWAT should be installed to run via the network super daemon. Depending on which system -your Unix/Linux system has you will have either an <filename>inetd</filename> or -<filename>xinetd</filename> based system. -</para> - -<para> -The nature and location of the network super -</para> +<para>You must use at least the following ...</para> <sect2> <title>The SWAT Home Page</title> diff --git a/docs/docbook/projdoc/Speed.sgml b/docs/docbook/projdoc/Speed.sgml index 753810c1d8..78b5935a9c 100644 --- a/docs/docbook/projdoc/Speed.sgml +++ b/docs/docbook/projdoc/Speed.sgml @@ -62,7 +62,7 @@ line with the -O option, or in the smb.conf file. </para> <para> -The <command>socket options</command> section of the &smb.conf; manual page describes how +The "socket options" section of the smb.conf manual page describes how to set these and gives recommendations. </para> @@ -75,9 +75,9 @@ much. The correct settings are very dependent on your local network. <para> The socket option TCP_NODELAY is the one that seems to make the biggest single difference for most networks. Many people report that -adding <command>socket options = TCP_NODELAY</command> doubles the read -performance of a Samba drive. The best explanation I have seen for this is -that the Microsoft TCP/IP stack is slow in sending tcp ACKs. +adding "socket options = TCP_NODELAY" doubles the read performance of +a Samba drive. The best explanation I have seen for this is that the +Microsoft TCP/IP stack is slow in sending tcp ACKs. </para> </sect1> @@ -86,9 +86,9 @@ that the Microsoft TCP/IP stack is slow in sending tcp ACKs. <title>Read size</title> <para> -The option <command>read size</command> affects the overlap of disk -reads/writes with network reads/writes. If the amount of data being -transferred in several of the SMB commands (currently SMBwrite, SMBwriteX and +The option "read size" affects the overlap of disk reads/writes with +network reads/writes. If the amount of data being transferred in +several of the SMB commands (currently SMBwrite, SMBwriteX and SMBreadbraw) is larger than this value then the server begins writing the data before it has received the whole packet from the network, or in the case of SMBreadbraw, it begins writing to the network before @@ -114,10 +114,10 @@ pointless and will cause you to allocate memory unnecessarily. <title>Max xmit</title> <para> -At startup the client and server negotiate a <command>maximum transmit</command> size, +At startup the client and server negotiate a "maximum transmit" size, which limits the size of nearly all SMB commands. You can set the -maximum size that Samba will negotiate using the <command>max xmit = </command> option -in &smb.conf;. Note that this is the maximum size of SMB request that +maximum size that Samba will negotiate using the "max xmit = " option +in smb.conf. Note that this is the maximum size of SMB request that Samba will accept, but not the maximum size that the *client* will accept. The client maximum receive size is sent to Samba by the client and Samba honours this limit. @@ -139,7 +139,7 @@ In most cases the default is the best option. <title>Log level</title> <para> -If you set the log level (also known as <command>debug level</command>) higher than 2 +If you set the log level (also known as "debug level") higher than 2 then you may suffer a large drop in performance. This is because the server flushes the log file after each operation, which can be very expensive. @@ -150,20 +150,20 @@ expensive. <title>Read raw</title> <para> -The <command>read raw</command> operation is designed to be an optimised, low-latency +The "read raw" operation is designed to be an optimised, low-latency file read operation. A server may choose to not support it, -however. and Samba makes support for <command>read raw</command> optional, with it +however. and Samba makes support for "read raw" optional, with it being enabled by default. </para> <para> -In some cases clients don't handle <command>read raw</command> very well and actually +In some cases clients don't handle "read raw" very well and actually get lower performance using it than they get using the conventional read operations. </para> <para> -So you might like to try <command>read raw = no</command> and see what happens on your +So you might like to try "read raw = no" and see what happens on your network. It might lower, raise or not affect your performance. Only testing can really tell. </para> @@ -174,25 +174,43 @@ testing can really tell. <title>Write raw</title> <para> -The <command>write raw</command> operation is designed to be an optimised, low-latency +The "write raw" operation is designed to be an optimised, low-latency file write operation. A server may choose to not support it, -however. and Samba makes support for <command>write raw</command> optional, with it +however. and Samba makes support for "write raw" optional, with it being enabled by default. </para> <para> -Some machines may find <command>write raw</command> slower than normal write, in which +Some machines may find "write raw" slower than normal write, in which case you may wish to change this option. </para> </sect1> <sect1> +<title>Slow Clients</title> + +<para> +One person has reported that setting the protocol to COREPLUS rather +than LANMAN2 gave a dramatic speed improvement (from 10k/s to 150k/s). +</para> + +<para> +I suspect that his PC's (386sx16 based) were asking for more data than +they could chew. I suspect a similar speed could be had by setting +"read raw = no" and "max xmit = 2048", instead of changing the +protocol. Lowering the "read size" might also help. +</para> + +</sect1> + +<sect1> <title>Slow Logins</title> <para> Slow logins are almost always due to the password checking time. Using -the lowest practical <command>password level</command> will improve things. +the lowest practical "password level" will improve things a lot. You +could also enable the "UFC crypt" option in the Makefile. </para> </sect1> @@ -203,8 +221,118 @@ the lowest practical <command>password level</command> will improve things. <para> Often a speed problem can be traced to the client. The client (for example Windows for Workgroups) can often be tuned for better TCP -performance. Check the sections on the various clients in -<link linkend="Other-Clients">Samba and Other Clients</link>. +performance. +</para> + +<para> +See your client docs for details. In particular, I have heard rumours +that the WfWg options TCPWINDOWSIZE and TCPSEGMENTSIZE can have a +large impact on performance. +</para> + +<para> +Also note that some people have found that setting DefaultRcvWindow in +the [MSTCP] section of the SYSTEM.INI file under WfWg to 3072 gives a +big improvement. I don't know why. +</para> + +<para> +My own experience wth DefaultRcvWindow is that I get much better +performance with a large value (16384 or larger). Other people have +reported that anything over 3072 slows things down enourmously. One +person even reported a speed drop of a factor of 30 when he went from +3072 to 8192. I don't know why. +</para> + +<para> +It probably depends a lot on your hardware, and the type of unix box +you have at the other end of the link. +</para> + +<para> +Paul Cochrane has done some testing on client side tuning and come +to the following conclusions: +</para> + +<para> +Install the W2setup.exe file from www.microsoft.com. This is an +update for the winsock stack and utilities which improve performance. +</para> + +<para> +Configure the win95 TCPIP registry settings to give better +perfomance. I use a program called MTUSPEED.exe which I got off the +net. There are various other utilities of this type freely available. +The setting which give the best performance for me are: +</para> + +<orderedlist> +<listitem><para> +MaxMTU Remove +</para></listitem> +<listitem><para> +RWIN Remove +</para></listitem> +<listitem><para> +MTUAutoDiscover Disable +</para></listitem> +<listitem><para> +MTUBlackHoleDetect Disable +</para></listitem> +<listitem><para> +Time To Live Enabled +</para></listitem> +<listitem><para> +Time To Live - HOPS 32 +</para></listitem> +<listitem><para> +NDI Cache Size 0 +</para></listitem> +</orderedlist> + +<para> +I tried virtually all of the items mentioned in the document and +the only one which made a difference to me was the socket options. It +turned out I was better off without any!!!!! +</para> + +<para> +In terms of overall speed of transfer, between various win95 clients +and a DX2-66 20MB server with a crappy NE2000 compatible and old IDE +drive (Kernel 2.0.30). The transfer rate was reasonable for 10 baseT. +</para> + +<para> +<programlisting> +The figures are: Put Get +P166 client 3Com card: 420-440kB/s 500-520kB/s +P100 client 3Com card: 390-410kB/s 490-510kB/s +DX4-75 client NE2000: 370-380kB/s 330-350kB/s +</programlisting> +</para> + +<para> +I based these test on transfer two files a 4.5MB text file and a 15MB +textfile. The results arn't bad considering the hardware Samba is +running on. It's a crap machine!!!! +</para> + +<para> +The updates mentioned in 1 and 2 brought up the transfer rates from +just over 100kB/s in some clients. +</para> + +<para> +A new client is a P333 connected via a 100MB/s card and hub. The +transfer rates from this were good: 450-500kB/s on put and 600+kB/s +on get. +</para> + +<para> +Looking at standard FTP throughput, Samba is a bit slower (100kB/s +upwards). I suppose there is more going on in the samba protocol, but +if it could get up to the rate of FTP the perfomance would be quite +staggering. </para> </sect1> diff --git a/docs/docbook/projdoc/UNIX_INSTALL.sgml b/docs/docbook/projdoc/UNIX_INSTALL.sgml index 1019e524f7..239ccd168b 100644 --- a/docs/docbook/projdoc/UNIX_INSTALL.sgml +++ b/docs/docbook/projdoc/UNIX_INSTALL.sgml @@ -172,5 +172,72 @@ Samba has been successfully installed at thousands of sites worldwide, so maybe someone else has hit your problem and has overcome it. </para> + <sect2> + <title>Scope IDs</title> + + <para>By default Samba uses a blank scope ID. This means + all your windows boxes must also have a blank scope ID. + If you really want to use a non-blank scope ID then you will + need to use the 'netbios scope' smb.conf option. + All your PCs will need to have the same setting for + this to work. I do not recommend scope IDs.</para> + </sect2> + + <sect2> + <title>Locking</title> + + <para>One area which sometimes causes trouble is locking.</para> + + <para>There are two types of locking which need to be + performed by a SMB server. The first is "record locking" + which allows a client to lock a range of bytes in a open file. + The second is the "deny modes" that are specified when a file + is open.</para> + + <para>Record locking semantics under Unix is very + different from record locking under Windows. Versions + of Samba before 2.2 have tried to use the native + fcntl() unix system call to implement proper record + locking between different Samba clients. This can not + be fully correct due to several reasons. The simplest + is the fact that a Windows client is allowed to lock a + byte range up to 2^32 or 2^64, depending on the client + OS. The unix locking only supports byte ranges up to + 2^31. So it is not possible to correctly satisfy a + lock request above 2^31. There are many more + differences, too many to be listed here.</para> + + <para>Samba 2.2 and above implements record locking + completely independent of the underlying unix + system. If a byte range lock that the client requests + happens to fall into the range 0-2^31, Samba hands + this request down to the Unix system. All other locks + can not be seen by unix anyway.</para> + + <para>Strictly a SMB server should check for locks before + every read and write call on a file. Unfortunately with the + way fcntl() works this can be slow and may overstress the + rpc.lockd. It is also almost always unnecessary as clients + are supposed to independently make locking calls before reads + and writes anyway if locking is important to them. By default + Samba only makes locking calls when explicitly asked + to by a client, but if you set "strict locking = yes" then it will + make lock checking calls on every read and write. </para> + + <para>You can also disable by range locking completely + using "locking = no". This is useful for those shares that + don't support locking or don't need it (such as cdroms). In + this case Samba fakes the return codes of locking calls to + tell clients that everything is OK.</para> + + <para>The second class of locking is the "deny modes". These + are set by an application when it opens a file to determine + what types of access should be allowed simultaneously with + its open. A client may ask for DENY_NONE, DENY_READ, DENY_WRITE + or DENY_ALL. There are also special compatibility modes called + DENY_FCB and DENY_DOS.</para> + + <!-- FIXME: Sync this with oplocks.sgml --> + </sect2> </sect1> </chapter> diff --git a/docs/docbook/projdoc/passdb.sgml b/docs/docbook/projdoc/passdb.sgml index 776c79f095..0de0376df8 100644 --- a/docs/docbook/projdoc/passdb.sgml +++ b/docs/docbook/projdoc/passdb.sgml @@ -341,9 +341,8 @@ include: <para> The second item can be accomplished by using LDAP NSS and PAM modules. LGPL versions of these libraries can be obtained from PADL Software -(<ulink url="http://www.padl.com/">http://www.padl.com/</ulink>). More -information about the configuration of these packages may be found at "LDAP, -System Administration; Gerald Carter, O'Reilly; Chapter 6: Replacing NIS". +(<ulink url="http://www.padl.com/">http://www.padl.com/</ulink>). However, +the details of configuring these packages are beyond the scope of this document. </para> </sect2> @@ -376,7 +375,7 @@ Samba 3.0 includes the necessary schema file for OpenLDAP 2.0 in </para> <para><programlisting> -objectclass ( 1.3.1.5.1.4.1.7165.2.2.2 NAME 'sambaAccount' SUP top AUXILIARY +objectclass ( 1.3.1.5.1.4.1.7165.2.2.2 NAME 'sambaAccount' SUP top STRUCTURAL DESC 'Samba Account' MUST ( uid $ rid ) MAY ( cn $ lmPassword $ ntPassword $ pwdLastSet $ logonTime $ @@ -477,11 +476,6 @@ index rid eq ##index gidNumber eq ##index cn eq ##index memberUid eq - -# (both fetched via ldapsearch): -index primaryGroupID eq -index displayName pres,eq - </programlisting></para> </sect3> @@ -491,20 +485,16 @@ index displayName pres,eq <para> The following parameters are available in smb.conf only with <parameter>--with-ldapsam</parameter> -was included when compiling Samba. +was included with compiling Samba. </para> <itemizedlist> - <listitem><para><ulink url="smb.conf.5.html#PASSDBBACKEND">passdb backend [ldapsam|ldapsam_nua]:url</ulink></para></listitem> <listitem><para><ulink url="smb.conf.5.html#LDAPSSL">ldap ssl</ulink></para></listitem> + <listitem><para><ulink url="smb.conf.5.html#LDAPSERVER">ldap server</ulink></para></listitem> <listitem><para><ulink url="smb.conf.5.html#LDAPADMINDN">ldap admin dn</ulink></para></listitem> <listitem><para><ulink url="smb.conf.5.html#LDAPSUFFIX">ldap suffix</ulink></para></listitem> <listitem><para><ulink url="smb.conf.5.html#LDAPFILTER">ldap filter</ulink></para></listitem> <listitem><para><ulink url="smb.conf.5.html#LDAPPORT">ldap port</ulink></para></listitem> - <listitem><para><ulink url="smb.conf.5.html#LDAPMACHINSUFFIX">ldap machine suffix</ulink></para></listitem> - <listitem><para><ulink url="smb.conf.5.html#LDAPUSERSUFFIX">ldap user suffix</ulink></para></listitem> - <listitem><para><ulink url="smb.conf.5.html#LDAPDELETEDN">ldap delete dn</ulink></para></listitem> - </itemizedlist> <para> @@ -531,20 +521,13 @@ use with an LDAP directory could appear as # changes, this password will need to be reset. ldap admin dn = "cn=Samba Manager,ou=people,dc=samba,dc=org" + # specify the LDAP server's hostname (defaults to locahost) + ldap server = ahab.samba.org + # Define the SSL option when connecting to the directory # ('off', 'start tls', or 'on' (default)) ldap ssl = start tls - passdb backend ldapsam:ldap://ahab.samba.org - - # smbpasswd -x delete the entire dn-entry - ldap delete dn = no - - # the machine and user suffix added to the base suffix - # wrote WITHOUT quotes. NULL siffixes by default - ldap user suffix = ou=People - ldap machine suffix = ou=Systems - # define the port to use in the LDAP session (defaults to 636 when # "ldap ssl = on") ldap port = 389 diff --git a/docs/docbook/projdoc/samba-doc.sgml b/docs/docbook/projdoc/samba-doc.sgml index 6048d60e5f..c56255d13a 100644 --- a/docs/docbook/projdoc/samba-doc.sgml +++ b/docs/docbook/projdoc/samba-doc.sgml @@ -14,29 +14,17 @@ <editor>&person.jht;</editor> <editor>&person.jerry;</editor> - <pubdate>Monday April 21, 2003</pubdate> + <pubdate>Sunday 6 April</pubdate> <abstract> <para> This book is a collection of HOWTOs added to Samba documentation over the years. -Samba is always under development, and so is it's documentation. This release of the -documentation represents a major revision or layout as well as contents. -The most recent version of this document can be found at -<ulink url="http://www.samba.org/">http://www.samba.org/</ulink> -on the "Documentation" page. Please send updates to -<ulink url="mailto:jelmer@samba.org">jelmer@samba.org</ulink>, -<ulink url="mailto:jht@samba.org">jht@samba.org</ulink> or -<ulink url="mailto:jerry@samba.org">jerry@samba.org</ulink>. -</para> - -<para> -The Samba-Team would like to express sincere thanks to the many people who have with -or without their knwoledge contributed to this update. The size and scope of this -project would not have been possible without significant community contribution. A not -insignificant number of ideas for inclusion (if not content itself) has been obtained -from a number of Unofficial HOWTOs - to each such author a big "Thank-you" is also offered. -Please keep publishing you Unofficial HOWTO's - they are a source of inspiration and -application knowledge that is most to be desired by may Samba users and administrators. +Samba is always under development, and so is it's documentation. +The most recent version of this document +can be found at <ulink url="http://www.samba.org/">http://www.samba.org/</ulink> +on the "Documentation" page. Please send updates to <ulink +url="mailto:jerry@samba.org">jerry@samba.org</ulink> or +<ulink url="mailto:jelmer@samba.org">jelmer@samba.org</ulink>. </para> </abstract> @@ -53,25 +41,26 @@ url="http://www.fsf.org/licenses/gpl.txt">http://www.fsf.org/licenses/gpl.txt</u <!-- Chapters --> <part id="introduction"> -<title>General Installation</title> +<title>General installation</title> <partintro> -<title>Preparing Samba for Configuration</title> -<para>This section of the Samba-HOWTO-Collection contains general info on how to install samba +<title>Introduction</title> +<para>This part contains general info on how to install samba and how to configure the parts of samba you will most likely need. PLEASE read this.</para> </partintro> &IntroSMB; &UNIX-INSTALL; +&BROWSING-Quick; +&Passdb; </part> <part id="type"> -<title>Server Configuration Basics</title> +<title>Type of installation</title> <partintro> -<title>First Steps in Server Configuration</title> +<title>Introduction</title> <para> -Samba can operate in various modes within SMB networks. This HOWTO section contains information on -configuring samba to function as the type of server your network requires. Please read this -section carefully. +Samba can operate in various SMB networks. This part contains information on configuring samba +for various environments. </para> </partintro> &ServerType; @@ -85,13 +74,9 @@ section carefully. <part id="optional"> <title>Advanced Configuration</title> <partintro> -<title>Valuable Nuts and Bolts Information</title> -<para> -Samba has several features that you might want or might not want to use. The chapters in this part each cover specific Samba features. -</para> +<title>Introduction</title> +<para>Samba has several features that you might want or might not want to use. The chapters in this part each cover one specific feature.</para> </partintro> -&NetworkBrowsing; -&Passdb; &NT-Security; &GROUP-MAPPING-HOWTO; &PRINTER-DRIVER2; @@ -105,16 +90,9 @@ Samba has several features that you might want or might not want to use. The cha &VFS; &MS-Dfs-Setup; &IntegratingWithWindows; +&BROWSING; &SecuringSamba; &unicode; -&locking; -</part> - -<part id="troubleshooting"> -<title>Troubleshooting</title> -&Diagnosis; -&problems; -&BUGS; </part> <part id="Appendixes"> @@ -125,5 +103,9 @@ Samba has several features that you might want or might not want to use. The cha &Other-Clients; &SWAT; &SPEED; +&Diagnosis; +&problems; +&BUGS; +&MANUALPAGES; </part> </book> diff --git a/docs/docbook/projdoc/unicode.sgml b/docs/docbook/projdoc/unicode.sgml index 42d2e1d50f..2f794aadc2 100644 --- a/docs/docbook/projdoc/unicode.sgml +++ b/docs/docbook/projdoc/unicode.sgml @@ -1,12 +1,6 @@ <chapter id="unicode"> <chapterinfo> &author.jelmer; - <author> - <firstname>TAKAHASHI</firstname><surname>Motonobu</surname> - <affiliation> - <address><email>monyo@home.monyo.com</email></address> - </affiliation> - </author> <pubdate>25 March 2003</pubdate> </chapterinfo> @@ -105,24 +99,4 @@ filenames from CP850 to the iso8859-15 charset.</para> </userinput> </para> </sect1> - -<sect1> -<title>Japanese charsets</title> - -<para>Samba doesn't work correctly with Japanese charsets yet. Here are points of attention when setting it up:</para> - -<simplelist> -<member>You should set <command>mangling method = hash</command></member> -<member>There are various iconv() implementations around and not all of -them work equally well. glibc2's iconv() has a critical problem in CP932. -libiconv-1.8 works with CP932 but still has some problems and does not -work with EUC-JP. </member> -<member>You should set <command>dos charset = CP932</command>, not Shift_JIS, SJIS...</member> -<member>Currently only <command>unix charset = CP932</command> will work (but still has some problems...) because of iconv() issues. <command>unix charset = EUC-JP</command> doesn't work well because of iconv() issues.</member> -<member>Currently Samba 3.0 does not support <command>unix charset = UTF8-MAC/CAP/HEX/JIS*</command></member> -</simplelist> - -<para>More information (in Japanese) is available at: <ulink url="http://www.atmarkit.co.jp/flinux/special/samba3/samba3a.html">http://www.atmarkit.co.jp/flinux/special/samba3/samba3a.html</ulink>.</para> -</sect1> - </chapter> diff --git a/docs/docbook/samba.dsl b/docs/docbook/samba.dsl index 5a424a551f..7c530ce424 100644 --- a/docs/docbook/samba.dsl +++ b/docs/docbook/samba.dsl @@ -68,11 +68,7 @@ ; === Books only === (define %generate-book-titlepage% #t) (define %generate-book-toc% #t) -(define %generate-part-toc% #f) -(define %generate-part-titlepage% #t) -(define %generate-chapter-toc% #f) -(define %number-screen-lines% #t) -(define %generate-partintro-on-titlepage% #f) +(define ($generate-chapter-toc$) #f) ;; never generate a chapter TOC in books ; === Articles only === (define %generate-article-titlepage% #t) diff --git a/docs/docbook/smbdotconf/.cvsignore b/docs/docbook/smbdotconf/.cvsignore deleted file mode 100644 index 0f8c6cb0ed..0000000000 --- a/docs/docbook/smbdotconf/.cvsignore +++ /dev/null @@ -1,4 +0,0 @@ -parameters.all.xml -parameters.global.xml -parameters.service.xml - diff --git a/docs/docbook/smbdotconf/expand-smb.conf.xsl b/docs/docbook/smbdotconf/expand-smb.conf.xsl deleted file mode 100644 index 87b4898cf7..0000000000 --- a/docs/docbook/smbdotconf/expand-smb.conf.xsl +++ /dev/null @@ -1,74 +0,0 @@ -<?xml version='1.0'?> -<!-- vim:set sts=2 shiftwidth=2 syntax=xml: --> -<xsl:stylesheet xmlns:xsl="http://www.w3.org/1999/XSL/Transform" - xmlns:exsl="http://exslt.org/common" - xmlns:samba="http://samba.org/common" - version="1.1" - extension-element-prefixes="exsl"> - -<xsl:output method="xml"/> - -<!-- Generates one big XML file for smb.conf --> - -<xsl:param name="xmlSambaNsUri" select="'http://samba.org/common'"/> - -<!-- This is needed to copy content unchanged --> -<xsl:template match="@*|node()"> - <xsl:copy> - <xsl:apply-templates select="@*|node()"/> - </xsl:copy> -</xsl:template> - - -<xsl:template match="//samba:parameter"> - <!-- reconstruct varlistentry - not all of them will go into separate files - and also we must repair the main varlistentry itself. - --> - <xsl:message> - <xsl:text>Processing samba:parameter (</xsl:text> - <xsl:value-of select="@name"/> - <xsl:text>)</xsl:text> - </xsl:message> - - <xsl:variable name="name"><xsl:value-of select="translate(translate(string(@name),' ',''), - 'abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz','ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ')"/> - </xsl:variable> - - <xsl:variable name="anchor"> - <xsl:element name="anchor"> - <xsl:attribute name="id"> - <xsl:value-of select="$name"/> - </xsl:attribute> - </xsl:element> - </xsl:variable> - - <xsl:variable name="context"> - <xsl:text> (</xsl:text> - <xsl:value-of select="@context"/> - <xsl:text>)</xsl:text> - </xsl:variable> - - <xsl:variable name="term"> - <xsl:element name="term"> - <xsl:copy-of select="$anchor"/> - <xsl:value-of select="@name"/> - <xsl:value-of select="$context"/> - </xsl:element> - </xsl:variable> - - <xsl:variable name="content"> - <xsl:apply-templates/> - </xsl:variable> - - <xsl:element name="varlistentry"> - <xsl:text> -</xsl:text> - <xsl:copy-of select="$term"/> - <xsl:copy-of select="$content"/> - <xsl:text> -</xsl:text> - </xsl:element> - -</xsl:template> - -</xsl:stylesheet> diff --git a/docs/docbook/smbdotconf/man.xsl b/docs/docbook/smbdotconf/man.xsl deleted file mode 100644 index a7ae76bbd8..0000000000 --- a/docs/docbook/smbdotconf/man.xsl +++ /dev/null @@ -1,159 +0,0 @@ -<?xml version='1.0'?> -<!-- vim:set sts=2 shiftwidth=2 syntax=xml: --> -<xsl:stylesheet xmlns:xsl="http://www.w3.org/1999/XSL/Transform" - version='1.0'> - -<xsl:import href="http://docbook.sourceforge.net/release/xsl/current/manpages/docbook.xsl"/> - -<xsl:param name="chunk.section.depth" select="0"/> -<xsl:param name="chunk.first.sections" select="1"/> -<xsl:param name="use.id.as.filename" select="1"/> -<xsl:param name="base.dir" select="'../../manpages/'"/> - -<!-- - Our ulink stylesheet omits @url part if content was specified ---> -<xsl:template match="ulink"> - <xsl:variable name="content"> - <xsl:apply-templates/> - </xsl:variable> - <xsl:if test="$content = ''"> - <xsl:text>: </xsl:text> - </xsl:if> - <xsl:if test="$content != ''"> - <xsl:value-of select="$content" /> - </xsl:if> - <xsl:if test="$content = ''"> - <xsl:apply-templates mode="italic" select="@url" /> - </xsl:if> -</xsl:template> - -<xsl:template match="refentry"> - - <xsl:variable name="section" select="refmeta/manvolnum"/> - <xsl:variable name="name" select="refnamediv/refname[1]"/> - <xsl:variable name="base.dir" select="$base.dir"/> - <!-- standard man page width is 64 chars; 6 chars needed for the two - (x) volume numbers, and 2 spaces, leaves 56 --> - <xsl:variable name="twidth" select="(74 - string-length(refmeta/refentrytitle)) div 2"/> - - <xsl:variable name="reftitle" - select="substring(refmeta/refentrytitle, 1, $twidth)"/> - - <xsl:variable name="title"> - <xsl:choose> - <xsl:when test="refentryinfo/title"> - <xsl:value-of select="refentryinfo/title"/> - </xsl:when> - <xsl:when test="../referenceinfo/title"> - <xsl:value-of select="../referenceinfo/title"/> - </xsl:when> - </xsl:choose> - </xsl:variable> - - <xsl:variable name="date"> - <xsl:choose> - <xsl:when test="refentryinfo/date"> - <xsl:value-of select="refentryinfo/date"/> - </xsl:when> - <xsl:when test="../referenceinfo/date"> - <xsl:value-of select="../referenceinfo/date"/> - </xsl:when> - </xsl:choose> - </xsl:variable> - - <xsl:variable name="productname"> - <xsl:choose> - <xsl:when test="refentryinfo/productname"> - <xsl:value-of select="refentryinfo/productname"/> - </xsl:when> - <xsl:when test="../referenceinfo/productname"> - <xsl:value-of select="../referenceinfo/productname"/> - </xsl:when> - </xsl:choose> - </xsl:variable> - - <xsl:call-template name="write.text.chunk"> - <xsl:with-param name="filename" - select="concat($base.dir, normalize-space ($name), '.', $section)"/> - <xsl:with-param name="content"> - <xsl:text>.\"Generated by db2man.xsl. Don't modify this, modify the source. -.de Sh \" Subsection -.br -.if t .Sp -.ne 5 -.PP -\fB\\$1\fR -.PP -.. -.de Sp \" Vertical space (when we can't use .PP) -.if t .sp .5v -.if n .sp -.. -.de Ip \" List item -.br -.ie \\n(.$>=3 .ne \\$3 -.el .ne 3 -.IP "\\$1" \\$2 -.. -.TH "</xsl:text> - <xsl:value-of select="translate($reftitle,'abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz', 'ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ')"/> - <xsl:text>" </xsl:text> - <xsl:value-of select="refmeta/manvolnum[1]"/> - <xsl:text> "</xsl:text> - <xsl:value-of select="normalize-space($date)"/> - <xsl:text>" "</xsl:text> - <xsl:value-of select="normalize-space($productname)"/> - <xsl:text>" "</xsl:text> - <xsl:value-of select="$title"/> - <xsl:text>" -</xsl:text> - <xsl:apply-templates/> - <xsl:text> </xsl:text> - - <!-- Author section --> - <xsl:choose> - <xsl:when test="refentryinfo//author"> - <xsl:apply-templates select="refentryinfo" mode="authorsect"/> - </xsl:when> - </xsl:choose> - </xsl:with-param> - </xsl:call-template> -</xsl:template> - -<xsl:template match="informalexample|screen|programlisting"> - <xsl:text>.nf </xsl:text> - <xsl:apply-templates/> - <xsl:text>.fi </xsl:text> -</xsl:template> - -<xsl:template match="//emphasis"> - <xsl:text>\fB</xsl:text> - <xsl:apply-templates/> - <xsl:text>\fR</xsl:text> -</xsl:template> - -<xsl:template match="para|simpara|remark" mode="list"> - <xsl:variable name="foo"> - <xsl:apply-templates/> - </xsl:variable> - <xsl:choose match="node()"> - <!-- Don't normalize-space() for verbatim paragraphs --> - <xsl:when test="informalexample|screen|programlisting"> - <xsl:value-of select="$foo"/> - </xsl:when> - <xsl:otherwise> - <xsl:value-of select="normalize-space($foo)"/> - <xsl:text> </xsl:text> - </xsl:otherwise> - </xsl:choose> - <xsl:text> </xsl:text> - <xsl:if test="following-sibling::para or following-sibling::simpara or - following-sibling::remark"> - <!-- Make sure multiple paragraphs within a list item don't --> - <!-- merge together. --> - <xsl:text> </xsl:text> - </xsl:if> -</xsl:template> - -</xsl:stylesheet> diff --git a/docs/docbook/smbdotconf/process-all.sh b/docs/docbook/smbdotconf/process-all.sh deleted file mode 100755 index 6d8c9941b4..0000000000 --- a/docs/docbook/smbdotconf/process-all.sh +++ /dev/null @@ -1,15 +0,0 @@ -#!/bin/sh -sh generate-file-list.sh >parameters.all.xml - -xsltproc --xinclude \ - --param smb.context "'G'" \ - --output parameters.global.xml \ - generate-context.xsl parameters.all.xml - -xsltproc --xinclude \ - --param smb.context "'S'" \ - --output parameters.service.xml \ - generate-context.xsl parameters.all.xml - -xsltproc --xinclude expand-smb.conf.xsl smb.conf.5.xml | \ -xsltproc http://docbook.sourceforge.net/release/xsl/current/html/docbook.xsl - diff --git a/docs/docbook/smbdotconf/security/passdbbackend.xml b/docs/docbook/smbdotconf/security/passdbbackend.xml deleted file mode 100644 index 256b6c9709..0000000000 --- a/docs/docbook/smbdotconf/security/passdbbackend.xml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,119 +0,0 @@ -<samba:parameter name="passdb backend" - context="G" - advanced="1" developer="1" - xmlns:samba="http://samba.org/common"> -<listitem> - - <para>This option allows the administrator to chose which backends - to retrieve and store passwords with. This allows (for example) both - smbpasswd and tdbsam to be used without a recompile. Multiple - backends can be specified, separated by spaces. The backends will be - searched in the order they are specified. New users are always added - to the first backend specified. Experimental backends must still be - selected (eg --with-tdbsam) at configure time. </para> - - <para>This parameter is in two parts, the backend's name, and a 'location' - string that has meaning only to that particular backed. These are separated - by a : character.</para> - - <para>Available backends can include: - <itemizedlist> - <listitem> - <para><command moreinfo="none">smbpasswd</command> - The default smbpasswd - backend. Takes a path to the smbpasswd file as an optional argument. - </para> - </listitem> - - <listitem> - <para><command moreinfo="none">smbpasswd_nua</command> - The smbpasswd - backend, but with support for 'not unix accounts'. - Takes a path to the smbpasswd file as an optional argument.</para> - - <para>See also <link linkend="NONUNIXACCOUNTRANGE"> - <parameter moreinfo="none">non unix account range</parameter></link></para> - </listitem> - - <listitem> - <para><command moreinfo="none">tdbsam</command> - The TDB based password storage - backend. Takes a path to the TDB as an optional argument (defaults to passdb.tdb - in the <link linkend="PRIVATEDIR"> - <parameter moreinfo="none">private dir</parameter></link> directory.</para> - </listitem> - - <listitem> - <para><command moreinfo="none">tdbsam_nua</command> - The TDB based password storage - backend, with non unix account support. Takes a path to the TDB as an optional argument (defaults to passdb.tdb - in the <link linkend="PRIVATEDIR"> - <parameter moreinfo="none">private dir</parameter></link> directory.</para> - - <para>See also <link linkend="NONUNIXACCOUNTRANGE"> - <parameter moreinfo="none">non unix account range</parameter></link></para> - </listitem> - - <listitem> - <para><command moreinfo="none">ldapsam</command> - The LDAP based passdb - backend. Takes an LDAP URL as an optional argument (defaults to - <command moreinfo="none">ldap://localhost</command>)</para> - </listitem> - - <listitem> - <para><command moreinfo="none">ldapsam_nua</command> - The LDAP based passdb - backend, with non unix account support. Takes an LDAP URL as an optional argument (defaults to - <command moreinfo="none">ldap://localhost</command>)</para> - - <para>Note: In this module, any account without a matching POSIX account is regarded - as 'non unix'. </para> - - <para>See also <link linkend="NONUNIXACCOUNTRANGE"> - <parameter moreinfo="none">non unix account range</parameter></link></para> - - <para>LDAP connections should be secured where possible. This may be done using either - Start-TLS (see <link linkend="LDAPSSL"><parameter moreinfo="none">ldap ssl</parameter></link>) or by - specifying <parameter moreinfo="none">ldaps://</parameter> in - the URL argument. </para> - </listitem> - - <listitem> - <para><command moreinfo="none">nisplussam</command> - - The NIS+ based passdb backend. Takes name NIS domain as - an optional argument. Only works with sun NIS+ servers. - </para> - </listitem> - - <listitem> - <para><command moreinfo="none">plugin</command> - Allows Samba to load an - arbitary passdb backend from the .so specified as a compulsary argument. - </para> - - <para>Any characters after the (optional) second : are passed to the plugin - for its own processing</para> - </listitem> - - <listitem> - <para><command moreinfo="none">unixsam</command> - Allows samba to map all (other) - available unix users</para> - - <para>This backend uses the standard unix database for retrieving users. Users included - in this pdb are NOT listed in samba user listings and users included in this pdb won't be - able to login. The use of this backend is to always be able to display the owner of a file - on the samba server - even when the user doesn't have a 'real' samba account in one of the - other passdb backends. - </para> - - <para>This backend should always be the last backend listed, since it contains all users in - the unix passdb and might 'override' mappings if specified earlier. It's meant to only return - accounts for users that aren't covered by the previous backends. - </para> - </listitem> - </itemizedlist> - </para> - - <para>Default: <command moreinfo="none">passdb backend = smbpasswd unixsam</command></para> - - <para>Example: <command moreinfo="none">passdb backend = tdbsam:/etc/samba/private/passdb.tdb smbpasswd:/etc/samba/smbpasswd unixsam</command></para> - - <para>Example: <command moreinfo="none">passdb backend = ldapsam_nua:ldaps://ldap.example.com unixsam</command></para> - - <para>Example: <command moreinfo="none">passdb backend = plugin:/usr/local/samba/lib/my_passdb.so:my_plugin_args tdbsam:/etc/samba/private/passdb.tdb</command></para> -</listitem> -</samba:parameter> diff --git a/docs/docbook/smbdotconf/security/restrictanonymous.xml b/docs/docbook/smbdotconf/security/restrictanonymous.xml deleted file mode 100644 index 7f78f94a99..0000000000 --- a/docs/docbook/smbdotconf/security/restrictanonymous.xml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,12 +0,0 @@ -<samba:parameter name="restrict anonymous" - context="G" - advanced="1" developer="1" - xmlns:samba="http://samba.org/common"> -<listitem> - <para>This is a integer parameter, and mirrors as much as possible the functinality the - <constant>RestrictAnonymous</constant> registry key does on NT/Win2k. - </para> - - <para>Default: <command moreinfo="none">restrict anonymous = 0</command></para> -</listitem> -</samba:parameter> |